SL Prerequisite Man

Slickline Training
Prerequisite Manual
Introduction
Section I Slickline Services Introduction
Section II Toolstring Components
Section III Auxiliary Service Tools
Section IV Pulling Tools
Section V Tubing Set Flow Controls
Section VI X-Line Equipment
Section VII Related X-Line Equipment
Section VIII Circulating Devices & Service Tools
Section IX Gas Lift Equipment & Service Tools
Section X Slickline Fishing
Section XI Calculations
Optional Profile Selective Equipment

INTRODUCTION
Introduction
Table of Contents
Welcome ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
Our Vision and Core Beliefs ......................................................................................................................... 4
Our Mission .................................................................................................................................................. 5
Safety ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
"one is too many" ...................................................................................................................................... 6
History........................................................................................................................................................... 7
How it all began ........................................................................................................................................ 7
Success brought rapid growth ................................................................................................................... 7
Innovation is the Key ................................................................................................................................ 7
Halliburton Wireline and Perforating Services ............................................................................................. 9
Slickline success: The art of being the best ............................................................................................... 9
1 Slickline
Introduction
Use for Section notes…
2 Slickline
Introduction
Welcome
First, we want to welcome you to Halliburton.
Halliburton provides many opportunities for personal development and travel.
As an oilfield service company; Halliburton has developed several different services to assist
our customer through the life of the well. We have services which start at the drilling phase
of oil or gas well development and extend those services through production to a point
when the well is ready to be plugged and abandoned.
Slickline Services may be called to assist the customer during any phase of the life of the
well. Therefore the Slickline PSL will provide you with lots of opportunity for learning and
development in the oil and gas industry.
This manual is designed with the intent to assist you with your competency development so
that you can advance in the Slickline Services PSL.
Disclaimer
The purpose of this manual IS NOT to serve as a guide and reference for an inexperienced
person to attempt the performance of slickline service and maintenance work.
Since all equipment is subject to engineering design changes which may alter the function
and/or part number of that equipment, the engineering data in this manual SHOULD NOT be
considered to be totally current and correct. Therefore the part numbers and engineering
data in this manual are intended only to facilitate training projects.
This manual was revised May 2009.
The information in this manual is proprietary information to Halliburton. The manual may
not be reproduced without the written consent of Halliburton.
This publication is intended for the internal use of Halliburton Employees. Halliburton
reserves the right to change equipment configuration, materials, specifications, operating
procedures and instructions without notice; Halliburton assumes no liability or responsibility
for the consequences of use of this publication by persons other than Halliburton employees
These instructions describe the desired results from use of Halliburton equipment, but such
results are not guaranteed. Operation of equipment is subject to mechanical limitations and
Halliburton shall only be liable for its merchandise and service as set forth in its general
terms and conditions. The operating instructions and procedures described in this
publication pertain to use of equipment under normal operating conditions.
This publication may contain information taken directly from the catalogues of Halliburton's
outside suppliers. Halliburton has not and cannot verify the accuracy of such information or
that such information is the most current information available from the supplier.
Halliburton accepts no liability or responsibility for the consequences of the use of such
information and recommends, with regard to equipment not manufactured by Halliburton,
that the supplier be contacted directly for current information and specifications
3 Slickline
Introduction
Our Vision and Core Beliefs
Vision – it defines who we are as a company and what we aspire to be and gives us an
image of what success will look like.
Halliburton’s vision is:
To be the preferred upstream service company for the development of global oil and gas
assets.
A preferred upstream service company:
 Maintains long-term sustainable customer relationships that meet the individual

differences of a global client base
 Understands that the reservoir is the source of all value, and it has the resources and
expertise to provide the right solutions
 Is a credible, reliable service provider that matches actions to words
 Is an effective innovator, applying technology that delivers results
 Is balanced geographically and in its portfolio offerings in order to serve and support
its customers
 Has a robust global supply chain that ensures a flow of critical supplies at a
competitive cost
 Epitomizes excellence in digital connectivity, using technology to link its global

network to maximize results.
Core Beliefs – they are our corporate DNA, the foundation for how we relate to each other
and every individual and entity with whom we interact.
Core Beliefs
- Safety leadership
- Ethical behavior
- Operational excellence
- Technology innovation
4 Slickline
Introduction
Our Mission
Mission - it identifies what an organization does, why it does it and for whom.
Halliburton’s mission is:
To create sustainable value by delivering outstanding products, services and Digital Asset
solutions that help our customers succeed by:
 Maximizing production and recovery
 Realizing reserves from difficult environments
 Improving operational efficiency.
Our motto is:
Unleash the Energy!
5 Slickline
Introduction
Safety
"one is too many"
In 2006, Halliburton’s HSE incident rate showed a disquieting rise. It’s an extraordinarily
serious matter—for a host of personal and professional reasons. And those reasons range
from loss of life to loss of significant business to loss of a sterling HSE reputation.
In HSE incidents worldwide, Halliburton is aiming for nothing less than zero. Zero fatalities.
Zero injuries. Zero environmental incidents. Zero health hazards. Zero regulator citations.
Zero anything that negatively impacts our stringent HSE policies. That’s why
one is too many
What is this one we’re talking about?
one unbuckled seat belt is too many

one flicked cigarette is too many
one frayed cable is too many
one highway cell phone call is too many
one outdated fire extinguisher is too many
one speeding incident is too many
and on and on and on and on………….
What does it take these days to effectively get our HSE message across?
It starts with a strong, bold, memorable rallying cry.

Something that instantly gets people talking, thinking, reacting. Something that rapidly
becomes part of our everyday conversations.
one is too many is unexpected in that, in everything else in life except HSE incidents, one is
not enough. This theme is effective not just because it is striking in its unexpected logic, but
because it makes perfect sense. It not only makes for a terrific hard hat sticker, bumper
sticker or office/trailer poster, but it is the perfect way to start any safety discussion or any
presentation on HSE.
6 Slickline
Introduction
History
How it all began

Halliburton’s Slickline Service Line (PSL) can trace its roots
back to the late twenties and the innovative genius of one
man, Herbert C. Otis, Sr. It was during that time that an
oil company offered to pay $1,000 to any man who could
remove and replace a broken valve on a high-pressure gas
well. The offer had stood for over a year when, despite the
dangers involved, Otis stepped forward to try.
Using a jury-rigged, drill-and-ratchet assembly, Otis
succeeded in drilling out the fouled disc on the valve. At
the same time, he put another valve on top of the broken Tractor-mounted drawworks,
one and tied the new valve into the production line. It typical of oilfield equipment
worked and the gas well began flowing. during the twenties.
Success brought rapid growth

Soon, Otis was swamped with requests for consultation by other companies. As time went
by, he developed other innovative ways to service oil and gas wells under high pressure.
Realizing the potential for such services, Otis formed his own company, called the Southern
States Company. Potential soon gave way to reality and the fledgling company grew rapidly.
In 1935, the organization was reincorporated under the name Otis Pressure Control, Inc. In
1957, the name changed again to Otis Engineering Corporation to more accurately reflect
the scope of the growing organization.
Innovation is the Key

Over the years, Otis Engineering Corporation continued to
innovate new tools and techniques to meet the changing
needs of the oilfield.
Products like the Tubing Safety Valve were developed to
control the higher pressures encountered as wells were
drilled steadily deeper. And for dual production zone wells,
the Side Door Choke was a major contribution towards
developing effective production zone stimulation.
The list of innovations could be recited on and on to
include such industry bywords as the Storm Choke, the
Bottom Hole Regulator and more recently, the Perma- The Otis "sidewinder" wireline
Trieve Packer. unit was state-of-the-art in its
day.
7 Slickline
Introduction
Mr. Otis alone accumulated over 50 patents and was co-

inventor of numerous other oil well tools. In 1957, he was
named the first recipient of the John Franklin Carl award,
given by the American Society of Petroleum Engineers for
outstanding contributions to petroleum engineering.
Otis Engineering Corporation became a subsidiary of the
Halliburton Company in 1959 and continues to thrive in this
capacity today. Spanning over half a century, the growth of
wireline service largely parallels the growth of the oil and
gas industry in the 20th century. Though blessed with
unbounded expansion, innovation remains the byword at
the Wireline PSL, a legacy of the founder.
In 1993 Halliburton integrated all of its oilfield services into
one company call Halliburton Energy Services, later to be
called Halliburton.
In 2006 Halliburton reorganized these services into two
basic divisions, the Completions and Production Division Running an Otis casing caliper
and the Drilling and Evaluation Division. It was during this around the late forties.
reorganization that Slickline Services became an integrated
part of the Wireline and Perforating PSL.
Today Halliburton has Slickline Service operations in over 40 countries around the world
with over 800 employees.
8 Slickline
Introduction
Halliburton Wireline and Perforating Services
Slickline success: The art of being the best
The range of tasks that Halliburton employees perform in the oil field has earned them a
variety of titles, from technician to advisor to field professional. However, it is rare for an
employee to be called an artist. Enter the Halliburton Wireline and Perforating Services
(WPS) product service line’s Slickline team. A superior combination of expertise, credibility
and a history of industry success set WPS apart from its competitors in this ever-changing
and critical area of subsurface service – making Halliburton the established market leader
in slickline technology and services.
Approximately the circumference of a wire coat hanger, slickline provides the most
innovative and efficient means for well intervention and completion. WPS’ expert slickline
specialists manipulate the slickline and a number of downhole tools, from several hundred
feet to several miles below the surface, to perform critical subsurface tasks using only depth
and line tension as their guide – a formidable task that takes years of experience to master.
The selective placement and strategic retrieval of wellbore hardware require precision
execution and innovation, and, when coupled with the fact that each inoperable moment
could lead to substantial losses in time and money, operator experience becomes the most
critical component to performing slickline operations safely and efficiently.
“Slickline operation is more than just a skill – it’s an art,” said David Larimore, Slickline
global product manager, WPS. “WPS’ team of experienced slickline technicians are the best
and the brightest – combining creativity, innovation, expertise and patience to produce
efficient and reliable results.”
As WPS continues to expand its slickline capabilities, customers can see the added value
that the PSL’s expert professionals and innovative tools bring to their projects. For example,
WPS’ downhole power unit (DPU) combines with slickline services to offer operators a
nonexplosive, precise, high-technology solution to the setting and retrieving of wellbore
devices.
Further, WPS’ unique slickline development program ensures that the PSL’s track record in
operational excellence and expertise continues. The program allows the industry’s
preeminent specialists to pass along their knowledge, skills and leadership to the next
generation of slickline and completion experts.
“Because of their unmatched skill and knowledge, WPS’ slickline operators are the preferred
choice when it comes to providing well intervention solutions for complex, high-profile
completions,” Larimore said. “This illustrates the industry’s respect for WPS’ slickline
employees, the value
they bring to our Company and the esteem they receive around the world.
“In today’s world of increasingly deep and more-complex well completions, the tasks that
slickline specialists are assigned are anything but simple, and the artistry they employ is
nothing short of remarkable. We applaud our world-class slickline personnel for the creative
ways they solve problems miles below the surface.”
HalWorld Today August 13, 2008 (David Larimore)
9 Slickline
Introduction
10 Slickline
PRODUCT SERVICE LINE NUMBER
(OCCUPATIONAL GROUP CODE)
SERVICE EQUIPMENT Part No.
Part No. Prefix
Prefix
Surface Use Pack-off Equipment. .................................................. 13
Plugs. ........................................................................ 21
Lubricator. ................................................................. 46 Pump Equipment. ...................................................... 25
Quick Unions. ............................................................ 46 28
Stuffing Box. .............................................................. 46 Regulators. ................................................................ 23
Wireline Reel. ............................................................ 46 123
Separation Tools........................................................ 24
Subsurface Use Standing Valves......................................................... 14
Subsurface Safety Valve. .......................................... 22
Bailers. .................................................................. 50 Tubing Stop. .............................................................. 13
Blind Box. .................................................................. 44 33
Circulating Plugs........................................................ 15
Cutter, Wireline. ......................................................... 47
Extension Hanger. ..................................................... 31
GAS LIFT COMMODITY
Gas Lift Nipple. .......................................................... 121
Extractor. ................................................................... 48
Gas Lift Pack-off Equipment. ..................................... 13
Gauge, Wireline Tubing. ............................................ 65
33
Go-Devil, Wireline...................................................... 47
Gas Lift Valves........................................................... 211
Grab, Wireline............................................................ 52
221
Impression Tool. ........................................................ 52
Intermitters. ................................................................ 270
Jars, Wireline. ............................................................ 44
Motor Valves.............................................................. 270
Knuckle Joint & Jars. ................................................. 45
Locator Tools............................................................. 46
Overshots. ................................................................. 212 PACKER COMMODITY
Perforators................................................................. 62
Positioning Tools. ...................................................... 42 Bridge Plugs. ............................................................. 312
Prongs, Equalizing..................................................... 49 Drillable Packer Accessories. .................................... 13
Pulling Tools. ............................................................. 40 212
Running Tools. .......................................................... 41 Hydraulic Packers. ..................................................... 12
Sockets, Fishing. ....................................................... 52 Sand Screens. ........................................................... 121
Sockets, Wireline. ...................................................... 43 Mechanical Packers................................................... 12
Stem, Wireline. .......................................................... 44 312
Stops, Perforator.................................................... 62 63 Telescoping Joints. .................................................... 31
Swage Tool. .............................................................. 65 Tubing Hold-down. .................................................... 12
Telescoping Joint....................................................... 31 Tubing Seal Dividers.................................................. 212
Test Tool, Tubing....................................................... 14 Tubing Set Packers. .................................................. 212
Wireline. .................................................................... 92 Twin Flow Conversion Units. ..................................... 212
Wireline-Set Drillable Packers. .................................. 212
PRE-COMPLETION,
REGULAR MERCHANDISE COMMODITY SURFACE SAFETY VALVE COMMODITY
Cylinder Assembly ..................................................... 70
Blast Nipples.............................................................. 11
170
Flow Couplings. ......................................................... 11
Gate Valve Bodies. .................................................... 93
Nipples, Bypass. ........................................................ 11
Lower Stem Kits. ....................................................... 70
Nipples, Drill Pipe. ..................................................... 11
Manifolds. .................................................................. 22
Nipples, Landing. ....................................................... 11
71
Nipples, Packing. ....................................................... 11
Pilots. ......................................................................... 70
Nipples, Side-Door. ................................................... 11
Surface Safety Valves. .............................................. 77
Sliding Side-Door®. ................................................... 121
POST-COMPLETION, MISCELLANEOUS MERCHANDISE

REGULAR MERCHANDISE COMMODITY Balls........................................................................... 93
Bearings. ................................................................... 93
Check Valve. ............................................................. 21 Gaskets. .................................................................... 93
Dual Flow Choke. ...................................................... 21 O-Rings. .................................................................... 91
Elements. .................................................................. 10 Packing Cups. ........................................................... 91
Equalizing Valves. ..................................................... 10 Pup Joints. ................................................................. 92
16 Elements.................................................................... 91
20 Springs. ..................................................................... 90
21 Tubing Couplings....................................................... 92
24 Tubing Swedges. ....................................................... 92
321 Vee-Packing. ............................................................. 91
Mandrels.................................................................... 10
16 PUMPDOWN COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
310
Part Number Prefix - 500 series
SECTION I
SLICKLINE SURFACE EQUIPMENT

Slickline Introduction to Units,
Surface Equipment and Wire
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 3
Early Days ................................................................................................................................................. 3
Slickline Units............................................................................................................................................... 5
Principles of Operation Open-Loop Hydraulic Slickline System (Chain Drive Units)................................. 6
Advantages ................................................................................................................................................ 6
System Description.................................................................................................................................... 6
Principles of Operation Closed-Loop Hydraulic Slickline System (Direct-Drive Units) ............................. 7
Advantages ................................................................................................................................................ 7
General ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
Reel Direction and Speed .......................................................................................................................... 7
Wire Tension ............................................................................................................................................. 8
Controls for Drive Pump and Reel Motor ................................................................................................. 9
Reel Braking .............................................................................................................................................. 9
Hydraulic Levelwind ................................................................................................................................. 9
Spool-Off Accessory ............................................................................................................................... 10
Filtration .................................................................................................................................................. 10
Heat Exchanger ....................................................................................................................................... 10
Surface Pressure Control Equipment .......................................................................................................... 11
Stuffing Box and Slickline Grease Head ................................................................................................. 12
Liquid Chamber/Chemical Injection Sub ................................................................................................ 13
Lubricator Purge Valve ........................................................................................................................... 14
Tool Catcher ............................................................................................................................................ 14
Tool Trap ................................................................................................................................................. 14
Lubricator Sections.................................................................................................................................. 15
Wireline Valves ....................................................................................................................................... 15
Lubricator Ball Valves ............................................................................................................................ 15
Flanged Tree Connections ....................................................................................................................... 16
Pressure Control Consoles....................................................................................................................... 16
Corrosion Resistant Alloy (CRA) Valves and Equipment ...................................................................... 16
Design Verification and Inspection Maintenance Procedures ................................................................. 16
Design Verification Certification ............................................................................................................ 17
Inspection Maintenance Certification...................................................................................................... 17
Lubricator Marking Standard .................................................................................................................. 17
Conclusions ............................................................................................................................................. 18
1 Slickline
© 2009, Halliburton
Slickline Introduction
Wire Mechanical Capabilities .................................................................................................................... 19

Slickline Wire .......................................................................................................................................... 19
Braided Wireline ..................................................................................................................................... 19
Wireline – Breaking Strengths (lbs) .................................................................................................... 20
Braided Wireline – Breaking Strengths (lbs) ....................................................................................... 20
Wireline Inspections on Location ............................................................................................................... 21
Logs ......................................................................................................................................................... 21
Visual Inspection ..................................................................................................................................... 21
Wireline Knot Test .................................................................................................................................. 21
Coil Test .................................................................................................................................................. 22
API 9A Torsion (Twist) Test................................................................................................................... 22
Test Procedures:................................................................................................................................... 22
Eddy Current Inspection Device ............................................................................................................. 23
Wireline Shear Force Analysis ................................................................................................................ 24
Slick Wireline ...................................................................................................................................... 24
Braided Wireline .................................................................................................................................. 24
Written Project ........................................................................................................................................ 25
Hands-On Projects................................................................................................................................... 26
2 Slickline
used to install or retrieve the control devices

Introduction from the well. This is accomplished by creating
jarring impacts to the shear pins by manipulation
Throughout the years, the petroleum industry of the slickline and tool string.
has called on Halliburton to help it find the Recent advanced technology development in
answer to many extremely complicated, difficult depth measurement and downhole slickline tools
and costly production problems; problems which have expanded slickline services to include:
at the time were considered out of the range on Memory Production Logging, real-time collar
normal service company work, but problems logging in tubing and casing, setting packers and
which needed a solution. It was generally bridge plugs on depth, tubing cutting, production
known that Halliburton wasn’t afraid to tackle perforating, and recording job activities for
and problems which had to do with subsurface quality assurance. In addition to that methods
flow control. This cooperative attitude, on the have been developed to inspect and track the
part of Halliburton, resulted in an extremely quality of the wire. All of this is done in an
close association between itself and its effort to enhance performance and reduce cost to
customers. And today provides the purchasers of our customers.
Slickline Services a variety of advanced features
not available from any other slickline service
company in the field today – features that are Early Days
synonymous with the name of Halliburton and
every service job it performs for its customers.
Halliburton development of slickline production
equipment is helping to simplify and reduce well
maintenance cost throughout the world.
Operators are saving money by performing a
variety of well servicing work downhole, under
pressure, using slickline methods, without
killing the well. They find “slickline” gives
them a wide range of completion possibilities to
solve most current well maintenance
requirements and to anticipate future
maintenance as well conditions change during
the life of their wells.
The evolution of the surface equipment for
Slickline Service is a method whereby various
slickline operations has been closely associated
well maintenance, remedial controls and safety
with new methods and tools for use in well
functions are accomplished under pressure in the
completions. In connection with the oil and gas
wellbore below the earth’s surface. This is done
well drilling, wire has been used since the early
by “running” and “pulling” tools and equipment
days of the industry. The uses of slick wire lines
into and out of the wellbore by using small
included depth determinations, crooked-hole
diameter slickline mounted on a powered reel at
the surface.
Some of the functions which are accomplished
by using slickline are: installing and retrieving
safety valves, plugs and pressure regulators;
removing sand and paraffin from the wellbore,
running instruments to record bottom-hole
pressure and temperature and installing or
retrieving gas lift valves.
Most of these functions require that metal pins
be sheared in the running and/or pulling tools
3 Slickline
tests, temperature and pressure surveys, paraffin These might include such prime movers as:
cutting, following the plug in cementing Steam or air motors, belts from spinning
operations. catheads, gas or diesel engines with gears and
belts or chain drives, and then the use of
hydraulic and electric motors.
A discussion of the surface equipment must, of

necessity, be quite broad. As the first step in
this discussion the actual mobile equipment
must be mentioned.
In the early day of slickline operations, few The earliest wire or measuring lines used in
problems in mobile equipment presented connection with oil wells was flat steel tapes
themselves. Trucks with winches, portable skid- with marked or stamped figures similar to a
mounted equipment, and even fixed units surveyor’s tape. They were used for accurately
mounted at strategic locations provided a means measuring well depths. As well depths
of handling most slickline problems and increased, getting tapes of sufficient length
procedures. became a problem. Stretching of the calibrated
tapes under loads made it necessary to correct
the readings to get accurate depths. When the
measuring line had to be run in a well under
pressure, the flat tape presented a problem when
running through the packing in a stuffing box.
These disadvantages brought about the adoption
of the circular slickline for depth measurements.
The line was tagged at equal increments of
length and the operator kept a record of the
amount of line paid out and retrieved. Later,
measuring devices with calibrated wheels came
into use because they were more convenient to
use and provided more accurate measurements.
As the oil field moved to more remote locations As wells depths increased and loads imposed on
the slickline reel units were mounted to the then measuring lines increased, it became necessary
existing equipment to provide mobility to to develop high-strength materials of which to
service the wells. make the lines and to draw them to a size to get
Probably among the earliest prime movers was sufficient tensile strength in as small diameter
the human being with a small hand crank and a wire as possible. Keeping the diameter size of
spool containing a short length of slickline wire. measuring line to a minimum is desirable
When the slickline wire proved a practical because:
means of depth determination and the need for 1. it reduces the load of its own weight,
greater depth runs developed, the prime mover
needed changing. Devices for applying 2. it can be run over smaller diameter sheaves
mechanical power to the spool were devised. 3. it keeps the reel size to a minimum
4 Slickline
4. it provides a small cross-sectional area for a gearbox or V-belts or chains, depending on the
operating under pressure. type of unit being used.
The most commonly used slickline is made from The slickline unit is usually a complete, self-
Carbon Steel and is sometimes referred to as contained unit in that it carries the slickline reel,
Bright Steel or improved Plough Steel. Stainless the power source, the slickline measuring device
Steel and Alloy Steel are also finding a place in and all the tools and equipment necessary to
slickline servicing as wells are drilled deeper accomplish routine jobs.
and H2S or CO2 gasses and higher temperatures Slickline units in common use today are
are encountered. These slicklines come in installed on several conveyances such as:
varying lengths from 10,000 feet up to 30,000 trailers, trucks, boats and skid unit for offshore
feet. platform use.
Slickline Units
As mentioned earlier, the slickline is installed on
a reel, which is normally powered by a diesel
engine. The power is transmitted from the
engine to the reel either hydraulically or through
Arctic Slickline Trailer Unit
Truck Mounted Slickline Unit

with Crane
Offshore Slickline Skid Unit
Slickline Lift Barge

Advanced Slickline Skid Unit
5 Slickline
position (handle pulled all the way back) and the

Principles of Operation actual motion of the wire, in or out of the well, is
Open-Loop Hydraulic controlled by the variable pilot relief valve
mounted on the operator’s console. The pressure
Slickline System setting of this valve controls the amount of
(Chain Drive Units) torque applied to the reel. With the right handle
pulled back, the system pressure can be reduced
just enough to allow the tools and wire to “drift”
into the well. When coming out of the well, the
system pressure is increased just enough so that
Advantages the wire and tools are pulled up the well. The
configuration of the hydraulic circuit assures
1. Simplest system – fewer hydraulic that the reel drive motor is not starved for oil
components, hoses and fittings. (cavitations) as the wire and tools drift into the
2. Most common system – more familiar to well, nor as they are pulled up.
operators and maintenance personnel. A particular advantage to this control scheme is
the system’s reaction when the tools come
3. Less expensive components to repair or against obstructions in the well. When drifting
replace. into the well, the combined weight of the tools
4. Hydraulic components less susceptible to and wire actually is pulling the wire off the reel.
contamination damage. If the tools come against an obstruction when
drifting into the well, some load is removed
5. Fewer interconnections when using separate
from the reel and the reel stops turning. This
power units and reel units.
prevents a “bird nest” of wire in the well. If the
6. Easier to “drift” tools into the well at light tools meet an obstruction when moving up the
tool weights. well, the hydraulic pressure will increase just
enough to open the main relief valve and prevent
7. Pumps and motors more tolerant of
over-pull on the wire.
“environmentally friendly” hydraulic fluids.
The pilot valve that the operator controls is
connected to the pilot port on the main system
relief valve. This large relief valve limits the
System Description maximum pressure that the pump can apply to
the motor. Under certain conditions, oil flowing
Hydraulic oil from the hydraulic power source through any large relief valve can generate
flows through a four-way directional control considerable noise. With the main relief valve
valve. The directional control valve is a two- mounted at the power unit some distance away
bank valve. That is, it has two four-way from the operator instead of at the control
directional control sections with two operating console, the noise level at the operator’s position
levers: the right-hand lever controls the wireline is reduced.
reel; and the left-hand lever controls the bi-
Besides the main relief valve, a dual relief valve
directional spool-off motor (if so equipped).
is mounted at the hydraulic motor that drives the
With both levers in the center position, all motor
reel. This valve protects the drive motor from
ports are blocked and oil flows freely back to the
pressure spikes that can occur during quick
reservoir.
reversals of the directional control valve. This
When setting up on a well, when spooling wire, valve is pre-set and is not controlled by the
or when performing maintenance functions, the operator.
bi-directional motor that drives the reel can be
The power source has an automatic oil cooling
powered in either direction by moving the right
system that controls the flow of hot return oil
handle of the two-bank valve forward or back.
through the cooling coils, which are mounted in
When performing normal slickline operations,
front of the engine radiator. When the oil
the right handle is positioned in the out-hole
6 Slickline
temperature is below a pre-set temperature, the pump is designed so that the direction of flow,
thermostatic valve remains closed and the oil and the rate of flow, can be changed with the
bypasses the cooling coils. When the oil reaches operator’s controls. Direction of flow
the operating temperature, the thermostatic valve determines the direction of the reel’s rotation.
opens and oil flows through the cooling coils. Flow rate determines the speed of the drive
motor and the speed of the reel.
Besides the two-bank directional control valve
and the pilot relief valve, the operator’s console A second pump supplies fluid to control and
has: a gauge that displays operating pressure (the power various functions. This auxiliary pump is
pressure on the reel motor); a gauge that mounted on the rear of the main drive pump and
displays the return pressure, and a temperature is powered by the drive pump’s through-shaft.
gauge that displays the temperature of the oil This pump is not controlled directly by the
returning to the power unit. operator. A pre-set controller inside this
auxiliary pump automatically adjusts the pump
Principles of Operation output to match changes in the required flow
rate.
Closed-Loop Hydraulic
Slickline System (Direct- Reel Direction and Speed
Drive Units)
At a fixed engine speed, reel direction (out and
in) and speed are determined by the position of
the drive pump’s cylinder block and by the
Advantages position of the motor’s cylinder block. Control
valves at the operator’s console are used to set
1. Single-handle control of both reel direction these positions.
and reel speed. An axial cylinder block in the drive pump (in
line with the pump axis) is turned by the drive
2. No four-speed gearbox - continuous control shaft and the pumping pistons reciprocate
of the reel’s speed/torque range from parallel to the drive shaft. Shoes on the
minimum to maximum. spherical ends of the pistons are held against an
3. No need to stop when changing the reel’s angled plate that turns with the shaft. The piston
speed/torque range. heads are forced to follow a path that varies
according to the angle of the plate. When the
4. Reduced maintenance – all drive
plate is vertical, the piston heads follow a
components operate in oil baths.
circular path, do not reciprocate, and no fluid is
5. Reduced heat generation at speeds that are pumped. As the plate tilts to different angles,
less than the maximum speed – no oil the pistons are forced to reciprocate within their
“blowing” over a relief valve. bores and fluid is pumped. When the plate is
near the center position, the flow rate is low. As
6. No drive chains to tighten or adjust.
the angle of the plate increases, the piston stroke
7. No clutch assembly required when powering increases and the flow rate increases. To change
multiple-reel units. flow direction, the plate can be made to tilt over-
center. This over-center movement and the
pump’s plate angle is under the operator’s
General control. It is how the operator controls reel
direction, and is the primary method of
controlling reel speed.
Reels are driven by a closed-loop hydrostatic
hydraulic drive system. A variable displacement The hydraulic motors used on the reels have a
pump circulates oil to the drive motor, which different design than the drive pump, but the
plugs into a planetary gearbox on the reel. The displacements of the motors (volume of fluid
7 Slickline
pumped per revolution) can be changed also. divided by the distance of the wire from the
The motor is a bent-axis type. This means that axis of the reel.
the centerline of the piston block is positioned at  Varying the Pump’s Maximum Pressure -
a shallow angle to the motor’s output shaft. One of the operator’s controls is a pilot
Because of the angle between the piston block valve connected to the drive pump’s
and the output shaft, as hydraulic pressure pressure control valve. Using the pilot
pushes the pistons, the pistons push on the valve, the operator can limit the output
output shaft and cause it to turn and produce pressure of the drive pump and limit the
torque. This angle between the piston block and motor torque to any value under the
the drive shaft can be varied between preset designed maximum. If the pressure in the
maximum and minimum values. Increasing the drive system exceeds the pressure that has
angle increases the motor’s displacement, which been set by the operator, the pilot valve
decreases maximum speed and increases the sends oil to the drive pump controls. This
maximum available torque. Decreasing the oil overcomes the pump’s flow setting and
angle increases shaft speed and decreases the causes the pump to move towards zero
maximum available torque. The angle cannot be displacement. As the flow rate decreases,
decreased close to zero degrees because, the pressure in the drive system decreases
theoretically, the motor speed would approach and stabilizes at the setting of the pilot relief
infinity and blow apart. Because of this, the valve.
motor can be used to change reel direction
because it cannot go over-center  Excess Tension Control Valve -- A solenoid
valve can be plumbed into the drive pump
A comparison can be made between the variable control circuit if the wireline unit is
hydraulic motor and an infinitely variable equipped with an Advanced Measuring
gearbox. The motor accepts the flow from the System (AMS). Prior to performing service
pump and converts it to a smooth range of speed work, the operator can adjust a setting on the
and torque. Higher speed ranges results in lower AMS to the maximum wire tension that is to
torque ranges. be allowed during the job. If the wire
tension reaches this setting, the AMS
actuates the solenoid valve. This drops the
control pressure to the drive pump, the pump
Wire Tension moves towards zero displacement, the
pressure decreases and the wire tension
Tension on the wire relates directly to the torque decreases. After the tension has fallen
output of the hydraulic motor driving the reel. below the setting of the AMS, the valve
Torque output of the motor depends on its closes, the pump displacement increases, the
displacement setting and on the pressure across pressure increases and the tension increases.
the motor. Three different control features serve The wire tension will alternately fall and
to regulate the maximum wire tension. increase (to the AMS setting) until the
operator takes action to: reduce the setting
 Pump Output Pressure Setting – A pilot- of the pilot relief valve, which reduces the
operated control valve within the drive maximum wire tension or; increase the
pump is set during start-up testing. It limits maximum wire tension setting on the AMS.
the maximum pressure that the pump can The maximum wire tension setting on the
maintain. At the maximum torque setting of AMS can be reset higher or lower at any
the motor (maximum displacement, time during operation.
minimum speed range), this maximum
pressure will result in the maximum possible
torque output of the motor. Tension in the
wire will be equal to the motor torque,
multiplied by the reel drive gear ratio,
8 Slickline
Controls for Drive Pump and the inertia of the wireline reel and its wire
continues to drive the hydraulic motor in the
Reel Motor same direction. Pressure builds at the motor’s
outlet until it reaches the settings of the pressure
Hydraulic pressure signals control angled plates control valves. These valves limit the pressure
in the drive pump and the reel motor. There are to the maximum pre-set value. This pressure on
two short handles on a valve assembly at the the outlet of the motor results in a braking effect
right side of the operator. This valve assembly that is equal to the motor’s maximum torque at
is supplied with pressurized oil from the the motor’s displacement setting. With the reel
auxiliary pump. When the handles are moved, stopped, and with the pump at zero displacement
the valve assembly sends pressure signals to the (no flow), flow out of the motor is blocked.
pump and motor stroke controls. With the Because all hydraulic motors have some internal
handles centered, the pilot signals to the pump leakage through the running clearances, the
and to the motor are at their minimum. Now the motor may turn very slowly when the wire is
pump is centered (zero flow) and the motor is at under load. Because of this, most closed-loop
the maximum displacement position (highest hydrostatic hydraulic drives have a “parking
torque range and lowest speed range). As the brake” feature.
pump control handle is moved forward, the pilot When performing slickline service work, it often
signal causes the pump to increase its is necessary to tension the wire when stopped
displacement and to flow oil in a direction so and to hold it tensioned for relatively long
that the reel spools off wire. As the pump periods. Also, some service work requires that
control handle is moved backward, the pilot the reel be stopped more quickly that what the
signal causes the pump to increase its hydraulic system can accomplish working alone.
displacement and to flow oil in a direction so All units have an operator-controlled band brake
that the reel spools on wire. The control can be mounted around one end of the reel. The brake
set in any position from off to full-flow reeling is self-actuated in the reel-out direction. That is,
out, or from off to full-flow reeling in, and the when applying the brake during reel out, the
control may be moved or reversed at any time forces on the brake band and its actuating levers
and as quickly as the operator can move the intensify the braking action. Reel-out braking
handle. action is sufficient to resist the maximum torque
As the motor control handle is moved forward, output of the motor.
the pilot pressure to the motor’s displacement Two nested helical springs set the brake.
control increases. This causes the motor to Pressure working on a hydraulic cylinder
move from maximum displacement (highest releases the brake. Braking action can be
torque range and lowest speed range) towards selected at any time with a lever-operated valve
minimum displacement (lowest torque range and at the operator’s console. A failure of hydraulic
highest speed range). Like the pump control, the pressure for any reason (power loss, pump
motor control may be moved at any time and failure, hose rupture, etc.) causes the brake
may be set from zero to full stroke or visa-versa cylinder to set.
as quickly as the operator can move the handle.
Moving the motor control handle backward from
neutral has no effect. Hydraulic Levelwind
Some units are equipped with a hydraulically
Reel Braking powered levelwind. A small hydraulic motor is
connected to the drive chain on the depth
As with all closed-loop hydrostatic hydraulic counter. One type of control uses a spring-
drives, when the pump control is moved to zero centered four-way hydraulic valve on the
stroke, the pump moves to zero flow and flow operator’s console. This allows the operator to
returning from the motor is blocked. However, move the counter head back and forth as desired.
9 Slickline
Some slickline units also have hydraulic

cylinders to move the counter head up and down
as the rig-up angle changes. In these units, side- Filtration
to-side motion, and the lifting and lowering
motion, are controlled with a joystick-type As with all hydraulic systems, appropriate
hydraulic pilot valve. As the operator moves the filtration is an important contributor to long
handle from side-to-side or from right to left, the service life and reliable operation. Closed-loop
counter head and its support moves accordingly hydraulic circuits use a combination of pressure
line and return line 3-micrometer filters. All
filters have devices that indicate increasing
Spool-Off Accessory differential pressures and that display warnings
to change the filter elements as the elements
A hydraulically powered spool off accessory accumulate debris.
provides a means of supporting a slickline
shipping spool and tensioning the wire on the
reel. In closed-loop hydraulic systems, the Heat Exchanger
spool-off accessory is powered only in the
direction to tension the wire. Spool-off tension A proper fluid operating temperature also is
is controlled with a pilot-operated pressure- important. The oil flows through an oil-to-air
reducing valve. The operating pressure of this heat exchanger as it returns to the reservoir. At
valve is set with a pilot valve at the operator’s low temperatures, a thermostat-operated
console. hydraulic valve bypasses oil around the cooler
until the oil temperature reaches the desired
operating range. The cooler may be mounted in
front of the engine radiator, or it may be
mounted separately and have a hydraulically
powered fan.
10 Slickline
Surface Pressure
Control Equipment
Since all wells that we will service will contain
or are subject to contain pressure, we must use a
safe and sensible means of gaining access to the
wellbore with our slickline tools. During the
performance of slickline and braided wireline
service operations on pressurized (live) wells,
slickline operators have traditionally employed
pressure-control equipment, commonly referred
to as lubricator stacks or risers, to control well
pressure and fluids. This equipment is
temporarily mounted on top of the wellhead as
the services are performed.
In general, lubricator stacks are manufactured
with threaded end connections that employ
elastomeric O-ring seals to enable the
components to be easily connected without
special tools. Equipment working pressures
range from 2,000 to 20,000 psi. The
components are usually sized to the tubing in the
well or the equipment that must be run in the
tubing and the ID sizes range from 2 to 9 inches.
In the 1930’s, the process of moving tools in and
out of a live wellbore using a pressure control
system or stack was developed. This process
was originally referred to as “lubricating the
tools” into and out of the well, and thus, the
pressure-control equipment became known as
“lubricator” or “lubricator stack.”
The first lubricator stacks consisted of a stuffing
box, lubricator sections, wireline valves or
blowout preventor (BOP’s), and a crossover to
the tree connection.
The stuffing box was used to provide a seal
around the slickline as it moved into and out of
the well. A manual packing nut could be
tightened to compress, and thus, energize special
packing within the stuffing box to affect the seal.
A sheave is used to affect an 180o bend and to
guide the wire into the stuffing box packing.
Lubricator stacks were assembled with lengths
and ID’s that are sufficient to accommodate the
length and diameter of the anticipated tool string
that would be run into or pulled out of the well.
The sections are normally 8 feet in length but
11 Slickline
could be acquired in shorter or longer lengths, if packing nut was one of the first environmental
necessary. and personnel safety enhancements made to the
The lower lubricator section(s) had ID’s large equipment. Use of this type stuffing box with a
enough to accommodate larger OD service tools hydraulic pump and hose eliminates potential
and included at least on bleed off valve to hazards associated with personnel climbing the
release the well pressure in the stack after the lubricator stack to tighten the stuffing box
tools are retrieved. packing. This was necessary to prevent well
fluids from leaking to the atmosphere. With the
Upper lubricator section(s) accommodated
hydraulic packing nut feature, however, the
smaller OD tool string components, which
operator can control the energizing of the
generally consisted of the wireline socket, stem,
packing from the ground.
and jars.
A blowout preventor plunger is currently
The wireline valve or blowout preventor was
used to close off and seal around the slickline
when special operational conditions or
emergency situations occurred without causing
damage to the wire. As an example, if the
packing in the stuffing box were to prematurely
wear out or be blown out, or some component in
the lubricator stack failed, the wireline valve
would be closed to shut in the well until the
problem was corrected. In addition the wireline
valve could provide access for attaching other
tools to the wire providing control of the well
pressure during wireline fishing operations when
the wire or several strand of wire had to be
stripped out of the hole.
The crossover or swage was used to connect the
bottom of the wireline valve to the top of the
tree. In most cases, the top of the crossover
matched the bottom connection of the wireline
valve, while the bottom thread of the crossover
was designed to screw into the top thread of the
tree.
With the broadening scope and the increase of
slickline services into more hostile environment
with pressures in excess of 5,000 psi, several
enhancement and improvements were made to
the existing technology to further ensure safety
of personnel and the integrity of the pressure
control systems in use.
Stuffing Box and Slickline

incorporated into most stuffing box designs to
Grease Head prevent the loss of well fluids to the
environment if the wire should inadvertently be
The stuffing box now uses at least a 16-inch OD pulled or blown out of the stuffing box. Should
sheave to reduce the fatigue stress on the large this situation occur, the elastomeric plunger is
diameter 0.108 and 0.125 slickline that are pushed on seat, forcing the hole though the
gaining popularity. In addition, the hydraulic plunger to be closed by differential well
packing nut was developed. The hydraulic
12 Slickline
pressure. To ensure proper operation, in the (10,000psi and above). Use of the slickline
event of an emergency, it is extremely important grease head allows grease to be pumped into the
that this plunger be replaced when the hole annular space between special close-tolerance
becomes worn. tubes and the wire to effect sealing. The grease
In some stuffing box designs the helps to lubricate the wire and provides a means
elastomeric plunger has been for adding inhibitors that reduce wire corrosion.
replaced with a grease injection In high pressure wells, the amount of “squeeze”
system. In this design the lower imparted to the stuffing box packing to effect
packing gland has been removed sealing on the wire can impart a friction force
and a short flowtube is installed. that exceeds the tool string weight, making it
Grease is then injected through the difficult to move tools into and out of the
port between the packing and the wellbore. In this application the stuffing box
flowtube to lubricate the wire and packing is not fully energized and functions
reduce stuffing box packing primarily as a wiper to remove most of the
friction. The flowtube has a small grease from the wire as it is pulled out of the
ball and seat incorporated into its well.
design to act as the BOP. When the
slickline has been pulled out or
blown out of the stuffing box the Liquid Chamber/Chemical
ball is enabled to move onto its seat Injection Sub
and shut-off well flow.
The liquid chamber/chemical injection sub is an
There is also a slickline grease optional piece of equipment that is normally
head, installed below the stuffing box, that is located directly below the stuffing box. Liquid
used primarily on high pressure gas wells chambers allow lubricants, inhibitors and
chemicals to be pumped into the lubricator and
onto the wire in situations where it is necessary
to inhibit for corrosion, provide lubrication to
the wire, or prevent hydrate formation. The
liquid chamber design creates a pocket into
which the liquid will pool so that the wire must
pass through it.
13 Slickline
Lubricator Purge Valve of the grease head with to much force, causing
the wire to pull out of the rope socket.
The lubricator purge valve is a new development
that allows air to be purged from the lubricator
when opening the well or when performing a
hydro test on the stack before the well is opened
to production. The purge valve is positioned just
below the stuffing box at the highest part of the
lubricator where air can become trapped. To
open the purge valve, the operator pulls a bind
on the wire; an upward bind opens the purge
port. When all the air is purged from the
lubricator, the operator releases the bind and the
valve closes the port.
The purge valve can also be used to purge air
from the lubricator stack when performing the
hydrostatic (water) pressure test, now required
by a large number of producing companies
before slickline services are allowed. Normally,
the packing in the stuffing box will seal
sufficiently at low pressures without being
energized by the packing nut so that little or no
air can enter or leave the stack. Opening the
purge valve will help facilitate and speed up the
process of filling the lubricator with the test
fluid by allowing air to escape during the
process. Tool Trap
The purge valve is also used to prevent auto
ignition in the lubricator by exhausting the air The tool trap is an optional device that an
from the top of the lubricator as well fluids or operator can use in place of a tool catcher. With
gases enter from the wellhead. Auto ignition is this device, the wire is run through a hinged
a phenomenon that occurs in the lubricator with flapper, and when the tool string is moved into
disastrous results when hydrocarbons and the lubricator above the flapper, it closes to
oxygen combine in the right proportions under prevent the tools from falling out of the
certain pressure and temperature conditions. lubricator. The tool trap would normally be
placed just above the wireline valve in the
lubricator stack.
Tool Catcher
A tool catcher is used in conductor line
operations and is normally placed in the
lubricator stack just below the grease head. It
was developed to latch the fishing neck on the
tool string and serves two purposes. First, it
facilitates the handling of the lubricator and tool
string in a safer manner by insuring that the tool
string remains inside the lubricator as it is being
removed from the wellhead. Secondly, it
prevents the tools from falling downhole if the
tool string should make contact with the bottom
14 Slickline
Lubricator Sections changed out on location when job conditions

require wire size changes.
In the past, screwing or welding end connections
onto tubing pup joints made most lubricator
sections. These sections still work well for
pressures of 5,000 psi and below. In cases of
higher pressures, harsher well conditions, and
higher stress that can be exerted by larger
diameter slickline sizes, it is now recommended
that lubricator sections be manufactured from
tubing sections designed for these purposes.
These sections are integral units in which the
end connections and tube are cut from one solid
forging, or the end connections are threaded
onto a tube section. The threaded connection is
usually a thread with a separate seal
arrangement, and therefore, the joint does not
have to rely upon thread interference to affect
seal.
The lower lubricator section has been equipped Dual and triple wireline valves are use to
with two bleed ports for the installation of bleed provide additional safety on high pressure well
valves. Higher-pressure gas well might cause and H2S wells. Electric conductor and braided
the valve to freeze off when bleeding down the line operators generally use dual wireline valves
lubricator, to change service tools, before the on wells with pressures of 5,000 psi or greater.
pressure inside the lubricator is bled off. Thus, In these applications, the lower rams are
the other valve can be opened to finish inverted so that grease can be injected between
depressurizing the lubricator. the rams to affect a seal in an emergency. These
rams can also be used in standard applications,
and the rams can be inverted only when
required. This capability provides greater cost
Wireline Valves efficiency for the wireline operator since a
specific additional valve does not have to be
Hydraulic wireline valve employ pistons to
designated for an inverted lower valve
engage and disengage the ram elements. These
application. Previously, special wireline valves
valves allow remote valve operation with a
had to be designed with keyed inverted rams or a
hydraulic pump and hose, and their usage has
standard wireline valve was inverted for these
increased considerably in recent years. They are
situations.
particularly beneficial for service operations
performed on H2S wells, as they eliminate the Dual and triple wireline valves can also be used
need to manually operate the valve at the with one of the ram bores equipped with a set of
wellhead, where potential of poisonous gas slickline rams and the other bore(s) equipped
leakage exists. They are also used on high rig- with braided line rams.
ups where the operation of manual wireline
valves may not be safe or practical.
Quick disconnect hydraulic cylinders have been Lubricator Ball Valves
incorporated into the latest wireline valve
designs to reduce the amount of time required to The lubricator ball valve is a device that can be
remove and replace or repair the wireline rams. made up in the lubricator stack as an emergency
This innovation reduces maintenance time shutdown system. This valve is a fail-close
required to service wireline valves and allows valve, designed to cut up to 7/32-inch conductor
the wireline rams to be easily and quickly or braided line when a loss of hydraulic pressure
15 Slickline
occurs. It can be remotely controlled with a dispense reels on the console. The consoles
hand pump or pressure-controlled pump skid provide a compact and easy method to ship a
and hydraulic hose. Fusible plugs can be unit. Some consoles are mounted in a shipping
incorporated to facilitate closure in case of a fire. frame; which also carries the wireline valves,
It is used in applications in which there is a long lubricator sections, stuffing box, and grease
distance between the location of the wireline head; and allows all of the slickline pressure
valve and the top of the wellhead. This often control equipment to be loaded on an offshore
occurs on offshore platforms when a lubricator rig in one lift.
section is run between the wellhead and an
upper deck to facilitate the slickline rig-up. The
lubricator ball valve is normally placed just Corrosion Resistant Alloy (CRA)
above the wellhead. The wireline valve and
lower lubricator section are placed above the
Valves and Equipment
upper deck floor to enable easier performance of CRA valves are gaining more prominence for
slickline operations. This use in lubricator equipment. As more wells are
being developed in hostile environments that
contain higher concentrations of H2S and CO2,
Flanged Tree Connections the lubricator stacks are being exposed to a
greater variety of elements, many of which
A flanged tree connection is now recommended adversely affect the alloy steels typically used in
on the wellhead to accommodate the lubricator lubricator equipment. In some cases, wireline
stack during standard service operations on valves exposed to critical well effluents have
wells with pressures greater than 5,000 psi and corroded to the point that they required replacing
during all H2S service operations. Threaded in less than one year.
crossover/tree connections that are used for
To combat the increase of corrosion incidence
standard sweet service should be limited to
experienced in some areas of the world, wireline
applications of 5,000 psi and lower for API-type
valves and other wetted surfaces within the
thread connections. Operators have recognized
lubricator stack assembly are being
that the addition of a threaded crossover
manufactured from corrosion-resistant alloys.
provides a potential leak path between the
To reduce the initial cost of these valves, new
wellhead and the wireline valve. Many are now
manufacturing methods such as the hot isostatic
incorporating the connection adapters to the
process (HIP) and weld overlays are being
bottom of wireline valve as part of their
pursued.
wellhead tree cap to eliminate the threaded
connection.
Design Verification and
Pressure Control Consoles Inspection Maintenance
Procedures
Pressure control consoles have been developed
to provide compact, easy-to-operate remote In order to help increase assurance that the
controls for hydraulic slickline and braided line safety of personnel and the environment will be
stuffing boxes, grease heads, and multiple maintained, Halliburton has implemented a
hydraulic wireline valves. safety inspection program that predetermines
The consoles usually contain a hydraulic whether its equipment has been designed,
reservoir, pumps and hoses to control the fabricated and maintained to perform the service
wireline valves and hydraulic packing nut. An for which it is intended.
additional grease reservoir and high pressure The program consist of a design verification
pump is supplied to operate the grease injection (DV) certification, and periodic inspection
head and to inject grease between the wireline maintenance (IM) certification and focuses on
valve rams. All hoses are stored on easy-to- critical components of the oil field service
16 Slickline
equipment that can impact operational safety. DV specifications package that there are no
The term “critical” is used to define equipment discontinuities in the part that would
types that would cause hazardous situations for compromise standards.
personnel, property, and the environment if a 5. Functional Testing – is required to
malfunction/failure of this equipment were to demonstrate that the equipment’s present
occur during operation or handling. condition can satisfactorily perform the task
for which it is designed.
Design Verification Certification

Inspection Maintenance
Each critical equipment component must pass
initial DV inspection before it can be placed in
Certification
service. The program was developed to
The Inspection Maintenance (IM) program was
ascertain whether existing equipment as well as
designed to be a continuation of the DV
new equipment conforms to current engineering
program. The IM program continues to verify
design standards. The intent of each DV
integrity of the equipment after it has passed the
inspection procedure is to verify that:
initial one-time DV inspection. The IM program
1. Critical service equipment meets minimum stipulates that periodic inspections are to be
basic standards. performed at specified intervals for all
2. Equipment that fails DV inspection is either equipment. Between IM inspections, the
upgraded to meet current standards or retired equipment is subjected to regimen of preventive
from service. maintenance.
3. The design standards used in the DV IM inspections generally consist of the
program are established in accordance with following:
company-developed criteria along with 1. Visual Inspection
industrial requirements and regulatory
2. Pressure testing
standards.
3. Nondestructive examination
The following examination techniques are
generally required in all DV inspections and 4. Visual and/or dimensional examination of
documents: designated components.
1. Visual Inspection – ensures that the physical IM policy requires that equipment failing any
appearance and condition of equipment is requirement in the IM procedure must be
appropriate for the function it performs withdrawn from service. The failed equipment
must be tagged and isolated to prevent its use
2. Design Requirement Verification – provides
until it has been properly repaired, in re-
assurance that the equipment meets
inspected, and has been designated as
minimum company, industry, and regulatory
satisfactory for service.
design standards. This examination requires
that documentation is collected or that
traceability to known documentation is
available. In the cases where no engineering
design documentation exist, the DV program Lubricator Marking Standard
may allow design verification through
specific load testing followed by An equipment marking standard has also been
nondestructive examination (NDE). developed to identify more clearly the pressure
3. Pressure Testing – ensures integrity of the and service rating of the lubricator equipment.
part to the working pressure of the pressure- This identification procedure further insures
containing equipment. proper use of equipment, and thus, improves
selection capability for lubricator equipment for
4. Nondestructive Examination – provides slickline service operations.
assurance on critical areas designated in the
17 Slickline
The chart shown below shows the standards

used for identifying standard service equipment.
A stripe of the specific color code is painted Conclusions
around the body of the equipment as shown to
distinguish its pressure rating. For H2S and The selection, proper use, and maintenance of
cold-weather service, -50oF to –75oF, the lubricator equipment for slickline service
lubricator equipment would be identified with operations are critical to the assurance of
the standard pressure stripe but would also have personnel safety and protection of property and
an additional smaller stripe of green, designating the environment.
H2S service, and another of brown, for cold Slickline equipment has evolved greatly from its
weather service. In addition, “H2S” or “COLD” initial designs, and many enhancements and
is stenciled in white in this stripe to further process developments that will help assure that
identify applicability. safety objectives can be met and that failures
resulting from improper usage of equipment will
be avoided. The process described will help to:
Insure equipment integrity,
Identify specific and proper equipment usage,
Prevent use of worn equipment, and
Prevent use of equipment in applications for
which it was not designed.
18 Slickline
Halliburton uses both “name brand” wireline

Wire Mechanical materials such as Bridon’s “Supa 75” and it
Capabilities generic equivalent “25-6MO”. The generic
equivalents are typically less costly than the
name brand wirelines while still maintaining
good quality. To insure that only quality wire is
purchased; it is recommended that all wireline
Slickline Wire be purchased through Halliburton or from
suppliers recommended by Technology – Dallas
Wireline (slickline or measuring line) is Center.
available for use in a broad range of well
conditions. Material choices range from bright To reduce the chance of premature fatigue
(carbon) steel to cobalt based alloys such as failures of wireline, it is recommended that four
MP35N. Wireline diameters .066”, .072”, and (4) foot counter wheels be used on the wireline
.082” are normally limited for use in well depth unit and 16” sheaves be used on hay pulleys and
surveys, with lengths from 6,000 to 20,000 feet. stuffing boxes for all wireline sizes through
Wireline diameters .092”, .105”, .108”, and .125”. The 10” stuffing box sheave and 7” hay
.125” are used for depth measurement as well as pulley can be used for .092” and smaller carbon
more aggressive well service work. These wires steel wireline, but using 16” sheaves with these
typically range from 10,000 to 30,000 feet in wires will increase the life of the wireline. Also,
length. In many locations, .125” wireline has the stuffing box packing gland material and ID
replaced braided line where the .125” wire has should be compatible with the wireline used.
sufficient strength to handle the expected Use of a chemical injection sub is highly
workload. recommended when performing work in wells
containing dry gases. Lubricant can be injected
To standardize on wireline materials, those listed into the sub to reduce line friction and wireline
have been selected as the preferred wireline wear.
materials for Halliburton. Breaking strengths
are given for each wireline material in the
common wire sizes. The wireline are listed Braided Wireline
according to resistance to H2S and chlorides
(with the carbon steels having the least
resistance to H2S and the cobalt alloys having Braided wireline (wire rope) is produced in a
the most resistance to both H2S and chlorides). number of sizes, type construction (strand
Carbon steels are recommended for use only in configuration), and materials. Braided lines are
standard (sweet) service wells. Austenitic available plain, galvanized, or die
stainless steels can be use in all H2S drawn/formed. Galvanized wire has better
concentrations but are not recommended for use resistance to saline conditions than the uncoated
in chlorides. The super austenitic stainless steels plain line, but the protection from the zinc is
and 6% molybdenum stainless steels can be used sacrificial. Once the zinc is corroded, the line is
in any concentration of H2S, but the well no longer protected. The die formed line gives a
temperature and percentage of chlorides must be higher breaking strength for any given diameter
considered before a recommendation can be as compared to the standard braided line.
made for use in sour wells containing chloride. Braided wireline is recommended for heavy-
Cobalt based wirelines can be used in any H2S duty wireline work including difficult fishing
and chloride combination. Recommendations jobs. For low-pressure wells, a swabbing
for wireline materials will be changed stuffing box is used as part of the lubricator rig-
periodically as other materials are evaluated. up to pack off pressure around the line. For well
Refer to Engineering Bulletin 354 or contact pressures above 1,500 psi, a grease head and
Technology – Dallas Center for further grease injection system is needed to pack-off the
assistance with selecting wireline materials. braided line against well pressure.
19 Slickline
Wireline – Breaking Strengths (lbs)
Carbon Steel – API 9A
Material 0.072 0.082 0.092 0.105 0.108 0.125

Bright Steel – (API Level 3 or Improved
961 1239 1547 1966 2109 2794
Plow Steel)
Bright Steel – (API Extra Improved
1150 1460 1830 2360 2490 3300
Plow Steel, Hi-Strength, or Monitor AA)
Austenitic Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel 1083 1363 1732 1786 2270
Super Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sandvik Sancrico 28 1445 1885 1995 2675
6 Moly Stainless Steel
Avesta 254 SMO 1462 1818 1924 2454

Bridon Supa 75 1550 2030 2030 2560
25-6MO 1475 N/A 2050 2550
Cobalt Based Alloy
MP35N 1582 2009 2080 2724
Braided Wireline – Breaking Strengths (lbs)
Size 3/16 3/16 7/32 7/32

Construction 1 x 16 1 x 19 Dycam 1 x 16 1 x 19 Dycam
Material – Galvanized Carbon Steel 4500 6400 6000 8600
NOTE: Breaking strengths will vary slightly depending on manufacturer
20 Slickline
pitting, necking down, flaking, flat spots, or

Wireline Inspections on other surface damage.
Location
Wireline Knot Test
Below are the most commonly used methods for
inspection of wireline to determine if Tie a standard wireline knot before and after
replacement is needed. A combination of these each job. If wireline breaks or cracks when the
methods should be used to inspect wireline, as knot is tied, the wireline is either hardened or
there is no one inspection method that will has been damaged by the well environment. It’s
consistently catch all wirelines before it actually helpful to periodically compare the knot tying
breaks. By inspecting the wire before and after capabilities of the used wireline with new
each job, it will be easier to determine at what wireline (preferably saved from the same
point the wireline should be replaced. If the wireline spool when new). Even if a No-Knot
wireline fails the visual inspection, wireline knot rope socket is normally used on the actual job,
test, API 9A torsion test, or the eddy current test, tying a knot for specifically for inspection
wireline should be cut off in 50-100 ft intervals purposes is recommended. This test can be
until the wireline will pass the inspection/test. If performed on all wireline materials and
the wireline fails the coil test, use one or more of diameters, including .125” line, and should be
the other inspection methods to further test the considered the “everyday” wireline inspection
line.
method for all wireline materials.
Logs
It is recommended that a log be kept for all

wireline spools. A copy of the log should be
sent in with any CPI/TER. This Log should
include:
 All details of the wireline: part number,
material type, size, trace numbers, and date
installed.
 Well data to include: well environment (at
minimum the % H2S, % chlorides, % CO2,
and downhole temperature) and well
location/number.
 Wireline operations performed: run plug,
fishing, jarring (duration and maximum
load), etc.
 Wireline Inspection results.
Note: See attached Wireline Log
Visual Inspection
At the beginning and end of the wireline job,

check the first fifty feet of wire for brightness,
21 Slickline
Coil Test the wireline breaks. The minimum turns before

breakage is listed in the API 9A specification.
Pull about 100 ft of wireline off the slickline unit
and allow the line to lay on the ground.
Overworked (work hardened) wires will not coil
freely, looses its spring, and tends to lay flatter
than wireline that is not overworked.
If a new spool of wire tends to lie flat after a
couple of jobs, this could be the result of the
wireline being feed through the counter
assembly wrong. In that case, remove the wire
from the counter and install it properly.
Tightly coiled wire could be the result of pulling
heavy loads from the well bore where the tools Note: The torsion tester can only be used for
were not able to rotate. As above on a new carbon steel lines (also known as bright
spool of wireline, this could be the result of steel).
improper installation of the wireline through the
counter assemble. Continuously working the Torsion Test
wireline in this condition could result in rapid Torsion
Material Size
deterioration of the wire. Twists
0.092 23
Standard Bright 0.105 20

Steel 0.108 19
0.125 17
0.092 21
Hi-Strength 0.105 18
Monitor AA 0.108 18
0.125 15
Test Procedures:
1. Before the wireline job, cut two 10” lengths

of wireline from the end of the wire.
2. Cut another wire sample about 12” long and
label with date, well location, and with
“before wireline job”. Save sample for step
API 9A Torsion (Twist) Test 9.
3. Bend the ends of the 10” samples, and for
An API torsion or ductility test machine is used the first sample, position the bent ends in the
to conduct this test. The device consist of a base tester jaws.
with two jar/clamps spaced 8” apart, one jaw is
4. Rotate crank until wireline breaks. Record
stationary while the other is rotated with a crank.
the number of turns needed to break the
Wireline placed between the jaws is twisted until
22 Slickline
wire. Compare to API Chart for Pass/Fail Eddy Current Inspection Device
results.
5. Repeat test for the second 10” sample and The eddy current inspection device uses an
record number of turns. electrical current call “eddy current” to inspect
wireline. Passing the line through an electrical
6. Compare the results of the two twist tests.
coil inspects the wireline. Any changes in the
Test a third 10” sample if there is a large
wireline (such as cracks, flats, laps, and other
difference in the test results.
flaws) will be highlighted by the instrument.
7. After the wireline job is completed, repeat Refer to the eddy current inspection device
the torsion test with two sample (use a third manual for details.
sample if there is a large difference in test
The eddy current tester is currently the only
results).
inspection device/method that can test the entire
8. Compare the results of the torsion tests length of wireline. All field locations should
performed before and after the job. If there review the benefits of the eddy current tester.
is a large difference between the before and Depending on the type of wireline used and
after tests, cut off 50-100ft of wireline and services performed; the eddy current tester often
retest. can pay for itself in just a few months.
9. If the wireline fails the torsion test:
a. 1. And the wireline has gradually lost
ductility and no longer passes the torsion
test (even after many cut-offs and retests),
replace the wireline. No need to submit a
CPI/TER.
b. 1. If the wireline torsion test values have
dropped significantly between the
before/after tests, proceed to the step
below.
b. 2. Cut a 6 ft length of line from the end of
the wireline and tag with date, well
location, and with the note “after wireline
job”
b. 3. Fill out a CPI/TER form for the
wireline.
b. 4. Send the CPI/TER form (including the
before and after job torsion results),
wireline log 12” wireline sample (from
Step 2), and the 6-ft wireline sample (from
Step 9.b.2.) to Dallas Center, Attn:
Technical Services. The actual torsion
test samples do not need to be sent.
b. 5. Repeat Step 8 until the wireline passes
the twist test. If the wireline repeatedly
fails the test, pull the wireline from
service.
23 Slickline
Wireline Shear Force Analysis Notes:

1. If the wireline breaks during use, the
A test fixture was specially designed to simulate fractured end(s) (at the end of about
a three- (3) inch gate valve to measure the force 6-ft of wireline) should be sent to Dallas
required to cut wireline and braided cable. The Technical Services with a CPI/TER. The
following is a table with the results: fractured end should NOT be cleaned, but
should be wrapped to preserve the fracture
for evaluation.
Slick Wireline 2. While it is recommended that a log be kept

which lists the complete history of the well
environment in which the wireline has been
Wire Size (in) Wire Type Shear Force(#)
used, it is recognized that complete well data
0.092 IP 1,400 is not always known. In dealing with TERs,
0.092 EIP 1,700 the more well history that can be provided to
Technical Services, the more accurate the
0.108 EIP 2,500
findings will be.
0.108 IP 2,100
3. For API 9A torsion (twist) tests, pass/fail
0.125 IP 3,000 values used may very from one field
location to the next due to the severity or
Braided Wireline type of wireline service being performed.
Acceptable twist test values may be lower
Line Size (in) Line Type Shear Force # for wireline units primarily performing
3
/16 Swab Line 5,000
downhole pressure surveys than for units
3
involved with service jobs requiring heavy
/16 Dycam 5,900 jarring. Experience will dictate what values
7
/32 Swab Line 6,500 are acceptable. It should be noted that the
1
/4 Dycam 12,500
torsion values in API 9A are for new
wireline. Torsion values for used wireline
will be lower.
24 Slickline
Written Project
1. List some of the functions accomplished by the use of slickline:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2. The power to move the slickline in and out of the well is transmitted to the reel from the
engine by:
3. What is the purpose of the Slickline BOP (Wireline Valve)?
4. What is the purpose of the Lubricator?
5. What is the purpose of the Stuffing Box?
6. What material and size of the slickline most commonly used in your area?
7. What is the breaking strength of that wire?
8. Write a description of the procedures that are used to rig-up slickline in your area (If you are
involved in more than one type of rig-up, describe the various types of rig-ups that you are
involved in; e.g. on land, offshore, land rig, offshore rig, drilling rig etc.)
25 Slickline
Hands-On Projects
This page is used to check the individual’s ability to perform the disassembly, assembly, repining, inspection and
maintenance of tools and/or equipment of this Section. (Dependant on what is used at the Individuals Location)
Check Tool Ability to Perform Task Witnessed By:

Box () Type Initial Emp. #
Test Wire (wrap & torsion)
Weight Indicator (calibration)
Counterhead Measurement system (calibrate)
Redress a Stuffing box
Redress a Chemical Injection Sub
Strip a Slickline Valve (BOP)
Rebuild a Slickline Valve (BOP)
Strip/Rebuild Equalizing valve on Slickline Valve
Invert a set of Dual Rams
Strip/Rebuild Greasehead and Packoff (braided line)
Function a Tool Catcher
Function a Tool Trap
Operate a Control Pump Module
Operate Winch Controls (Slickline Unit)
Basic Checks on a Power Pack.
Operate and reset a shutdown system on a Power Pack
Change out “O” ring on Pressure Control Equip
Make up a Quick Union correctly
Understand how the Xmas tree valves work and
closing sequence
Demonstrate the Principals of double isolation
Demonstrate the Operation of a Lubricator Manifold
26 Slickline
SECTION II
SLICKLINE TOOL STRING

Slickline Tool String
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 3
Tool String Components............................................................................................................................ 4
Rope Socket ........................................................................................................................................... 4
Stem ....................................................................................................................................................... 5
Mechanical Jars ..................................................................................................................................... 6
Knuckle Joint ......................................................................................................................................... 7
Hydraulic Jars ........................................................................................................................................ 7
Spring Jars ............................................................................................................................................. 9
Accelerator........................................................................................................................................... 10
Compact Tool Strings .......................................................................................................................... 11
Tool String Design Considerations ......................................................................................................... 12
Toolstring Calculations ........................................................................................................................ 14
Section II Project Two ............................................................................................................... 16
Hands-On Projects ............................................................................................................................... 17
1 Slickline
2 Slickline
Introduction
In order to accomplish “slickline” work
downhole, we must have a slickline tool string
attached to the wire. A typical slickline tool
string (Fig. 1) would consist of:
1. Rope Socket
2. Stem (Weight Bar)
3. Mechanical (Link) Jars
4. Knuckle Joint
This assembly is essentially the “work string” of
the slickline operation. Depending upon the
operation to be performed, (retrieving a plug,
safety valve, etc.) the pulling tool would be
attached to the tool string below the knuckle
joint.
In every area there seems to be a standard tool
string that is used. These consist of
configurations that have proven to give the most
success during standard operations in that area.
For example, in some areas the standard tool
string might consist of a rope socket, 5 foot – 1
½” stem, and mechanical jar would make up the
tool string. In other areas, the standard tool
string would consist of a rope socket, 8 foot – 2
3
/8” stem, knuckle joint, and mechanical jars.
What causes variations in the standard tool
string in given areas?
And if these are the standards, what causes the
use of non-standard tool strings?
In this section we hope to give you the
information that you need to select the
components to make up a tool string for
whatever well conditions and slickline
operations that you might encounter.
3 Slickline
reduced to 1 ½ to 2 wraps. With only 1 ½ to 2

wraps, the operator could pull the wire out of the
Tool String Components rope socket if the tool string became stuck.
The No-Knot (Fig. 4) rope socket is quickly
becoming the favored method of connecting the
Rope Socket wire to the tool string for two reasons.
1. It is easier to make up (with larger wire
The slickline rope socket provides a means of
sizes currently being used).
connecting to tool string to the end of the wire.
2. It is stronger.
For slickline operations there are two basic types
of rope sockets available:
1. Conventional “Knot” type, and 1
2. Wedge “No-Knot” type.
2
Part Description
1 Body
2 Thimble Eye
Part Description 3 Thimble (Wedge)
1 Body
2 Spring Fig. 4
3 Spring Support
4 Disc
With the No-Knot rope socket the wire is
Fig. 2 threaded through the body and thimble eye and
folded around the thimble (wedge). The wedge
The knot type rope socket (Fig. 2) is what we is then inserted into the thimble eye.
will call the traditional type, because it has been The strength of this type of rope socket is due to
around the longest. In this type of rope socket the reduction of tight bending radiuses.
the wire is threaded through the body, spring and
spring support, wrapped around a disc, and then There is a downfall to this type of connection,
wrapped around itself with tight coils (Fig. 3). due to its design it loses its ability to swivel.
For typical slickline operations, the operator Therefore a knuckle or tool string swivel should
would make between 7 to 14 wraps to complete be used below the “No-Knot” rope socket to
the knot. keep the natural twist of the wire.
Note: The rope socket used should be sized to
ensure that a pulling tool could retrieve it and the
tool string from the wellbore.
Fig. 3
However, there are situations (crooked tubing,

wire fishing, etc.) where the wraps would be
4 Slickline
The stem also provides the “mass” or weight

Stem which is needed to deliver the impact
(hammering effect) that is required to set
(install) or retrieve the various subsurface flow
The stem (weight bar) (Fig. 5) provides the
control devices.
weight to:
The amount of stem used in a tool string is
1. Overcome the friction of the stuffing box
determined primarily by:
packing on the wire.
1. The amounts of well pressure (working
2. Overcome the force created by the well
against the area of the wire).
pressure acting on the cross sectional area
of the wire which is “packed off” (sealed) 2. The impact required to accomplish the
in the stuffing box. This force is trying to downhole work to be done.
push the wire up and out of the well. The deviation of the well at the depth of
operations, the type of fluid in the well, and the
size of the tubing also affect the amount and size
of the stem being used.
In some situations the rig-up conditions can
Fish Neck affect the type of stem that is used. On some
Top Sub offshore platforms, there is limited space and
special “weighted” stem (Fig. 6) has to be used
to reduce length and maintain the weight
required for successful operations.
Note: When selecting the stem size,
consideration needs to be given to the tubing
size and the cutter bar that might be used to cut
Housing
the wire at the rope socket. If the cutter bar and
the stem can fit side-by-side in the tubing, when
the cutter bar is dropped, it might fall along side
of the tool string creating a very difficult fishing
Lead or operation.
Mallory
Housing
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
The stem must provide the weight necessary to

overcome the friction and force and pull the wire
into the well.
5 Slickline
We might think of the stem as the weight of a

Mechanical Jars hammer and the length of the jar stroke as the
distance the hammer can move up or down and
the slickline as the hammer handle.
With the mechanical jars attached below the
stem, the weight of the stem can be used to “jar” A greater impact can be obtained while jarring
up by quickly pulling up on the wire to rapidly up because the wire can be pulled rapidly by the
“open” (extend) the jars to create an upward slickline unit, to move the stem at a very fast
impact. To jar down, the wire would be pulled rate of speed. When jarring down, only the
up slowly to extend the jars and then released weight of the stem controls the rate of speed at
quickly to allow the stem to fall, closing the jars which it falls. We can not use the wire to
and creating a downward impact. “push” the stem downward.
There are two types of mechanical jars:
1. “Spang” Link Jars (Fig. 7), and
2. Tubular Jars (Fig. 8)
Spang jars are available in two different stroke
lengths 20” and 30” stroke. The 20”-Stroke jars
are most commonly used because it is felt that
they are stouter, with less chance of becoming
“scissored”. The 30”-Stroke jars are used when
extensive upward jarring is required.
Tubular jars are used most often when well
conditions or the operation might cause the
Spang jars to become fouled.
Note: The OD of the jars should match the OD
of the stem.
Fig. 7 Fig. 8
6 Slickline
the thin wall of the socket, removing the roll pin

Knuckle Joint and socket to clean and grease the threads are
part of the maintenance required. The condition
of the socket should be inspected before each
The knuckle joint (Fig. 9) has a ball and socket
use to determine its condition.
design to allow for “swivel” and angular action
between the jars and the tool or control device
that is attached below the knuckle joint. In most Hydraulic Jars
slickline operations the tool or control device
attached to the lower end of the knuckle joint is The Hydraulic Jar (Fig. 10) is designed to
considerably large in diameter than the tool provide upward jarring impacts under conditions
string. The importance of the knuckle joint is to where it may be difficult or impractical to obtain
allow the larger tool or control device to align or adequate upward jarring impacts with the
centralize itself in the tubing bore, especially if mechanical jars.
the tubing is crooked or “corkscrewed”.
Hydraulic jars are capable of providing an
upward jarring impact only. They do not provide
a downward jarring impact. When used, the
hydraulic jar should be installed immediately
1 above the mechanical jars in the slickline tool
string. The hydraulic jar is not intended to
replace the mechanical jar in the slickline tool
2
string.
3
4 Essentially the hydraulic jar consists of two

basic sub assemblies. These are:
1. The mandrel sub assembly that has a
2
piston at its lower end and a top sub
Part Description (fishing neck) at its upper end. Inside the
5
1 Top Sub/Fish Neck
2 Roll Pin piston, there is a valve and port assembly
3 Socket that will not allow fluid flow from above
4 Ball Pin
5 Bottom Sub/Box the piston to below but will allow fluid
flow from below to above the piston.
Fig. 9
2. The Body (housing) sub assembly. Near
Some operators will not use knuckle joints
its lower end, the Body has a restricted
because they feel that it will create a weak link
internal diameter (cylinder) that will
in their tool string. Their feelings are justified, if
accept the piston end of the mandrel
a knuckle joint is not properly cared for it could
assembly. Also note that a balance piston
easily part.
is installed in the lower end of the
When you look at the design of the knuckle restricted internal diameter (cylinder) in
joint, where the top sub screws into the socket, the body. The balance piston seals in the
the connection has a thin wall on the socket. A cylinder and is free to move up and down
roll pin keeps the socket from backing off. Now as required to equalize the pressure of the
let’s add some salt water to the threads, and hydraulic fluid, inside the jar, with the
misplaced pipe wrenches to the thin wall of the well pressure outside the jar. The balance
socket and with a little time and rust all you piston also compensates for any expansion
have holding the knuckle joint together is the of the hydraulic fluid, and resultant
roll pin. pressure increase that could be caused by
temperature.
Maintenance is the key to insure that the knuckle
joint remains in operational condition. Careful
placement of the pipe wrenches to keep them off
7 Slickline
TOP SUB
LOCK PIN
INSERT BUSHING
MIDDLE BODY INSERT
MANDREL
NONEXTRUSION RING
MANDREL SEAL
PROTECTOR RING
MANDREL SEAL
FILL PLUG
FILL PLUG SEAL
MIDDLE BODY INSERT
SEAL
MANDREL
(W/Integral Piston)
MIDDLE BODY
SPRING GUIDE
VALVE PLUG SPRING
VALVE PLUG
VALVE PLUG SEAL
VALVE PLUG SEAT SEAL
VALVE PLUG SEAT

BALANCE PISTON
NONEXTRUSION RING
BALANCE PISTON SEAL
BALANCE PISTON SEAL
PROTECTOR RING
BALANCE PISTON
BOTTOM SUB
CLOSED PISTON HAS JUST COMPLETION OF

PISTON CLEARED CYLINDER JARRING STROKE
Fig. 10
When the hydraulic jar is in the "closed" mandrel assembly is pulled upward in relation to
position, the piston (at the lower end of the the body. The hydraulic fluid that must pass
mandrel assembly) is inside the restricted through the extremely narrow annular space
internal diameter (cylinder) of the body. When between the outside diameter of the piston (on
an upward strain is taken on the slickline, the the mandrel) and restricted internal diameter
(cylinder) in the body impedes the upward
8 Slickline
movement of the mandrel. As soon as the piston Spring Jars

moves out of the restricted internal diameter
(cylinder) of the body and into the enlarged Spring Jars (Fig. 11) were developed in response
internal diameter of the body, the fluid to the “gas up” problems of the hydraulic jars
resistance ceases. At this point, the "stretch" that and to increase the effective stroke thereby
has been pulled in the slickline causes the increasing the impact forces downhole.
mandrel subassembly to travel upward at a
constantly accelerating velocity until the top Spring jars use a stack of disc spring washers
shoulder on the piston strikes the stop in the that are fully adjustable giving them the ability
upper end of the body. This transmits an upward to simulate the function of hydraulic jars without
jarring impact to the tool(s) that are below the the risk.
hydraulic jar.
After the upward jarring impact has been
completed, the wire is slacked off to allow the
weight of the slickline stem to "close" the
hydraulic jar. During closing, as the piston
enters the cylinder, the valve assembly in the
piston is moved off seat to permit rapid
displacement of hydraulic fluid from below the
piston to above. When the mandrel/piston
assembly has completed its downward travel, the
valve in the piston is closed by a small spring
and the jar is ready for the next upward jarring
impact.
The slickline operator can control the intensity
of the upward jarring impact of the hydraulic jar
by increasing or decreasing the amount of
tension (and the resulting stretch) that is pulled
on the wire.
One of the problems associated with the use of
hydraulic jars is that they can “gas up” and
created a shock absorber that hinders jarring.
Understanding the operation and function of the
components of the hydraulic jars and using good
redress practices can reduce the risk of getting
gas into the jars.
When the hydraulic jars enter the wellbore, a
pressure differential is created if the balance
piston does not move. The fluid inside the jars
will remain at atmospheric pressure. Then when
the mandrel/piston is pulled out to effect an
upward jar the differential is greater. This
pressure differential causes rapid deterioration of
the seals and gas enters.
Pre-testing the hydraulic jars on the surface, and
visually inspecting the movement of the balance
piston, will assure longer use.
Fig. 11
9 Slickline
Accelerator
The accelerator (Fig. 12) is used in conjunction

with the hydraulic or spring jars, primarily,
when unseating and retrieving unusually heavy
sub surface devices from shallow depths in the
well.
At shallow depths and deeper depths in highly

deviated wells, the amount of "stretch" that
could be pulled in the slickline to activate the
hydraulic jar would be minimal. Slickline riding
along the tubing wall can cause a change in the
effective stretch of the wire. Additionally, this
load applied to the slickline at shallow depths
would tend to either break the slickline or cause
it to pull out of the slickline socket.
Installation of the accelerator in the slickline tool
string between the slickline socket and the stem
allows the hydraulic jar to be used at shallow
depths or more effectively in highly deviated
wells.
When a strain is pulled on the slickline, with the
accelerator in place, the spring in the accelerator
is compressed a given distance. The distance
that the spring is compressed is greater than the
distance that the mandrel/piston assembly of the
hydraulic jar must travel when moving from its
"closed" to its "open" position. By maintaining a
constant tension on the slickline, the compressed
spring in the accelerator tends to accelerate the
upward speed of the mandrel/piston assembly of
the hydraulic jar when it activates. This delivers
an upward jarring impact to the tools below the
hydraulic jars.
In effect, at shallow depths, the accelerator
simulates the wire "stretch" that is normally
required to operate the hydraulic jar. The
accelerator also provides a cushioning effect that
helps to avoid either breaking or pulling the wire
out of the slickline socket at shallow depths. At
deeper depths the accelerator can increase the
speed of the impact to generate more force.
Fig. 12
10 Slickline
Compact Tool Strings
Compact tool stings (Fig. 13) have been

designed and used to supply derivatives of the
standard system to suit specific operator needs.
The compact tool string provides the operator
with equipment designed for use in applications
where reduced tool string length is required. It
is supplied to offer the user maximum flexibility
of tool string configuration for restricted height
operations.
The tool string consist of a compact jarring tool
which is run with on of the following, a heavy
duty compact accelerator, weighted stem, or
multi-roller stem. All of these incorporate an
integral rope socket. Also supplied is a standard
jar rod for the tubular jar for use when it
unnecessary to run a hydro-mechanical jar.
Fig.13
11 Slickline
Tool String Design Considerations

Chart A is a guide that may be used to assist in determining the amount of tool string weight that is
needed to pull various sizes of wireline (slickline) into the well against various well pressures. This chart
is reasonably accurate in determining the amount of stem weight that is required to equal (balance) the
force of the well’s surface shut-in pressure that is trying to push the wire up and out of the stuffing box
packing. The chart does not take into consideration the additional weight that may be required to
overcome the friction of the stuffing box packing. The degree of friction between the wireline and
stuffing box packing can vary greatly due to:
1) Type of packing material being used in the stuffing box.

2) The amount of compression applied to the packing.
3) The size (diameter) of the wireline.
4) The condition of the wireline. A clean, straight, smooth surfaced, lubricated wireline will
pass through the packing with much less frictional effect than will a dirty, rough surfaced,
dry (un-lubricated) wireline.
Chart A is laid out with the vertical lines representing well pressure (in 100 psi increments) from 0 psi to
20,000 psi. The horizontal lines represent weight (in 2 pound increments) from 0 to 250 pounds. The
seven (7) diagonal lines that originate at zero (0) in the lower, left corner of the chart represent the
various, common wireline diameters from .092 inch to .125 inch. To use the chart:
1) Find the shut-in well pressure (represented by the vertical lines) at the bottom of the
chart.
2) Follow the vertical pressure line up until in intersects the diagonal line that is labeled
with the wireline size (diameter) that is being used.
3) At this intersection, follow the nearest horizontal “weight” line to the right (or left) and
read the number of pounds of weight.
Remember, the weight derived from this chart is only the weight that is required to prevent the well
pressure from pushing the wireline upward through the stuffing box packing (disregarding the frictional
effect of the packing). Normally, in wireline operations we consider only the weight of the wireline stem
(sinker bar) when determining the weight that is required to balance the wireline against the force of the
well pressure. The additional weight of the jars, knuckle joint, pulling tool, etc. is not normally
considered in this weight requirement. In some operations (especially at lower tubing pressures and when
using the smaller diameter wirelines) the additional weight of these items (jars, knuckle joint, etc.) that
are attached to the wireline stem is sufficient to overcome the friction of the stuffing box packing and to
pull the wireline into the well. In other operations where higher tubing pressures are encountered and/or
where larger wire sizes are used, stem weight may have to be added in addition to the accessories (jars,
knuckle joint, pulling tool, etc.) and in addition to the stem weight derived from the chart.
12 Slickline
Chart “A”
CAUTION: When determining the wireline tool string weight that is required to pull the wireline into the
well when running a sub surface device, consideration must be given to the design of the device being
run. In the larger ID of the wireline lubricator and in the larger ID of the tree, the weight of the device
may be beneficial in pulling the wireline into the well. However, if the device has centralizers or spring
loaded components that contact the tubing wall, a portion (if not all) the weight of the device, and
possibly some of the tool string weight, may be supported by the centralizers or spring loaded
components when they enter the smaller ID of the tubing. Therefore, it is a general practice to disregard
the weight of this type of device when calculating the weight required to pull the wireline into the well.
In fact, additional weight will be required to overcome the “drag” effect of the centralizers or spring
loaded components that may be in contact with the tubing wall.
Although Chart “A” is extended to 20,000 psi well pressures and to wire sizes up to .125 inch diameter,
under certain conditions such as extremely high well pressures and/or smaller tubing sizes, it may be
impractical to use the larger wire sizes.
13 Slickline
Toolstring Calculations
Chart B shows the cross-sectional area of the wire sizes from .066 inch
diameter up through .125 inch diameter. Chart A is based on
multiplying the area of the wireline by the surface shut-in well
pressure.
A x P = F (Area x Pressure = Force)
Force is expressed in actual pounds of weight. Therefore, by simple

calculation, you may multiply the area of the wireline (taken from
Chart B) by the shut-in surface pressure of the well to determine the
stem weight required to balance the wireline against the shut-in well
pressure.
Example: Area of .092 inch diameter wireline is .0066 square inch (taken from Chart B). Well pressure
is 9000 psi.
Area x Pressure = Force

.0066 x 9000 psi = 59.4 pounds (weight required)
Note: Use Chart A to find the stem weight required to balance .092 wireline against 9000 psi. The
weight that you determine from Chart A should be very close to the weight (59.4 pounds) found
in the example above.
We have found that we need 59.4 pounds of stem weight to balance the .092 wireline against 9000 psi of
well pressure. Next we need to determine how many feet of stem we need to provide the 59.4 pounds of
weight. In this example we will use 1 1/2 inch diameter stem.
A formula that is reasonably accurate for determining the weight per foot of round, cold rolled steel bar
stock is:
D2 x 8 = weight per foot

3
Diameter x Diameter x 8 = weight per foot

Divide by 3
Example
: 1.5 x 1.5 = 2.25
2.25 x 8 = 18
18 = 6 pounds per foot
3
In the example above we found that a round steel bar having a diameter of 1 1/2 inches weighs 6 pounds
per foot. If we have a 5 foot length of this 1 1/2 inch diameter bar, it will weigh 30 pounds (5 ft. x 6
pounds per foot = 30 pounds). Considering the loss of steel that occurred due to machining the box and
pin connections and fishing neck on a 5 foot length of 1 1/2 inch diameter stem, it will actually weigh
slightly less than 30 pounds.
14 Slickline
We have determined that 1 1/2 inch diameter steel stem weighs approximately 6 pounds per foot and that
we need 59.4 pounds of stem weight to balance the .092 wireline against 9000 psi shut-in well pressure.
Now we can determine the number of feet of 1 1/2 inch diameter stem that we need simply by dividing
the required stem weight (59.4 pounds) by the weight per foot (6 pounds) of the 1 1/2 inch diameter stem.
59.4 (pounds required)

6 (weight per foot of 1 1/2 inch diameter stem)
59.4 = 9.9 feet or 10 feet of stem needed

6
Use the preceding information, charts and examples to answer the following questions.
1. How many pounds of stem weight would be required to balance .082 inch diameter wireline
against 6000 psi shut-in surface pressure? pounds
2. How many feet of the following stem sizes would be required to provide the weight you found in
the preceding question?
1 inch diameter ft. 1 3/4 inch diameter ft.
1 1/4 inch diameter ft. 1 7/8 inch diameter ft.
1 1/2 inch diameter ft. 2 1/8 inch diameter ft.
3). How much force would be exerted on the following wireline sizes, and how many feet of 1 1/4
inch diameter stem would be required to balance each wireline size against a surface shut-in pressure of
14,300 psi?
.092 pounds ft. of 1 1/4 inch stem
Note: In circumstances where the length of the lubricator being used is not long enough to contain the
amount of standard steel stem required for the job, special “weighted” stem is available. This
stem is normally constructed by using a steel tube filled with materials which are much heavier
than steel. Some of the heavy materials which are used in this stem is lead, tungsten, and spent
(non-active) uranium.
15 Slickline
Section II Project Two
1. List the components of the slickline tool string:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2. What is the purpose of the Rope Socket?
Do you use a knot-type or No-Knot rope socket in your area?
3. What is the purpose of the Stem?
What is Weighted Stem?
4. What is the purpose of the Mechanical Jars?
What types of Mechanical jars are available?
5. What is the purpose of the Stuffing Box?
6. What material and size of the slickline most commonly used in your area?
7. What is a knuckle joint and why should it be used at the lower end of the tool string?
8. When are hydraulic jars used and why are they selected for that purpose?
9. How does an accelerator help in retrieving subsurface devices and what position is it placed
in the tool string?
16 Slickline
Hands-On Projects
This page is used to check the individual’s ability to perform the disassembly, assembly, repining,
inspection and maintenance of tools and/or equipment of this Section. (Dependant on what is used at the
Individuals Location)

Demonstrate making up a Rope Socket (Slickline
and/or Braided line)
Make up Sucker Rod and Quick Connect Connections
Demonstrate a redress of Power Jars (Hydraulic or
Spring)
Produce a Toolstring Drawing with all the Relevant
Information
Demonstrate the Safe handling of Toolstring
components
17 Slickline
SECTION III
AUXILIARY SERVICE TOOLS

Auxiliary Slickline Tools
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 2
Tubing Gauge ............................................................................................................................................ 2
Tubing Swage ............................................................................................................................................ 3
Impression Tool......................................................................................................................................... 4
Impression Tool......................................................................................................................................... 4
Blind Box .................................................................................................................................................. 4
Blind Box .................................................................................................................................................. 5
Tubing Broach ........................................................................................................................................... 6
Metal Removal Broach .......................................................................................................................... 6
Scale Removal Broach ........................................................................................................................... 7
Magnetic Fishing Tool .............................................................................................................................. 8
Tubing End Locator................................................................................................................................... 9
Sand Bailer ................................................................................................................................................ 9
Sand Bailer .............................................................................................................................................. 10
Tubing Perforators................................................................................................................................... 12
Project Three ......................................................................................................................................... 16
1 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
available that are slightly smaller than the

Introduction landing nipple I.D. These undersized tubing
gauges can be used to gauge the tubing below
There are several tools used in Slickline Services the landing nipples and at the same time
which provide some very basic functions. These determine if the landing nipples are obstructed
tools comprise our list of Auxiliary Tools. by deposits or possibly by a previously installed
subsurface device.
1. Tubing Gauge
2. Tubing Swage
3. Impression Block
4. Blind Box
5. Magnetic Fishing Tool
6. Tubing Broaches
7. Tubing End Locators
8. Sand Bailers and
9. Tubing Perforators
These tools perform the task of ensuring the
tubing is clear to pass subsurface flow controls
to their desired location in the tubing string,
identifying objects or obstruction in the well
bore and removing them.
Tubing Gauge
It is recommended that Slickline Services of a

well begin with a Tubing Gauge before running
a subsurface flow control device into the well.
The O.D. of the tubing gauge is normally
slightly larger than the O.D. of the control
device that is to be run. A slickline trip with a
tubing gauge should determine whether or not
the subsurface device will pass freely through
the tubing.
If the tubing I.D. is restricted by paraffin, scale,
or other deposits the restriction can sometimes
be removed with the tubing gauge, dependent Tubing Gauge
upon the type and severity of the deposit.
The oversized tubing gauge will not pass
through the standard landing nipples that may be
installed in the well. In situations where the
subsurface control device is to be installed
below the uppermost nipple, tubing gauges are
2 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Tubing Swage
Occasionally the I.D. of the tubing may be
restricted due, usually to abuse or mishandling
of the tubing prior to, or during its installation in
the well. In situations where external areas of the
tubing have been flattened or crimped to the
extent of preventing the internal passage of
subsurface control devices, the Tubing Swage,
run on slickline, can often be used to open these
restrictions sufficiently to allow passage of the
subsurface control devices.
The tubing swage cannot be used to enlarge the
I.D. of landing nipples or similar restrictions in
the tubing string. It is normally used only to
reopen minor restrictions that have been caused
by mechanical damage to the tubing.
The tubing swage can also replace the tubing
gauge as the first run into the well bore to insure
open passage for subsurface control devices. It
may be preferred in deviated wells where there
are I.D. changes that may cause a tubing gauge
to hang. The tubing swage with its tapered lower
end closely resembles the shape of some
Tubing Swage
3 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Impression Tool
The Impression Tool (commonly called an
impression block) is a lead filled, steel cylinder.
The lead is retained in the cylinder by cross pins
in the cylinder, or by an anchor bolt (as shown).
The lead extends about ¼” below the lower end
of the steel cylinder.
The impression tool is used primarily in fishing
operations. The tool is lowered into the well and
stops on the fish. One light to moderate
downward jarring stroke is usually sufficient to
obtain an impression of the top of the fish.
When retrieved to the surface, the impression
obtained in the lead should indicate the size,
shape and position of the top of the fish. This
information is then used to determine the type of
tool (or tools) necessary for the next step in the
fishing operation.
Note: At least three precautions should be taken
when using an impression tool.
1. The lead in the impression tool should not
extend more than ¼” to 3/8” below the steel
cylinder.
2. The outside diameter of the lead, that
extends below the cylinder, should not be
large than the O.D. of the steel cylinder.
3. An extremely heavy toolstring and heavy
downward jarring should be avoided.
These precautions are taken to help reduce the
possibility of the lead becoming flared to the Impression Tool
extent of hanging in the tubing I.D. or becoming
fouled on the fish to the extent of separating the
lead from the steel cylinder. Once separated
from its cylinder, the lead is extremely difficult
to retrieve from the tubing.
4 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Blind Box
The Blind Box is a cylindrical, solid steel tool
that is used in slickline operations where heavy
downward jarring is required to dislodge a stuck
subsurface control device, dislodge or break
junk, drive an object downhole, etc. This tool
has a flat bottom similar to the face of a hammer
and should be made of a material that is resistant
to cracking, shattering or excessive extrusion
due to heavy impact.
The blind box is used in slickline fishing
operations to cut the wire at the rope socket. It
may be run in the hole with the slickline
toolstring or dropped from the surface. When
the blind box impacts the rope socket the wire is
either cut or severely crimped so that it will
easily break.
Blind Box
5 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Tubing Broach
Tubing Broached are available in several
different designs depending upon the intended
use of the tool. Tubing broaches run on
slickline, are used to:
1. Remove Scale or other hard deposits from
the tubing wall.
2. Remove metal burrs for the tubing I.D. that
tend to cut and damage packing on
3. Remove internally extruded metal from the
tubing connection where excessive torque
has been applied.
4. Enlarge the I.D. of various undersized
components that may have been installed as
part of the tubing string. (i.e. tubing
crossovers, landing nipples, etc.)
One type of broach consists of a carrier mandrel
and a set of three broaching spools. The bottom
spool will generally have a smaller O.D. than the
top and middle spool. The top and middle
spools should be the same size with the cutting
surfaces facing the opposite directions. The
middle spool cutting face should be pointed
down and the top spool cutting face should be
pointed up. The spools have helical type cutting
surfaces.
Metal Removal Broach
This type of broach is used to remove metal

burrs and enlarge the I.D. of restrictions due to
excessive torque on the tubing connection.
Before running this broach, the minimum I.D. of
the tubing restriction that is to be enlarged must
be determined. Then the spools are selected that Tubing Broach
are slightly large than the restriction to begin
enlarging the restriction. Once the initial broach
passes freely through the restriction, the next
larger size spool is used. This process is
continued until the restriction is enlarged to the
desired diameter.
6 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Scale Removal Broach
This type of broach is used to remove scale and

other hard deposits from the tubing wall. This
broach is shaped like a tubing swage with
hardened square or diamond shaped protrusions.
These protrusions are designed to chip away the
scale or other deposits that have built up on the
tubing wall.
The tapered design allows the tool to gradually
increase the bore size as it is driven through the
tubing. Depending on the amount of
accumulation one or several sized of this type of
broach may need to be run to remove the scale.
Note: An important feature of this type of
broach is the fluid bypass through the center of
the broach. If the broach should become stuck
(due to heavy debris build-up around the tool)
pressure could build up under the broach. If
there is an increase of pressure under the broach,
the broach and slickline toolstring could be blow
up hole.
Note: Diamond shaped protrusions should never
be used in or around landing nipple locations. If
the broach becomes off-centered the sharp
downward point of the diamond shape can and
will damage the bore of the landing nipple.
Tubing Broach
7 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Magnetic Fishing Tool

The Magnetic Fishing Tool is used to retrieve
small pieces of ferrous metal that are resting on
top of a subsurface control device or on some
other tool that is to be retrieved from the well. If
not retrieved, these small pieces of junk could
interfere with or in some cases, prevent the
retrieval of the subsurface tool.
The magnetic fishing tool should not be jarred
downward trying to pick up pieces of junk. The
magnet in these tools is not strong enough to
dislodge small pieces of metal that are wedged
in place.
Note: When retrieving the magnet from the
wellbore, slickline speed should be below 150
feet per minute, to avoid washing the small
pieces off the magnet.
Magnetic Fishing Tool
8 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Tubing End Locator

The Tubing End Locator is run on a standard
slickline toolstring and is used to locate the
lower end of the tubing I order to correlate the
slickline depth measurement to the depth
measurement recorded on the well completion
schematic. Since the smaller diameter wire does
stretch under a load, the standard slickline
measurement seldom, if ever, corresponds
accurately with the measurement on the well
completion records. This could be very critical
if slickline is used to determine whether or not
“fill in” has occurred in the casing to the extent
that it has blocked some or the entire perforated
interval.
Caution: A tubing gauge run should be made
prior to running the tubing end locator to assure
that the tubing end locator can freely pass
through the tubing and out into the casing. If the
tubing end locator cannot be lowered from the
tubing into the casing to allow the latch to shear
the shear pin and pivot into the slotted body,
problems may be encountered in retrieving the
tool.
As the tubing end locator is lowered into the
tubing, the spring loaded latch rides against the
tubing wall. When the tool passes out of the
tubing and into the casing, the spring moves the
latch to a position perpendicular to the body of
the tool. In this position the latch is resting on
the shear pin and will engage and stop at the end
of the tubing as the tool is lifted upward. At this Tubing End Locator
point the slickline depth measurement of the end
of the tubing is noted. Upward jarring action on
the tool will shear the pin and allow the latch to
pivot downward and into the slotted body.
Tubing End Locator

with Sample Bailer
9 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Sand Bailer
The Sand Bailer can be used to remove sand or
other particulate material from the well bore.
Wells being produced from unconsolidated sand
zones can become completely plugged by
formation of sand bridges in the tubing. Also
when a well is shut-in at the surface, prior to
running slickline tools to retrieve a subsurface
control device, any solids that are suspended in
the well fluids tend to settle out on top of the
subsurface control device that is to be retrieved.
A very small volume of sand or other solids on
or around the top of the control device can
prevent the engagement and retrieval of the
device.
Sand bailers exist in three basic designs;
1. Sample Bailer (shown.)
2. Pump Bailer
3. Hydrostatic Bailer
These sand bailers are available in sizes

compatible with all tubing sizes.
Cautions:
1. If the sand bridge that is being bailed has
pressure differential below it, the tubing
above the bridge should be completely filled
with fluid and/or be pressurized to a
pressure that is at least equal to the pressure
below the bridge. This is to prevent the
slickline toolstring from being blown up
hole when the bailer breaks through or
weakens the sand bridge.
2. The bailer should be pulled up hole to a
depth above where the sand bridge was first
encountered after two or three jars or after
each pump stroke. This will help to avoid
the possibility of sand falling in around the
bailer and becoming stuck in the bridge.
3. When the sand bailer is retrieved to the
surface, there is a possibility pressure could
be trapped inside the bailer. Care should be
taken when removing the bailer bottom to
avoid injury. Sand Bailer Pump Bailer Hydraulic
Bailer
10 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
After having bailed down to the top of a the bailer is equipped with an automatic
subsurface control device, and the pump bailer pressure relief value and also a manual
will no longer retrieve any sand, an impression pressure relief value it is possible that the
block should be run to determine that the top of internal pressure port leading to both relief
the subsurface control device is clear of sand. valves could become plugged. The upper
Even if an impression of the top of the Allen head set screw should always be
subsurface control device is obtained with the backed out at lease two to three rounds to
impression block, there is still likely to be allow the ball relief valve to move off seat
enough sand around the fishing neck of the before opening the bailer.
subsurface control device to prevent it from
being latched onto and retrieved with a pulling
tool. In this case, the hydrostatic bailer (Fig. 10)
should be run to remove the remaining sand
from around the fishing neck.
The hydrostatic bailer (Figure 11) consists of a
sealed chamber (barrel) that contains air at
atmospheric pressure. The seal at the lower end
of the barrel is a brass shear disc. The skirt and
ball type check valve is attached to the lower
end of the barrel, below the shear disc. The skirt
is designed with a larger ID which will allow it
to move down around the fishing neck of the
subsurface control device. When the skirt of the
bailer stops on the downhole control device, a
few downward jarring strokes will shear the
disc, which allows a sudden influx of well fluid
or gas into the chamber. The movement of the
fluid or gas will carry the remaining sand past
the check valve and into the chamber of the
bailer.
NOTE: Special skirts with a junk catcher are
available for the hydrostatic bailer. They can
sometimes be used to retrieve small pieces of
free junk from around or below the fishing neck
of a subsurface control device.
CAUTIONS:
1. The hydrostatic bailer should not be used
until the sand has been removed from the
tubing down to the top of the subsurface
control device. When jarring down on a
long sand bridge to shear the disc in the
hydrostatic bailer, the bailer may be driven
into the bridge and become stuck even if the
disc does not shear. If the disc shears, the
bailer may bury itself in the bridge to the
extent that it may become stuck.
2. After retrieving the hydrostatic bailer to the
surface, care must be taken when opening
the bailer due to the possibility of pressure
being trapped in the chamber. Even though
11 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
that he use more weight to get the tools into the

well. Depending upon the amount of stem
Tubing Perforators weight being used, only very light to moderate
upward jarring action should be used to
Both mechanical and explosive type Tubing perforate the tubing. Excessive stem weight
Perforators are available for use with Slickline. and/or severe upward jarring impacts are not
The Otis Type “A” Tubing Punch which is a necessary with this perforator and, in fact will be
simple, mechanical tool that is used to punch a detrimental to its performance.
hole through the tubing wall to provide
communication between the tubing and
tubing/casing annulus.
Properly assembled and pinned, the perforator is
lowered to a previously set stop, or it may be run
with a stop attached. Once the perforator is
seated on the stop, light downward jar action
shears two small pins that have held the
perforator in a neutral position while going in
the hole. After shearing the pins, an upward pull
on the wireline causes the double tapered wedge
to move the punch into contact with the tubing
wall and at the same time move the upper,
serrated end of the perforator housing into
contact with the tubing wall. Light to moderate
upward jarring action continues to move the
double tapered wedge up behind the base of the
punch to force the punch through the tubing
wall. After the punch penetrates the tubing wall,
continued upward jarring allows the reverse
taper on the double tapered wedge to engage the
front side of the base of the punch. This retracts
the punch back into the perforator, locks it in the
fully retracted position and frees the perforator
to be retrieved.
The perforator is equipped with a safety shear
pin located near the lower end of the tool. Once
the perforator is in the well and is activated by
shearing the top pins, it can be de-activated to
the non-perforating position by jarring
downward to shear the safety shear pin. This
causes the tool to be locked in a non-perforating
position and allows it to be retrieved from the
well without perforating the tubing.
This tool is available for use in standard weight
tubing and also in some of the heavier weight
ranges.
CAUTION: When using this perforator to
mechanically punch a hole in the tubing wall,
the wireline operator should not use more than
30 to 35 pounds of stem weight in the tool string
unless high surface pressure in the well requires
12 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Tubing Perforators
Otis® ‘A’ Tubing Perforators are mechanically
operated and can be used with slickline (under
pressure) to perforate both standard and
heavyweight tubing.
Applications
 To provide access to casing annulus to
circulate or kill a well
 To bring in additional productive zones
 To permit production through tail pipe that
has been plugged and cannot be opened by
regular methods
Benefits
 No explosives used, minimizing the
possibility of perforating the casing
 Safety-release mechanism designed to
permit removing perforator without
perforating
 Greater tubing penetration
 Perforator designed to retract the punch and
release automatically after perforating
Type ‘A’ Tubing

Perforator
13 Slickline
AuxiliaJY Tools
OTIS® 'A' Perforator

Pulling Tool: 62A02.4 62A011 62A01 62A027 62A028
SAP Number: 101015161 101064631 10106463) 101064033 101064634
•••
L ngllt Pinn.ed L*"!l.

,,. ,..,
"""'' , , ""' ,.,
381110 I375
.... ....
GZ A On
.....,. 44.3.0 1.315
.,...
2125
33.4t0 60.1110 1.313
""""
.... ""'
<370
3600
35.UO
"""
51.510
"""
""
2313
HALLIBURTON 14 Slickline
® 2009, HaNibudon
Auxiliary Tools
the versatility to meet operational

requirements.
DPU® Tubing Punch
 Improves safety with its non-explosive
operation by eliminating transportation and
The DPU® tubing punch can help cut your costs handling of explosives and by not requiring
for perforating the tubing. Coupled with the explosive-trained personnel.
MonoLock® plugging device, the DPU tubing
punch provides an effective and dependable  Offers proven, dependable operation of the
solution for well (kill) workover operations. punch
 Equipped with a timer-accelerometer-
Features pressure actuation system for precise
control.
 Can reduce the cost for perforating tubing
 Reduces rig time by minimizing misruns
with other mechanical perforators
 No extensive jarring to achieve a hole
 Eliminates the need for electric wireline and
an explosive soft shot perforating service.
The DPU tubing punch can be run on
slickline, braided line, or coiled tubing. This
means it offers the economy of slickline and
15 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
16 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Project Three
1. What is the purpose of the gauge cutter and when is it used?
What problems might be encountered when running a gauge ring?
2. What is the tubing swage used for?
3. What is the purpose of the impression tool when is it used?
4. What is the purpose of the tubing broach and when is it used?
5. What is the purpose of the blind box and when is it used?
6. What is a magnetic fishing tool and how is it applied in slickline operations?
7. What is a tubing end locator, how is it run and what precautions should be taken before
running it into the well?
8. Write a description of the procedures that are used when running the different types of
sand bailers and what cautions should be followed.
9. What are some applications of the Type ‘A’ tubing perforators?
17 Slickline
Auxiliary Tools
Hands-On Projects
This page is used to check the individuals ability to perform the disassembly, assembly, repining,
inspection and maintenance of tools and/or equipment of this Section. (Dependant on what is used
at the Individuals Location)

Prepare correct size of Gauge Cutter for 4½” , 12.75#
tubing
Prepare correct size of Blind Box for 5”, 13# tubing
Prepare correct size of Tubing End Locator for 4½”,
12.75# tubing
Redress and Prepare an LIB for 3½”. 10.30# Tubing
Redress and Prepare a Pump Bailer Safely
Redress and Prepare a Drive Down Bailer Safely
Redress and Prepare a Hydrostatic Bailer Safely
17 Slickline
SECTION IV
PULLING TOOLS
Slickline Pulling Tools
Pulling Tools
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 3
Pulling Tools Cross-References by Company ........................................................................................... 4
Halliburton Pulling Tools........................................................................................................................... 5
B Series Pulling Tools ............................................................................................................................... 5
B Series Pulling Tool - Table .................................................................................................................... 5
B Pulling Tool Operation: ......................................................................................................................... 6
R Series Pulling Tools ............................................................................................................................... 7
R Series Pulling Tools - Table .................................................................................................................. 8
R Pulling Tool Operation: ......................................................................................................................... 8
R Series Pulling Tool Charts ............................................................................................................... 10
S Series Pulling Tools ............................................................................................................................. 12
S Series Pulling Tools - Table ................................................................................................................. 13
S Pulling Tool Operation:........................................................................................................................ 14
Double Shear-Down Adapter .................................................................................................................. 15
Double Shear-Down Adapter .................................................................................................................. 16
Operation of the SSB, SSS, and SSJ Pulling Tools ................................................................................. 18
S Series Pulling Tool Charts ................................................................................................................ 19
S Series Pulling Tool Charts ................................................................................................................ 20
Type 'UO' Pulling Tool ........................................................................................................................... 22
Changing the Shear Mode.................................................................................................................... 22
Adjusting the Reach ............................................................................................................................. 22
Manual Release.................................................................................................................................... 23
Shear-Down To Release Mode ............................................................................................................ 23
Shear-Up To Release Mode ................................................................................................................. 23
G-Series Pulling Tools ........................................................................................................................... 24
G Series Pulling Tools - Table ................................................................................................................ 25
GS Pulling Tool ...................................................................................................................................... 25
Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 25
GS Pulling Tool Charts ........................................................................................................................ 27
GR Pulling Tool ...................................................................................................................................... 28
Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 28
G Series Pulling Tools Special Features ................................................................................................. 30
GR Pulling Tool Charts ....................................................................................................................... 31
Camco Pulling Tools............................................................................................................................... 32
JD Series Pulling Tools ........................................................................................................................... 32
JD Series Pulling Tool Operation ........................................................................................................ 33
Slickline Pulling Operations ................................................................................................................ 33
1 Slickline
Aborting the Pulling Operation............................................................................................................ 33

Releasing the Pulling Tool at the Surface ............................................................................................ 33
JU Series Pulling Tools ....................................................................................................................... 34
JU Series Pulling Tool Operation ........................................................................................................ 35
PRS Series Pulling Tools ..................................................................................................................... 36
PRS Series Pulling Tool Operation...................................................................................................... 36
Shear Pin Nomographs ......................................................................................................................... 39
Shear Pin Nomographs ......................................................................................................................... 39
RB Parts List ........................................................................................................................................ 43
RS Parts List ........................................................................................................................................ 44
RJ Parts List ......................................................................................................................................... 45
RQ Parts List........................................................................................................................................ 45
SB Parts List ........................................................................................................................................ 46
SS Parts List......................................................................................................................................... 47
SQ Parts List ........................................................................................................................................ 47
SSJ Parts List ....................................................................................................................................... 48
R & S Releasing Tool .......................................................................................................................... 49
R & S Pinning Tool ............................................................................................................................. 49
GS Parts List ........................................................................................................................................ 50
GSL Parts List...................................................................................................................................... 51
GS Pulling Tool Parts .......................................................................................................................... 52
52 GS Pulling Tool Parts ..................................................................................................................... 52
52 GS Pulling Tool Parts ..................................................................................................................... 53
GR Pulling Tool Components.............................................................................................................. 54
GRL Pulling Tool Components ........................................................................................................... 54
GU Adapters ........................................................................................................................................ 55
GU Adapter Parts List ......................................................................................................................... 55
GU Adapter Parts List (Large Sizes) ................................................................................................... 56
Project Four ......................................................................................................................................... 57
2 Slickline
jarring action is exerted on the pulling tool.

Introduction These jarring blows may be exerted either
upward or downward to shear the pin in the
Pulling tools are designed primarily for the use pulling tool, depending upon the type of pulling
of retrieving subsurface locking devices and tool being used. Certain types of pulling tools
other downhole equipment from the tubing bore. are designed to shear and released by upward
These subsurface devices are constructed in such jarring action, and other times of pulling tools
a way as to provide a place, near the upper end, are designed to shear and released by downward
for the pulling tool to engage and latch onto the jarring action.
subsurface device so that the device may be
unlocked and retrieved from the tubing bore.
This part of the subsurface device is commonly
called the fishing neck or the pulling neck, and
is also sometimes referred to as the pulling
flange.
Some subsurface devices are constructed with an
external fishing neck (Fig. 1) and other
subsurface devices are constructed with an
internal fishing neck (Fig. 2). Therefore, some
pulling tools are designed to engage external
fishing necks (Fig. 3) and other pulling tools are
designed to engage internal fishing necks
(Fig.4).
External Internal
Fishing Neck Fishing Neck
Type ‘R’ Type ‘GR’

Pulling Tool Pulling Tool
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Slickline service companies use pulling tools

that have been developed by several different
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 manufacturing companies. The selection of
pulling tools by a service company, vary with
Further, all standard pulling tools are operator experience, cost, quality and knowledge
constructed so that they may be released from of available tools.
the subsurface device in the tubing bore in the Halliburton has designed and manufactures the
event that the device may be stuck and cannot be widest range of available pulling tools for
readily retrieved. This release feature of the slickline service. The pulling tools are
pulling tool is usually accomplished by the manufactured in a plant where ISO9001
shearing a metal pin installed in the pulling tool. Standards are practiced, providing quality
The shearing of the pin is accomplished from the assurance.
surface by manipulating the slickline so that
3 Slickline
The following Chart provides a list of companies

and pulling tools that are designed and
manufactured by those companies.
Pulling Tools Cross-References by Company

Halliburton Camco Baker Petroline PES
Shear to Release
Engages External Fishing Necks
(Direction to Jar)
BB
N/A N/A N/A N/A UP
BE
RB JUC PES
RS JUS N/A N/A Heavy Duty UP
RJ JUL Pulling Tool
SB JDC HDPT PES
SS JDS N/A (Heavy Duty Heavy Duty DOWN
N/A JDL Pulling Tool) Pulling Tool
SSB
SSS N/A N/A N/A N/A DOWN
SSJ
UO N/A N/A N/A N/A UP or DOWN
Engages Internal Fishing Necks
GS M DU N/A DOWN
PRS-2 Jar Up
GR N/A N/A UP
then Down
N/A PRS N/A N/A N/A DOWN
4 Slickline
Though Type B pulling tools are used quite often

Halliburton Pulling Tools to fish for lock mandrels or other downhole
equipment which has junk, wire, etc., around the
B Series Pulling Tools fishing neck to the extent that it cannot be latch
with a skirted tool such as the R series. The Type
The Type B Series Pulling Tool has exposed B pulling tools are sometimes used to retrieve
dogs (without skirt) that are frequently useful in downhole equipment when the well conditions
extremely sandy or trashy wells. Being exposed, (crooked tubing, heavy fluid, etc.) may prevent
the dogs can move down over the fishing neck optimum upward jarring action. Under these
of the mandrel more easily. The Type B pulling conditions, and in the event that the downhole
tools engages external fishing necks and shears device could not be retrieve, the B series tool
to release by upward jarring. These tools are not would require less jar action to shear due to its
use extensively in routinely retrieving smaller pin.
subsurface lock mandrel and control devices.
This is due primarily to the possibility of The Type B Series Pulling Tool can be modified
bending the expose dogs while engaging a as follows:
control device and also due to the fact that the
tool carries a small diameter shear pin and
therefore, shears more readily than does the B Series Pulling Tool - Table
Type R Series tool.
Tool Tool Applications
The BB Pulling Tool can be used to latch a
number of rope sockets, of service tool strings
that have been lost in the well, short reach
service tools (i.e. Type F Tubing Stops and
Test Tools). The recommended pulling tools
to unlock and retrieve slip lock mandrels (i.e.
BB Halliburton Type W Slip Lock or CAMCO
Type A Slip Lock and various Baker
equipment items such as their Model S, W, Z
and TS lock mandrels).
The BE Pulling Tool is used to pull all
BE controls that do not have full relative motion;
mainly in fishing applications.
The Type B pulling tool is used in two versions

or types, which are the type BB (Fig. 5) and the
type BE (Fig. 6). The type BB has the shorter
dogs and therefore the shorter reach, while the
Type BE has longer dogs and a greater reach.
The two types are identical except for the length
of the dogs. By simply changing the dogs, you
can change either type to the other. All other
parts of the two tools are identical and are
completely interchangeable.
Type ‘B’ Type ‘BE’

Pulling Tool Pulling Tool
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
5 Slickline
B Pulling Tool Operation:

The B series pulling tools consist of a cylinder
(2) with a connecting sub (1) threaded into its
upper end, a core (7), and a set three dogs (8)
inserted into its lower end, all held in place by a
core nut (3). To tool was so constructed that the
dogs will pivot against the inside lower edge of
the cylinder. There is approximately 3/8” vertical
travel of the core within the cylinder. It is this
relative movement which controls the pivoting
and releasing of the dogs. When the core is held 1
in its uppermost position within the cylinder
against the sub by the shear pin (4), the dogs are
forced outwardly against the cylinder by the
springs (6) swinging the lower end the dogs into
an engaging position. These dogs, however, can 2
move outwardly against a force of the spring the
pass over and engage the pulling flange on the
subsurface control. All downward impacts of 3
the jars against the pulling tool are transmitted 4
through the sub and core and on to the mandrels
5
of the subsurface control.
All upward jarring impact and pulling load is 6
transmitted from the sub through the cylinder to Part # Name
the core by the shear pin and onto the pulling 1 Top Sub 7
tool dogs. It is practically impossible to shear 2 Cylinder
the shear pin by a uniform upward pull on the 3 Core Nut
slickline. However, if for some reason difficulty 4 Shear Pin 8
5 Set Screw
is encountered in pulling the subsurface control 6 Dog Spring
a few sharp upward jars will release a pulling 7 Core
tool and permit the slickline and tools to be 8 Dogs
pulled from the well. Upward jarring cuts the
shear pin and permits the cylinder to move
upward until stopped by the core nut. The
upward movement of the cylinder, in relation to
the core, raises the pivot point of the dogs above
the center of the dog spring and cause the lower
end of the dog to move out to a released
position. The thread connection in the bottom of
the core is for attaching an equalizing prong,
which is used to equalize any pressure
differential that might exist below a subsurface
control device.
6 Slickline
R Series Pulling Tools

The “R” Series Pulling Tools (Fig. 7) have a set
of three dogs held in their engaged position
against a cylinder spring. This design permits
the pulling tool dogs to apply a gripping action
to an external fishing neck. The tools utilize
upward jarring and line pull to cause the dogs to
securely engage the fishing neck on a subsurface
device, reducing the possibility if the dogs
slipping off the device. The tools are designed
to release by shearing a pin with upward jar
action. When the pin is sheared the cylinder
spring forces the cylinder down, releasing the
dogs from their engaged position.
The difference in the three types is only the
length of core, which is installed in the tool.
The Type RB is the longest core (Fig. 8) and the
Type RS uses the intermediate core (Fig. 9)
length and the Type RJ uses the shortest core
(Fig. 10).
Note: There is another core used to assemble a
RQ Pulling Tool which is used in the
retrieval of tools which are equipped with
a Quick connection instead of threads. Type ‘RB’ Pulling Tool
Fig. 7
The length of the core determines the reach of
the pulling tool. Reach is a distance from the
lower end or face of the core down to the
engaging shoulder at the lower end of the
pulling tool dogs. Therefore, the Type RB
pulling tool, which has the longest core, would
have the shortest reach and the Type RJ pulling
tool, with the shortest core, would have the
longest reach. Anyone of these three tools
(Type RB, RS or RJ) may be changed to either
of the two other types simply by changing the
core. All other parts of the three types of tools
are identical and are completely interchangeable.
B S J
‘B’ Core ‘S’ Core ‘J’ Core

Fig. 8 Fig. 9 Fig. 10
7 Slickline
The “R” Series Pulling Tool can be modified as

follows:
R Series Pulling Tools - Table

NOTE: It should be noted that when either running or retrieving certain rope sockets in the well bore, an ‘S’ core is
often required. It is imperative that all toolstring and downhole assemblies which are to be run in the wellbore,
including those which may be used as back up or contingency, are function tested, with the operating envelope
verified to meet job requirements.
Alternative
Tool
The RB Pulling Tool can be used to latch a number of rope sockets, of service tool
strings that have been lost in the well, short reach service tools (i.e. Type F Tubing
Stops and Test Tools). The recommended pulling tools to unlock and retrieve slip
RB Camco JUC
lock mandrels (i.e. Halliburton Type W Slip Lock or CAMCO Type A Slip Lock and
various Baker equipment, such as their Model S, W, Z and TS lock mandrels).
The RS Pulling Tool is used to latch fishing necks with threaded pin
connection on the top (i.e. Stem). The recommended pulling tool to unlock and
retrieve Profile Selective lock mandrels (Halliburton Type S, T, and V) and their
RS Camco JUS
compatible No-Go lock mandrels (Halliburton Type N and Q). Also used to retrieve
the Halliburton Type E Circulating Plug and the CAMCO Type A Standing Valve
The RJ Pulling Tool is used to pull all controls that do not have full relative motion;
RJ mainly in fishing applications. It is also used to run/retrieve test tools, if staying Camco JUL
attached.
R Pulling Tool Operation:

1
When the R Series pulling tool is lowered onto a
subsurface device, the cylinder (7) of the pulling
tool starts down over the fishing neck of the
subsurface device. The pulling tool dogs (10) 2
are in their engage position and will stop on top
of the fish neck of the subsurface device. The 3
weight of the slickline tool string, or a light
4
downward jarring impact transmitted to the
pulling tool, will cause the dogs (10) and the 5
washer (9) to move up in the cylinder against the 6
force of the dog spring (8). As the dogs move
7
up in relation to the cylinder, the upper ends of
the dogs are forced by the cylinder to move 8
inward, toward the core. This causes lower end 9
of the dogs to move outward so that they can
move down past the fish neck of the subsurface 10
device. Once the dogs (10) move down past the Part # Name
fishing neck of the subsurface device, the dog 2

1 Top Sub
Set Screw
11
spring (8) moves the washer (9) and the dogs 3 Core Spring
4 Sleeve
(10) down in relation to the cylinder (7). As the 5 Shear Pin Cap
lower ends of the dogs (10) move down into the 6 Shear Pin
7 Cylinder
lower end of the cylinder (7) the internal, 8 Dog Spring
tapered shoulder of the cylinder guides the lower 9 Washer
10 Dogs
end of the dogs in and holds them in their 11 Core
8 Slickline
engage position. In this position, downhole, the

dogs cannot release from the fishing neck of the
subsurface device until the pin (6) is shear.
Downward jarring impacts will not shear the pin
(6) in the R Series pulling tool. If the core (11)
of the pulling tool is resting on the subsurface
device the downward jarring impacts are
transmitted directly to the top sub (1) and the
core (11) to the subsurface device.
If the cylinder (7) of the pulling tool is resting
on the subsurface device (and the core is not),
the downward jarring impacts are transmitted to
the subsurface device through the top sub (1),
the sleeve (4), the shear pin cap (5) and the
cylinder (7).
If the subsurface device does not come free,
continued upward jarring will shear the pin (6).
When the pin shears, the compress cylinder
spring (3) immediately lifts and holds a top sub
(1) and the core (11) in their uppermost position
in relation to the cylinder (7). The upward
movement of the core (11) lifts the dogs (10)
against a force of the dogs’ spring (8). When the
core lifts the dogs, the tapered, upper ends of the
dogs are forced into the cylinder (7). This
causes the lower end of the dogs (10) to pivot
outwardly and to release from the fishing neck
of the subsurface device (See Fig. 11). The
slickline tool string and the pulling tool may be
retrieve to the surface.
‘RB’ Sheared ‘RB’ Pinned
Fig. 11
9 Slickline
R Series Pulling Tool Charts
RB Pulling Tools
SAP Material Old Material Will

Size Max. OD Reach Top Thread Fish Neck Core Thread
Number Number Engage
101056591 40RB12 1.00 0.969 0.750 1.320 5/8-11 UNC 0.750 10-24 UNC
120057558 40RB11 1.25 1.188 0.875 1.173 5/8-11 UNC 0.875 10-24 UNC
101056590 40RB10 1.25 1.220 1.000 1.250 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 3/8-16 UNC
101056592 40RB14 1.50 1.427 1.187 1.070 15/16-11 UNC 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101056602 40RB9 1.50 1.440 1.000 0.840 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 NA
101056595 40RB21 1.50 1.484 1.187 1.050 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101056601 40RB8 2.00 1.771 1.375 1.270 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
100005947 40RB17 2.00 1.771 1.375 1.270 15/16-11 UNC 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
120057561 40RB29 2.00 1.830 1.375 1.280 15/16-11 UNC 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
100005948 40RB18 2.50 2.178 1.750 1.270 15/16-11 UNC 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101056600 40RB58 3.50 2.700 2.313 1.380 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101015084 40RB56 3.50 2.740 2.313 1.380 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101056598 40RB55 3.50 3.115 2.750 1.350 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101010012 40RB20 4.00 3.670 3.125 1.490 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.312 1 1/4-12 UNF
101015085 40RB59 4.00 3.670 3.125 1.490 1 9/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-12 UNF
RS Pulling Tools
SAP Old
Max. Will Fish
Material Material Size Reach Top Thread Core Thread
OD Engage Neck
Number Number
101056610 40RS12 1.000 0.885 0.687 1.020 1/2-13 UNC 0.687 1/4-20 UNC
101056608 40RS10 1.250 1.220 1.000 2.160 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 3/8-16 UNC
120057589 40RS27 1.500 1.427 1.187 1.820 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101012253 40RS5 1.500 1.427 1.187 1.820 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101056609 40RS11 1.900 1.484 1.187 1.820 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101056611 40RS14 1.750 1.560 1.187 1.780 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
100008706 40RS6 2.000 1.771 1.375 2.060 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101009376 40RS7 2.500 2.178 1.750 2.060 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101009375 40RS32 3.500 2.740 2.313 2.200 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101056614 40RS33 4.000 3.115 2.750 2.100 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
120057587 40RS22 4.000 3.670 3.125 2.240 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-12 UNF
101010016 40RS9 4.000 3.670 3.125 2.240 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-12 UNF
120057585 40RS17 7.000 5.880 5.250 2.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 1/4-12 UN
1 Slickline
© 2009, Halliburton 0
RJ Pulling Tools
SAP Old
Max. Will Fish
OD Engage Neck
Number Number
101010013 40RJ4 1.250 1.220 1.000 1.900 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 3/8-16 UNC
101010014 40RJ5 1.500 1.427 1.187 2.600 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
120057584 40RJ10 1.750 1.560 1.187 2.550 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 3/8-16 UNC
101056603 40RJ1 2.000 1.771 1.375 2.650 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101056606 40RJ2 2.500 2.178 1.750 2.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 1/2-13 UNC
101056605 40RJ11 3.000 2.740 2.313 2.700 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101010015 40RJ6 4.000 3.670 3.125 2.000 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-12 UNF
RQ Pulling Tools (for Retrieving Tools w/Q Conn.)

SAP Old
Max. Will Fish
OD Engage Neck
Number Number
101314290 40RQ3 1.750 1.560 1.187 3.000 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 3/8-16 UNC
101314365 40RQ1 2.000 1.771 1.375 2.900 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101314355 40RQ2 2.500 2.178 1.750 3.100 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 1/2-13 UNC
101336694 40RQ4 3.000 2.740 2.313 3.400 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
1 Slickline
S Series Pulling Tools

The S Series Pulling Tools (Fig. 12) are
designed to engage an external fishing neck and
shear to release by downward jar action. This
design makes the Type S Series pulling tool
ideal for jobs where extensive jarring is required
to pull a subsurface flow control. Basically, the
S Series pulling tool is used in two versions or
types. These are the Type SB and the Type SS.
The two tools are identical except for the length
of the core. The Type SB has the longer core
(Fig. 13) and therefore the shorter reach. The
Type SS has the shorter core (Fig. 14) and the
longer reach. Essentially, that type SB pulling
tool has the same reach as a type RB and the
type SS has the same reach is the type RS.
Simply changing the core can change either of
the two tools to the other. All other parts of the
two tools are identical and are completely
interchangeable. The Type S Series pulling
tools may also be used as a running tool to run
collar stops, pack-off anchors and various other
subsurface devices.
Note: When used as a running tool, the core
should be of sufficient length for upward travel
after shearing the pin, before the equipment
being run stops the skirt. It is this action that
permits complete release of the equipment
being run.
Type ‘SB’ Pulling Tool
As stated above, the Type S Series pulling tools
Fig. 12
shear to release by downward jar action, but in
order for this tool to shear, the core must be
resting on the fish or device being released. Due
to the design of the tool, the downward forced,
produced by the jarring action; it exerted
through the pulling tool cylinder (skirt) and, in
turn, through the shear pin. Therefore, the core
must remain stationary and the cylinder must
move downward in relation to the core in order
to shear the pin. The tool cannot be sheared if
the cylinder is resting on the fish.
Note: There is another core used to assemble a
SQ Pulling Tool which is used in the
retrieval of tools which are equipped with
a Quick connection instead of threads.
‘B’ Core ‘S’ Core

Fig. 13 Fig. 14
1 Slickline
The “S” Series Pulling Tool can be modified as

follows:
S Series Pulling Tools - Table

Note: It should be noted that when either running or retrieving certain rope sockets in the well bore, an ‘S’ core is
often required. It is imperative that all toolstring and downhole assemblies which are to be run in the wellbore,
including those which may be used as back up or contingency, are function tested, with the operating envelope
verified to meet job requirements.
Alternative
Tool
The SB Pulling Tool can be used to latch a number of rope sockets, of service tool
strings that have been lost in the well. It may also be used as the running/pulling tool Camco JDC
SB
for short reach service tools (i.e. Type F Tubing Stops and Equalizing Prongs for the
Type PXX or PRR Plugs).
The SS Pulling Tool is used to latch fishing necks with threaded pin
connection on the top (i.e. Stem). It can also be used as running/pulling tool for the Camco JDS
SS
CAMCO Type A Standing Valve and the Halliburton Type E Circulating Plug.
SM Comes in two different sizes only (Nominal 2” and 1 ¼”) for use in latching and
Special retrieving gas lift valves. The 2” version is used to retrieve Camco JDC 2”
Application the Type 1 ½” RA Latch. The 1 ¼” version is used to retrieve the Type 1” BK Latch and 1 ¼”
Note: The SM is a special purpose tool designed primarily to retrieve various side pocket gas lift latches.
Although it is a shear down to release tool and design is much the same as the type SB and SS tools, the
dimensions of the various components of the SM are not the same as a type SB and SS pulling tools.
Therefore, the Type SM components are not usually interchangeable with the components of the Type, SB
and SS tools.
Externally, the Type S Series pulling tools are

very similar in appearance to the Type R Series
pulling tools. An easy way to visually
distinguish between the S Series and the R
Series tools is the note that the R Series (Fig. 15)
has a shear pin cap immediately below the bright
metal sleeve, while the S Series (Fig. 16) tools
do not have the shear pin cap.
When used as a pulling tool, both the Type SB
and Type SS are most often used when severe Sleeve Sleeve Only
upward jarring action is required. Since these No Cap ‘S’ Series
tools shear and release by downward jarring Shear Pin Cap
action, they will withstand longer periods of ‘R’ Series
upward jar action than the shear up Types RB
and RS tools.
Fig. 15 Fig. 16
1 Slickline
S Pulling Tool Operation:

When the Type S Series pulling tool contacts the
subsurface device that is to be retrieve, the
cylinder (10) of the pulling tool moves down
over the fish neck of the subsurface device (lock
mandrels, rope socket, etc.). The pulling tool’s
dogs (8) and washer (7) move up against the
force of the dog spring (6). As the dogs move
upward in the cylinder, the upper end of the
1
dogs cam inwardly into the cylinder. This
causes the lower end of the dogs to move
outwardly so that they can pass down over the
fishing neck. Once the lower end of the dogs
passes the fishing neck of the subsurface device, 2
the spring moves the dogs back down to the
engaged (latched) position.
3
Upward pull and/or jarring impacts are used to
unseat and retrieve the subsurface device.
Upward jarring impacts are transmitted to the 4
subsurface device to top sub (1), the cylinder
(10), and dogs (8) of the Type S Series pulling
5
tool. During upper jarring the shear pin (5) is
not damaged because the upper jarring impact 6
does not cause the core (9) to move relative to
the cylinder (10). However, if the subsurface 7
control will not release for retrieval (or if the
decision is made not to retrieve it) the pulling
tool can be released from the subsurface control
8
device by downward jarring action. Part # Name
In order to release the Type S Series pulling tool 1 Top Sub
2Sleeve 9
(SB, SS, or SM) from the subsurface device, the
3 Core Nut
core (9) of the pulling tool must rest on the 4 Core Spring
subsurface device. The downward are impacts 5 Shear Pin
are transmitted to the shear pin (5) through the 6 Dog Spring
7Washer 10
top sub (1) and the cylinder (10) of the pulling 8 Dogs
tool. In order to shear the pin the cylinder must 9 Core
move down in relation to the core therefore, the 10 Cylinder
cylinder must have enough clearance to move
down a distance that is equal to the diameter of
the shear pin (5).
Once the pin is sheared, the large core spring (4)
lifts and holds a core (9) in its uppermost
position in relation to the cylinder (10). The
.
upward movement of the core lifts the dogs (8)
against the force the smaller dog spring (6). As
the core lifts the dogs up, their tapered upper
ends are forced into the cylinder. This causes
the lower end of the dogs to pivot outward and
to release from the fishing neck of the
subsurface device. The slickline tool string and
pulling tool may now be retrieved to the surface
1 Slickline
‘SB’ Pinned ‘SB’ Sheared
1 Slickline
Double Shear-Down Adapter

In order to increase the versatility of the S Series
pulling tools, a "Double Shear Down Adapter”
(Fig. 18) has been designed for use on the S
Series tools (Fig. 17).
The purpose of the double shear down adapter is
to allow the S Series pulling tools to shear and
release with either the core or the cylinder (or
both) all resting on the subsurface device.
The use the adapter, remove the top sub from the
standard S Series pulling tool and replace it with
the double shear down adapter. Since the
adapter carries a shear pin, the "normal" shear
pin in the S Series tool should be removed when
the double shear down adapter is installed.
Caution: When the "normal" shear pin is left in
the S Series portion of the tool, the
shear pin in the double shear down
adapter will be shear by downward jar
action if either the core or the cylinder
(or both) are resting on the subsurface
device. Then the "normal" shear pin in
the S Series portion of the tool can be
shear by downward jarring action.
This can happen only if the core is
resting on the subsurface device and
the cylinder has enough clearance to
move down (in relation to the core) a
distance that is equal to the diameter
of the shear pin.
Note: The installation of both shear pins might ‘SS’ Double
be desired in some fishing operations. In Shear Down
Adapter ‘SB’ Pulling Tool
situations where hydraulic or spring jars
are being used, which cause a downward Fig. 17 Fig. 18
jar against the pulling tool during closing,
two shear pins would allow longer
continuous jarring. rest on any standard subsurface device and
therefore the shear pin in the tool cannot be the
When the shear down adapter is installed on a
sheared to release it from the subsurface device.
standard S Series pulling tool, an additional
letter “S” is added to the assembly number of the Along with the double shear down adapter, a ‘J’
"new" tool. For example, if a double shear length (short) core was designed to be used in
down adapter is installed on a standard SB the S Series pulling tool only when the double
pulling tool, it becomes the type SSB pulling shear down adapter is being used. This core
tool. If a double sure down adapter is installed allows the S Series tool to have the reach
on the standard SS pulling tool, it becomes the capabilities that are equivalent to the RJ pulling
type SSS pulling tool. tool.
When the ‘J’ core and the double shear down
Until the double shear down adapter was
adapter are installed in the S Series tool, it
designed, we did not have, nor did we need, of
becomes a Type SSJ pulling tool (Fig. 19)
"J" (short) core for the standard S Series pulling
tool. This was because the short "J" core cannot
1 Slickline
Double Shear Down

Adapter
‘J’ Core
‘SB’ Pulling Tool Fig. 19 ‘SSJ’ Pulling Tool
1 Slickline
Operation of the SSB, SSS, and

SSJ Pulling Tools
1
When the DSD adapter is properly assembled
and pinned, the lower, enlarged end of the core 2
extension (3) pushes the locking segments (7)
through the "windows" in the locking sleeve (8) 3
and cause the segments to engage a groove 4
5
inside the housing (6). This firmly locks the
6
locking sleeve (8) to the housing (6) and
prevents any vertical movement of the locking
7
sleeve.
The lower end of the locking sleeve (8) of the 8
DSD adapter rests against the core nut (10) of 9
the S Series portion of the tool. This holds the
core (13) of the S Series tool down in its normal 10
"pinned" position without having a shear pin 11
installed in this section of the tool.
When this pulling tool assembly is lowered onto 12
a subsurface device, the cylinder (17) of the
pulling tool starts down over the fishing neck of
the subsurface device. The pulling tool dogs (16) 13
are in their retracted (engaged) position and will 14
Part # Name
stop on top of the fishing neck of the subsurface
1 Fish Neck
device. The weight of the wireline tool string, or 2 Set Screw
15
a light downward jarring impact, through the 3 Core Extension
4 Shear Pin
cylinder of the pulling tool, will cause the dogs 5 Shear Pin Retainer
(16) and washer (15) to move up in the cylinder 6 Housing
7 Locking Segments 16
against the force of the dog spring (14). As the 8 Locking Sleeve
dogs move up in relation to the cylinder, the 9 Spring
upper ends of the dogs are forced to move 10 Core Nut
11 Sleeve
inwardly in the cylinder. This causes the lower 12 Core Spring
ends of the dogs to move outwardly so that they 13 Core
14 Dog Spring
can move down past the fishing neck of the 15 Washer
subsurface device. Once the dogs (16) move 16 Dogs
17
17 Cylinder
down past the fishing neck of the subsurface
device, the dog spring (14) moves the washer
(15) and the dogs (16) downward in relation to in the housing (6), the upward jarring impacts
the cylinder (17). This returns the dogs to their are not transmitted to the shear pin (4).
engaged (latched) position. If it becomes necessary to release the pulling
Once the pulling tool dogs are engaged onto the tool from the subsurface device, downward
fishing neck of the subsurface device, upward jarring impacts are required. When the pulling
pull and/or upward jarring impacts will not tool cylinder (17) or the core (13) (or both) are
damage the shear pin (4) in the DSD adapter. resting on the subsurface device, downward
The upward jarring impacts are transmitted to jarring impacts are transmitted through the
the subsurface device through the fishing neck fishing neck (1) and the core extension (3)
(1), the core extension (3), the housing (6), the directly to the shear pin (4).
cylinder (17) and the dogs (16). Since the core Once the pin (4) is sheared by downward jarring,
extension (3) is resting against a "stop shoulder" the fishing neck (1) and core extension (3) of the
1 Slickline
DSD adapter is free to move down in relation to

the housing (6). As the enlarged, lower end of
the core extension (3) moves down below the
locking segments (7), the lug segments are free
to move inwardly against the reduced diameter
of the core extension (3) and out of the groove
in the housing (6). This unlocks the locking
sleeve (8) from the housing (6). As soon as the
locking sleeve (8) is unlocked, the large spring
(12) lifts and holds the core (13) in its uppermost
position in relation to the cylinder (17). The
upward movement of the core (13) lifts the dogs
(16) against the force of the smaller dog spring
(14). As the dogs are lifted by the core (13),
their tapered upper ends are forced inwardly into
the cylinder (17). This causes the lower end of
the dogs (16) to pivot outwardly and to release
from the fishing neck of the subsurface device.
The wireline tool string and pulling tool may be
retrieved to the surface.
‘SSJ’ Pinned ‘SSB’ Sheared

Fig. 20
1 Slickline
S Series Pulling Tool Charts
SB Pulling Tools
SAP
Old Material Will Fish
Material Size Max. OD Reach Top Thread Core Thread
Number Engage Neck
Number
101056760 40SB25 1.00 0.927 0.687 1.000 5/8-11 UNC 0.687 1/4-20 UNC
101056753 40SB14 1.25 1.220 1.000 1.280 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 3/8-16 UNC
120057658 40SB15 1.25 1.220 1.000 1.060 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 3/8-16 UNC
101056763 40SB3 1.50 1.427 1.187 0.670 15/16-11 UNC 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
100008713 40SB6 1.50 1.427 1.187 1.480 15/16-11 UNC 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101056768 40SB8 1.90 1.484 1.187 1.370 15/16-11 UNC 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101009378 40SB1 2.00 1.771 1.375 1.300 15/16-11 UNC 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
120057664 40SB31 2.00 1.860 1.375 1.300 15/16-11 UNC 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101056755 40SB19 2.38 1.771 1.187 1.220 15/16-11 UNC 1.187 1/2-13 UNC
13629 40SB2 2.50 2.178 1.750 1.240 15/16-11 UNC 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101056754 40SB17 2.50 2.178 1.750 1.240 1 1/16-10 UNS 1.750 1/2-13 UNC
101056765 40SB34 3.00 2.700 2.313 1.380 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
120057665 40SB32 3.00 2.720 2.313 1.250 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101009381 40SB9 3.00 2.734 2.313 1.250 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101009379 40SB13 3.00 2.844 2.313 1.380 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101009380 40SB7 3.00 2.844 2.313 1.380 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101010019 40SB11 3.50 3.115 2.750 1.750 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101010018 40SB10 4.00 3.670 3.125 1.500 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-12 UNF
120041332 40SB27 4.00 3.670 3.125 1.500 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-12 UNF
101015088 40SB39 4.00 3.670 3.125 1.500 1 9/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-12 UNF
101056741 40SBH7 1.500 1.625 1.187 0.670 15/16-10 UNC 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101056738 40SBH18 2.375 2.160 1.375 1.260 15/16-10 UNC 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101056739 40SBH24 2.875 2.290 1.750 1.240 15/16-10 UNC 1.750 1/2-13 UNC
SS Pulling Tools
SAP Material Old Material Will Fish

Size Max. OD Reach Top Thread Core Thread
Number Number Engage Neck
101056781 40SS3 1.50 1.427 1.187 1.860 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3 /8-16 UNC
120057668 40SS12 1.63 1.625 1.187 1.860 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3 /8-16 UNC
101015701 40SS1 2.00 1.771 1.375 2.140 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
13630 40SS2 2.50 2.178 1.750 2.280 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101056782 40SS6 3.00 2.734 2.313 2.290 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
13641 40SS4 3.00 2.844 2.313 2.290 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
120057669 40SS5 3.50 3.115 2.750 2.150 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101056783 40SS9 4.00 3.670 3.125 2.280 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-12 UNF
120057667 40SS11 7.00 5.875 5.250 2.000 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 1/4-12 UN
101056777 40SSH1 1.50 1.625 1.187 1.860 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3 /8-16 UNC
2 Slickline
SSJ Pulling Tools

SAP
Old Material Will Fish
Material Size Max. OD Reach Top Thread Core Thread
Number Engage Neck
Number
101462460 40SSJ4 1.50 1.427 1.187 2.650 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3/8-16 UNC
101056778 40SSJ1 2.00 1.771 1.375 2.500 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
13564 40SSJ2 2.50 2.178 1.750 2.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 1/2-13 UNC
13565 40SSJ3 3.00 2.844 2.313 2.700 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101012257 40SSJ5 3.50 3.115 2.750 2.500 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
SQ Pulling Tools (for Retrieving Tools w/Q Conn.)

SAP Material Old Material
Number Number Will Reach Fish
Size Max. OD Top Thread Core Thread
Engage Neck
101313012 40SQ2 1.500 1.427 1.187 3.120 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 3 /8-16 UNC
101313016 40SQ1 2.000 1.771 1.375 3.600 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101314292 40SQ3 2.500 2.178 1.750 3.890 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101337236 40SQ4 3.000 2.740 2.313 3.400 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
2 Slickline
Adjusting the Reach

Type 'UO' Pulling Tool
The upper end of the Dog collet (14) covers the
The Type 'UO' Pulling Tool (Fig. 21) is Retaining Pin (11) that must be removed to
designed to run and/or retrieve wireline set change the reach of the tool. The Dog collet
devices with external fishing necks. It can be run must be moved upward to expose the Retaining
in the shear-up to release or shear-down to Pin (11). Insert a piece of .092 wireline through
release mode. The reach be adjusted to three the slots at the upper end of the Cylinder (15)
lengths, and it be manually released using a and through the hole in the Core (7). This
screwdriver. It is run and retrieved by standard prevents rotation of the Upper Core Extension
wireline methods. (3). Insert a Core Wrench into the lower end of
One UO pulling tool can be used to replace the the Cylinder (15) and rotate the Lower Core
R Series, S Series, and S Series with the double Extension (13). Right hand rotation increases the
shear down adapter install pulling tools. reach and left-hand rotation decreases the reach.
The UO pulling tool is designed stronger than
the R and S Series pulling tools. The one-piece
collet dogs insure that each dog is loaded UO Pulling Tool
equally. The cylinder is designed to support the
dogs with a 90o backup, reducing outward
expansion.
The top sub assembly must be removed from the
pulling tool assembly for changing the shear
mode and/or the reach of the pulling tool.
Changing the Shear Mode
When separated, the Core (7) extends upward

from the lower subassembly. There are two sets
of slots in the Core (7) in which the Lugs (6) can
be placed. When the Lugs (6) are placed in the
upper set of slots, the 'UO' Pulling Tool is in the
shear-up to release mode. When the Lugs are
placed in the lower set of slots, the 'UO' Pulling
Tool is in the shear-down to release mode.
Alternate sizes of shear pin holes are provided in
the Top Sub (8) and Upper Core Extension (3)
for each mode. A 5/16-inch Shear Pin is used for
the shear-up to release mode and a 1/4-inch Shear
Pin is used for the shear-down to release mode.
The tool is designed to remain in the released
position if the tool is not pinned to match the
shear mode as determined by which slot in the
Core (7) the Lugs (6) are inserted.
Shear Up Shear Down

Mode Mode
Fig. 21
2 Slickline
The Lower Core Extension (13) has been the Core (7) and the Fishing Neck (1) and Upper
provided with three sets of retainer pin slots. Core Extension (3) are pinned in the down
These slots when aligned to receive the position. A 5/16-inch Shear Pin (4) is used. An
Retaining Pin (11), automatically adjusts the upward load can now be applied to release the
reach of the 'UO' Pulling Tool to match an 'UO' Pulling Tool. The 'UO' Pulling Tool can
existing Otis Pulling Tool. The reach of the tool release by upward jarring only. Downward
can be changed without removing the shear pin jarring will not affect the Shear Pin (4).
from the upper section. After upward jarring has sheared the Shear Pin
(4), the Fishing Neck (1) and Upper Core
Manual Release Extension (3) move upward until the Upper Core
Extension (3) contacts the I.D. of the Top Sub
The 'UO' Pulling Tool is manually released by (8). When the Upper Core Extension (3) moves
inserting a screwdriver into one of three access upward, the Lugs (6) are also released to move
slots around the O.D. of the pulling tool. When a upward. Spring (9) pressure forces the Core (7),
downward force is applied to the screwdriver, Lower Core Extension (13) and the Core Nut
the Dogs (14) are forced upward to their (12) to move upward and contact the shoulder
released position. This one-hand release enables on the Dogs (14). The Dogs (14) are pulled
the operator to have one hand on the fish. upward causing them to cam out of the cylinder
window and releasing the Dogs (14) from the
fishing neck of the fish.
Shear-Down To Release Mode
When placed in the shear-down to release mode,

the Lugs (6) are placed in the lower lug slots of
the Core (7) and the Fishing Neck (1) and Upper
Core Extension (3) are pinned in the extended or 1
up position. A ¼ inch Shear Pin (16) is used. A 2
load can now be applied on either the cylinder or
3
core to release the 'UO' Pulling Tool. The 'UO'
Pulling Tool can release by downward jarring 16 4
only. Upward jarring will not affect the Shear 5
Pin (16). After downward jarring has sheared the
Shear Pin (16), the Fishing Neck (1) and Upper 6
Core Extension (3) move down until the Fishing 7
Neck (1) contacts the Top Sub (8). During this
downward movement, the undercut portion of 8
the Upper Core Extension (3) moves under the 9
Lugs (6). This permits the Lugs (6) to release
from a shoulder in the Top Sub (8). Spring 16
pressure forces the Core (7), Lower Core
10
Extension (13) and the Core Nut (12) to move
Part # Name
upward and contact the shoulder on the Dogs 1 Fish Neck 11
(14). The Dogs (14) are pulled upward causing 2 Set Screw
3 Upper Core Ext.
them to cam out of the cylinder window and 4 Shear Pin 12
releasing the Dogs from the fishing neck of the 5 Pin Retainer Ring
6 Lugs 13
fish. 7 Core
8 Top Sub
9 Core Spring
10 Dog Spring
Shear-Up To Release Mode 11 Retainer Pin
12 Core Nut 14
13 Lower Core Ext.
When placed in the shear-up to release mode, 14 Dogs 15
15 Cylinder
the Lugs (6) are placed in the upper Lug slots of 16 Set Screw
2 Slickline
G-Series Pulling Tools

The G Series pulling tools exist in two basic
types. These are the Type GS (Fig. 22) that shear
down to release and the type GR (Fig. 24) that
shear up to release. Both tools are designed to
engage an internal fishing neck.
The Type GS tool was developed in the late
1950's as a running and pulling tool for the Type
G packoff equipment. This packoff equipment
was the first basic equipment to use the internal
fishing neck. In the running position, the dogs
are designed to seat and lock in the internal
recess of the mandrel being run until a pin is
sheared by downward jarring. Because of this
design the tool can be used in pulling operations
where excessive jarring upward is required to
retrieve a subsurface control.
In the early 1960's, the X® and R® locking
mandrels were developed. The X® and R® lock
mandrels utilize the internal fishing neck and GU Adapter
require downward jarring impacts in their Fig. 23
unlocking and retrieval procedure. This created
the need for a shear up to release tool that could
be used to retrieve these lock mandrels. This was
accomplished by adding the GU adapter (Fig.
23) to the Type GS tool which would cause it to
shear by upward jarring action. The Type GR
pulling tool is a Type GS tool which has a Type
GU shear up adapter attached to it.
The Type GR pulling tool is designed to shear
with upward jarring. To accomplish this, the
shear pin is removed from the GS and a shear
pin is installed in the GU shear-up adapter. The
GR pulling tool is used for slickline operations
where downward jarring is required to unlock
the subsurface control and where shear down is
not possible. GR Pulling Tool
GS Pulling Tool
Caution: When the Type GR tool is used only Fig. 24
Fig. 22
the shear pin in the shear up adapter
can be used. The shear pin must be
removed from the GS portion of the
tool. The pin in the Type GS tool
cannot be sheared when the GU
shear up adapter is attached to the
Type GS tool.
2 Slickline
The Type G Series pulling tool can be modified

as follows:
G Series Pulling Tools - Table

Alternative
Tool
The GS Pulling Tool is used to run and retrieve G Packoff Equipment. It
is also used to retrieve X & R Equipment, however it should not be run
with an equalizing prong attached as this limits the ability to shear off Camco PRS-2
GS
should the tool become stuck. It is also used as an alternate pulling tool Baker M
for various other subsurface devices with internal fishing necks (i.e.;
Retrievable Sleeves)
GSL Exist, not recommended for use. None
Exists, not generally used; however, special applications might create a
GSS None
need for it.
The GR Pulling Tool is used to pull X & R Lock Mandrels (including RQ,
RP, RPT, FBN, SS Lock Mandrels and the MonoLock) and associated
flow controls. It is used to retrieve G Packoff Equipment. It is the
GR Camco PRS-2
recommended pulling tool to unlock and retrieve the D Collar Stop. It
also has application in retrieving various other subsurface devices with
internal fishing necks.
It is used as the recommended pulling tool to unlock and retrieve the D
GRL None
Collar Lock Mandrel. Not for use with the D Collar Stop.
Exists, not generally used; however, special applications might create a
GRS None
need for it.
NOTE: A special unlocking tool must be screwed into the core of the GR pulling tool in order to unlock
the safety set lock mandrel.
GS Pulling Tool 1
3
Operation
4
When the GS pulling tool is lowered onto a sub 5
surface device, the dogs are in their expanded
(engaged) position and must retract in order to 6
pass through the restriction of the internal 7
fishing neck. The weight of the wireline tool
string or a light downward jarring impact will 8
cause the dogs and the dog retainer to move up 9
Part # Name
against the force of the dog spring. As the dogs
1 Fish Neck
move up in relation to the core the lower end of 2 Set Screw 10
the dogs retract inwardly against the reduced 3 Core
4 Top Sub
diameter of the core. This allows the dogs to 5 Shear Pin
move down through the restricted diameter of 6 Cylinder
7 Core Spring
the fishing neck on the sub surface device. 8 Spring Retainer 11
As soon as the dogs pass the restriction, the dog 9 Dog Spring
10 Dog Retainer
spring moves the dog retainer and the dogs back 11 Dogs
down to their original "expanded" position on
2 Slickline
the larger diameter of the core near its lower against the smaller diameter of the core
end. At this point the dogs are engaged in the so that the GS tool may be lifted out of the
internal fishing neck of the sub surface device. fishing neck of the sub surface device.
Once the GS pulling tool (Fig. 25) is engaged in
the fishing neck of the sub surface device, the
upward jarring impacts are transmitted to the sub
surface device through the fishing neck the core
and the dogs of the GS tool. Therefore the
upward jarring impacts should not affect the
shear pin.
If the sub surface device does not come free,
downward jarring impacts will be required to
shear the pin in order to release the GS pulling
tool from the sub surface device.
In order to shear the pin the core of the pulling
tool must move down in relation to the top sub
and cylinder. Therefore the lower end of the
cylinder must rest on the sub surface device and
there must be enough clearance below the core
to allow it to move down a distance that is equal
to the diameter of the shear pin.
When the cylinder is resting on the sub surface
device, the downward jarring impacts are
transmitted through the fishing neck, and core to
the shear pin. Since the cylinder and top sub are
supported by the sub surface device, the
downward jarring impacts drive the core
downward through the top sub and shears the
pin.
As soon as the pin is sheared, (Fig. 26) the core
spring lifts and holds the top sub, cylinder, dog
retainer and the dogs in their uppermost position
in relation to the core. In this position the lower,
engaging end of the dogs are adjacent to the
reduced diameter of the core. This allows the
dogs to move inwardly against the core and to
release from the fishing neck of the sub surface
device.
GS Pulling Tool GS Pulling Tool
Caution: If the core of the GS pulling tool is Pinned Sheared
resting on the sub surface device, or
Fig. 25 Fig. 26
any other obstruction, downward
jarring impacts cannot shear the pin.
Note: To release the GS tool from a sub surface

device that has been retrieved to the
surface, allow the cylinder of the pulling
tool to rest on the fishing neck of the sub
surface device. Then grasp and lift the
dog retainer against the force of the dog
spring. This allows the dogs to retract
2 Slickline
GS Pulling Tool Charts
GS Pulling Tools
SAP
Old Material Max. Will Fish
Material Size Reach Top Thread Core Thread
Number OD Engage Neck
Number
101056283 40GS12500 1.250 1.160 0.875 1.080 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 3/8-16 UNC
101009371 40GS15000 1.500 1.470 1.060 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 1/2-13 UNC
101056288 40GS17800 1.780 1.750 1.375 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
100009896 40GS18700 1.870 1.810 1.375 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101009372 40GS21800 2.180 2.160 1.812 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC
100005945 40GS23100 2.310 2.250 1.812 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC
13621 40GS27500 2.750 2.720 2.313 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101009373 40GS31202 3.125 3.110 2.620 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 3/8-12 UNF
27123 40GS31282 3.125 3.110 2.620 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 3/8-12 UNF
100005946 40GS36804 3.688 3.620 3.120 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/8-12 UN
120057503 40GS36805 3.688 3.620 3.120 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/8-12 UN
100009643 40GS36807 3.688 3.620 3.120 1.620 1 9/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/8-12 UN
120057494 40GS2 5.000 4.000 3.580 1.820 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-11 1/2 NPT
101056291 40GS20 5.000 4.000 3.580 1.820 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/4-11 1/2 NPT
101056306 40GS45603 4.562 4.320 4.000 1.820 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 1/8-12 UN
101056305 40GS45601 4.562 4.500 4.000 1.820 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/2-10 UN
100008673 40GS45600 4.562 4.500 4.000 1.820 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 1/2-10 UN
120057505 40GS45602 4.562 4.500 4.000 1.820 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 1/2-10 UN
101056307 40GS45604 4.562 4.500 4.000 1.820 1 9/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 1/2-10 UN
101455663 40GS56213 5.625 5.456 4.750 1.780 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 3/4-10 UN
101008835 40GS56210 5.625 5.560 4.750 1.780 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 3/4-10 UN
101369217 40GS56212 5.625 5.560 4.750 1.780 1 9/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 3/4-10 UN
101012223 40GS58710 5.875 5.830 5.250 1.860 1 9/16-10 UNS 3.125 3 5/8-10 UNS
101012222 40GS58700 5.875 5.830 5.380 1.860 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 3 5/8-10 UNS
101009374 40GS59600 5.963 5.880 5.380 1.860 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 3 5/8-10 UNS
101056311 40GS70500 7.050 6.550 5.880 1.890 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 4-12 UN
101274138 40GS81201 8.125 8.020 7.120 2.100 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 5 1/4-8 STUB AC
101389980 40GS95010 9.500 9.265 8.375 2.000 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 6 1/2-8 STUB AC
For 7 Inch CAMCO DB Lock #10266-000-05000
GSL Pulling Tools

SAP
Number
101056276 40GSL18700 1.870 1.810 1.375 3.500 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101015697 40GSL23100 2.310 2.250 1.812 3.500 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC
101015698 40GSL27500 2.750 2.720 2.313 3.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101056277 40GSL36802 3.688 3.620 3.120 3.020 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/8-12 UN
2 Slickline
GR Pulling Tool
1
Operation
When the GR pulling tool is lowered onto a 2

subsurface device, the dogs (16) are in their 3
expanded (engaged) position and must retract in
order to pass through the restriction of the 4
internal fishing neck. The weight of the wireline 6
tool string or a light downward jarring impact
will cause the dogs (16) and the dog retainer 5
(15) to move upward against the force of the dog
7
spring (14). As the dogs move up in relation to
the core (9), the lower ends of the dogs retract 8
inwardly against the reduced diameter of the
core (9). This allows the dogs to move down 9
through the restricted diameter of the fishing 10
neck on the subsurface device.
11
As soon as the dogs pass the restriction, the dog
spring (14) moves the dog retainer (15) and the 12
dogs (16) back down to their original
Part # Name 13
"expanded" position on the larger diameter of 1 Fish Neck
the core (9) near its lower end. At this point the 2 Pin Retainer Ring 14
3 Shear Pin
dogs are engaged in the internal fishing neck of
4 Retainer Pin 15
the subsurface device. 5 Core Nut
6 Set Screw
Once the GR pulling tool (Fig. 27) is engaged to 7 Fish Neck
the fishing neck of the subsurface device, 8 Set Screw
9 Core 16
downward jarring impacts will have no effect on 10 Top Sub
the shear pin (3). If the cylinder (11) is resting 11 Cylinder
on the subsurface device, the downward jarring 12 Core Spring
13 Spring Retainer
impacts are transmitted through the fishing neck 14 Dog Spring
(1), the top sub (10) and the cylinder (11) to the 15 Dog Retainer
16 Dogs
subsurface device. This will not effect the shear
pin (3). jarring impacts are transmitted to the subsurface
If the core (9) is resting on the subsurface device device through the fishing neck (1) the shear pin
(and the cylinder is not) the downward jarring (3) the core nut (5), the fishing neck (7), the core
impacts are transmitted to the subsurface device (9) and the dogs (16).
through the fishing neck (1), the core nut (5), the As soon as the pin (3) is sheared (Fig. 28), the
fishing neck (7), and the core (9). This will not cylinder spring (12) lifts and holds the fishing
effect the shear pin (3). neck (1) the top sub (10), the cylinder (11) the
Normally upward pull or upward jarring impacts dog retainer (15) and the dogs (16) in their
should retrieve the subsurface device. If the uppermost position in relation to the core (9). In
subsurface device does not come free, continued this position the lower, engaging ends of the
upward jarring impacts will be required to shear dogs (16) are adjacent to the reduced diameter of
the pin (3) to allow the GR pulling tool to the core (9). This allows the dogs (16) to move
release from the subsurface device. The upward inwardly against the core and to release from the
2 Slickline
fishing neck of the subsurface device. The

wireline tool string and the pulling tool can now
be retrieved to the surface.
Note: (Fig. 29) To release the GR pulling tool
from a subsurface device that has been
retrieved to the surface, allow the
cylinder (12) of the pulling tool to rest on
the fishing neck of the subsurface device.
Then, grasp the dog retainer (16) and lift
it and the dogs (17) against the force of
the dog spring (15). This allows the dogs
(17) to retract against the smaller
diameter of the core (9) so that the GR
tool may be lifted out of the fishing neck
of the retrieved subsurface device.
PULLING
TOOL
LOCK
MANDREL
Fig. 29
GR Pulling Tool GR Pulling Tool

Pinned Sheared
Fig. 27 Fig. 28
2 Slickline
G Series Pulling Tools Special

Features
The core of the Standard GS tool is illustrated
in. Fig. 30. There is an extended (longer) core
that may be installed in the GS pulling tool.
When this longer core is installed in the GS
pulling tool, it becomes a GSL pulling tool.
When the type GU shear up adapter is installed
on the GSL pulling tool, it becomes a GRL
pulling tool (Fig. 31).
The Type GRL pulling tool (Fig. 31) is required
to unlock and retrieve the Type DD Tubing
Bridge Plug and the Type D Collar Lock
Mandrel.
Note: The Type GRL pulling tool must not be
used to retrieve the Type D Collar Stop.
The longer core in the GRL pulling tool
will unlock the Type D Collar Stop but
will not allow the pulling tool dogs to
engage the fishing neck of the Collar
Stop.
A very limited number of the G Series pulling
tools have been manufactured with some special
feature that is different (nonstandard) from the
Standard G Series tool. The Special feature may
be nothing more than a "nonstandard" thread
size and/or thread type in the lower end of the
pulling tool core or keys (Fig. 32). This special
feature is indicated in the assembly number of
the pulling tool by use of the letter S. For
example, if the GS pulling tool has a special
feature, such as a nonstandard thread or keys, it
becomes a Type GSS pulling tool. If the Type
GU shear up adapter is installed on the GSS tool
it becomes a GRS pulling tool.
GS Pulling Tool
Fig. 30
Extended Core for Type

GS with Special D Collar Lock Mandrels
Keys GRL Pulling Tool
Fig. 32 Fig.31
3 Slickline
GR Pulling Tool Charts
GR Pulling Tools
SAP
Number
101056251 40GR12500 1.250 1.160 1.000 1.080 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 3/8-16 UNC
101056253 40GR15000 1.500 1.470 1.060 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 1/2-13 UNC
100008669 40GR17800 1.780 1.750 1.375 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
100009894 40GR18700 1.870 1.810 1.375 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
100008670 40GR21800 2.180 2.150 1.812 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC
100009893 40GR23100 2.310 2.250 1.812 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC
100008671 40GR27500 2.750 2.720 2.313 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101056259 40GR31200 3.120 3.120 2.620 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 3/8-12 UNF
101008834 40GR36800 3.688 3.620 3.120 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/8-12 UN
100008672 40GR45600 4.560 4.500 4.000 1.820 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 1/2-10 UN
101010011 40GR56210 5.625 5.560 4.750 1.780 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 3/4-10 UN
101009370 40GR58700 5.875 5.830 5.380 1.860 1 1/6-10 UNS 3.125 3 5/8-10 UNS
101056272 40GR59600 5.963 5.880 5.380 1.860 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 3 5/8-10 UNS
101056275 40GR70500 7.050 6.550 5.880 1.890 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 4-12 UN
101274124 40GR81201 8.125 8.020 7.120 2.100 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 5 1/4-8 STUB AC
101391714 40GR95000 9.500 9.265 8.370 2.000 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 6 1/2-8 STUB AC
GRL Pulling Tools

SAP
Number
101056248 40GRL18700 1.875 1.810 1.375 3.500 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC
101056249 40GRL23100 2.313 2.250 1.812 3.500 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC
NA 40GRL27500 2.750 2.720 2.313 3.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC
101056250 40GRL36800 3.688 3.620 3.120 3.020 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/8-12 UN
3 Slickline
tools have a larger pin thread connections and

JDC-TD pulling tools have smaller (turned-
Camco Pulling Tools down) maximum OD’s than the JDC pulling
tools of the same size. Even though JDC-TD
pulling tools have reduced maximum OD’s, they
require the same minimum working ID’s for
JD Series Pulling Tools pulling dog expansion as JDC pulling tools of
the same size. JDS and JDS-2 pulling tools have
The JD Series Pulling Tool (Fig. 1) is a slickline medium-length cores; however all JDS-2 pulling
service tool is designed to remove retrievable tools except the 11/2” JDS-2 have larger pin
subsurface devices, with outside fishing necks, thread connections than JDS pulling tools of the
from a well. The JD Series pulling tool is same size. The 11/2” JDS-2 features a bell skirt,
available with different core lengths, which which increases the maximum OD, in addition
permits the tool to retrieve subsurface devices to a larger pin thread connection. All JDL
with fishing necks of different length of reach. pulling tools have short cores.
The JD Series pulling tools consist of a fishing
neck with a pin thread connection on the upper
end, a D sub, spring loaded dogs, a core, a skirt,
an emergency release shear pin and two springs,
internal and external. The D sub connects
directly to the skirt instead of the core and the
core is sheared-pinned to the skirt. The dogs
that are mounted on the skirt are inserted to the
vertical openings in the skirt. The dogs are
spring-loaded and have pawls located in the
windows in the skirt. The JD Series pulling tool
can be released, if necessary, from the
retrievable device by downward jarring which
shears the pin connecting the core to the skirt
JD Series pulling tool nomenclature indicates
the series of pulling tool, the direction of the
safety shear release and the core length. A JD
Series pulling tool is a ‘jar down” to release tool.
The third letter indicates the core length; a C
indicates a long core (which accommodates a
short fishing neck), and S indicates a medium-
length core (which accommodates a medium-
length fishing neck). A third core length, L,
indicates a short core (which accommodates a
long fishing neck) has limited application. Any
other letters or numbers following the first three
letters indicate variations in one or more of the
following specifications: maximum OD, core
length, and pin thread connection.
The JD pulling tool series includes JDC, JDC-1,
JDC-2, JDC-TD, JDS, JDS-2 AND JDL pulling
tools. JDC, JDC-1, JDC-2 and JDC-TD pulling
Pinned Sheared
tools have longer cores; however, JDC-1 pulling JD Pulling Tool
tools have slightly longer cores, JDC-2 pulling Fig.1
3 Slickline
JD Series Pulling Tool Operation 5. Remove the slickline tool string and
subsurface device from the well.
The JD Series pulling tool is run into the well
using standard slickline techniques. When the
Aborting the Pulling Operation
pulling tool contacts the fishing neck of the
subsurface device, the spring loaded dogs move
The JD Series pulling tool can be released from
up and expand over the fishing neck. Then the
the subsurface device, without pulling the
external spring forces the dogs downward to
device, by downward jarring. Downward jarring
latch under and around the fishing neck (Fig. 2).
exerts force against the shear pin, which attaches
Upward jarring releases the subsurface device
the core to the skirt. When the pin shears, the
from the well.
heavier core spring overcomes the resistance of
the lighter dog spring, the core to move
upwards. As the core moves upward, the lower
OPERATION
shoulder of the core engages the base of the
pawls, pushing the pawls upward. As the pawls
move upward, they, in turn, pull the dogs
upward. When the dogs move upward along the
inclined surface of the vertical openings in the
skirt, the dogs move outward, releasing the dogs
from the fishing neck of the subsurface device.
The pulling tool is now free to retrieve to the
surface
Latched
Engaging
Shouldering
Fig. 2 Releasing the Pulling Tool at the
Surface
Slickline Pulling Operations To release the pulling tool from the subsurface
device at the surface, grasp the dogs in the area
1. Ensure that the JD Series pulling tool is fully of the pawls. Pull the dogs toward the upper end
assembled and in proper working order. . of the tool, compressing the dog spring. As the
This includes checking to make sure the dogs are pulled upward, they will move outward,
shear pin has not been sheared. Also it is releasing the dogs from the fishing neck of the
important to make sure that the pulling tool subsurface device. The subsurface device can
has the correct core or reach. Make up the now be removed from the pulling tool.
pulling tool onto the slickline tool string
2. Equalize pressure above and below the
subsurface device. This may be
accomplished by installing an equalizing
prong into the core of the pulling tool.
3. Run the tool string into the well until the
pulling tool latches onto the fishing neck of
the subsurface device. The approximate
depth of the subsurface device is known
from well records.
4. Jar upward to release the subsurface device
from the well. There should be an increase
in the tool string weight indicating that the
device has been released.
3 Slickline
The JU Series pulling tools consist of a fishing

JU Series Pulling Tools end, a U sub, spring loaded dogs, a core, a skirt,
an emergency release shear pin and two springs,
The JU Series Pulling Tool (Fig. 3) is a slickline internal and external. The U sub connects
service tool is designed to remove retrievable directly to the core instead of the skirt and the
subsurface devices, with outside fishing necks, core is sheared-pinned to the skirt. The dogs
from a well. The JU Series pulling tool is that are mounted on the skirt are inserted to the
available with different core lengths, which vertical openings in the skirt. The dogs are
permits the tool to retrieve subsurface devices spring-loaded and have pawls located in the
with fishing necks of different length of reach. windows in the skirt. The JU Series pulling tool
can be released, if necessary, from the
retrievable device by upward jarring which
shears the pin connecting the core to the skirt
JU Series pulling tool nomenclature indicates
the series of pulling tool, the direction of the
safety shear release and the core length (Fig. 4).
A JU Series pulling tool is a ‘jar up” to release
tool. The third letter indicates the core length; a
C indicates a long core (which accommodates a
short fishing neck), and S indicates a medium-
length core (which accommodates a medium-
length fishing neck). A third core length, L,
indicates a short core (which accommodates a
long fishing neck) has limited application. Any
other letters or numbers following the first three
letters indicate variations in one or more of the
following specifications: maximum OD, core
length, and pin thread connection.
CORE LENGTHS
S CORE C CORE L CORE

Fig. 4
Pinned Sheared
JU Pulling Tool The JU pulling tool series includes JUC, JUC-2,
Fig. 3
JUC-U, JUC-TD, JUS, JUS-2 and JUL pulling
3 Slickline
tools. JUC, JUC-2, JUC-U and JUC-TD pulling Upward pull releases the subsurface device from
tools have longer cores; however, JDC-2 pulling the well.
tools have a larger pin thread connections, JUC-
U pulling tools have slightly smaller maximum
OD’s, and JUC-TD pulling tools have smaller
Slickline Pulling Operations
(turned-down) maximum OD’s than the JDC
1. Ensure that the JU Series pulling tool is fully
pulling tools of the same size. Even though
assembled and in proper working order.
JUC-U and JDC-TD pulling tools (Fig. 5) have
This includes checking to make sure the
reduced maximum OD’s, they require the same
shear pin has not been sheared. Also it is
minimum working ID’s for pulling dog
important to make sure that the pulling tool
expansion as JUC pulling tools of the same size.
has the correct core or reach. Make up the
Also, the 2” JUC-2 features a bell skirt (Fig. 6),
pulling tool onto the slickline tool string.
which increases the maximum OD, in addition
to a larger pin thread connection. JUS and JUS- 2. Equalize pressure above and below the
2 pulling tools have medium-length cores; subsurface device. This may be
however all JUS-2 pulling have larger pin thread accomplished by installing an equalizing
connections than JUS pulling tools of the same prong into the core of the pulling tool.
size. All JUL pulling tools have short cores. 3. Run the tool string into the well until the
pulling tool latches onto the fishing neck of
the subsurface device. The approximate
SKIRT OPTIONS depth of the subsurface device is known
from well records.
4. Jar downward to unlock or loosen the
subsurface device. Upward pull will release
the device from the well. There should be
an increase in the tool string weight
indicating that the device has been released.
5. Remove the slickline tool string and
subsurface device from the well.
Aborting the Pulling Operation
The JU Series pulling tool can be released from

the subsurface device, without pulling the
Turned Down device, by upward jarring. Upward jarring
Fig. 5 exerts force against the shear pin, which attaches
the core to the skirt. When the pin shears the
heavier core spring overcomes the resistance of
Bell
Fig. 6
the lighter dog spring causing the core to move
upwards. As the core moves upward, the lower
shoulder of the core engages the base of the
JU Series Pulling Tool Operation pawls, pushing the pawls upward. As the pawls
move upward, they, in turn, pull the dogs
The JU Series pulling tool is run into the well upward. When the dogs move upward along the
using standard slickline techniques. When the inclined surface of the vertical openings in the
pulling tool contacts the fishing neck of the skirt, the dogs move outward, releasing the dogs
subsurface device, the spring loaded dogs move from the fishing neck of the subsurface device.
up and expand over the fishing neck. Then the The pulling tool is now free to retrieve to the
external spring forces the dogs downward to surface
latch under and around the fishing neck.
3 Slickline
Releasing the Pulling Tool at the

Surface
To release the pulling tool from the subsurface

device at the surface, grasp the dogs in the area
of the pawls. Pull the dogs toward the upper end
of the tool, compressing the dog spring. As the
dogs are pulled upward, they will move outward,
releasing the dogs from the fishing neck of the
subsurface device. The subsurface device can
now be removed from the pulling tool.
PRS Series Pulling Tools

The PRS Series pulling tools are slickline
service tools used to retrieve subsurface devices
that have internal fishing necks from a well.
These devices include pack-offs, collar locks
nipple stops and large bore no-go type locks
The PRS Series pulling tools consist of a fishing
end, and inner mandrel, a collet, a collet core, a
collet spring, a release shear pin and a core
spring to tools through 3-½” or a ratchet
assembly for tools large than 3-½”.
The PRS pulling tool series includes PRS (Fig.
7), PRS-2 (Fig.8) and PRS-3 pulling tools. PRS
pulling tools require downward jarring for safety
shear release, while PRS-2 tools feature a
reversible safety shear release. PRS-3 pulling
tools, which also feature reversible safety shear
release, are specifically designed to retrieve
Halliburton Type D Locks
PRS Series Pulling Tool Operation
The PRS pulling tool is run into the well using

standard slickline techniques. When the pulling
tool contacts the fishing neck of the subsurface
device, the collet spring is compressed. Tool
string weight and inertia allows the collet core to
continue its downward travel. The collet fingers
are deflected inward around the reduced OD of
the collet core until the collet fingers pass into
the fishing neck. The collet spring then extends
the collet over the large OD of the collet core to
securely latch into the fishing neck. The PRS
pulling tool and the device are retrieved from the PRS PRS-2
well by upward jarring on the slickline. All PRS Fig. 7 Fig. 8
3 Slickline
pulling tools have a safety shear release pin that Aborting the Pulling Operation
allows the pulling operation to be aborted
without retrieving the subsurface device. PRS The PRS-2 and PRS-3 pulling tool can be
Series pulling tools 3-½” and smaller feature a released from the subsurface device without
reversible safety shear release that is pulling the device by upward or downward
accomplished by either upward or downward jarring, depending on the position of the
jarring, depending on the core spring position. compression core spring in the spring housing.
If the core spring is located above the stop on To release the pulling tool from the device by
the inner mandrel, downward jarring is required; downward jarring, the compression core spring
if the core spring is located below the inner is located in the upper section of the spring
mandrel stop, upward jarring is required. For housing. Downward jarring shears the shear pin
PRS Series pulling tools larger than 3-½”, a in the collet housing. The shearing or the shear
safety shear release is accomplished by pin permit, the inner mandrel, with the aid of the
downward jarring only. Following downward compression core spring, to move downward.
jarring, a ratchet assembly retains the collet core As the inner mandrel travels downward, the
in the released position. collet core moves out from under the collet
Most PRS Series pulling tools are internally fingers. The collet fingers move inward onto the
threaded to receive a prong for equalizing reduced outside diameter of the collet core, at
operations. which time the pulling tool can be separated
from the device.
Slickline Pulling Operations To release the pulling tool from the device by
upward jarring, the compression core spring is
1. Ensure that the PRS Series pulling tool is located in the lower section of the spring
fully assembled and in proper working housing. Upward jarring shears the shear pin in
order. This includes checking to make sure the collet housing. The shearing of the shear pin
the shear pin has not been sheared. Also it permits the inner mandrel, with the aid of the
is important to make sure that the pulling compression core spring, to move upward. As
tool has the correct equalizing prong. Make the inner mandrel travels upward, the collet core
up the pulling tool onto the slickline tool moves up into the inside diameter of the collet
string. fingers. The upward movement of the collet
core permits the collet fingers to deflect inward
2. Run the tool string into the well until the
when the fingers contact the restricted diameter
collet fingers of the pulling tool lock into the
of the internal fishing neck of the subsurface
locking recess of the internal fishing neck of
device, releasing the pulling tool from the
the retrievable subsurface device.
device.
3. Jar upward on the slickline.
The 4-½”, 5-½” or 6” PRS pulling tool can be
Note: If the subsurface device does not released from the subsurface device without
dislodge from the well, the PRS pulling tool pulling the device by downward jarring.
can be disengaged from the device and Downward jarring brings the collet housing of
recovered to the surface with downward the pulling tool in contact with the top of the
jarring. The PRS-2 and PRS-3 pulling tool subsurface device, causing the shear pin holding
can be released from the device with upward the spring housing and inner mandrel to shear.
or downward jarring, depending on the Continued downward jarring moves the inner
compression core spring in the spring mandrel downward, engaging the buttress treads
housing. in the inner mandrel with the buttress threads in
4. Retrieve the slickline tool string with the the ratchet sleeve. The ratchet sleeve holds the
subsurface device and closed the master inner mandrel in a downward position. As the
valve after the tool string is in the lubricator. inner mandrel travels downward, the collet core
5. Bleed pressure off of the lubricator, break moves out from under the collet fingers. The
quick union and remove the tools. collet fingers move inward onto the reduced
3 Slickline
outside diameter of the collet core, at which time

the pulling tool can be separated from the
device. Redress the pulling tool each time a
pulling operation is aborted.
Releasing the Pulling Tool at the

Surface
1. To release the pulling tool from the

subsurface device, place a pin punch or rod
of the appropriate size in the hole of the
collet.
2. Retract the collet against the collet spring.
3. Rotate the punch or rod in the
circumferential slot in the collet housing.
4. Separate the pulling tool from the device.
3 Slickline
Shear Pin Nomographs
Those nomographs give the theoretical breaking

force necessary to shear pins up to one inch OD,
or metal areas up to 0.7 square inches.
These are representative samples only, and were Sleeve
tested under good conditions. The edges of the
holes in the fixture were sharp, with 0.0005 Core
clearance on each side of the core. The pins fit Pin
Pin
very snugly in the holes. Any condition other Sheare
than these would give different results.
To calculate the breaking force for round pins in
a fixture such as this draw a straight line from S
(Ultimate Material Shear Strength – psi) to D
(Pin Diameter – Inches) on the graph. Where It is very difficult to produce pure shear in
the line crosses P (Breaking Force – Pounds), metals. However, this condition can be
read pounds. If the pin extends through the core approached if both cutting edges are sharp and
to both outside edges of the sleeve, merely move in the same plane, with very little
double P for double shear. clearance between each other. One example of
There are several factors involved which will this is a close fitting core and cylinder fixture
increase the actual breaking force. Some of with a hole drilled radially through both to
these are: receive a pin slightly smaller in size than the
hole. Either the core or the cylinder is fixed and
1. Cutting edges of holes in the core the other moves axially to shear the pi.
and cylinder are rounded or dull.
2. Holes in the core or cylinder larger Actual Shear
than the shear pin.
3. Increase clearance between the core
and cylinder.
If the pin diameter is large in relation to the core
diameter, it would be best to calculate the actual
area sheared, rather than using the pin diameter
Sleeve
scale.
For edge shear pins (Fig. 2) the actual area in the
shear would have to be found and used on the A
scale (cross-sectional area – square inches). Core
Several material of different sizes of round rod Pin
Pin
were sheared in double in a fixture similar to Sheared
Fig. 1. The results are listed on the following

page in Ultimate Shear Strength.
3 Slickline
ULTIMATE SHEAR
MATERIAL TYPE STRENGTH
Yellow Brass ½ Hard Rockwell B 70 40,500 psi
Aluminum 2024 – T4 41,000 psi
Navel Brass Tobin ¼ Hard Rockwell B 80 43,000 psi

Bronze
Mild Steel 1018 58,000 psi
Low Fuming Bronze RCUZN-C Rockwell B 82 58,000 psi
Low Fuming Bronze RCUZN-C Rockwell B 80 60,000 psi
Drill Rod Oil Hardened, Polished, 81,000 psi

Annealed, Rockwell C 10
4 Slickline
d A P S
1.0 40,000 50,000
0.9
7/8
0.8 0.5
0.7 P=AS=[(πd²)/4]xS
40,000
P = BREAKING FORCE – POUNDS
0.6 10,000
9/16 A = AREA – SQUARE INCHES
d = DIAMETER – INCHES
ULTIMATE MATERIAL SHEAR STRENGTH - PSI

S = ULTIMATE SHEAR STRENGTH
5,000 - PSI
7/16
0.4
3/8 30,000
0.1
5/16
0.3
CROSS SECTIONAL AREA – SQUARE INCHES
1/4
1,000.
BREAKING FORCE - POUNDS
0.2
PIN DIAMETER - INCHES
3/16
500 KEY 20,000
5/32
dAP S
1/8
2 3
0.01
0.1 1
3/32 100 15,000
0.09
0.08
5/64
0.07 50
1/16
0.06
0.05
3/64
0.04 10,000
0.001 10
9,000
1/32
0.03
5
8,000
0.02 7,000
BREAKING STRENGTH OF SHEAR PINS
ULTIMATE MATERIAL SHEAR
STRENGTH 5,000 TO 50,000 P.S.I
1/64 COPYRIGHT 1958 PRINTED IN USA F.L. RHOADES
1.0 6,000
0.0001 0.5
0.01 5,000
4 Slickline
d A P S
1.0 150,000 200,000
0.9
7/8 100,000
0.8 0.5
3/4
0.7 P=AS=[(πd²)/4]xS
5/8 50,000
P = BREAKING FORCE – POUNDS
0.6 150,000
9/16 A = AREA – SQUARE INCHES
d = DIAMETER – INCHES
ULTIMATE MATERIAL SHEAR STRENGTH - PSI

1/2 0.5
S = ULTIMATE SHEAR STRENGTH
- PSI
7/16
0.4
3/8
0.1 10,000
5/16
0.3
5,000. 100,000
CROSS SECTIONAL AREA – SQUARE INCHES
1/4
BREAKING FORCE - POUNDS
90,000
0.2
PIN DIAMETER - INCHES
3/16
KEY 80,000
5/32
dAP S
1,000
1/8 70,000
2 3
0.01
500
0.1 1
3/32 60,000
0.09
0.08
5/64
0.07
1/16 50,000
0.06
100
0.05
3/64
50 40,000
0.04
0.001
1/32
0.03
30,000
10
0.02
BREAKING STRENGTH OF SHEAR PINS
5 ULTIMATE MATERIAL SHEAR

STRENGTH 5,000 TO 50,000 P.S.I
1/64 COPYRIGHT 1958 PRINTED IN USA F.L. RHOADES
0.0001
0.01 1.5 20,000
4 Slickline
RB Parts List
RB Pulling Tool Parts List

Core Shear Pin Dog Spring
Material Cylinder Dog Spring Dog Core Sleeve
Size Fish Neck Spring Cap Washer
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101056591 101056727 101078594 101056730 101056731 101078596 101056732 101056733 101056729
1.00 NA
40RB12 40R79 90C157 40R81 40R83 90C158 40R84 40R85 40R80
120057558 120057644 120060074 120057646 120057647 120003269 101056724 101056725 120057645
1.25 NA
40RB11 40R71 90C1054 40R73 40R75 90C155 40R76 40R77 40R72
101056590 101056726 101078588 101056720 101056721 101078590 101056722 101056723 101056719
1.25 NA
40RB10 40R78 90C152 40R66 40R68 90C153 40R69 40R70 40R65
101056592 101056736 101078512 101056735 101012256 101078120 100008715 100008717 100008712
1.50 NA
40RB14 40R92 90CN49 40R91 40R89 90CN222 40S27 40S44 40R93
101056602 101056718 101078734 101056694 101056711 101078735 100008711 101056712 101056713
1.50 NA
40RB9 40R64 90C49 40R26 40R29 90C50 40R27 40R30 40R31
101056595 101056736 101078512 101056735 101056647 101078120 100008715 100008717 100008712
1.50 NA
40RB21 40R92 90CN49 40R91 40R130 90CN222 40S27 40S44 40R93
101056601 100008708 101078642 101056681 100005943 101015272 101056714 101056717 101056716 101056645
2.00
40RB8 40R111 90C23 40R2 40R100 90C273 40R6 40R63 40R62 40R128
100005947 100008708 101078209 101056681 100005943 100014516 101056714 100005941 100014541 100008710
2.00
40RB17 40R111 90CN270 40R2 40R100 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40R114 40R115
120057561 100008708 101078209 101056681 100005943 100014516 101056714 120021391 120021390 100008710
2.00
40RB29 40R111 90CN270 40R2 40R100 90CN273 40R6 40R188 40R187 40R115
100005948 100008707 101013642 101056728 101056619 101015266 101056637 100005942 101056626 101056633
2.50
40RB18 40R107 90CN271 40R8 40R101 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40R108 40R116
101056600 101056635 101078218 101056622 101056705 101010200 101056690 101056706 101015086
3.50 NA
40RB58 40R118 90CN272 40R103 40R273 90CN1064 40R23 40R274 40R105
101015084 101056695 101078218 101056622 101056620 101010200 101056690 101009377 101015086 101056697
3.50
40RB56 40R260 90CN272 40R103 40R102 90CN1064 40R23 40R22 40R105 40R261
101056598 101056695 101078218 101056622 101056660 101010200 101056707 101010017 101056680 101056697
3.50
40RB55 40R260 90CN272 40R103 40R155 90CN1064 40R276 40R156 40R193 40R261
101010012 101056636 101078705 101056639 101056640 101015273 101056641 101012254 101056646
4.00 NA
40RB20 40R119 90C342 40R121 40R122 90C343 40R123 40R124 40R129
101015085 101056708 101078705 101056639 101056640 101015273 101056641 101012254 101056646
4.00 NA
40RB59 40R277 90C342 40R121 40R122 90C343 40R123 40R124 40R129
4 Slickline
RS Parts List
RS Pulling Tool Parts List

Core Shear Pin Dog Spring
Material Cylinder Dog Spring Dog Core Sleeve
Size Fish Neck Spring Cap Washer
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101056610 101056649 101078509 101056650 101056652 101078510 101056654 101056653 101056651 101056655
1.00
40RS12 40R136 90CN470 40R137 40R139 90CN471 40R141 40R140 40R138 40R142
101056608 101056726 101078588 101056720 101056721 101078590 101056722 101056723 101056644
1.25 NA
40RS10 40R78 90C152 40R66 40R68 90C153 40R69 40R70 40R127
120057589 101056736 101078512 101056735 101012256 101078120 100008715 100008717 101056734
1.50 NA
40RS27 40R92 90CN49 40R91 40R89 90CN222 40S27 40S44 40R90
101012253 101056736 101078512 101056735 101012256 101078120 100008715 100008717 101056734
1.50 NA
40RS5 40R92 90CN49 40R91 40R89 90CN222 40S27 40S44 40R90
101056609 101056736 101078734 101056735 101056647 101078635 100008715 100008717 101056734
1.90 NA
40RS11 40R92 90C49 40R91 40R130 90C222 40S27 40S44 40R90
101056611 101056736 101078734 101056735 101056657 101078635 100008715 101056658 101056734
1.75 NA
40RS14 40R92 90C49 40R91 40R149 90C222 40S27 40R150 40R90
100008706 100008708 101078209 101056681 100005943 100014516 101056714 100005941 100008709 100008710
2.00
40RS6 40R111 90CN270 40R2 40R100 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40R112 40R115
101009376 100008707 101013642 101056728 101056619 101015266 101056637 100005942 101056627 101056633
2.50
40RS7 40R107 90CN271 40R8 40R101 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40R109 40R116
101009375 101056695 101078218 101056622 101056620 101010200 101056690 101009377 101015087 101056697
3.50
40RS32 40R260 90CN272 40R103 40R102 90CN1064 40R23 40R22 40R106 40R261
101056614 101056695 101078218 101056622 101056660 101010200 101056707 101010017 101056659 101056697
4.00
40RS33 40R260 90CN272 40R103 40R155 90CN1064 40R276 40R156 40R154 40R261
120057587 101056636 101078462 101056639 101056640 100009009 101056641 101012254 101056638
4.00 NA
40RS22 40R119 90CN342 40R121 40R122 90CN343 40R123 40R124 40R120
101010016 101056636 101078462 101056639 101056640 100009009 101056641 101012254 101056638
4.00 NA
40RS9 40R119 90CN342 40R121 40R122 90CN343 40R123 40R124 40R120
120057585 120057600 120060132 120057606 120057605 101078754 120057604 120057603 120057607
7.00 NA
40RS17 40R157 90C696 40R163 40R162 90C695 40R161 40R160 40R164
1 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 Slickline
RJ Parts List
RJ Pulling Tool Parts List
Dog
Core Shear Pin Dog
Material Fish Neck Cylinder Spring Dog Core Sleeve
Size Spring Cap Spring
Number Washer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101010013 101056726 101078588 101056720 101056721 101078590 101056722 101056723 101056648
1.25 NA
40RJ4 40R78 90C152 40R66 40R68 90C153 40R69 40R70 40R134
101010014 101056736 101078734 101056735 101012256 101078635 100008715 100008717 101056656
1.50 NA
40RJ5 40R92 90C49 40R91 40R89 90C222 40S27 40S44 40R143
120057584 101056736 101078734 101056735 101056657 101078635 100008715 101056658 101056656
1.75 NA
40RJ10 40R92 90C49 40R91 40R149 90C222 40S27 40R150 40R143
101056603 100008708 101078209 101056681 100005943 100014516 101056714 100005941 101056631 100008710
2.00
40RJ1 40R111 90CN270 40R2 40R100 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40R113 40R115
101056606 100008707 101013642 101056728 101056619 101015266 101056637 100005942 101056628 101056633
2.50
40RJ2 40R107 90CN271 40R8 40R101 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40R110 40R116
101056605 101056695 101078218 101056622 101056620 101010200 101056690 101009377 101017715 101056697
3.00
40RJ11 40R260 90CN272 40R103 40R102 90CN1064 40R23 40R22 40R135 40R261
101010015 101056636 101078705 101056639 101056640 101015273 101056641 101012254 101056683
4.00 NA
40RJ6 40R119 90C342 40R121 40R122 90C343 40R123 40R124 40R205
RQ Parts List
RQ Pulling Tool Parts List (for Retrieving Tools w/Q Conn.)

Dog
Core Shear Pin Dog
Material Fish Neck Cylinder Spring Dog Core Sleeve
Size Spring Cap Spring
Number Washer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101314290 101056736 101078734 101056735 101056657 101078635 100008715 101056658 101314289
1.75 NA
40RQ3 40R92 90C49 40R91 40R149 90C222 40S27 40R150 40Q4
101314365 100008708 101078209 101056681 100005943 100014516 101056714 100005941 101314364 100008710
2.00
40RQ1 40R111 90CN270 40R2 40R100 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40Q2 40R115
101314355 100008707 101013642 101056728 101056619 101015266 101056637 100005942 101314358 101056633
2.50
40RQ2 40R107 90CN271 40R8 40R101 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40Q3 40R116
101336694 101056695 101078218 101056622 101336697 101010200 101056690 101336695 101017715 101056697
3.00
40RQ4 40R260 90CN272 40R103 40Q6 90CN1064 40R23 40Q7 40R135 40R261
4 Slickline
SB Parts List
40SB Pulling Tool Parts List

Dog
Pin Core Dog
Material Fish Neck Cylinder Core Nut Spring Dog Core
Size Retainer Spring Spring
Number Washer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101056760 10105679 101056792 101056793 101056795 101078097 101078510 101056654 101056686 101056796
1.00
40SB25 40S117 40S118 40S119 40S120 90CN1941 90CN471 40R141 40R220 40S121
101056753 101056887 101056888 101056885 101056886 101078102 101078590 101056722 101056723 101056889
1.25
40SB14 40S95 40S96 40S92 40S94 90CN1995 90C153 40R69 40R70 40S97
120057658 101056887 101056888 101056885 101056886 101078102 101078590 101056722 101056723 120057692
1.25
40SB15 40S95 40S96 40S92 40S94 90CN1995 90C153 40R69 40R70 40S98
101056763 101056866 101056858 101056860 101056859 100009003 101078120 100008715 100014556 101056863
1.50
40SB3 40S42 40S25 40S28 40S26 90CN221 90CN222 40S27 40S29 40S30
100008713 101056866 101056858 101056860 101056859 100009003 101078120 100008715 100014556 100008716
1.50
40SB6 40S42 40S25 40S28 40S26 90CN221 90CN222 40S27 40S29 40S43
101056768 101056864 101056858 101056874 101056859 101078634 101078635 100008715 100008717 100008718
1.90
40SB8 40S36 40S25 40S61 40S26 90C221 90C222 40S27 40S44 40S59
101009378 100005952 100014557 100005944 101056861 101078055 100014516 101056714 100005941 100008714
2.00
40SB1 41S1 40S4 40S12 40S3 90CN142 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40S13
120057664 100005952 100014557 120057682 101056861 101078055 100014516 101056714 100005941 100008714
2.00
40SB31 41S1 40S4 40S173 40S3 90CN142 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40S13
101056755 100005952 100014557 101056787 101056861 101078055 101009581 100008715 101009384 101009383
2.38
40SB19 41S1 40S4 40S106 40S3 90CN142 90C218 40S27 40S105 40S104
13629 101056816 101056821 100014553 101056826 101078080 101015266 101056637 100005942 101016718
2.50
40SB2 40S14 40S15 40S17 40S16 90CN174 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40S18
101056754 101056785 101056821 101009382 101056826 101015269 101015266 101056637 100005942 101016718
2.50
40SB17 40S101 40S15 40S17 40S16 90C174 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40S18
101009379 101056869 101056870 101056871 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056690 101009377 101015090
3.00
40SB13 40S50 40S51 40S52 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40R23 40R22 40S55
120057665 120057684 120057683 120057685 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056824 101056823 101015090
3.00
40SB32 40S181 40S180 40S182 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40S157 40S156 40S55
101056765 101056849 101056851 101056850 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056824 101056706 101015090
3.00
40SB34 40S192 40S194 40S193 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40S157 40R274 40S55
101009380 101056869 101056870 101056871 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056690 101009377 101015090
3.00
40SB7 40S50 40S51 40S52 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40R23 40R22 40S55
101009381 101056877 101056876 101056878 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056824 101056823 101015090
3.00
40SB9 40S71 40S70 40S72 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40S157 40S156 40S55
101010019 101056869 101056870 101010021 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056707 101010017 101056882
3.50
40SB11 40S50 40S51 40S65 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40R276 40R156 40S87
101010018 101056869 101056870 101014711 101009385 101078034 101015273 101056641 101012254 101056880
4.00
40SB10 40S50 40S51 40S78 40S53 90CN119 90C343 40R123 40R124 40S79
120041332 101056869 101056870 101014711 101009385 101078034 100009009 101056641 101012254 101056880
4.00
40SB27 40S50 40S51 40S78 40S53 90CN119 90CN343 40R123 40R124 40S79
101015088 101056853 101056870 101014711 101009385 101078034 101015273 101056641 101012254 101056880
4.00
40SB39 40S198 40S51 40S78 40S53 90CN119 90C343 40R123 40R124 40S79
101056741 101056866 101056858 101056836 101056859 100009003 101078120 100008715 101056837 101056863
1.50
40SBH7 40S42 40S25 40S174 40S26 90CN221 90CN222 40S27 40S175 40S30
101056738 100005952 100014557 101056820 101056861 101078055 100014516 101056714 101056819 100008714
2.38
40SBH18 41S1 40S4 40S143 40S3 90CN142 90CN273 40R6 40S142 40S13
101056739 101056816 101056821 101056789 101056826 101078080 101015266 101056637 100005942 101016718
2.88
40SBH24 40S14 40S15 40S115 40S16 90CN174 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40S18
4 Slickline
SS Parts List
40SS Pulling Tool Parts List

Dog
Pin Core Dog
Material Fish Neck Cylinder Core Nut Spring Dog Core
Number Washer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101056781 101056866 101056858 101056867 101056859 101078634 101078635 100008715 100008717 101056863
1.50
40SS3 40S42 40S25 40S45 40S26 90C221 90C222 40S27 40S44 40S30
120057668 101056866 101056858 101056835 101056859 101078634 101078635 100008715 100008717 101056863
1.63
40SS12 40S42 40S25 40S172 40S26 90C221 90C222 40S27 40S44 40S30
101015701 100005952 100014557 100005944 101056861 101078055 100014516 101056714 100005941 101016719
2.00
40SS1 41S1 40S4 40S12 40S3 90CN142 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40S35
13630 101056816 101056821 100014553 101056826 101078080 101015266 101056637 100005942 101015089
2.50
40SS2 40S14 40S15 40S17 40S16 90CN174 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40S34
13641 101056869 101056870 101056871 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056690 101009377 101056872
3.00
40SS4 40S50 40S51 40S52 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40R23 40R22 40S54
101056782 101056877 101056876 101056878 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056690 101056823 101056879
3.00
40SS6 40S71 40S70 40S72 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40R23 40S156 40S73
120057669 101056869 101056870 101010021 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056707 101010017 120057690
3.50
40SS5 40S50 40S51 40S65 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40R276 40R156 40S64
101056783 101056869 101056870 101014711 101009385 101078034 100009009 101056641 101012254 101056797
4.00
40SS9 40S50 40S51 40S78 40S53 90CN119 90CN343 40R123 40R124 40S122
120057667 120057672 120057673 120057675 120057674 120060103 101078754 120057604 120057603 120057676
7.00
40SS11 40S151 40S152 40S154 40S153 90C1918 90C695 40R161 40R160 40S155
101056777 101056840 101056841 101056838 101056859 100009003 101078120 100008715 101056839 101056863
1.50
40SSH1 40S178 40S179 40S176 40S26 90CN221 90CN222 40S27 40S177 40S30
1 2 4 5 3 6 7 8 9
SQ Parts List
40SQ Pulling Tool Parts List (for Retrieving Tools with Q Conn.)
Dog
Pin Core Dog
Fish Neck Cylinder Core Nut Spring Dog Core
Material Spring Spring
Size Retainer Washer
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101313012 101056866 101056858 101313013 101056859 101078634 101078635 100008715 101313014 100008716
1.50
40SQ2 40S42 40S25 40S199 40S26 90C221 90C222 40S27 40S200 40S43
101313016 100005952 100014557 100005944 101056861 101078055 100014516 101056714 100005941 101313015
2.00
40SQ1 41S1 40S4 40S12 40S3 90CN142 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40Q1
101314292 101056816 101056821 100014553 101056826 101078080 101015266 101056637 100005942 101314291
2.50
40SQ3 40S14 40S15 40S17 40S16 90CN174 90CN274 40R12 40R99 40Q5
101337236 101056869 101056870 101337237 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056690 101336695 101056812
3.00
40SQ4 40S50 40S51 40Q9 40S53 90CN119 90CN1064 40R23 40Q7 40S136
4 Slickline
SSJ Parts List
40SSJ Pulling Tool Parts List

Double Dog
Shear Pin Core Dog Spring
Material Adapter Cylinder Core Nut Washer Dog Core
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101462460 101462461 101056858 101056867 101056859 100009003 101078120 100008715 100008717 100008716
1.50 40SO13 40S25 40S45 40S26 90CN222 40S27 40S44 40S43
40SSJ4 90CN221
101056778 101056774 100014557 100005944 101056861 101078055 100014516 101056714 100005941 101056799
2.00
40SSJ1 40SO10 40S4 40S12 40S3 90CN142 90CN273 40R6 40R98 40S124
13564 101056775 101056821 100014553 101056826 101078080 101015266 101056637 100005942 101056811
2.50
13565 101056776 101056870 101056871 101009385 101078034 101015267 101056690 101009377 101056812
3.00
101012257 101056776 101056870 101010021 101009385 101078034 101010200 101056707 101010017 101056822
3.50
40SO Double Shear Adapter

Pin
Core Lock Ring Lock
Material Top Sub Housing Retainer Spring
Size Extension Segments Sleev
Number Ring
e
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
101462461 100008699 101462463 101462467 101462464 101462465 101078500 101462466

1.50 40G90 40S144 40S148 40S145 90CN35 40S147
40SO13 40S146
101056774 101056425 101056802 101056803 101056800 101056801 101078555 101056804
2.00
40SO10 40G42 40S127 40S128 40S125 40S126 90CN94 40S129
101056775 101056432 101056808 101056810 101056807 101056806 101078103 101056809
2.50
40SO11 40G51 40S132 40S134 40S131 40S130 90CN20 40S133
101056776 3.00/ 100008694 101056818 101056817 101056813 101056815 101078506 101056814
40SO12 3.50 40G53 40S141 40S140 40S137 40S139 90CN429 40S138
1 2 4 5 3 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 Slickline
R & S Releasing Tool
R & S Series Releasing Tools

SAP Assembly
Used With
Number Number
100005949 40RB23 1 1/4" R or S PT
100008703 40RB24 1 1/2"-1 3/4" 2" R or S PT
100008704 40RB25 2 1/2" R or S PT
100008705 40RB26 3" R or S PT
101056596 40RB27 4" R or S PT
101056597 40RB28 3 1/2" R or S PT
101056599 40RB57 1 1/2" R or S PT Heavy Duty
120057564 40RB35 1" R or S PT
R & S Pinning Tool
R & S Series Pinning Tools

SAP Assembly
Used With
Number Number
101095944 83MO10 2" & 2 1/2" R or S PT
120021216 83MO108 3" & 3 1/2" R or S PT
101638966 83MO131 4" R or S PT
4 Slickline
GS Parts List
40GS Pulling Tool Parts List

Core Spring Dog Dog
Material Fish Neck Core Top Sub Cylinder Dog
Size Spring Retainer Spring Retainer
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101056283 101056361 101056359 101056402 101056401 101078546 101056356 101078547 101056357 101056358
1.250
40GS12500 40G140 40G139 40G314 40G313 90CN884 40G134 90CN885 40G137 40G138
101009371 100008699 101056540 100008687 100008688 100009003 100008700 100009010 100008701 100005938
1.500
40GS15000 40G90 40G91 40G306 40G309 90CN221 40G95 90CN393 40G96 40G97
101056288 101056425 101056414 100008691 100008685 101078055 100005935 101078544 100005939 100005934
1.780
40GS17800 40G42 40G370 40G382 40G245 90CN142 40G39 90CN85 40G202 40G38
100009896 101056425 101056414 101056413 100005940 101078055 100005935 101078544 100005939 100005934
1.870
40GS18700 40G42 40G370 40G369 40G312 90CN142 40G39 90CN85 40G202 40G38
101009372 101056432 101056421 101056417 100008689 101078080 101056349 101078497 100008681 101012244
2.180
40GS21800 40G51 40G379 40G375 40G310 90CN174 40G123 90CN349 40G204 40G52
100005945 101056432 101056421 101056418 101056399 101078080 101056430 101078497 100014530 101012244
2.310
40GS23100 40G51 40G379 40G376 40G311 90CN174 40G49 90CN349 40G203 40G52
13621 100008694 100008690 101056405 100008686 101078034 101056911 101078045 101056373 101015083
2.750
40GS27500 40G53 40G359 40G357 40G262 90CN119 40Y5 90CN1356 40G205 40G264
101009373 100008694 101056443 101056441 101056442 101078034 101056434 101078039 101056436 101056386
3.125
40GS31202 40G53 40G555 40G541 40G550 90CN119 40G518 90CN1265 40G526 40G267
27123 27159 27160 27161 27173 101078034 27080 101078039 27175 101056394
3.125
40GS31282 40G276 40G556 40G563 40G567 90CN119 40G519 90CN1265 40G527 40G282
100005946 100008694 101056444 101056440 101012246 101078034 101056439 101015265 101056438 101012234
3.688
40GS36804 40G53 40G557 40G539 40G546 90CN119 40G538 90CN1260 40G535 40G261
120057503 100008694 101056444 101056440 101012246 101078034 101056439 101015265 101056438 120057530
3.688
40GS36805 40G53 40G557 40G539 40G546 90CN119 40G538 90CN1260 40G535 40G410
100009643 101056524 101056444 101056440 101012246 101078034 101056439 101015265 101056438 101012234
3.688
40GS36807 40G756 40G557 40G539 40G546 90CN119 40G538 90CN1260 40G535 40G261
101056306 101012243 101056490 101056492 101056491 100090911 101056493 100090910 101056494 101056489
4.562
40GS45603 40G364 40G718 40G720 40G719 90CN929 40G721 90CN668 40G722 40G717
101056305 101056412 101056409 101056410 101056411 100090911 101056408 100090910 101012239 101056403
4.562
40GS45601 40G368 40G365 40G366 40G367 90CN929 40G363 90CN668 40G326 40G324
100008673 101012243 101056409 101056410 101056411 100090911 101056408 100090910 101012239 101056403
4.562
40GS45600 40G364 40G365 40G366 40G367 90CN929 40G363 90CN668 40G326 40G324
120057505 101012243 101056409 101056410 101056411 101015276 101056408 100090910 101012239 101056403
4.562
40GS45602 40G364 40G365 40G366 40G367 90C929 40G363 90CN668 40G326 40G324
101056307 101056521 101056409 101056410 101056411 100090911 101056408 100090910 101012239 101056403
4.562
40GS45604 40G753 40G365 40G366 40G367 90CN929 40G363 90CN668 40G326 40G324
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 Slickline
GSL Parts List
40GSL Pulling Tool Parts List

Core Spring Dog Dog
Material Fish Neck Core Top Sub Cylinder Dog
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101056276 101056425 101056416 101056413 100005940 101078055 100005935 101078544 100005939 100005934
1.870
40GSL18700 40G42 40G372 40G369 40G312 90CN142 40G39 90CN85 40G202 40G38
101015697 101056432 101056423 101056418 101056399 101078080 101056430 101078497 100014530 101012244
2.310
40GSL23100 40G51 40G381 40G376 40G311 90CN174 40G49 90CN349 40G203 40G52
101015698 100008694 101056406 101056405 100008686 101078034 101056911 101078045 101056373 101015083
2.750
40GSL27500 40G53 40G361 40G357 40G262 90CN119 40Y5 90CN1356 40G205 40G264
101056277 100008694 101056446 101056440 101012246 101078034 101056439 101015265 101056438 101012234
3.688
40GSL36802 40G53 40G572 40G539 40G546 90CN119 40G538 90CN1260 40G535 40G261
5 Slickline
GS Pulling Tool Parts
40GS Pulling Tool Parts List (Large Sizes)

Pin
Core Spring Dog Dog
Material Fish Neck Nut Core Top Sub Retainer Cylinder Dog
Number Ring
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
101455663 101056456 101056452 101056447 101455664 101455666 101455665 101078122 10105645 101078388 101056455 101012247
5.625
40GS56213 40G584 40G579 40G574 40G830 40G832 40G831 90CN2222 4 40G581 90CN3076 40G583 40G582
101008835 101056456 101056452 101056447 101056448 101056453 101056451 101078122 10105645 101078388 101056455 101012247
5.625
101369217 101369223 101056452 101056447 101056448 101056453 101056451 101078122 10105645 101078388 101056455 101012247
5.625
101012223 101056457 101012227 101012231 101012240 101012242 101012241 101078047 10101222 101078048 101012230 101012229
5.875
101012222 101012235 101012227 101012231 101012240 101012242 101012241 101078047 10101222 101078048 101012230 101012229
5.875
101009374 101012235 101012227 101012231 101056370 101056404 101056369 101078582 10101222 101078583 101012230 101012229
5.963
40GS59600 40G270 40G188 40G193 40G194 40G344 40G189 90C1361 8 40G190 90C1362 40G192 40G191
101056311 101056458 101056462 101056467 101012248 101056469 101012249 100090908 10105646 100090909 101056468 101056465
7.050
101274138 101274139 120057526 120057536 120057534 120057531 120057535 120060033 12005753 120060032 120057533 101056426
8.125
101389980 101394761 101390252 101390269 101390253 101390341 101390263 101390344 10139026 101390345 101390262 101390265
9.500
1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
52 Slickline
52 GS Pulling Tool Parts
52GS Conversion Kits Conversion Kit Parts

SAP Will Will
Old Material
Material Description Engage Engage Reach Core Thread Core Slips (4ea.)
Number
Number Min. Max.
101063863 52GS18700 CONV FSH TL KIT F/ 40GS18700 1.380 1.590 1.620 1/2-13 UNC 101063882 (52G149) 101063884 (52G150)
NA 52GS31200 CONV FSH TL KIT F/ 40GS31202 2.620 2.830 1.620 1 3/8-12 UNF 101063881 (52G147) 101063880 (52G146)
101063866 52GS36800 CONV FSH TL KIT F/ 40GS36800 3.125 3.330 1.880 1 3/4-12 UN 101063871 (52G138) 101063872 (52G139)
101063867 52GS45600 CONV FSH TL KIT F/ 40GS45600 4.000 4.190 1.820 2 1/2-10 UNS 101063878 (52G144) 101063879 (52G145)
NA 52GS58700 CONV FSH TL KIT F/ 40GS58700 5.380 5.620 1.570 3 5/8-10 UNS 52G151 52G152 (12 ea.)
GS with Special
Dogs
53 Slickline
GR Pulling Tool Components
GR Pulling Tools
SAP
Old Material Max. Will Fish GS Pulling Tool GU Adapter
Number
101056251 40GR12500 1.250 1.160 1.000 1.080 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 3/8-16 UNC 101056283 (40GS12500) 101056312 (40GU12500)
101056253 40GR15000 1.500 1.470 1.060 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.187 1/2-13 UNC 101009371 (40GS15000) 100008674 (40GU15000)
100008669 40GR17800 1.780 1.750 1.375 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC 101056288 (40GS17800) 100008675 (40GU17800)
100009894 40GR18700 1.870 1.810 1.375 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC 100009896 (40GS18700) 101056313 (40GU18700)
100008670 40GR21800 2.180 2.150 1.812 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC 101009372 (40GS21800) 101056316 (40GU21800)
100009893 40GR23100 2.310 2.250 1.812 1.620 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC 100005945 (40GS23100) 100163626 (40GU23100)
100008671 40GR27500 2.750 2.720 2.313 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC 13621 (40GS27500) 101012225 (40GU31200)
101056259 40GR31200 3.120 3.120 2.620 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 3/8-12 UNF 101009373 (40GS31202) 101012225 (40GU31200)
101008834 40GR36800 3.688 3.620 3.120 1.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/8-12 UN 100005946 (40GS36804) 101012225 (40GU31200)
100008672 40GR45600 4.560 4.500 4.000 1.820 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 1/2-10 UN 100008673 (40GS45600) 100008676 (40GU45600)
101010011 40GR56210 5.625 5.560 4.750 1.780 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 2 3/4-10 UN 101008835 (40GS56210) 101008836 (40GU56210)
101009370 40GR58700 5.875 5.830 5.380 1.860 1 1/6-10 UNS 3.125 3 5/8-10 UNS 101012222 (40GS58700) 101056331 (40GU58700)
101056272 40GR59600 5.963 5.880 5.380 1.860 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 3 5/8-10 UNS 101009374 (40GS59600) 101056332 (40GU59600)
101056275 40GR70500 7.050 6.550 5.880 1.890 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 4-12 UN 101056311 (40GS70500) 101056334 (40GU70500)
101274124 40GR81201 8.125 8.020 7.120 2.100 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 5 1/4-8 STUB AC 101274138 (40GS81201) 101274129 (40GU81201)
101391714 40GR95000 9.500 9.265 8.370 2.000 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 6 1/2-8 STUB AC 101389980 (40GS95010) 101391713 (40GU95000)
GRL Pulling Tool Components
GRL Pulling Tools

SAP GSL Pulling Tool GU Adapter
Old Material Max. Will Fish Core Thread
Material Size Reach Top Thread
Number
101056248 40GRL18700 1.875 1.810 1.375 3.500 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 1/2-13 UNC 101056276 (40GSL18700) 101056313 (40GU18700)
101056249 40GRL23100 2.313 2.250 1.812 3.500 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 5/8-11 UNC 101015697 (40GSL23100) 100163626 (40GU23100)
NA 40GRL27500 2.750 2.720 2.313 3.620 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 5/8-11 UNC 101015698 (40GSL27500) 101012225 (40GU31200)
101056250 40GRL36800 3.688 3.620 3.120 3.020 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 2 1/8-12 UN 101056277 (40GSL36802) 101012225 (40GU31200)
54 Slickline
GU Adapters
GU Adapter for GR Pulling Tools

SAP
Old Material Max Fish Bottom
Material
Number Size . Top Thread Nec Thread Where Used
Number OD k
40GR12500
101056312 40GU12500 1.250 1.160 5/8-11 UNC 1.000 5/8-11 UNC
40GR12501
100008674 40GU15000 1.500 1.470 15/16-10 UNC 1.187 15/16-10 UNS 40GR15000
100008675 40GU17800 1.780 1.750 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 15/16-10 UNS 40GR17800
40GR18700
101056313 40GU18700 1.870 1.810 15/16-10 UNS 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
40GRL18700
101056316 40GU21800 2.180 2.120 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 15/16-10 UNS 40GR21800
40GR23100
100163626 40GU23100 2.310 2.250 15/16-10 UNS 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
40GRL23100
40GR27500
40GR31200
101012225 40GU31200 3.125 2.720 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS 40GR36800
40GRL27500
40GRL36800
100008676 40GU45600 4.560 3.600 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS 40GR45600
101008836 40GU56210 5.625 5.560 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS 40GR56210
101056331 40GU58700 5.875 5.830 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS 40GR58700
101056332 40GU59600 7.000 5.880 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS 40GR59600
101056334 40GU70500 7.050 5.960 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 1 9/16-10 UNS 40GR70500
101274129 40GU81201 8.500 7.700 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 1 9/16-10 UNS 40GR81201
101391713 40GU95000 9.500 9.265 1 9/16-10 UNS 5.250 1 9/16-10 UNS 40GR95000
GU Adapter Parts List
40GU Adapter Parts List

Shear Pin Retainer
Material Fish Neck Core Nut
Size Band Pin
Number
1 2 3 4
101056312 101056355 101056352 101056351 101056354

1.250
40GU12500 40G131 40G129 40G128 40G130
100008674 101056545 100008702 100008677 100008678
1.500
40GU15000 40G98 40G99 40G100 40G101
100008675 101056375 100008684 100005936 100008698
1.780
40GU17800 40G243 40G242 40G79 40G82
101056313 101056536 100008697 100005936 100008698
1.870
40GU18700 40G81 40G80 40G79 40G82
101056316 101056347 101056346 100008680 100008698
2.180
40GU21800 40G118 40G117 40G116 40G82
100163626 101056537 101056538 100005937 100008698
2.310
40GU23100 40G84 40G85 40G86 40G82
101012225 101056343 101056344 100008679 101056345
3.125
40GU31200 40G112 40G113 40G114 40G115
101056323 101056497 101056344 101056495 101056496
3.125
40GU31201 40G726 40G114 40G724 40G725
100008676 100008693 100008683 100008682 100008692
4.560
40GU45600 40G385 40G240 40G238 40G384
55 Slickline
GU Adapter Parts List (Large Sizes)
40GU Adapter Parts List

Shear Pin Retainer Ball 1/4" Spacer
Material Fish Neck Band Pin Core Nut Nylon Sub
Size
Number
1 2 3 4 5 6
101008836 101056450 101012236 100008682 101012237 101014265 101056449
5.625
40GU56210 40G577 40G290 40G238 40G291 93B29 40G576
101056331 101012238 101012236 100008682 101012237 101014265 101012245
5.875
40GU58700 40G292 40G290 40G238 40G291 93B29 40G534
101056332 101012238 101012236 100008682 101012237 101014265 101056395
7.000
40GU59600 40G292 40G290 40G238 40G291 93B29 40G293
Socket
101056334 101056466 101056461 101056459 101056460 Screw 101056464
7.050
40GU70500 40G597 40G590 40G588 40G589 101058890 40G593
412SS440
Socket
101274129 101274132 Screw 120057540 101274135
8.500
40GU81201 40G784 100008754 40G439 40G785
410SS230
101391713 101391708 100008754 120057540 101274135 101014265 101391710
9.500
40GU95000 40G818 410SS230 40G439 40G785 93B29 40G819
56 Slickline
Project Four
1. List the pulling tools that are available to latch an external fishing neck that shear up to
release:
2. List the pulling tools that are available to latch an external fishing neck that shear down to
release:
3. What core lengths are available for the “R” Series pulling tools?
4. What core lengths are available for the “S” Series pulling tools?
5. What is the difference between the ‘BB’ and the ‘BE’ pulling tools?
6. How is the “reach” of pulling tools defined?
7. What part or parts are necessary to change a ‘RB’ pulling tool to a ‘RS’ pulling tool?
8. Describe the process used to release a “R” Series pulling tool from a subsurface device that
has become stuck in the well:
9. Describe the process used to release a “S” Series pulling tool from a subsurface device that
has become stuck in the well:
10. What is the purpose of the 40SO – Double Shear Down Adapter?
57 Slickline
11. Why should the “J” Core only be used with the Double Shear Down Adapter?
12. How do you convert a type ‘GR’ pulling tool into a type ‘GS’ pulling tool?
13. What is the difference between the type ‘GR’ and the type ‘GRL’ pulling tools?
14. The ‘GR’ pulling tool consist of two assemblies the 40GS pulling tool and the 40GU shear up
adapter, what problem could occur if the shear pin in the ‘GS’ is not removed when the ‘GR’
pulling tool is ran to retrieve a subsurface device?
15. Two features make the type ‘UO’ pulling tool unique, what are they?
a.
b.
16. What feature makes the ‘UO’ pulling tool stronger than the “R” or “S” Series of pulling
tools?
17. The Camco “JU” Series of pulling tools are comparable to the Halliburton “R” Series of
pulling tools, give the comparable “R” Series for the following Camco pulling tools;
a. JUS -
b. JUC -
c. JUL -
18. The Camco “JD” Series of pulling tools are comparable to the Halliburton “S” Series of
pulling tools, give the comparable “S” Series for the following Camco pulling tools;
a. JDL -
b. JDS -
c. JDC -
58 Slickline
Hands-On Projects
inspection and maintenance of tools and/or equipment of this Section. Tool Sizes from across 1½” -7”
(Dependant on what is used at the Individuals Location)

RB Replace Shear Pin of sheared Tool
RB Disassemble Pulling Tool, Clean and Inspect Parts
RB Assemble Pulling Tool
SB Replace Shear Pin of sheared Tool
SB Disassemble Pulling Tool, Clean and Inspect Parts
SB Assemble Pulling Tool
GR Replace Shear Pin of sheared Tool
GR Disassemble Pulling Tool, Clean and Inspect Parts
GR Assemble Pulling Tool
GS Replace Shear Pin of sheared Tool
GS Disassemble Pulling Tool, Clean and Inspect Parts
GS Assemble Pulling Tool
7”GR Replace Shear Pin of sheared Tool
7”GR Disassemble Pulling Tool, Clean and Inspect Parts
7”GR Assemble Pulling Tool
7”GS Replace Shear Pin of sheared Tool
7”GS Disassemble Pulling Tool, Clean and Inspect Parts
7”GS Assemble Pulling Tool
JDC Replace Shear Pin of sheared Tool
JDC Disassemble Pulling Tool, Clean and Inspect Parts
JDC Assemble Pulling Tool
JUC Replace Shear Pin of sheared Tool
JUC Disassemble Pulling Tool, Clean and Inspect Parts
JUC Assemble Pulling Tool
59 Slickline
SECTION 5
Tubing Set Flow Controls

Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 3
Type ‘W’ Slip Lock Mandrel .................................................................................................................... 5
Application: ............................................................................................................................................... 6
Type ‘W’ Running Tool ............................................................................................................................ 7
Running and Setting Procedure ................................................................................................................. 8
Unlocking and Pulling Procedures .......................................................................................................... 10
Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel ................................................................................................................. 12
Description ‘D’ Collar Lock .................................................................................................................... 13
D Lock Running Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 14
Pulling Procedure for the Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel ........................................................................ 17
Type M Element ...................................................................................................................................... 19
321 DD Bridge Plug Assembly ............................................................................................................... 21
Equalizing Devices .................................................................................................................................. 24
Description........................................................................................................................................... 24
Plug Bottoms ........................................................................................................................................... 31
TYPE ‘C’ PLUG.................................................................................................................................. 32
TYPE ‘D’ PLUG ................................................................................................................................. 34
Tubing Stops & Circulating Plugs. .......................................................................................................... 35
Type ‘F’ Slip (Tubing) Stop ................................................................................................................... 36
Recommended Tools to Run and Set the Type ‘F’ Slip Stop .............................................................. 37
Running and Setting Procedures for the Type ‘F’ Slip Stop................................................................ 37
Recommended Pulling Tools used to Retrieve the Type ‘F’ Slip Stop ............................................... 38
Pulling Procedure For Type ‘F’ Slip Stop ........................................................................................... 38
Type ‘G’ Slip (Tubing) Stop ................................................................................................................... 39
‘GO’ Quick-Set Running Tool ............................................................................................................ 40
Running and Setting Procedure FOR the Type ‘G’ Slip Stop ............................................................. 41
Pulling Procedure for the Type ‘G’ Slip Stop Assembly. .................................................................... 43
TYPE ‘F’ COLLAR STOP ..................................................................................................................... 44
Recommended Running Tools for the Type ‘F’ Collar Stop (All must be shear down type) .............. 46
Running Procedure for the Type ‘F’ Collar ......................................................................................... 46
Procedure for Attaching the Type 'C' Running Tool to the Type 'F' Collar Stop................................. 47
Recommended Pulling Tools for the Type 'F' Collar Stop .................................................................. 49
Pulling Procedure for the Type 'F' Collar Stop .................................................................................... 49
Type ‘D’ Collar Stop ............................................................................................................................... 50
Running Procedure for the Type ‘D’ Collar Stop ................................................................................ 51
PULLING PROCEDURE FOR THE OTIS TYPE ‘D’ COLLAR STOP ........................................... 53
CIRCULATING PLUGS ........................................................................................................................ 54
1 Slickline
Type 'E' Circulating Plug ..................................................................................................................... 55

Running Tool required for the type ‘E’ Circulating Plug .................................................................... 56
Running Tool required for the type ‘E’ Circulating Plug .................................................................... 57
Running and Setting Procedures for the Type ‘E’ Circulating Plug .................................................... 57
Recommended Pulling Tools for the Type 'E' Circulating Plug .......................................................... 58
Pulling Procedure for the Type ‘E’ Circulating Plug........................................................................... 58
Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug .................................................................................................................. 59
Recommended Running Tools for the Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug. .................................................... 60
Running Procedures for the Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug...................................................................... 61
Recommended Pulling Tools for the Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug: ...................................................... 63
Alternate Pulling Tools ........................................................................................................................ 63
Pulling Procedure for the Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug ......................................................................... 63
Tubing Packoffs ...................................................................................................................................... 64
Running Procedure for ‘G’ Packoff ..................................................................................................... 67
Tool Part Numbers .................................................................................................................................. 68
W Slip Lock Mandrel .......................................................................................................................... 69
W Running Tool .................................................................................................................................. 70
W Element Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 70
D Collar Lock Mandrel ........................................................................................................................ 71
D Element Assemblies ......................................................................................................................... 71
41 D Running Tool .............................................................................................................................. 72
310 D Equalizing Valve ....................................................................................................................... 72
310 D Adapter Sub .............................................................................................................................. 72
20 B Equalizing Valves ....................................................................................................................... 73
20 F Equalizing Valves ........................................................................................................................ 73
20 H Equalizing Valves ....................................................................................................................... 73
20 D Equalizing Valves .................................................................................................................... 74
21 D Plug Bean Assemblies .............................................................................................................. 74
21 C Plug Bean Assemblies ................................................................................................................. 75
F Collar Type Tubing Stop .................................................................................................................. 76
F Slip Type Tubing Stop...................................................................................................................... 76
D Collar Type Tubing Stop ................................................................................................................. 77
G Slip Type Tubing Stop ..................................................................................................................... 77
41 G Running Tool .............................................................................................................................. 78
E Circulating Plug................................................................................................................................ 78
W Circulating Plug .............................................................................................................................. 78
G Packoff Elements ............................................................................................................................. 79
Projects .................................................................................................................................................... 80
Introduction
Most oil and gas wells in existence today are
completed with one or more landing nipples
which are made up as a part of the tubing string.
Landing nipples function as receptacles for
locking mandrels which can be installed in (set)
and retrieved (pulled) from the landing nipples
by use of slickline. The function of a locking
mandrel is to anchor (lock) and seal a control
device in the tubing string. Various control
devices such as a safety valve, a plug, a pressure
regulator, etc. may be attached to a lock mandrel
and installed in a nipple to provide for safety and
well control. (Fig. 1)
Locking mandrels which are installed in landing
nipples provide several advantages over other
types of locking mandrels. One very important
advantage of a "nipple set" lock mandrel is that
it can support a relatively high pressure
differential from below or from above.
Occasionally it may become necessary to install

a control device in a well that has no landing
nipple, or, even if the well is equipped with
landing nipples, it may be necessary to install a
control device at a point other than where a
landing nipple is installed in the tubing. There
are two different methods of anchoring and
sealing control devices in the tubing without the
use of a landing nipple as a receptacle.
One of these methods is by use of “slip type”
locking devices which may be set at any point
in the bore of the tubing away from the tubing
coupling (Fig 2) The second method is by use
of collar locking devices which may be set in
an API coupling (collar) recess. (Fig. 3)
In summary, wireline-retrievable locking
devices exist in three (3) distinct categories as
follows:
1. NIPPLE type locking devices which SET
only in a landing nipple.
2. SLIP type locking devices which SET
anywhere in the bore of the tubing AWAY
from the coupling.
3. COLLAR locking devices which SET only
in an API EU or NU coupling (collar)
recess.
3 Slickline
This section of the manual will include ONLY

those wireline-retrievable devices which DO
NOT require a landing nipple as a receptacle
for their installation in the well. It will include
locking mandrels, equalizing subs, plugs, ,
tubing stops, collar stops and other related
equipment.
Halliburton currently manufactures one slip
lock mandrel; the Type 'W'. (See Fig. 4)
The major limitations of the slip-type lock

mandrels are:
1. They have a relatively low differential
working pressure. (Maximum of 1500 psi
differential working pressure from below)
2. They will not support a differential pressure
from above.
3. They are designed only for standard weight
ranges of tubing.
4 Slickline
Type ‘W’ Slip Lock Mandrel

The Type 'W' Lock Mandrel (Fig. 4) has three
serrated slips mounted around the tapered slip
mandrel. The slips are suspended from the slip
carrier and are retained on the slip mandrel by
the mandrel band. The upper end of the slip
carrier provides a fishing neck (pulling flange)
which allows the lock mandrel assembly to be
engaged by a pulling tool in order to retrieve the
assembly from the well.
The element assembly is threaded into the lower
end of the slip mandrel. The above described
Items are mounted on the main mandrel. The
internal groove near the upper end of the main
mandrel provides a means of attaching the Type
'W' running tool to the lock mandrel assembly.
The element expander is threaded onto the lower
end of the main mandrel. The lower end of the
element expander provides an external thread to
which equalizing subs and control devices such
as plugs, safety valves, pressure regulators, etc.
can be attached. The internal thread in the lower
end of the element expander is provided for
installation of a choke bean. The port or slot in
the element expander provides an escape route
for any fluid or gas that may be present between
the element and element expander when the
expander is moved up to expand the element. It
also provides for equalization across the
expander so that the expander cannot become
pressure locked against the element.
The shear pin(s) hold the main mandrel
stationary in relation to the element assembly to
prevent premature expansion of the element
during the "running" procedure.
5 Slickline
4. Since the element on the Type 'W' Lock

Mandrel is mechanically expanded against
Application: the tubing wall when we set the lock, it is not
necessary to flow the well to create a seal.
The lock mandrel alone, serves no useful
purpose if installed in a well. Equalizing subs
and control devices such as pressure regulators,
safety valves, plugs and bottomhole chokes may
be attached to the lower, threaded end of the
lock mandrel assembly. These devices, when
used must be anchored (locked) in place in the
well tubing. The well's flow (fluid and/or gas)
must be directed through these control devices in
order for them to be effective.
This purpose is accomplished by the Type 'W'
Lock Mandrel in the following manner:
When installed (set) in the tubing, the slip
mandrel is moved upward in relation to the slips,
forcing the slips outwardly to engage the tubing
wall. In effect, the tapered slip mandrel simply
wedges the slips against the internal diameter of
the tubing, preventing upward movement of the
lock mandrel assembly. Once locked in place the
pin(s) are sheared allowing additional upward
movement of the main mandrel. This upward
movement pulls the element expander up into
the element, forcing the resilient element
outward and into positive contact with the tubing
wall. This creates a seal which now forces the
wells flow (fluid and/or gas) through the control
device which is attached to the lower end of the
lock mandrel (safety valve, pressure regulator,
etc.).
Notes:
1. The Type 'W' Mandrel is rated at 1500 psi
differential from below only and should
never be subjected to a differential pressure
greater than 1500 psi. This is due in part, to
the unknown condition of the tubing in which
it is installed.
2. The Type 'W' Lock Mandrel will not support a
differential from the top. If subjected to a
differential from the top, the mandrel will
unlock and move downhole.
3. The Type 'W' Lock Mandrel should never be
set less than 1000 feet deep.
6 Slickline
Type ‘W’ Running Tool

The Type ‘W’ Running Tool (Fig. 6) is used to
install the Type ‘W’ Slip Lock Mandrel in the
tubing.
The collets on the lower end of the ‘W’ Running
Tool are place into the running neck of the ‘W’
Slip Lock (Fig. 7). The Top Sub of the Running
tool is then pushed down placing the core in
position behind the collets locking them into the
running neck of the lock mandrel (Fig. 8). A
shear pin is used to hold the tool in this position
until the lock is set in the tubing.
7 Slickline
Running and Setting Procedure Continued upward jarring will shear the pins
in the type 'W' running tool and allow it to
release from the lock mandrel assembly.
1. Close the wing valve on the well to stop
(See Fig. 9).
well flow.
CAUTION: Do not let the tool string and
2. Lower the assembly into the tubing at a slow
running tool fall back and strike the mandrel
to moderate rate of speed. This will prevent
after shearing the pins. This could unlock
"bouncing" the assembly to the extent of
the mandrel and allow it to fall,
shearing the pins in the running tool and
uncontrolled, down the hole.
lock mandrel or prematurely setting the lock
mandrel. 9. Retrieve the wireline tool string and attached
running tool from the well.
3. Stop the assembly at the desired setting
depth, making every effort to determine that
the mandrel assembly is in the body of the
tubing joint and not at the tubing coupling.
The slips are now settled down on the
tapered portion of the mandrel and are in
light contact with the tubing wall. This will
prevent upward movement of the lock
mandrel assembly.
4. Slowly pull upwardly on the wireline until
the weight indicator shows 200 to 250
pounds more than hanging tool weight. This
wedges the tapered mandrel up into the
slips, causing the slips to bite into the tubing
wall and lock the mandrel assembly in place.
5. Slowly and carefully slack off on the
wireline to partially close the wireline jars.
Completely closing the jars would apply all
of the wireline tool string weight to the
tapered mandrel and may cause the lock
mandrel to unlock and move downhole.
6. With short, light jar action, begin jarring up
to move the tapered mandrel fully up into
the slips. Be careful to avoid closing the jars
downwardly.
7. Continued upward jarring action will shear
the pins in the lock mandrel, allowing the
main mandrel to move up and pull the
expander mandrel up into the element. This
expands the element into positive contact
with the tubing wall and creates a seal
between the lock mandrel assembly and
tubing. (See Fig. 9).
8. The mandrel is now locked in place and
sealed off in the tubing.
8 Slickline
9 Slickline
Unlocking and Pulling

Procedures
GENERAL: Before unlocking and retrieving
any type of lock mandrel, any pressure
differential existing across that lock mandrel
must be relieved. This is especially true of the
slip type lock mandrels since a differential
pressure below the mandrel actually tends to
force the tapered mandrel more firmly up into
the slips, making it practically impossible to
move the tapered mandrel down to the
unlocked position with conventional wireline
tools.
Therefore, if a differential exists across the lock
mandrel at the time it is to be unlocked and
retrieved from the well, an equalizing prong
must be screwed into the core of the pulling
tool in order to open the equalizing valve
assembly which is normally placed between the
lock mandrel and control device (Fig. 9). By
opening the equalizing valve the differential
pressure is allowed to equalize across the lock
mandrel before it is unlocked. If no differential
exists across a slip type mandrel an equalizing
prong is not required.
1. Close wing valve on tree to stop well flow.
2. Lower properly pinned RB Pulling Tool
(with equalizing prong attached if a
differential exists) down to the lock
mandrel assembly. After equalization jar
down with light to moderate impacts.
When the lock mandrel is in its normal
locked position, the pulling tool dogs
cannot engage the fishing neck of the lock
mandrel. The core of the pulling tool rests
on the upper end of the main mandrel
which extends above the fishing neck (Fig.
10).
3. Downward jar action moves the main
mandrel and element expander down,
releasing the element. Continued
downward jarring moves the slip mandrel
down in relation to the slips, allowing the
10 Slickline
pulling tool to engage the fishing neck of

the lock mandrel as it is unlocked. (Fig. 10)
If the element is not excessively swollen, the
lock mandrel assembly will normally move
down the hole after being unlocked and
engaged by the pulling tool. If so:
4. Pull up on the wireline and retrieve the
assembly from the well at a slow rate of
speed.
5. If the lock mandrel assembly will not move
up the hole freely it is probably due to the
element being swollen or hardened, or
stuck to the tubing wall. In this event do
not immediately try to jar the assembly up
the hole. It is usually best to jar down
moderately to move the assembly down
hole a short distance. This may help to
relax and/or wear down the element and
allow it to move up more freely. Severe
jarring in either direction should be
avoided, especially upward jarring.
Prolonged, severe, upward jarring can
sometimes separate the slip carrier from the
slips and only the slip carrier will be
retrieved. If this happens, the remainder of
the assembly is seldom ever retrieved
except by removing the tubing from the
well (See Fig. 11).
11 Slickline
Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel

The Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel (Fig. 12) is
designed to locate, lock and seal various control
devices into the coupling (collar) recess of
either API Externally Upset Tubing or API
Non-Upset Tubing. The same lock mandrel
assembly (of a given size) may be used in EU
OR NU tubing without any part changes being
made.
The advantages of the Type 'D' Collar Lock
Mandrel, when compared to the Type 'W' Slip
Lock Mandrels, are:
1. The Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel has
a much higher differential working
pressure rating (some sizes up to 5000
psi differential).
2. The Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel will
support this higher differential pressure
from below and from ABOVE.
3. The Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel has
a larger bore (ID) which provides a
greater flow area than can be obtained
through the slip type lock mandrels
The major limitation (or disadvantage) of the

Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel is that it can
locate and lock ONLY in API, EU or NU
threaded and coupled tubing. It CANNOT be~
used in tubing other than API EU or NU.
The Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel is designed
for use in standard weight ranges of tubing and
will pass through the Type 'S' or Type 'X'
Landing Nipples which are normally used in
standard weight tubing.
Caution: Any temperature over 200o F the

Nitrile Element pressure rating should be cut by
half.
Contact Engineering for recommended Element
with well temperature above 200°F.
12 Slickline
Description ‘D’ Collar Lock

Figure 13 illustrates the Type 'D' Collar Lock
Mandrel in the unlocked (running) position.
The internal fishing neck is threaded into the
upper end of the housing. The locking dogs are
positioned in "windows" which are machined in
the housing. The three Items, (the fishing neck,
the housing and the dogs) are linked together
and can move up or down as a unit in relation
to all other parts of the assembly. As shown in
Figure 13, the dog-outer sleeve-fishing neck
unit is in its uppermost position. Note that the
locking dogs are recessed inwardly against the
smaller diameter of the internal lock mandrel
and are flush with the diameter of the housing.
This allows the assembly to pass through the
tubing.
The collet lock, the lock mandrel and the
packing mandrel are threaded together and
must move as a single unit. This unit can move
up or down in relation to the fishing neck-outer
sleeve-dog unit. Figure 13 shows this unit in its
lowermost position in relation to the fishing
neck-outer sleeve-dog unit.
The locking sleeve is installed inside the upper,

colleted end of the collet lock. Note that the
collets of the collet lock are latched into a
groove near the upper end of the locking
sleeve.
In the "unset" (running) position (Fig. 13) the
collet lock cannot release from the groove in
the locking sleeve due to the internal diameter
of the housing.
The O-Ring cage, the element, and the element

expander are mounted on the packing mandrel.
These items and their functions will be
discussed later in this section.
13 Slickline
D Lock Running Procedure

1. With a Type 'D' Running Tool (Fig. 14)
properly pinned to the Type 'D' Collar Lock
Mandrel, lower the assembly into the
tubing at a slow to moderate rate of speed
to avoid "bouncing" the assembly.
Explanation: Note in Figure 15 that the

collets of the Type 'D' Running Tool are
positioned below the locking sleeve and are
resting on a shoulder near the lower end of the
collet lock. The locking sleeve is held in the
upper end of the collet lock by the collets
engagement in a groove on the locking sleeve.
The collet lock, the lock mandrel and the

packing mandrel are all threaded together and
must move as a single unit. When the Type 'D'
Collar Lock Mandrel is suspended from the
running tool, the outer housing the fishing neck
and the dogs are free to move up and/or down
in relation to the inner parts of the Type 'D'
Collar Lock Mandrel.
As the Type 'D' Lock Mandrel starts to enter

the tubing, the outer sleeve, fishing neck, dog
assembly is in a "down" position and the dogs
are pushed out to their extended position BUT
are not locked in this position. At this point the
diameter of the assembly at the locking dogs is
greater than the ID of the tubing
As the locking dogs contact the ID of the

tubing, the weight of the wireline tool string is
transmitted through the Type 'D' Running Tool
to the inner assembly collet lock, lock mandrel
and packing mandrel. The weight of the tool
string moves the inner assembly down in
relation to the outer housing and dogs. The
beveled, lower end of the collet lock moves
down inside the upper end of the dogs and
causes the lower end of the dogs to pivot
inwardly against the smaller diameter of the
lock mandrel. This allows the entire assembly
to move DOWN through the tubing.
14 Slickline
2. Stop the assembly approximately 90 feet

above the desired setting depth and slowly
pull it back up the hole. The dogs on the
lock mandrel should locate and stop at the
first coupling recess it reaches. Caution:
DO NOT pull more than 75 to 100 pound
bind at this point. Write down the wireline
measurement at this “reference coupling”,
in order to determine the “wireline” depth
of the coupling which is nearest to the
desired setting depth. (The average length
of a tubing joint is approximately 30 feet.)
3. Slack off on the wireline and, if necessary,

jar down very lightly to dislodge the
mandrel from the coupling recess to allow
it to move downhole:
1. Move the assembly down to a point

approximately 10 feet below the
desired coupling recess
2. Slowly pull the assembly up the hole to

locate and engage the desired coupling
recess. When the locking dogs engage
the coupling recess, pull a 200 to 300
pound bind on the wireline.
Explanation: As the Type 'D' Collar Lock

Mandrel is being pulled up through the
tubing, the beveled, lower end of the lock
mandrel is being pulled up against the
lower, internal ends of the locking dogs. the upper end of the O-Ring cage into the
But, the internal diameter of the tubing lower end of the outer sleeve. This
does not allow the dogs to move outwardly. provides a temporary "friction lock" to
As the locking dogs reach a coupling hold the lock mandrel up between the
recess, they are immediately pushed out dogs to keep them propped out into the
into the recess by the lock mandrel. This coupling recess. This "friction lock" is
allows the larger, lower end of the lock strong enough to support the weight of
mandrel to move up between the dogs to the wireline tool string IF the weight is
keep them "propped out" into the coupling applied gently.
recess, which stops the upward movement
of the outer housing-fishing neck and dogs Caution: At this point, any downward
(Fig. 16). jarring impact will drive the inner assembly
(collet lock, lock mandrel and the packing
4. The 200-300 pound bind moves the inner assembly) down to release the dogs and will
assembly (collet lock-locking sleeve, allow the entire Type 'D' Lock Mandrel
lock mandrel and packing assembly) up assembly to move down hole. (If this occurs,
in relation to the outer housing and dog step 5 must be repeated).
assembly. The upper end of the O-Ring
cage has a slight taper (3 degrees). The
200 300 pound bind forces and "wedges"
15 Slickline
5. Gently close the wireline jars and use 6. Continue to jar up until the pin is sheared
HARD UPWARD jar action to expand in the running tool to release it from the
the element and to lock the mandrel in Type 'D' Lock Mandrel Assembly (Fig.
place. CAUTION: DO NOT allow any 19).
downward jarring to occur. (Refer to Fig. 7. Retrieve the running tool.
17 and 18)
Explanation: The element must be

compressed (vertically) to cause it to expand
(horizontally) against the internal diameter of
the tubing. Once the element is expanded it
must be "locked" in the expanded position. In
step 5, the O-Ring cage is stopped by the lower
end of the outer housing. The O-Ring cage
now serves as an upper "stop" for the element.
The "hard" upward jar action in step 6 is

transmitted through the running tool to the
inner assembly (locking sleeve, collet lock,
lock mandrel-packing mandrel). This impact
(or force) pulls the entire inner assembly up,
compressing the element between the O-Ring
cage and the element expander. As the inner
assembly moves up, the beveled upper ends of
the collets contact a matching bevel on the
lower end of the fishing neck. At this point, the
collets are aligned with and move out into the
groove in the outer housing. This releases the
collets from the grove in the locking sleeve
and allows the locking sleeve to move up to its
stop shoulder in the fishing neck. When the
locking sleeve is moved up against the stop
shoulder in the fishing neck, the diameter of
the locking sleeve below the groove traps the
collets in the groove in the outer housing. This
holds the inner assembly in its uppermost
position to keep the element in its expanded
position AND also holds the larger, lower end
of the lock mandrel between the dogs to
prevent their escape from the tubing coupling
recess.
When the locking sleeve is moved up against

its stop shoulder in the fishing neck, the small
"shoulder" inside the collet lock snaps into the
small groove near the lower end of the locking
sleeve. This holds the locking sleeve in its Caution: Do not allow the running tool to
uppermost position to keep the collets propped fall back to the lock mandrel after the pin is
out into the groove in the outer sleeve. sheared. (This could drive the locking sleeve
down and would unlock the Type 'D' Collar
Lock Mandrel.)
16 Slickline
Pulling Procedure for the Type assembly, the lower, enlarged end of the lock
mandrel contacts the upper end of the O-Ring
'D' Collar Lock Mandrel cage and drives it down and away from its
"friction lock" in the lower end of the outer
The Type GRL Pulling Tool (Fig. 20) is sleeve. When the inner assembly moves down
required to Unlock and pull the Type 'D' Collar to its lowermost position, the enlarged lower
Lock Mandrel. The standard Type 'GR' Pulling end of the lock mandrel is BELOW the locking
Tool (short core) will engage the fishing neck dogs. This allows the locking dogs to move in
of the Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel BUT against the smaller diameter of the lock
CANNOT UNLOCK the mandrel due to the
short core length of the standard Type 'GR'
Pulling Tool (Fig. 21).
Note: As with all types of wireline retrievable

subsurface control devices, any pressure
differential across the Type 'D' Collar Lock
Mandrel should be equalized Before the lock
mandrel is Unlocked.
If a differential exists across the Type 'D'

Collar Lock Mandrel when it is to be retrieved,
the proper equalizing prong must be attached
to the pulling tool.
1. Engage the fishing neck of the Type 'D'
Collar Lock Mandrel with the Type 'GRL'
Pulling Tool. Allow time for pressure
equalization (if necessary).
2. AFTER the differential has equalized, jar
down to unlock the Type 'D' Collar Lock
Mandrel.
Explanation: After the dogs of the Type

'GRL' Pulling Tool engage the fishing neck of
the Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel, the lower
end of the pulling tool core will stop on the
upper end of the locking sleeve in the Type 'D'
Lock Mandrel. When jarring down, the core of
the pulling tool drives the locking sleeve
downward until the lower end of the locking
sleeve stops on a shoulder in the collet lock. At
this point the groove in the locking sleeve is
aligned with the upper end of the collets. The
collets immediately move out of the groove in
the outer sleeve and into the groove in the
locking sleeve. At this point, the entire inner
assembly, locking sleeve, collet lock, lock
mandrel and packing mandrel are free to move
down. As the inner assembly moves down it
releases the compression on the element and
allows it to relax to a smaller diameter. With
continued downward movement of the inner
17 Slickline
mandrel and to release from the tubing

coupling recess.
3. When the Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel is

unlocked (by downward jar action) it will
normally drop downhole.
4. Retrieve the Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel
at a slow to moderate rate of speed.
Caution: Excessive speed in fluid can create

a swabbing action which could load and
EXPAND the element on the Type 'D' Collar
Lock Mandrel.
18 Slickline
Ring cage and in the expander provides a seal

on the packing mandrel.
Type M Element
The Type ‘M’ Element used on the Type ‘D’
Collar Lock Mandrel is identical to the element
used on the Otis Type ‘G’ Pack-Off assembly
and certain other downhole devices. This
element must be mechanically expanded into
contact with the tubing wall and must be
pressure balanced before it can hold a pressure
differential. This means that the pressure
differential that the element is required to seal
against, must also be admitted into and held
inside the element.
Eample: If we set a Type ‘DD’ Bridge Plug

in the tubing and bleed off 2000 pounds of
pressure from above the plug assembly, then In order for pressure from below the assembly
the element on the plug will be subjected to and to enter the inside of the element, the pressure
must hold a 2000 pound pressure differential below the O-Ring (Item 2) in the element
from below the plug. The 2000 pounds of expander (Item 5) moves the O-Ring up against
differential pressure is trying to pass between the split ring(s). The O-Ring cannot seal
the OD of the expanded element and the ID of against the split rings.
the tubing. If this same 2000 pounds of
pressure is not allowed to enter the inside of the The pressure passes around the outside of the
element to BALANCE the 2000 psi being O-Ring, and then passes between the O-Ring
exerted outside the element, the element will and split ring(s) to exit the element expander
simply collapse inwardly and move away from and enter the inside of the element. Once the
its contact with the tubing wall. This would pressure is inside the element, it continues
prevent the element from sealing against any upwardly to the O-Ring (Item 2) in the O-Ring
pressure differential whatsoever. cage (Item 1). This O-Ring is sealed on the OD
But, if the 2000 pound differential pressure is of the packing mandrel (Item 6) AND is also
admitted to and is held inside the element, it sealed at the top of the O-Ring groove in the O-
balances (equals) the 2000 pounds outside the Ring cage. This stops the upward movement of
element and prevents the element from the pressure and keeps it inside the element to
collapsing inwardly. Therefore, the element maintain the pressure BALANCE from the
remains in contact with the tubing wall and will inside to the outside of the element.
maintain its sealing effect to hold the
differential pressure from below the plug
assembly. This same principal applies if the
differential is applied from above the plug
assembly.
Figure 24 illustrates the element assembly
which uses the split ring(s) between the O-Ring
and the element. The element is shown in the
expanded (set) position. Note that the upper
end of the element is sealed against the lower
end of the O-Ring cage and the lower end of
the element is sealed against the upper end of
the element expander. The O-Rings in the O-
19 Slickline
If the pressure differential is applied from

above, the same sequence of events occur,
starting from above the element assembly. The
pressure entering from above the O-Ring in the
O-Ring cage (Item 1) moves the O-Ring down
against the split ring(s) and prevents the O-
Ring from sealing against the bottom of the O-
Ring groove in the O-Ring cage. The pressure
passes around the outside of the O-Ring, then
between the O-Ring and split ring and
downwardly into the element. As the pressure
contacts the O-Ring in the element expander
(Item 5) the O-Ring moves down away from
the split rings and seals on the lower shoulder
of the O-Ring groove. This stops and holds the
pressure inside the element to provide the
Balance required for sealing the element
against the tubing wall. Figure 25 illustrates the element assembly
Caution: When using the element which does not use the split rings. In this
assembly which has the split ring(s); the split assembly the element must be the ported
ring(s) must always be installed between the type. The absence of the split rings allows the
o-ring and the element. O-Rings in the element expander (Item 5) and
in the O-Ring cage (Item 1) to seal against
pressure from both directions (above and
below) and will not allow pressure to enter the
inside of the element as described above. In
this assembly (Fig. 18) the holes in the wall of
the element allow the balance pressure to enter
the inside of the element.
20 Slickline
321 DD Bridge Plug Assembly

Note in Figure 26 that the Type ‘D’ Collar
Lock Mandrel has an internal (box) thread at
its lower end rather than an external (pin)
thread which is present on most other types of
lock mandrels.
The Type ‘D’ Lock Mandrel was initially
designed for use as a Retrievable Tubing
Bridge Plug. The term Bridge-Plug normally
indicates a plug that is set in the casing and
which will hold a differential pressure from
below and from above.
Figure 20 illustrates a Type ‘D’ equalizing

assembly which is designed specifically to be
used with the Type ‘D’ Collar Lock Mandrel to
make a Type ‘DD’ Bridge Plug.
The Type ‘D’ equalizing assembly consists of
four parts:
1. Cap
2. Shear Disc (alloy or stainless steel)
3. Equalizing Mandrel
4. Bean
The shear disc is retained on the equalizing
mandrel by the cap and effectively plugs or
seals the bore of the equalizing mandrel.
Essentially, the shear disc serves as a plug and
an equalizing feature.
21 Slickline
The larger external thread on the lower end of The bean, is simply a socket head screw which
the equalizing mandrel (Item 3) is used to has a small hole (orifice) drilled through its
install the Type ‘D’ equalizing assembly (Fig. center. If the Type ‘DD’ Bridge has a pressure
27) into the lower threaded end of the Type ‘D’ differential across it when it is to be retrieved,
Collar Lock Mandrel (Fig. 26). When the the pressure differential must be equalized
equalizing assembly is installed in the lock before the plug can be unlocked and retrieved.
mandrel, it plugs the bore of the lock mandrel In order to equalize the pressure differential, a
and will hold a pressure differential from above sharp, pointed equalizing prong attached to a
or from below when set in the tubing (Fig. 28). Type ‘GRL’ Pulling Tool (Fig. 29) is used to
jar down and punch a hole in the shear disc.
This allows the differential pressure to equalize
through the perforated shear disc. The small
orifice in the bean regulates or controls the
volume of fluid and/or gas being equalized
through the perforated shear disc.
22 Slickline
In addition to its use as a Type ‘DD’ Bridge

plug, the Type ‘D’ Lock Mandrel, with certain
adaptations, can be used as:
1. A lock mandrel for many standard flow
control devices.
2. A pump locator and hold down for both
conventional sucker rod pumps and for
hollow sucker rod pumps.
3. A packer (tension or compression)
For the purposes of this manual we will discuss

the Type ‘D’ Lock Mandrel only in its use with
standard flow control devices and as a Type
‘DD’ Bridge Plug.
Figure 30 illustrates the Type ‘D’ Lock

Mandrel with an adapter sub threaded into its
lower end. The external (pin) thread at the
lower end of the adapter sub is identical to the
thread on the Type ‘W’ Slip Type Lock
Mandrels and the profile selective lock
mandrels (Type ‘S’ equipment).
By use of this adapter sub, all equalizing

valves, plugs, safety valves, pressure
regulators, bottom hole choke beans, etc.
which are used with the Types ‘B’ and ‘W’ Slip
Lock Mandrels, can be used with the Type ‘D’
Collar Lock Mandrel.
In addition, certain other control devices, (such

as the Type ‘M’, ‘J’ and ‘T’ Injection Safety
Valves) which are normally used with “nipple
set” lock mandrels can also be used with the
Type ‘D’ Collar Lock Mandrel.
23 Slickline
Equalizing Devices
All Wireline Retrievable, subsurface control
devices (plugs, safety valves, pressure
regulators, etc.) which are closed or are capable
of closing and holding a pressure differential
must be equipped with an equalizing device.
The equalizing device provides a means of:
1. Allowing equalization of a pressure
differential which may exist across that
control device when it is to be unlocked
and retrieved.
2. Allowing a fluid bypass around a closed
control device (plug-regulator) when that
control device is being installed in a
landing nipple.
Some subsurface control devices which will be

discussed later will have their own “built-in”
equalizing feature. Examples of these are the
circulating plugs, test tools, and standing
valves.
Other subsurface control devices require a

separate equalizing sub to be made up in the
assembly between the lock mandrel and the
control device (plug-safety valve-regulator,
etc.). (Fig. 1)
Description
An equalizing sub consists of a body (or

housing) and a valve assembly. The body is
internally threaded on its upper end so that it
may be made up to the bottom of a lock
mandrel. The lower end of the body (or
housing) is threaded to accept a control device
such as a plug, safety valve, pressure regulator,
etc.
Equalizing subs fall into two general

categories. These are vertical and horizontal.
This simply denotes the direction in which the
valve portion of the equalizing sub moves to
the open or closed position.
24 Slickline
Figure 2 shows an equalizing sub having a Figure 3 is an example of an equalizing sub

“vertical valve”. It consists of a body and a with a “horizontal” valve. This equalizing sub
valve assembly. Equalizing ports (holes) are consists of; a body (or housing) and a valve
apparent in the body. The valve assembly assembly.
carries two O-Rings which seal off above and
below the ports in the body. This isolates or The body is machined with a threaded
closes the ports. To “open” the assembly, the receptacle in its side to accept the valve. The
valve must be moved down (vertically) so that bottom of this receptacle provides a lapped seat
both O-Rings are below the ports in the body. for the valve. The valve assembly consists of
the valve, a spring and orifice place. The
This allows equalization (or transfer of spring guides the valve and holds it on the seat
pressure) from outside to inside or from inside in the body. The orifice plate threads into the
to outside of the body. There are several body and retains the valve and spring within the
different types of vertical equalizing subs, receptacle in the body of the equalizing sub.
which will be discussed later, along with the
lock mandrels which “set” in a landing nipple. The orifice plate provides a small port (orifice)
which allows the pressure surrounding the
Vertical equalizing subs are never used with housing to enter the area where the valve and
slip type lock mandrels. spring are housed. When the equalizing valve
is moved off seat (opened) the orifice in the
orifice plate regulates the rate or volume of
flow that can pass through the assembly.
25 Slickline
When the equalizing valve is on seat (closed)

higher pressure outside the equalizing sub
assembly tends to hold the valve on seat more
tightly. But if there is more pressure inside the
equalizing sub than there is on its outside, the
valve will move off seat. The horizontal
equalizing sub will not hold a pressure
differential from the inside.
Notice in Figure 3 that the end of the valve

protrudes into the bore of the housing.
Figure 4 illustrates a plug choke (or plug) “set”
in the tubing. The entire assembly consists of
(from top to bottom) a locking mandrel, a
horizontal equalizing sub and a plug assembly.
The lock mandrel anchors (locks) the assembly

in place in the tubing. The packing on the lock
mandrel seals against the internal wall of the
tubing to prevent any flow around the outside
of the lock mandrel.
The equalizing sub is attached to the bottom of
the lock mandrel (below the packing on the
lock mandrel). The equalizing valve in the sub
is being held on seat by the spring and is
closed.
The plug bean assembly is attached to the lower

end of the equalizing sub and prevents any flow
from entering the bore of the equalizing sub
and lock mandrel. The well is now plugged
and cannot flow around or through the plug
choke assembly.
When pressure is bled (released) from the

tubing above the assembly a pressure
differential is created across the plug choke
assembly. This simply means that there is
more pressure below the assembly than there is
above the assembly.
Before unlocking and retrieving the assembly,

the pressure differential must be equalized.
(Obtain equal pressure above and below the
plug.)
26 Slickline
CAUTION: If the lock mandrel is unlocked

while a pressure differential exists below it, the
mandrel and attached control device will be
rapidly “blown up the hole” by the pressure
differential from below. This usually results in
the wireline tool string, pulling tool and lock
mandrel overrunning the wire and becoming
entangled in the wire to the extent of becoming
lodged in the tubing (Fig. 5). This type of
“fishing” job can be difficult and time
consuming to complete.
To equalize the differential across the plug

assembly, an equalizing prong must be screwed
into the core of the pulling tool which is to be
used to retrieve (pull) the assembly (Fig. 6).
27 Slickline
As the pulling tool and equalizing prong is

lowered onto the lock mandrel-plug assembly,
the equalizing prong will enter the bore of the
lock mandrel. When the core of the pulling
tool stops on top of the lock mandrel the prong
will have entered the bore of the equalizing sub
which is attached to the bottom of the lock
mandrel (Fig. 7). The equalizing prong
contacts the end of the equalizing valve which
protrudes into the bore of the equalizing sub
and pushes the valve back against the spring.
This moves the valve off seat and allows the

higher pressure (differential) outside of the
equalizing sub to enter the bore of the
equalizing sub, lock mandrel, and tubing above
the plug choke assembly. When equalization of
pressure above and below the plug is achieved,
the assembly may be unlocked and retrieved.
28 Slickline
Halliburton manufactures four (4) different

types of horizontal equalizing subs which may
be used with the slip type lock mandrels. These
four types are:
1. Type ‘B’
2. Type ‘H’
3. Type ‘F’
4. Type ‘D’
All four types have an Occupational Group
Code of 20.
Figure 8 illustrates the Type ‘B’ Equalizing

Sub. It consists of a body and ONE valve
assembly. The Type ‘B’ Equalizing Sub was
designed to be used with some of the first lock
mandrels which were built many years ago.
These early lock mandrels had a relatively
small internal diameter (bore) and therefore the
Type ‘B’ Equalizing Sub was designed with a
compatible internal diameter.
The Type ‘F’ Equalizing Sub (Fig. 9) is

identical to the Type ‘B’ Equalizing Sub except
that the Type ‘F’ has three (3) equalizing valve
assemblies installed in its body. Therefore
when the three equalizing valves in the Type
‘F’ Sub are opened they will provide a much
greater volume of flow than would a single
valve as in the Type ‘B’ Sub. The Type ‘F’
Sub (3 valves) is normally used when a large
volume of fluid must pass through the sub to
achieve equalization.
The Type ‘H’ Equalizing Sub is identical to the

Type ‘B’ and ‘F’ Subs except that it has a
larger internal diameter (bore). For example,
the nominal two (2) inch size Type ‘B’ and
Type ‘F’ Subs have an internal diameter of .53 Either Figure 8 or Figure 9 can represent the
inches and the nominal 2-inch size Type ‘H’ Type ‘H’ Sub, depending upon the number of
Sub has an internal diameter of .69 inches. The valve assemblies it has.
Type ‘H’ Sub is available with either one valve
assembly or with three valve assemblies. The The three equalizing subs (Types ‘B’, ‘F’ and
larger internal diameter of the Type ‘H’ Sub is ‘H’) all have an internal bevel or taper at the
compatible with the larger internal diameter of lower end of the body. This bevel serves as a
the slip type lock mandrels (Type ‘W’) and the seat for the Type ‘C’ Plug Bean which will be
profile selective lock mandrels (Type ‘S’). discussed later in this section.
29 Slickline
The Type 'D' Equalizing Sub (Fig. 10) is a

special purpose sub in that it is designed
specifically to be used with the Type 'D' Plug
Bean Assembly. The Type 'D' Equalizing Sub
has a single equalizing valve and the same
threads top and bottom. The body is machined
to accept the Type 'D' Plug Bean assembly. The
Type 'D' Plug Bean fits into the lower end of
the body and affects a resilient to metal seal
between the body of the equalizing sub and the
plug bean assembly. Normally the Type 'D'
Equalizing Sub is used only when using the
Type 'D' Plug Bean Assembly (Fig. 11).
The beveled upper end of the Type 'D' Bean
Assembly serves as a guide and "stop" for the
assembly when it is positioned in the lower end
of the Type 'D' Equalizing Sub.
The spring helps to hold the bean assembly in
place in the equalizing sub.
The bean cage guides and retains the spring and
bean assembly onto the equalizing sub.
Caution: This “pump through” feature

applies only if the plug assembly is attached to
a lock mandrel which will hold a differential
from the top. (Such as the nipple type lock
mandrels or the Type 'D' Collar Lock Mandrel.)
Applied differential from above, will unlock a
slip type lock mandrel. Then the entire
assembly will be fall "down the hole".
30 Slickline
Plug Bottoms
Wireline retrievable plugs are separated into must be given to the amount of pressure in
three (3) general categories. These are: the casing at the depth the plug is set.
1. Plugs which will hold a pressure If the pressure differential from the casing
differential from below only exceeds the collapse resistance of the
2. Plugs which will hold a pressure tubing then the tubing is likely to collapse
differential from above only immediately above the plug. This type
3. Plugs which will hold a pressure situation must be avoided.
differential from both directions (above Abnormally high temperatures associated
and below).Plugs in this category are with extreme depth could also affect the
generally referred to as POSITIVE PLUGS type plug and/or lock mandrel to be used.
4. Well Conditions – The term “well
Some of the most common applications for the conditions” could imply many things such
use of wireline retrievable plugs are: as crooked tubing – deviated hole,
1. To remove or repair the wellhead restricted ID, scale build-up on tubing wall,
(Christmas tree). mud, sand laden fluid, etc. From a
2. To pressure test the tubing “plugging” standpoint we must consider all
3. To isolate one formation from another of these things in selecting the best plug
4. To “set” a hydraulic packer assembly to accomplish the job.
In order to select the proper plug assembly to For example, if the plug is set and the fluid in
accomplish a specific “job” we must consider the tubing above the plug contains sand, the
at least four things: sand is quite likely to “settle out” of the fluid
1. The direction of the pressure and fill the bore of the lock mandrel and
differential. The plug selected must be equalizing sub as well as a portion of the tubing
capable of holding a pressure differential immediately above the plug assembly. This
from that direction. Obviously a plug that would prevent the pulling tool from reaching
holds a differential from the top only or a the plug when we attempt to retrieve it. The
plug that holds a differential from both sand can usually be bailed or washed out of the
directions would not be used with a slip tubing down to the top of the lock mandrel.
type lock mandrel, since the slip type lock But, depending upon the size and type of the
mandrels CANNOT support a differential lock mandrel, the sand which is inside the bore
from the top. of the lock mandrel and equalizing valve may
2. The amount of the differential pressure be difficult or impossible to remove. If this
(psi). Generally the working pressure of a situation exists, the equalizing prong could not
plug is determined by the working pressure reach the equalizing valve and therefore the
of the lock mandrel to which it is attached. differential across the assembly could not be
Obviously then, in a plugging situation, the equalized and the assembly could not be
amount of differential to be held would retrieved by conventional methods.
determine the type lock mandrel to be used. Some of the plugs to be discussed later are
As stated, the plug assembly usually specifically designed for this type situation.
assumes the working pressure of the lock At this point we will discuss ONLY those plugs
mandrel used. which are normally used with the slip type lock
3. Depth at which the plug is to be installed. mandrels.
If a plug is to be set at an extreme depth
and the tubing pressure above the plug is
to be bled off (released), consideration
31 Slickline
TYPE ‘C’ PLUG
The Type ‘W’ Slip Lock Mandrel will hold a

differential pressure from below only.
Therefore, the plugs that may be attached to the
slip type lock mandrels should be of a type that
holds a differential pressure from below only.
Halliburton manufactures two types of plugs
which may be used with the slip type lock
mandrels. They are:
1. The Type ‘C’ Plug Assembly

2. The Type ‘D’ Plug Assembly
Both are in the Occupational Group Code 21.
The Type ‘C’ Plug Assembly (Fig. 12) consists

of:
1. The bean assembly
2. The spring
3. The bean cage
The tapered upper end of the bean assembly

serves as a valve and seals on a matching taper
(seat) which is present in the lower end of all
Type ‘B’, ‘H’ or ‘F’ Equalizing Subs.
The spring holds the bean on seat with a very
light force.
The bean cage guides the springs and bean

assembly onto the seat and retains them on the
equalizing sub. This effectively plugs the bore
of the equalizing sub and lock mandrel from the
bottom.
The Type ‘C’ Bean Assembly consists of:

1. The secondary valve
2. The spring
3. Bea
n
4. Roll pin
32 Slickline
As previously stated, the upper end of the bean

(Item 3) serves as a valve which seats and seals
on a tapered seat which is present in all Type
‘B’, Type ‘H’ and Type ‘F’ Equalizing Subs.
The lower end of the Type ‘B’ and Type ‘W’
Lock Mandrels also provide a tapered seat for
the Type ‘C’ Bean. Therefore the Type ‘C’
Plug Assembly can be used directly on the
lower end of the Type ‘B’ or Type ‘W’ Lock
Mandrel without use of an equalizing sub.
(Fig. 15)
The secondary valve (Item 1 – Fig. 12)
provides the means of equalization if an
equalizing sub is not used in the plug
assembly. The secondary valve is held on seat
in the bean by the spring and roll pin. Notice
that an extension of the secondary valve
extends above the top of the bean. If the
secondary valve is to be used to accomplish
equalization, the end of the equalizing prong
will rest on the extension of the secondary
valve, allowing the weight of the wireline tool
string to push the secondary valve down and off
its seat in the bean. This will allow
equalization past the secondary valve.
The small spring and the differential pressure
from below is holding the secondary valve up
and on seat. Depending upon the amount of
differential pressure underneath the secondary
valve, the weight of the wireline tool string
may not be sufficient to move it down to the
open position. Light, downward jarring action
may be required to move the secondary valve
off seat. For this reason it is recommended that
a separate equalizing sub be used, if possible,
especially with the slip type lock mandrels.
Remember, the slip type lock mandrels are
unlocked by downward jarring action.
33 Slickline
TYPE ‘D’ PLUG
Figure 14 illustrates the Type ‘D’ Plug

Assembly. It consists of:
1. ‘D’ Equalizing Sub

2. ‘D’ Bean Assembly
3. Spring
4. Bean Cage
The lower end of the Type ‘D’ Equalizing Sub

is machined internally to accept the Type ‘D’
Bean Assembly. The Type ‘D’ Bean Assembly
will not fit to any equalizing sub other than the
Type ‘D’.
The beveled upper end of the Type ‘D’ Bean
Assembly serves as a guide and “stop” for the
assembly when it is positioned in the lower end
of the Type ‘D’ Equalizing Sub.
The spring helps to hold the bean assembly in
place in the equalizing sub.
The bean cage guides and retains the spring and
bean assembly onto the equalizing sub.
Figure 15 illustrates the Type ‘D’ Bean

Assembly. It consists of:
1. The core (bolt)
2. The packing adapter
3. The packing
4. The body
5. The set screws
CAUTION: This “PUMP THROUGH” feature

applies only if the plug assembly is attached to
a lock mandrel which will hold a differential
from the top. (Such as the nipple type lock
mandrels or the Type ‘D’ Collar Lock
Mandrel.) A differential from the top, as when
pumping into the well, will unlock a slip type
lock mandrel and will allow the entire
assembly to be pumped “down the hole”.
34 Slickline
Tubing Stops & Circulating

Plugs
Up to this point we have discussed two plug
categories which can be set in the tubing
without the use of a landing nipple. The two
categories are:
1. Plugs that hold a differential from the

bottom only. These are the Type ‘C’ and
Type ‘D’ Plug Assemblies attached to the
Type ‘W’ Slip Lock Mandrels and to the
Type ‘D’ Collar Lock Mandrel.
2. Plugs that hold a differential from both
directions. The Type ‘DD’ Bridge Plug
represents this category.
The third plug “category” is “plugs that will

hold a differential pressure from the top only.”
Halliburton manufactures two plugs of this type
which do not require a landing nipple to set in.
These two plugs are the Types ‘E’ Circulating

Plug and the ‘W’ Circulating Plug.(Fig. 1)
The circulating plugs are not designed to lock

into the tubing in any way. Both plugs require
that a “stop” of some type be set in the tubing
to serve as a base to stop and support the plug
and a differential pressure from above. These
stops can be either the “Slip” type or the
“Collar” locking type. The slip type stops are
designed to set in the ID of the tubing away
from the coupling. The collar stops locate and
set ONLY in an API EU or NU coupling
(collar) recess. (Fig. 2)
Since a stop must be installed in the tubing

before a circulating plug can be used, we will
discuss the stops before getting to the
circulating plugs.
35 Slickline
Type ‘F’ Slip (Tubing) Stop
Figure 14 illustrates a Type ‘F’ Slip (Tubing)

Stop. This stop is commonly referred to as a
Type ‘F’ Pack-Off Anchor Stop simply because
It was Initially designed for use with the Otis
Type ‘F’ Pack-Off equipment. The Type ‘F’
Slip Stop consists of
1. A Slip Mandrel
2. The Slips
3. A Slip Band
4. A Slip Carrier
The slips and slip carrier are mounted around
the slip mandrel and are retained on the slip
mandrel by the band. Since the band is welded
in place, field disassembly is not advised.
36 Slickline
Recommended Tools to Run and Set

the Type ‘F’ Slip Stop
(Must be Shear Down Type Fig. 15)

1. Type ‘SSJ’ Pulling Tool
2. Type ‘SB’ Pulling Tool, can be used as a
running tool for most sizes of the Type ‘F’
Tubing Stop. Some of the stops have been
manufactured with a short fishing neck
which will prevent the Type ‘SB’ Tool
from shearing. If using the Type ‘SB’ Tool,
be sure that there is enough space between
the end of its cylinder (skirt) and the
shoulder on the stop to allow the pin to
shear in the SB Tool.
Running and Setting Procedures for

the Type ‘F’ Slip Stop
1. With the stop engaged by a properly pinned

shear down tool, lower the assembly into
the well at a slow to moderate rate of
speed.
2. When the desired setting depth Is reached
slack off rapidly on the wireline. This
causes the wireline jars and tool string to
override the stop and pushes the slip
mandrel (Item 1) down Into the slips (Item
2). This wedges the slips into contact with
the tubing wall.
3. Jar down to fully drive the slip mandrel
into the slips. DO NOT bump the Jars up as
this will unlock the stop.
4. Continue to Jar down until the pin is
sheared in the running tool to release it
from the stop.
5. Retrieve the wireline and tool string.
Note: The Type ‘F’ Stop may be difficult to
“set” at an exact depth, especially if there is no
fluid in the tubing at the desired setting depth.
37 Slickline
Recommended Pulling Tools used to

Retrieve the Type ‘F’ Slip Stop
1. Type ‘RB’ Pulling Tool

2. Type ‘SB’ Pulling Tool
Caution: As stated previously, a very limited
number of the Type ‘F’ Stops may have a short
fishing neck which will prevent the Type ‘SB’
Pulling Tool from being sheared. Therefore, If
one of these stops is engaged with a Type ‘SB’
Pulling Tool and if the stop cannot be
unlocked, there is no convenient way to release
the pulling tool from the stop.
If the Type ‘RB’, ‘SB’ or ‘UO’ Pulling Tools
are not available, the Type ‘F’ Stops may be
pulled with the Types ‘RS’, ‘RJ’ or ‘SSJ’
Pulling Tools. These three tools have a shorter
core and a longer reach than the recommended
pulling tools. Therefore, if severe jarring is
required to unlock the stop, these tools may
cause more damage on their dogs and on the
pulling flange of the stop than would the
recommended tools which have a shorter reach.
Pulling Procedure For Type ‘F’ Slip

Stop
1. Use suitable pulling tool and engage stop.

2. Jar up to unlock stop.
3. Retrieve stop.
The force created by the applied differential
above the circulating plug is exerted on the
tapered mandrel of the stop. This force tends to
wedge the mandrel very firmly into the slips.
Good, solid jar action will be required to
unlock and retrieve the stop.
38 Slickline
Type ‘G’ Slip (Tubing) Stop
Figure 5 illustrates the Type ‘G’ Slip Stop

(Occupational Group Code 13). The Type ‘G’
Stop has several uses but at this point we will
discuss ONLY its use as a stop or base for the
circulating plugs.
This stop is commonly referred to as a Type
‘G’ Pack-Off Anchor Stop because it was
designed for use with the Type ‘G’ Pack-Off
equipment.
The Type ‘G’ Stop consists of:
1. A slip mandrel (Item 1) which has a
“fishing neck” machined internally near its
upper end.
2. A “one piece” slip section (Item 2) which is
mounted around the slip mandrel (Item 1).
3. A retainer wire (Item 3) which is installed
in an internal groove in the slip section
ABOVE a stop shoulder on the slip
mandrel. The retainer wire retains the slip
mandrel (Item 1) in the slip section (Item 2)
to prevent their separation.
4. The bottom sub (Item 4) is not a
component of the stop assembly but has
been attached to the stop as a thread
protector AND to provide a means of
pinning the stop to a Type ‘GO’ Running
Tool. Notice that the bottom sub has been
drilled to accept a shear pin.
DISASSEMBLY: Other than removing the
bottom sub, the Type ‘G’ Stop is NOT
designed for disassembly in the field.
Since the slip section of the Type ‘G’ Stop is of
one piece “collet type” construction the slip
segments are not free to pivot “in and out” as
are the slips on the Type ‘F’ Slip Stop.
Therefore if the slips have been previously
expanded they DO NOT return to the fully
retracted position when the tapered slip
mandrel is pulled up and away from the slips.
Before running a previously “set” ‘G’ Stop, the
slips must be manually retracted to their
smallest diameter.
39 Slickline
‘GO’ Quick-Set Running Tool
Figure 6 illustrates the Type ‘GO’ Quick Set

Running Tool with a Type ‘G’ Stop attached.
The use of the ‘GO’ Running Tool is required
when the Type ‘G’ Stop is to be set
independent of other assemblies in the tubing.
The Type ‘G’ Stop can be accurately set at an
exact depth by use of the Type ‘GO’ Quick Set
Running Tool. The Type ‘GO’ Running Tool
has an Occupational Group Code of 41.
Pinning Procedure for the Type ‘GO’ Running

Tool and Type ‘G’ Slip Stop.
1. Align shear pin hole in the outer mandrel

with the shear pin hole in the operating
mandrel and install shear pin. Use
aluminum or brass shear stock.
2. Align the shear pin holes in the lock
mandrel with the shear pin holes in the
outer mandrel and install both shear pins.
Use brass shear stock. Lay the running tool
aside.
3. Pull the tapered slip mandrel of the Type
‘G’ Stop fully up and away from the slip
section to its extended length and manually
reduce the slips to their smallest diameter.
This is accomplished by using a small ball
pein hammer to gently tap each slip
segment immediately below its serrated
area. The slip section should now hold the
slip mandrel in the “up” position.
CAUTION: Do not install shear pins in the
stop assembly.
4. Slide the Type ‘G’ Stop (with bottom sub
attached) onto the lower end of the
operating mandrel of the Type ‘GO’
Running Tool.
5. Align the shear pin holes in the bottom sub
of the Type ‘G’ Stop with the shear pin
hole in the operating mandrel of the
running tool and install the shear pin. Use
mild steel shear stock.
40 Slickline
NOTE: Disassembly and Assembly

Running and Setting Procedure FOR Instructions for the Type ‘GO’ Quick Set
the Type ‘G’ Slip Stop Running Tool will be found in the BDMI’s.
1. Lower the assembly into the tubing at a CAUTION: There may be a few “shop
slow to moderate rate of speed. made” tools in certain field locations which are
2. Stop the tool at the desired setting depth. very similar to the Type ‘GO’ Quickset
The dogs on the Type ‘GO’ Running Tool Running Tool. A few of these “shop made”
will settle down on the (tapered) lock tools have malfunctioned downhole to the
mandrel. extent that they could not be retrieved from the
3. Gently pull 150-200 pounds above hanging tubing after being used to set the Type ‘G’ Slip
tool weight. This moves the lock mandrel Stop. Before using one of these “shop made”
firmly up into the dogs and prevents running tools, it should be carefully inspected
upward movement of the running tool. and tested by a Supervisor or other qualified
4. Partially close the wireline jars and begin person. The recommended practice is to use
lightly jarring up. Be careful to avoid only the valid Quick Set Running Tool which
setting the tool weight down on the running can be identified by Otis part numbers and
tool or jarring down. This upward jarring markings on various components of the tool.
first shears the pin and allows the operating
mandrel to move up in relation to the other
parts of the running tool. When the
operating mandrel moves up, it pulls the
slip section of the Type ‘G’ Stop up onto
the tapered portion of the slip mandrel.
5. Continued, light, upward jar action sets the
Type ‘G’ Stop and shears pin. This
releases the running tool from the Type ‘G’
Stop, but the running tool is still locked in
the tubing by the dogs. After the pin
shears and the operating mandrel of the
running tool moves up, shoulder on the
operating mandrel engages shoulder inside
the outer mandrel of the running tool.
Upward jarring impacts are now transferred
to pins.
6. Continued upward jarring will now shear
the pins and allow the outer mandrel to
move up in relation to the lock mandrel of
the running tool. As the outer mandrel
moves up, shoulder (on the outer mandrel)
engages shoulder inside the dog segments
and lists the dogs and dog carrier up and
away from the tapered lock mandrel (Item
8). This “unlocks” the running tool from
the tubing and allows it to be retrieved.
7. After the running tool is retrieved it may be
advisable to make another wireline trip,
using a blind box to jar down on the stop to
assure that it is firmly “set”.
41 Slickline
42 Slickline
Pulling Procedure for the Type ‘G’

Slip Stop Assembly.
1. Using a properly pinned Type ‘GS’ or Type

‘GR’ Pulling Tool (Fig. 9), engage the stop
assembly.
2. Jar up to unlock the stop assembly.
3. Retrieve the stop at a slow to moderate rate
of speed. The slips are not fully retracted and
could provide some interference in a landing
nipple or other restricted diameter in the tubing.
43 Slickline
TYPE ‘F’ COLLAR STOP
As previously mentioned, slip type stops or

collar stops may be used as a base on which a
circulating plug may be set. The Slip stops can
be set anyplace In the tubing away from the
coupling (collar). The Collar stops can be set
only in the coupling (collar) recess of API EU or
NU tubing.
Figure 10 illustrates a Type ‘F’ Collar Stop in
the set position. The Type ‘F’ Collar Stop was
initially designed to be used in open ended
tubing to prevent tools from accidentally passing
through the tubing and out into the casing. In the
field it is a common practice to set a stop below
a series of wireline retrievable side-pocket gas
lift valves before installing or retrieving the
valves or dummies. In the event that a valve or
dummy is dropped, it will fall only to the stop
and can be readily retrieved from the tubing.
The Type ‘F’ Collar Stop has a “two-leg” collet
assembly permanently mounted on the mandrel.
The upper end of the mandrel provides an
external fishing neck. The lower, enlarged end
of the mandrel serves to expand and lock the
collet in an API EU or NU coupling recess. Note
the “shoulder” Inside each collet. These
shoulders trap the mandrel in the “down”
position to keep the collets locked in the
coupling recess. The trip springs serve to hold
the collets retracted while running the assembly
into the well and also to release the collets when
the setting depth has been reached. The roll pins
simply provide a means of attaching the trip
springs to the collets. The roll pin in the mandrel
serves to prevent small tools or equipment from
passing through the bore of the collar stop
assembly. This roll pin is found only in stops to
be used in 2 7/8-in. OD tubing and larger. Since
the collet assembly is permanently mounted on
the mandrel field disassembly of these
components is not done. The trip springs may be
replaced by driving out the roll pins.
44 Slickline
NOTICE: As previously stated, the type ‘F’

Collar Stop can be set only in an API EU or NU
coupling recess. The dimensions of the EU
coupling recess IS NOT the same as the
dimensions of the NU coupling recess.
Therefore, the collets on the Type ‘F’ Collar
Stop which sets in an EU coupling recess has
slightly different dimensions than the collets on
the stop which would set in an NU coupling
recess. The Engineering Data Sheet included in
this manual lists the part numbers and other
information for the Type ‘F’ Collar Stops which
are designed for EU tubing and those designed
for NU tubing.
Figure 11 illustrates the Type ‘F’ Collar Stop in
the running position. The mandrel is moved to
its upper most position in relation to the collet
assembly. Shear pin hole (which is the smallest
and lower hole in the mandrel) is aligned with
shear pin hole near the upper end of the collet
assembly and a shear pin is installed. These
holes are present only on one side of the mandrel
and collet. Notice that a larger hole is present in
the mandrel above the shear pin hole. This hole
facilitates removal of the sheared portion of the
pin in the collet assembly once the stop has been
“set” and retrieved.
The “legs” of the collet assembly are held in the
retracted position by the trip springs. This allows
the assembly to be run into the tubing. The trip
springs must be long enough and positioned so
that both are in contact with the tubing wall
while running into the well. When setting the
collar stop, the trip springs also serve to “trip”
and release the collets so that they can expand
and locate a coupling recess.
Check the Trip Springs in a “Try Nipple” before
running the stop.
45 Slickline
mandrel In the down and locked position.

Recommended Running Tools for the The stop is now “set”.
Type ‘F’ Collar Stop (All must be 6. Continue to Jar down to shear the pin in the
shear down type) running tool and release it from the stop.
Retrieve the running tool.
1. Type ‘SB’
2. Type ‘SS’
3. Type ‘SSJ’
ALTERNATE RUNNING TOOL
Type ‘C’ - Used primarily to run the F Collar
Stop past side-pocket gas lift mandrels.
Running Procedure for the Type ‘F’

Collar
Stop when using the recommended running

tools.
1. Engage the stop to a properly pinned
running tool (Fig. 19). Take care to avoid
tripping the trip springs while pulling the
assembly up into the lubricator.
2. Lower the assembly into the well at a
moderate rate of speed to a depth BELOW
the coupling it is to be installed in.
3. Pull the assembly up through the selected
coupling BUT NOT past the next higher
coupling. As the collar stop moves up
through a coupling, the trip springs will
engage the coupling recess and will “TRIP”
to release the collets to their expanded
position.
4. Lower the assembly back down to the
coupling. The collets of the Type ‘F’ Collar
Stop will locate and stop in the coupling
recess.
5. Jar down with light to moderate impact. This
will shear the pin (Item 2) in the collar stop
and allow the mandrel (Item 1) to move
down into the collets (Item 3). As the lower,
enlarged end of the mandrel contacts the
“shoulders” (E) inside the collets, the collets
are flexible enough to move out and allow
the enlarged end of the mandrel to pass
through the “shoulders”. This traps the
46 Slickline
Procedure for Attaching the Type 'C'

Running Tool to the Type 'F' Collar
Stop
1. Prepare the Type 'F' Collar Stop for running.

2. Measure the OD of the stop at shear pin hole
(immediately below the fishing neck).
3. Cut a piece of shear stock (aluminum or
brass) 1/4 inch shorter than the
measurement taken in step 2 above.
4. Using the flat Jaws of the vise (or a hammer
and anvil) flatten approximately 1/4 inch of
each end of the shear stock.
5. Cut the shear stock into two equal lengths.
6. Insert the Type 'C' Running Tool into the
bore of the collar stop and align the hole in
the running tool with the holes in the collar
stop.
7. Install the previously prepared shear pins -
round end first - one each side.
8. Drive the pins to a point where the flattened
ends are just flush with the OD of the stop.
Do not flare or "center punch" the pins after
they are installed. The previously flattened
ends will hold the pins in place.
The purpose of the above pinning method is to
leave a space between the ends of the two pins
in the running tool. The running and setting
procedure when using the Type 'C' Running
Tool is exactly the same as when using the
standard shear down running tools previously
described. Once the stop has been tripped and
set, downward jar action shears the pins to
release the Type 'C' Running Tool from the stop.
As these pins shear, the running tool moves
down in relation to the stop. The two sheared
portions of the pins which remain in the running
tool can move in toward each other, and prevent
wedging in the bore of the stop.
If a full length shear-pin is used it will often
wedge in the bore of the stop after being sheared
and will sometimes cause the stop to be
retrieved with the running tool.
47 Slickline
Running Tripping Tripped Set

Fig. 14
© 2009, HallibJrton
Recommended Pulling Tools for the

Type 'F' Collar Stop
The Type 'RB' and Type 'SB' (short reach) (Fig

22). In lieu of the Type 'RB' or 'SB' Pulling
Tools, any standard pulling tool (shear up or
shear down) of the proper size and which will
engage the fishing neck of the Type 'F' Collar
Stop may be used.
Pulling Procedure for the Type 'F'

Collar Stop
1. Engage the Type 'F' Collar Stop with a

properly pinned pulling tool.
2. Jar up to unlock and retrieve the stop
(upward jarring moves the mandrel up and
away from the lower end of the collets,
allowing the collets to be pulled out of the
coupling recess.)
3. Retrieve tools from well bore.
49 Slickline
Type ‘D’ Collar Stop

Figure 16 illustrates a Type ‘D’ Collar Stop in
the “unlocked” position. The Type ‘D’ Collar
Stop has an Occupational Group Code of 33.
The Type ‘D’ Collar Stop can be set in an API
EU or NU coupling (collar) recess. Unlike the
Type ‘F’ Collar Stop, the Type ‘D’ Stop is
designed so that the same stop will locate and
set in either an EU or a NU coupling recess.
The Type ‘D’ Collar Stop was designed

primarily to be used with the Otis Type ‘G’
Packoff equipment. The stop has a relatively
large internal diameter which minimizes its
resistance to flow and also allows small
diameter wireline tools and equipment to be run
through it.
The Type ‘D’ Collar Stop has four locking dogs

which are mounted in “windows” in the sleeve.
The mandrel retains and controls the dogs in
the sleeve. The mandrel cap retains the
mandrel inside the sleeve and dog assembly.
The upper end of the sleeve provides an
internal fishing neck. Note that the lower end
of the sleeve is slotted vertically and is
machined internally to provide a “COLLET”
type feature.
In the unlocked (or running) position (Fig. 16)
the enlarged, lower portion of the mandrel is
below the dogs and the beveled lower end of
the mandrel cap is positioned inside the upper
end of the dogs. This causes the lower enlarged
end of the dogs to pivot inwardly against the
smaller diameter of the mandrel, so that the
assembly can pass down through the tubing. In
Figure 16, note the groove near the lower end
of the mandrel and the beveled shoulder
immediately above the groove. This shoulder
and groove, along with the collet arrangement
at the bottom of the sleeve provide the locking
feature for the Type ‘D’ Collar Stop (Fig. 17).
50 Slickline
Running Procedure for the Type ‘D’

Collar Stop
The Type ‘C’ Running Tool (Fig. 18) is

REQUIRED to set the Type ‘D’ Collar Stop.
The Type ‘C’ Running Tool has an
Occupational Group Code of 41. The Type ‘C’
Running Tool is nothing more than a properly
sized, round steel bar which has a standard
fishing neck and thread at its upper end and a
shear pin hole near its lower end.
1. The Type ‘D’ Stop should be in the

“unlocked” position before pinning it to the
running tool. Also, if the collets at the
lower end of the sleeve appear to be opened
excessively, pull the mandrel down to its
lower most position and gently tap each
collet segment with a small hammer to
move the collets in toward the mandrel.
2. Measure the outside diameter of the
mandrel at the shear pin holes.
3. Using shear stock (usually brass) of the
correct diameter, cut the pin approximately
1/4-inch SHORTER than the measurement
taken in step 2 above.
4. Insert the Type ‘C’ Running Tool through
the upper end of the collar stop and align
the shear pin hole in the running tool with
the holes in the lower end of the mandrel of
the collar stop.
5. Drive the shear pin in to approximately one
half of its length and then slightly bend the
pin. This will retain the sheared portion of
the pin in the running tool after the stop is
set. Finish driving the pin into the running
tool and collar stop assembly.
6. Flare each end of the pin with a center
punch. This will retain the sheared
portions of the pin in the stop.
51 Slickline
7. Lower the assembly at a moderate rate of

speed to a point immediately below the
coupling it is to be “set” in. DO NOT go
past the next coupling down the hole.
8. Pull the assembly slowly back up toward
the coupling. At this point the dogs are
recessed in the windows and against the
smaller diameter of the mandrel. The
lower end of the dogs are resting on the
beveled shoulder of the enlarged diameter
of the mandrel. This beveled shoulder is
“pushing” the dogs outwardly, but due to
the ID of the tubing, the dogs cannot move
out until they reach the coupling recess.
Once the dogs reach the coupling recess,
they move out into the recess, allowing the
enlarged, lower portion of the mandrel to
move up between the dogs. This traps the
dogs in the coupling recess and stops the
assembly.
9. Once the dogs locate and stop in the
coupling recess, pull a “bind” of 150 to 200
pounds above tool weight. This forces the
shoulder and groove (near the lower end of
the mandrel) up into the collets on the
lower end of the sleeve. The collets on the
sleeve snap into the groove in the mandrel
and holds the mandrel in the up and locked
position. (Fig. 19) The stop is now locked
in the coupling recess.
10. Partially close the wireline jars and begin to
jar up until the pin in the running tool is
sheared. Do Not Jar Down.
CAUTION: Do not allow the running tool
to fall back on the stop after it shears. This
could unlock the stop.
11. Retrieve the running tool.
52 Slickline
PULLING PROCEDURE FOR THE

OTIS TYPE ‘D’ COLLAR STOP
The recommended pulling tool for the Type ‘D’

Stop is the standard type ‘GR’ Pulling Tool.
Caution: Do not use the ‘GRL’ pulling tool.
The longer core on the ‘GRL’ will unlock the
stop but will not allow the pulling tool dogs to
engage the fishing neck of the stop. (Fig. 20)
1. Lower a properly pinned standard Type

‘GR’ Pulling Tool and latch into the fishing
neck of the stop.
2. Jar Down to unlock and release the stop
from the coupling recess. After latching
the stop the lower, beveled end of the core
of the Type ‘GR’ Pulling Tool will rest on
the beveled, upper end of the mandrel cap.
Downward jar action forces the collets on
the lower end of the sleeve to open, which
allows the mandrel to move down to its
lowermost position. This lets the dogs
move inward against the small OD of the
mandrel and releases the collar stop from
the coupling recess. The collar stop,
pulling tool and tool string should drop
downhole when the stop is unlocked.
3. Retrieve the assembly from the tubing.
53 Slickline
CIRCULATING PLUGS
Circulating plugs are designed to hold a

pressure differential from above only. They
may be used in tubing which has no landing
nipples or may be used in the tubing at a depth
where no landing nipple has been installed.
Circulating plugs are not designed to lock
themselves in the tubing in any manner. A stop
(slip or collar) must be "set" in the tubing to
serve as a base to set the circulating plug on
(Fig. 21). Since a circulating plug can hold
pressure from the top side only, it is not
necessary to provide a "hold down" to keep it
in place. But, if the well is allowed to flow
while the circulating plug is in place, the plug
can move up the hole with the flow.
Some of the most common applications for the
use of circulating plugs are:
1. To pressure test the tubing
2. To assist in locating a tubing leak
3. When set below a Circulating device
which is to be opened or below a depth that
the tubing is to be perforated, a circulating
plug isolates the formation from the
hydrostatic pressure of the heavy casing
fluid and from the pressures created by
circulation and/or displacement of the
fluids in the casing or in the tubing.
54 Slickline
Type 'E' Circulating Plug
Figure 24 illustrates the Type 'E' Circulating

Plug in the "running" position. This plug carries
one up facing choke cup. The choke cup is
identical to the cups used on the Type 'B' Lock
Mandrel. The expander sleeve serves to expand
the choke cup against the tubing wall to create
a seal between the OD of the plug and ID of the
tubing. In the running position (as shown), two
shear pins hold the expander sleeve up and
away from the choke cup during the "running"
process. The upper end of the expander sleeve
provides a fishing neck which is used in the
running and pulling of the circulating plug.
The ball serves as a valve in the bore of the
circulating plug. It rests on a seat in the upper
end of the packing mandrel and will hold
pressure applied from above only. The ball is
free to move up in the upper mandrel but is
prevented from escaping the upper mandrel by
the roll pin.
The cup washer fits against a shoulder on the
packing mandrel. The cup washer provides
internal support for the choke cup. The cup ring
threads onto the packing mandrel and serves as
a seat and retainer for the choke cup. The cup
ring carries an O-Ring which provides a seal
between the choke cup and the packing
mandrel.
The bottom sub serves as a "lock nut" to
prevent the cup ring from backing away from
the choke cup. The lower end of the bottom sub
provides an internal thread which can accept
other tools such as the 62FO collar stop, a
pulling tool, a blind box, etc.
55 Slickline
The Type 'E' Circulating Plug provides its own packing mandrel. Now the pressure differential
"built-in" equalizing and fluid "bypass" system. (overload) above the plug can enter the
Note In Fig. 25 that the circulating plug is circulating plug through ports A & B and exit
pinned in the "Running" position. The through ports. Once equalized, the plug can be
equalizing ports in the packing mandrel are retrieved. Since the expander sleeve remains in
between the two stationary O-Rings on the its upper most position during the retrieval of
packing mandrel. The ports in the expander the plug, the ports also remain aligned and
sleeve are aligned with ports in the packing allow fluid bypass through the plug while
mandrel, providing communication from inside retrieving it.
to outside of the circulating plug. Notice that
both sets of ports are above the choke cup and
below the ball.
Due to the diameter of the choke cup, there is
very little fluid bypass area between the OD of
the cup and the ID of the tubing (or a landing
nipple which the tool may have to pass
through). Additional fluid bypass is provided
through the bore of the circulating plug. As the
assembly moves down the hole, fluid enters
through ports, which are below the choke cup.
The fluid entering ports can exit above the
choke cup through ports A & B. The ball can
also move up and off its seat allowing fluid to
exit through the top of the circulating plug.
When the circulating plug is "set", the expander
sleeve is moved down to expand the choke cup
against the tubing wall. This creates a pressure
seal between the outside diameter of the
circulating plug and the internal diameter of the
tubing. Notice that the ports in the expander
sleeve are no longer aligned with the ports in
the packing mandrel. The ports in the expander
sleeve are below the lower O-Ring and
communication through these ports is shut off.
Now, when pressure is applied above the plug,
the choke cup prevents the pressure from
passing between the outside of the plug and the
tubing wall. The ball is on seat and prevents
pressure from passing down through the bore of
the plug. The tubing is effectively plugged and
has a greater pressure above it than it has below
Before retrieving the Type 'E' Circulating Plug,
the pressure differential above the plug must be
relieved. This is accomplished by engaging a
pulling tool to the fishing neck of the expander
sleeve. Once engaged, minimum upward jar
action will move the expander sleeve to its
upper most position. This realigns the ports in
the expander sleeve with the ports in the
56 Slickline
Running Tool required for the type

‘E’ Circulating Plug
The Type ‘SSJ’ Running/Pulling Tool

Caution: Do not use a Type ‘SB’ or ‘SS’
pulling tool to run the type ‘E’ Circulating
Plug. The Cup cannot be expanded if the type
‘SB’ is used. If the type ‘SS’ is used, it cannot
shear to release from the plug.
Running and Setting Procedures for

the Type ‘E’ Circulating Plug
1. (Assuming that a suit able stop has already

been set at the desired depth in the tubing.)
Screw a blind box of the proper size to the
bottom of a properly dressed and pinned
‘E’ Circulating Plug. The blind box is
necessary, especially if the plug is to be set
on a Type ‘D’ Collar Stop or a type ‘G’
Slip Stop. If the blind box is not used, the
lower end of the circulating plug may
wedge inside the fish neck of the stops and
might unset the ‘D’ Collar Stop. It is also
necessary to protect the threads on the
bottom of the plug.
2. Engage the fishing neck of the circulating
plug with the ‘SSJ’ Running/Pulling Tool
(pinned with brass)
3. Lower the assembly at a moderate rate of
speed to the previously “set” stop.
4. Once the circulating plug reaches the stop,
jar down to shear the pins in the circulating
plug. After the pins are sheared, the
expander sleeve moves down inside the
choke cup to expand it to contact the tubing
wall. This creates a seal between the
circulating plug and the tubing. When the
sleeve moves down to expand the cup, it
also closes the equalizing ports.
5. Continue to jar down to shear and release
the running tool from the circulating plug.
Retrieve the running tool.
57 Slickline
Recommended Pulling Tools for the

Type 'E' Circulating Plug
1. Type 'RS' Pulling Tool

2. Type 'RJ' Pulling Tool
ALTERNATE PULLING TOOLS which
may be used to retrieve the Type 'E' Circulating
Plug:
1. Type 'SSJ' Running/Pulling Tool
Pulling Procedure for the Type ‘E’

Circulating Plug
1. Engage the fishing neck of the circulating

plug with a suitable pulling tool.
2. JAR UP lightly to move the expander
sleeve to its uppermost position, and away
from the choke cup. When the sleeve
moves up, the ports align and allow the
pressure differential (or fluid overload)
above the plug to enter the circulating plug
below the ball and exit through the ports
near the bottom of the plug.
3. Allow time for equalization and then
retrieve the circulating plug assembly.
Caution: Pull the plug slowly. The choke cup
has been expanded and is likely to momentarily
hang in any slight restriction or landing nipple
in the tubing. For this reason, any paraffin or
other deposits on the tubing wall should be
removed prior to running the circulating plug
into the well.
58 Slickline
Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug
Figure 26 illustrates a Type ‘W’ Circulating

Plug in the “running” position. This plug
carries one up-facing sealing element
assembly) which is identical to the element
assembly used on the Type ‘W’ Lock Mandrel.
The Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug uses a poppet

(drop dart) type valve assembly. The fishing
neck is threaded onto the upper end of the
valve. The valve is housed by a cage which is
threaded onto the element expander. The upper
end of the element expander provides the seat
for the valve. The lower end of the element
expander is threaded onto the main mandrel.
The element assembly is mounted around the
main mandrel. The lower sub is threaded onto
the lower end of the element assembly. Notice
that the lower end of the lower sub provides an
internal thread which can accept other tools
such as a pulling tool, a blind box, etc.
The shear pin is installed through the lower sub

and the main mandrel in order to keep the
element expander up and away from the
element while the assembly is being run into
the well. The shear pin prevents the expander
from prematurely expanding (setting) the
element before the circulating plug reaches the
stop.
59 Slickline
Recommended Running Tools for

the Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug.
1. Type ‘SSJ’ Running/Pulling Tool (Fig. 27)

2. Type ‘UO’ Pulling Tool – shear down
mode – J core length.
Note: that all of the recommended running

tools are of the “shear-down” type which have
a long reach (short core). They are all of a type
that will “shear-down” when the cylinder (skirt)
is resting on a stationary object.
When running the Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug

into the well, there is very little fluid by-pass
area between the OD of the plug and the ID of
the tubing, especially when the plug has to be
run through a landing nipple or other
restrictions in the tubing. Adequate fluid by-
pass is provided by allowing the fluid to enter
the bore of the plug through ports and exit
through ports above the valve and seat. In
order for this to occur, the valve must be able to
“float” up and off its seat. When using any of
the recommended running tools, the cylinder
(skirt) of the running tool will rest on the upper
end of the valve cage of the ‘W’ Circulating
Plug, keeping the core of the running tool well
above the fishing neck of the circulating plug.
This provides space for the valve to move up
and off seat to allow the fluid to by-pass
through ports.
Caution: The Type ‘SB’ Pulling Tool should

not be used to run and set the Type ‘W’
Circulating Plug. The core of the ‘SB’ Pulling
Tool will rest on the fishing neck of the plug
and will hold the valve on seat, preventing fluid
by-pass. Additionally, any downward jarring
will force the valve onto the seat and may
damage the valve and/or seat.
60 Slickline
Running Procedures for the Type

‘W’ Circulating Plug
Assuming that a suitable stop has already

been set at the desired depth in the tubing.
1. Make up a blind box of the proper size

into the bottom of a properly dressed
and pinned Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug.
The blind box is necessary, especially if
the plug is to be set on a Type ‘D’
Collar Stop of a Type ‘G’ Slip Stop. If
the blind box is not used the smaller,
lower end of the circulating plug may
wedge inside the Type ‘D’ or ‘G’ Stops.
It could also unlock the Type ‘D’ Collar
Stop.
2. Engage the fishing neck of the Type ‘W’
Circulating Plug with one of the
recommended running tools previously
listed.
3. Lower the assembly at a moderate rate
of speed to the previously set stop.
4. Once the circulating plug reaches the
stop, the cylinder (skirt) of the running
tool rests on the upper end of the cage.
Jar down to shear the pin in the
circulating plug. This allows the
element expander to move down and
expand the element against the tubing
wall.
5. Continue to jar down to shear the pin in
the running tool which will release it
from the circulating plug.
6. Retrieve the running tool.
Figure 28 illustrates the Type ‘W’

Circulating Plug in the “set” position. The
element expander has moved down into the
element to expand and seal it against the
tubing wall. This prevents any fluid or
pressure above the plug from passing down
around the outside of the circulating plug.
The valve is on seat and has sealed off the
bore of the plug from the top. A differential
pressure can now be applied above the plug.
61 Slickline
Consideration must be given to the amount

of differential or fluid overload which will
be on the plug when it is to be retrieved.
Any pressure differential or fluid overload
which cannot be bled off at the surface will
exert a downward force which will hold the
valve on its seat. (force = area X pressure)
In order to equalize the pressure or fluid
overload remaining above the plug when it
is to be retrieved, the valve must be lifted up
and away from its seat. This will allow the
pressure or fluid overload above the plug to
pass through ports, enter the bore of the plug
and to exit through ports at the lower end of
the circulating plug.
With this type equalizing feature it is very
possible that the force holding the valve on
seat can exceed the breaking strength of the
wireline which is being used to lift the valve
off seat. Prior to installing the Type ‘W’
Circulating Plug, calculations should be
made to determine that the pressure or fluid
load remaining above the plug when it is to
be retrieved will not prevent equalization of
the pressure across the plug.
62 Slickline I
Recommended Pulling Tools for

the Type ‘W’ Circulating Plug:
1. Type ‘RB’
2. Type ‘SB’
Alternate Pulling Tools
1. Type ‘RS’
2. Type ‘RJ’
3. Type ‘SSJ’
4. Type ‘UO’ – shear up OR shear down
mode – any core length
The Type ‘SS’ Pulling Tool should not be

used. If the circulating plug should become
lodged to the extent that it could not be
retrieved, the Type ‘SS’ Pulling Tool may
not be able to shear and release from some
of the Type ‘W’ Circulating Plugs.
Pulling Procedure for the Type ‘W’

Circulating Plug
1. Engage the fishing neck of the

circulating plug with a suitable pulling
tool.
2. Pull up with the wireline to lift and hold
the valve off seat. Allow sufficient time
to permit a pressure or fluid overload to
equalize from above or below the plug.
3. Once the differential is equalized, the
expander should move up and away
from the element and allow the plug to
be retrieved. Light upward jar action
may be required. The plug should be
pulled at a slow to moderate rate of
speed. This will help to avoid swabbing
action which could load and expand the
element to the extent that it may lodge
in the tubing.
63 Slickline I
Tubing Packoffs
Packoff anchors are designed to straddle and Packoff anchors vary in design from one
packoff holes or other communication in the manufacture to the next, but generally
tubing so that production of the well can be consists of the following components:
continued without pulling the tubing. The (Fig. 1)
packoff anchor may also be used to convert a
well to gas lift. 1. The lower stop – either collar type or slip
type.
Holes often occur opposite the top perforation 2. The packoff anchor – (lower element,
in a dual completion or may occur any where spacer pipe and upper element).
in the tubing string. Other examples of 3. The upper slip type tubing stop.
communication are leaking tubing couplings,
blast joints, flow couplings, SSD and gas lift
mandrels.
There are several ways to locate holes or

other communication problems. Tubing
calipers are used to find holes and severely
eroded tubing. BHP and BHT instruments
are used to find a change in pressure and
temperature that might indicate a leak. The
use of the newly developed downhole camera
can show the leak and condition of the
tubing. Test tools and hole finders use pumps
to pressure test the tubing in order to locate a
leak. “Pony tails” (cloth or rope attached to
the wireline tool string) have been used very
successfully in locating leaks by circulating
gas or fluid down the tubing, the “pony tail”
finds the hole by following the flow. Another
method is circulating dye, the depth of the
hole is found by calculating the number of
barrels pumped into the volume of the well
bore.
Packoff anchors can be positioned where

desired, under pressure, in the tubing using
wireline methods. If the tubing to be packed
off is under pressure, the length of the
packoff is controlled by the length of the
lubricator. If the well can be killed, so that
the well can be opened to the atmosphere, the
length of the packoff is determined by the
tensile strength of the line handling the
assembly.
64 Slickline I
The Type ‘G’ Packoff Anchor (Fig. 2) three trips of the wireline. This is
employs an internal running and pulling neck accomplished by the addition of a fishing
designed to allow a maximum internal neck to the top of the upper element and an
diameter through the packoff. This packoff is end sub to the bottom of the upper stop. (Fig.
particularly suited for installations where 3) Set up this way, the upper stop can be
high volumes of production are designed. retrieved independently of the packoff;
therefore, eliminating potential problems
Operation: The Type ‘G’ Packoff installation when retrieving the packoff.
may be completed in only two trips of the
wireline. This is accomplished by attaching The lower stop to be used is determined by
the upper stop to the packoff element the type and placement in the tubing where
assembly. However, past experiences have the packoff is to be set. If the tubing has
demonstrated some difficulty in retrieval collar recesses, the Type ‘D’ Collar Stop is
used (provided a collar is near the location of
the hole). Using a collar stop allows a more
accurate means to determine the spacer pipe
length than a slip stop does by collating
wireline measurements to tubing
measurements. It also offers a more reliable
resetting feature if the packoff is to be pulled
and reset. If no collar recesses exist in the
tubing wall then the Type ‘G’ Slip Stop is
used.
The packoff anchor consists of three sections,

these are:
1. The Lower Packoff Element Assembly

2. The Spacer Pipe, and
3. The Upper Packoff Element Assembly.
The upper and lower element assemblies are

identical with the exception of the end sub
used. The lower assembly uses a collet
device threaded into the end and the upper
assembly uses a fishing neck.
Note: The collet on the lower element

assembly is designed to engage the fishing
neck of the lower tubing stop. It is
imperative that the collet be used with the
packoff; in that, its function is to hold the
lower portion of the packoff stationary
allowing the lower element to be retracted.
Without the collet it is difficult to retract the
lower element and therefore more difficult to
retrieve the packoff assembly.
Note: The use of the fishing neck on the

when using this method. It is recommended upper element assembly (instead of the ‘G’
that the packoff be set up to be installed in stop directly connected) eliminates a potential
65 Slickline I
weak point during retrieval. This weak point experienced pulling the packoff. By running
is the retainer wire on the ‘G’ stop that retains the upper stop separately less jar action is
the fish neck-expander in the body. This wire required to retrieve only the stop and less
is subject to upward jar action during likelihood of failure exists.
retrieval and could part if difficulty is
66 Slickline I
retain the element in the expanded position

Running Procedure for ‘G’ Packoff until the upper stop is set.
The following procedure should provide a guide

for running the Type ‘G’ Packoff Assembly.
1. Determine the depth of the hole to be packed

off. The tubing size and type of
connections.
2. Run a full size tubing gauge to the depth that
the bottom packoff assembly is to be set.
3. Discuss with the customer how the packoff
is to be tested after it has been set. This is
important because an improperly set packoff
can lead to further tubing damage. If the
hole to be packed off is above the top packer
a differential test can be applied. If the hole
to be packed off is between two packers
there are two ways to test the packoff after it
is set. One way to test a packoff set between
two packers is a production flow rate test.
The flow rate should indicate that the well is
flowing from the lower zone only. The
other way to test a packoff set between two
packers requires a standing valve to be set
below the packoff assembly. This would
allow the customer to test the tubing to
insure that the packoff is properly set.
4. Determine the type of lower stop to be used.
If the tubing has collar recesses, use the
Type ‘D’ Collar Stop. If the tubing has no
collars or the tubing collar is too great a
distance from the hole, use the Type ‘G’
Slip Stop. Run and set the tubing stop in the
predetermined position in the tubing.
5. Prepare packoff element assemblies with
proper length of spacer pipe.
6. Run and set the packoff assembly. The
element assemblies are designed to be
expanded and set through downward jar
action against the lower stop. As the
element assembly compressed by the jar
action several things are taking place. (See
Fig. 4) First, the locking sleeve moves
down causing the centralizers to move
outward centering the packoff in the tubing.
Second, the element expanders expand the
element against the tubing wall. Finally, the
element expander forces the locking
segments against the internal wall of the
locking sleeve creating a “friction bite” to
67 Slickline I
Tool Part Numbers
68 Slickline I
W Slip Lock Mandrel
W Slip Lock Mandrel

SAP Old Fish
Tubing Lock Slips Element Bottom Running Pulling
Material Material Neck
Description ID OD Lock ID Expanded Expanded Thread Tool Tool
Number Number OD
101057612 101056590
101336338 10WO29 SLIP MDRL ASSY STNLS 1.380 1.234 0.468 1.472 1.457 3/4-16 UN 1.000
(41WO25) (40RB10)
101057611 101056592
(41WO23) (40RB14)
101057611 101056592
(41WO23) (40RB14)
100008721 100005947
101351352 10WO113 SLIP MDRL ASSY 9CR H2S 1.995 1.770 0.560 2.071 2.085 1 3/16-14 UN 1.375
(41WO13) (40RB17)
100008721 100005947
101022157 10WO18 SLIP MDRL ASSY STNLS 1.995 1.859 0.687 2.092 2.078 1 3/16-14 UN 1.375
(41WO13) (40RB17)
101057609 100005948
(41WO14) (40RB18)
101057609 100005948
101022168 10WO70 SLIP MDRL ASSY 303 STNLS 2.992 2.590 0.880 3.000 3.120 1 9/16-12 UN 1.750
(41WO14) (40RB18)
101057610 101015084
22290 10WO110 SLIP MDRL ASSY 9CR H2S 2.992 2.844 1.375 3.089 3.156 2-12 UN 2.313
(41WO22) (40RB56)
101057610 101015084
101022160 10WO23 SLIP MDRL ASSY STNLS 2.992 2.844 1.375 3.089 3.156 2-12 UN 2.313
(41WO22) (40RB56)
101057613 101056598
(41WO30) (40RB55)
101057613 101056598
(41WO30) (40RB55)
101057613 101056598
(41WO30) (40RB55)
69 Slickline I
W Running Tool
41W Running Tool

SAP Old
Maximum Fish Neck
Material Material Description Top Thread
OD OD
Number Number
101057612 41WO25 RUN TL 1.25 1.190 1.000 5/8-11 UNC
101057611 41WO23 RUN TL 1.50 1.380 1.187 15/16-10 UNS
100008721 41WO13 RUN TL 2.00 1.500 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
101057609 41WO14 RUN TL 2.50 1.500 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
101057610 41WO22 RUN TL 3.00 2.250 1.750 1 1/16-10 UNS
101057613 41WO30 RUN TL 3.50 2.620 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
101057614 41WO37 RUN TL 4.00 3.500 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
W Element Assembly
W Element Assembly
SAP Old
Material Material Description
Number Number
101335566 10WO28 ELEM ASSY 1.250 STNLS

21935 10WO111 ELEM ASSY 2.50 9CR
21936 10WO112 ELEM ASSY 3.00 9CR
32154 10WO108 ELEM ASSY 3.00 K-M
101022167 10WO65 ELEM ASSY 3.000 17-4 PH
101022169 10WO71 ELEM ASSY 3.000 303SS
70 Slickline I
D Collar Lock Mandrel
310DO Collar Lock Mandrel

SAP Old OD OD Fish
Material Material Dogs Dogs Lock Bottom Running Neck
Description Pulling Tool
Number Number Retracted Expanded ID Connection Tool ID
101055573 310DO8 LOCK MDRL ASSY 2.00 MONEL STD/H2S 2.091

101055555 310DO11 LOCK MDRL ASSY 2.00 STNLS STD 1.844 2.107 1 5/16-18 101056970 101056248 1.375
0.937
UNEF (41DO10) (40GRL18700)
101055556 310DO12 LOCK MDRL ASSY 2.00 MONEL STD/H2S 2.091
101055561 310DO3 LOCK MDRL ASSY 2.50 ALY STD/H2S 2.560
101055554 310DO10 LOCK MDRL ASSY 2.50 ALY STD/H2S 2.560 1 21/32-14 101056971 101056249
2.281 1.375 1.812
101055564 310DO40 LOCK MDRL ASSY 2.50 ALY STD 2.528 UNS (41DO11) (40GRL23100)
101055565 310DO42 LOCK MDRL ASSY 2.50 ALY STD 2.560
101055571 310DO59 LOCK MDRL ASSY 3.00 ALY STD
101056973
101055572 310DO60 LOCK MDRL ASSY 3.00 ALY STD 2.844 3.109 1.750 2 1/8-12 UN (40GRL27500) 2.313
(41DO9)
101740072 310DO88 LOCK MDRL ASSY 3.00 9CR
101333960 310DO69 LOCK MDRL ASSY 4.000 9CR STD 3 1/16-12 101056972 101056250
3.800 2.690 SLB (41DO15) (40GRL36800) 3.120
4.160
101333966 310DO70 LOCK MDRL ASSY 4.000 9CR STD
D Element Assemblies
310DO Element Assembly

SAP Old
Material Material Description Element Expanded OD
Number Number
101016983 310DO47 ELEM ASSY 2.00 ALY STD 2.13 in. +.02 -.04 (2.09/2.15)
101055566 310DO44 ELEM ASSY 2.00 MONEL STD/H2S 2.13 in. +.02 -.04 (2.09/2.15)
101016984 310DO52 ELEM ASSY 2.50 303SS STD 2.63 in. +.03 -.03 (2.6/2.66)
101749655 310DO90 ELEM ASSY 3.00 9CR 3.203 in. +.03 -.03 (3.173/3.233)
101055575 310DO87 ELEM ASSY 4.00 9CR H2S 4.08 in. +.03 -.03 (4.05/4.11)
71 Slickline I
41 D Running Tool
41DO Running Tool

SAP Material Old Material Maximum Fish
Description Thread
Number Number OD Neck
101056970 41DO10 RUNNING TOOL 2.00 1.375 15/16-10 UNS 1.375
101056971 41DO11 RUNNING TOOL 2.50 1.750 15/16-10 UNS 1.750
101056973 41DO9 RUNNING TOOL 3.00 2.000 1 1/16-10 UNS 1.750
101056972 41DO15 RUNNING TOOL 4.00 2.940 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.313
310 D Equalizing Valve
321DO Equalizing Assembly

SAP Material Old Material Bean ID Without Pulling Prong
Description
Number Number ID Bean
101055746 321DO11 EQ ASSY 2.00 ALY STD 0.125 0.375 101017150 (49S467)
101055749 321DO3 EQ ASSY 2.00 STNLS STD 0.125 0.375 101017150 (49S467)
101055745 321DO10 EQ ASSY 2.50 ALY/STNLS STD 0.125 0.375 101017151 (49S600)
101055744 321DO1 EQ ASSY 2.50 STNLS STD 0.125 0.375 101017151 (49S600)
101055747 321DO12 EQ ASSY 3.00 ALY/STNLS STD 0.125 0.375 101062555 (49S622)
101055748 321DO16 EQ ASSY 4.00 9CR H2S 0.250 0.375 101062349 (49P1907)
310 D Adapter Sub
310D Adapter Sub

SAP Material Old Material Bottom Thread
Description Top Thread
Number Number
101055596 310D144 ADPTR SUB 1 5/16-18 UNEF 1 3/16-14 UNS
101055597 310D145 ADPTR SUB 1 21/32-14 UNS 1 9/16-12 UNS
101744878 310D244 ADPTR SUB 2 1/8-12 UNS 2.00-12 UNS
72 Slickline I
20 B Equalizing Valves
20BO Equalizing Sub

SAP Material Old Material Maximum Minimum Pulling Prong for use
Description Top Thread Bottom Thread
Number Number OD ID with W Slip Lock
101039677 20BO32 EQ SUB 2.00 1.752 0.531 1 3/16-14 UN BOX 1 3/16-14 UN PIN 100008849 (49P100)
101039676 20BO2 EQ SUB 2.50 STNLS H2S 2.125 0.718 1 9/16-12 UN BOX 1 9/16-12 UN PIN 101062429 (49P242)
20 F Equalizing Valves
20FO Equalizing Sub

Description Top Thread Bottom Thread
101351145 20FO34 EQ SUB 2.00 9CR H2S
101269024 20FO18 EQ SUB 2.00 H2S 1.752 0.531 1 3/16-14 UN BOX 1 3/16-14 UN PIN 100008849 (49P100)
101039717 20FO17 EQ SUB 2.00
101039718 20FO21 EQ SUB 2.50 2.120 1.060 1 9/16-12 UN BOX 1 9/16-12 UN PIN 49P110
101351130 20FO35 EQ SUB 3.00 9CR H2S
2.627 1.375 2-12 UN BOX 2-12 UN PIN 101352794 (49P2100)
101269114 20FO28 EQ SUB 3.00 MONEL H2S
101039719 20FO26 EQ SUB 3.00 STNLS STD 2.627 1.375 2-12 UN BOX 2-12 UN PIN 101352794 (49P2100)
101339118 20FO30 EQ SUB 5.00 STNLS STD 4.744 2.880 4-12 SLB BOX 4-12 SLB PIN 49P1529
20 H Equalizing Valves
20HO Equalizing Sub

Entry Name Top Thread Bottom Thread
101039763 20HO20 EQ SUB 1.25 1.116 0.454 3/4-16 UNF BOX 3/4-16 UNF PIN 49P477
101039765 20HO6 EQ SUB 1.50 1.421 0.562 7/8-14 UNF BOX 7/8-14 UNF PIN 49P478
101039766 20HO8 EQ SUB 2.00
101039764 20HO37 EQ SUB 2.00 STNLS STD 1.752 0.687 1 3/16-14 UN BOX 1 3/16-14 UN PIN 101062434 (49P479)
101039762 20HO14 EQ SUB 2.00
101569612 20HO38 EQ SUB 2.50
2.156 0.875 1 9/16-12 UN BOX 1 9/16-12 UN PIN 101062435 (49P480)
101039767 20HO9 EQ SUB 2.50
101039760 20HO10 EQ SUB 3.00 2.718 1.500 2-12 UN BOX 2-12 UN PIN 101062439 (49P572)
73 Slickline I
20 D Equalizing Valves
20DO Equalizing Sub
Entry Name Top Thread Bottom Thread
101039682 20DO11 EQ SUB 2.00 1.752 0.531 1 3/16-14 UN BOX 1 3/16-14 UN PIN 49P415
101039683 20DO13 EQ SUB 2.50 STNLS STD 2.127
0.719 1 9/16-12 UN BOX 1 9/16-12 UN PIN 101062429 (49P242)
101039684 20DO14 EQ SUB 2.50 925/MONEL 2.120
101744576 20DO30 EQ SUB 3.00 9CR
101039687 20DO17 EQ SUB 3.00
2.627 1.156 2-12 UN BOX 2-12 UN PIN
101039686 20DO16 EQ SUB 3.00
101039685 20DO15 EQ SUB 3.00 101062451 (49P850)
101039688 20DO18 EQ SUB 3.50 2.752 2 1/2-12 UN BOX
101039689 20DO19 EQ SUB 4.00 3.500 1.156 2 7/8-12 UN BOX 2-12 UN PIN
101039690 20DO29 EQ SUB 4.00 9CR H2S 3.520 2 1/2-12 UN BOX
21 D Plug Bean Assemblies

21 DO Plug Bean Assembly
Number Number
101040454 21DO14 PLUG BN 1.25 3/4-16 UNF
101011614 21DO9 PLUG BN 1.50 7/8-14 UNF
101040451 21DO1 PLUG BN 2.00 1 3/16-14 UNS
100008556 21DO3 PLUG BN 2.00 1 3/16-14 UNS
101574997 21DO68 PLUG BN 2.50 1 9/16-12 UN
101040456 21DO2 PLUG BN 2.50 1 9/16-12 UN
101040452 21DO11 PLUG BN 2.50 1 9/16-12 UN
100008557 21DO4 PLUG BN 2.50 1 9/16-12 UN
101367556 21DO67 PLUG BN 2.50 9CR H2S 1 9/16-12 UN
101040461 21DO6 PLUG BN 3.00 2-12 UN
101040458 21DO5 PLUG BN 3.00 2-12 UN
101339589 21DO66-ASK PLUG BN 3.00 9CR H2S-ASK 2-12 UN
101040462 21DO61 PLUG BN 3.00 INC-925 2-12 UN
101040463 21DO63 PLUG BN 3.00 MONEL/INC-925 2-12 UN
101040460 21DO59 PLUG BN 3.50 9CR H2S 2 1/2-12 UN
101040459 21DO58 PLUG BN 3.50 9CR H2S 2 1/2-12 UN
101040455 21DO17 PLUG BN 4.00 2 7/8-12 UN
101307159 21DO65-ASB PLUG BN 4.75 IN-725-ASB 2 7/8-12 UN
101040464 21DO64 PLUG BN 6.25 5 1/16-8 SLB
101040457 21DO47 PLUG BN 6.250 5 1/16-8 SLB
74 Slickline I
21 C Plug Bean Assemblies
21 CO Plug Bean Assembly

Number Number
101011613 21CO8 PLUG BN 1.25 3/4-16 UNF

101040437 21CO38 PLUG BN 1.25 9CR STD 3/4-16 UNF
101040438 21CO4 PLUG BN 1.50 7/8-14 UNF
120065503 21CO37 PLUG BN 1.500 9CR H2S 7/8-14 UNF
101040433 21CO1 PLUG BN 2.00 1 3/16-14 UNS
101040434 21CO2 PLUG BN 2.50 1 9/16-12 UN
22288 21CO39 PLUG BN 2.50 STD 1 9/16-12 UN
101040436 21CO36 PLUG BN 3.00 2-12 UN
101040435 21CO3 PLUG BN 3.00 2-12 UN
75 Slickline I
F Collar Type Tubing Stop
33FO Collar Type Tubing Stop

SAP Material Old Material Maximum Running Fish
Description Running Tool Pulling Tool
Number Number OD OD Neck
101015689 33FO3 CLR STP 1.50 1.880 1.310 1.000 101056753 (40SB14) 101056602 (40RB9)
100014900 33FO1 CLR STP 2.00 2.380 1.750 1.375 101009378 (40SB1) 100005947 (40RB17)
100005933 33FO2 CLR STP 2.50 2.810 2.190 1.750 13629 (40SB2) 100005948 (40RB18)
101055950 33FO4 CLR STP 3.00 3.380 2.750 2.313 101009380 (40SB7) 101015084 (40RB56)
101055949 33FO10 CLR STP 4.00 4.250 3.750 2.313 101009380 (40SB7) 101015084 (40RB56)
54852 33FO43 CLR STP 4.50 4.270 3.750 3.125 100005946 (40GS36804) 100005946 (40GS36804)
101230070 33FO44 CLR STP 4.50 4.270 3.750 3.125 100005946 (40GS36804) 100005946 (40GS36804)
101379786 33FO45 CLR STP 7.00 6.565 6.025 4.750 101008835 (40GS56210) 101008835 (40GS56210)
F Slip Type Tubing Stop
13FO Slip Type Tubing Stop

101036780 13FO56 SLIP TBG STP 1.805 1.484 1.187 101056763 (40SB3) 101056763 (40SB3)
101015525 13FO50 SLIP TBG STP 2.00 2.082 1.750 1.375 101009378 (40SB1) 100005947 (40RB17)
101036783 13FO8 SLIP TBG STP 2.50 2.590 2.500 1.750 13629 (40SB2) 13629 (40SB2)
101036781 13FO66 SLIP TBG STP 3.00 3.178 2.720 2.313 13621 (40GS27500) 13621 (40GS27500)
76 Slickline I
D Collar Type Tubing Stop
33DO Collar Type Tubing Stop

Number Description OD OD Running Tool Pulling Tool
Number Neck
101055922 33DO1 CLR STP 2.00 2.250 1.844 1.375 41C82 100009896 (40GS18700)
101055925 33DO3 CLR STP 2.50 2.560 2.281 1.812 41C77 100005945 (40GS23100)
101055923 33DO14 CLR STP 3.00 2.720 2.620 2.313 41C78 13621 (40GS27500)
101014651 33DO4 CLR STP 3.00 2.843 2.620 2.313 41C78 13621 (40GS27500)
101331863 33DO18 CLR STP 4.50 4.160 3.800 3.125 101056965 (41C132) 101008834 (40GR36800)
101055924 33DO20 CLR STP 4.50 4.160 3.800 3.125 101056965 (41C132) 100005946 (40GS36804)
G Slip Type Tubing Stop
13GO Slip Type Tubing Stop

100005840 13GO187 SLIP TBG STP 2.00 2.000 1.840 1.375 101057007 (41GO4) 100009896 (40GS18700)
120017413 13GO310 SLIP TBG STP 2.50 2.520 2.280 1.812 100005945 (40GS23100) 100005945 (40GS23100)
120037690 13GO300 SLIP TBG STP 3.50 3.000 2.550 1.812 41GO12 100005945 (40GS23100)
77 Slickline I
41 G Running Tool
41GO Running Tool

SAP Material Old Material Maximum Fish
Number Number OD Neck
101293650 41GO16 RUN TL 4.50 ALY STD 3.800 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
101057009 41GO9 RUN TL 3.00 ALY STD 2.700 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
E Circulating Plug
15EO Circulating Plug

Number Number Element OD OD Neck
101038694 15EO5 CIRC PLUG 3.00 2.875 2.810 2.313 13565 (40SSJ3) 101009375 (40RS32)
W Circulating Plug
15WO Circulating Plug

Number Number Element OD OD Neck
101038709 15WO5 CIRC PLUG 3.00 3.156 2.700 2.313 13565 (40SSJ3) 101015084 (40RB56)
78 Slickline I
G Packoff Elements
13GO Packoff Elements

SAP Material Old Material MaximumElement Running Minimum Collet
Description Fish Neck
Number Number OD OD ID
100008487 13GO254 ELEM 2.00 2.030 1.840 1.060 100005837 (13G102) 100008488 (13G46)
100005843 13GO253 ELEM 2.00 2.030 1.840 1.060 100005837 (13G102) 100008488 (13G46)
100005844 13GO264 ELEM 2.50 2.476 2.280 1.460 100005838 (13G103) 100005836 (13G64)
100005842 13GO252 ELEM 2.50 2.476 2.280 1.460 100005838 (13G103) 100005836 (13G64)
120017412 13GO301 ELEM 2.50 H2S 2.476 2.280 1.494 100005838 (13G103) 100005836 (13G64)
101036804 13GO262 ELEM 2.50 2.476 2.280 1.500 100005838 (13G103) 100005836 (13G64)
101036807 13GO293 ELEM 3.00 ALY 3.042 2.700 1.700 101036867 (13G493) 101036854 (13G385)
101036817 13GO314 ELEM 3.50 H2S 3.042 2.700 1.700 24721 (13G721) 101036923 (13G720)
101036821 13GO319 ELEM 3.50 3.042 2.710 1.700 101036867 (13G493) 101036854 (13G385)
101036820 13GO317 ELEM 3.50 13CR STD 3.042 2.720 1.700 24721 (13G721) 101036924 (13G722)
101036806 13GO280 ELEM 3.50 STD 3.037 2.840 1.880 101036829 (13G255) 101014609 (13G73)
101036805 13GO278 ELEM 3.50 3.037 2.840 2.000 101036829 (13G255) 101014609 (13G73)
101036812 13GO307 ELEM 4.50 4.100 3.805 2.421 101036889 (13G682) 101036899 (13G694)
101297639 13GO318 ELEM 4.50 4.100 3.805 2.421 101036889 (13G682) 101036899 (13G694)
101036814 13GO311 ELEM 4.50 4.100 3.830 2.794 101036909 (13G705) 101036910 (13G706)
79 Slickline I
Projects
1. Where in the tubing may a slip lock mandrel be set?
2. What are the tubing requirements for setting a collar lock mandrel?
3. What is the differential working pressure of the slip lock mandrels?
4. Will the slip lock mandrel hold pressure from above or below?
5. The primary running tool for slip lock mandrels made by Halliburton is a 41 .
6. After the desired setting depth is reached the slip lock mandrel is set by jarring
to shear the pin in the running tool.
7. Once equalized, the slip lock mandrel is unlocked by jarring (direction) with
a 40 pulling tool.
8. Slip lock mandrels can be used for setting several different flow control devices in the
wellbore, name three (3):
9. The 310DO collar lock mandrel will support a psi differential from both
directions.
10. The running tool necessary to locate and lock a 310DO collar lock mandrel in the wellbore is
a 41 running tool.
11. Once equalized, the 310DO collar lock mandrel is unlocked by jarring
(direction) with a 40 pulling tool.
12. The 321DD bridge plug holds pressure from both directions and is equalized with a 49
equalizing prong attached to the pulling tool.
13. List the four different equalizing valves that can be used with a slip lock mandrel of a given
size:
14. The plug bean assemblies that are used with these equalizing valves are the; 21 &
21 plug assemblies.
80 Slickline I
15. These equalizing valves and plug bean assemblies will hold pressure from above, below, or
both directions?
16. The 15EO and 15WO circulating plugs will hold pressure from above only and must be set
on a tubing stop. True False
17. What is the recommended running tool for circulating plugs?
18. What is the differential pressure rating of the nominal 2” “G” packoff assembly?
19. What is the minimum I.D. through the nominal 2” “G” packoff assembly?
20. The stops that are recommended to be run below the type “G” packoff assembly are the type:
21. What running tool is used to set the collar stop for the “G” packoff assembly?
22. What pulling tool is used to retrieve the collar stop for the “G” packoff assembly?
23. What is the stop specifically recommended to be run above the type “G” packoff assembly?
24. The tool used to run and set the top tubing stop for the “G” packoff assembly is the:
25. When using the type “G” slip stop as the bottom tubing stop, the recommended running tool
is the:
26. What pulling tool should be used to retrieve the type “G” tubing stop?
81 Slickline I
Hands-On Projects
inspection and maintenance of tools and/or equipment of this Section.

10WO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a WO Slip Lock
Lock Mandrel – Reassemble
41WO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a WO Running
Run Tool Tool – Reassemble
10WO Assemble and Pin a 41WO Running Tool onto a
41WO 10WO Lock Mandrel
310DO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a DO Slip Lock
41DO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a DO Running Tool
– Reassemble
Run Tool
310DO Assemble and Pin a 41DO Running Tool onto a
41DO 10DO Lock Mandrel
10WO Assemble a 21DW Plug Assembly, Insure the
20DO equalizing valve is in proper working order and the
21DO plug bean assembly has a good element.
310DO Assemble a 321DD Bridge Plug, Insure that the
321DO shear disk is properly installed.
40RB Prepare the pulling tool necessary for the retrieval of
49P the 21DW Plug Assembly.
40GRL Prepare the pulling tool necessary for the retrieval of
49S the 321DD Bridge Plug.
13GO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a 13GO Packoff –
Packoff Reassemble
41GO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a GO “Quick”-Set
Run Tool Running Tool – Reassemble
13GO Assemble and Pin a 41GO Running Tool onto a
Slip Stop 13GO Slip Stop
41GO
Run Tool
33DO Disassemble, Clean, and Inspect a 33DO Collar
Collar Stop - Reassemble
Stop
33DO Assemble and Pin a 41C Running Tool onto a 33DO
41C Collar Stop
82 Slickline I
SECTION 6
X-LINE EQUIPMENT
X & R Equipment
Table of Contents
Landing Nipples ............................................................................................................................................ 4
Profile Selective Landing Nipples ............................................................................................................. 5
Profile Selective Landing Nipples ............................................................................................................. 5
Running Tool Selective Landing Nipples ................................................................................................. 5
No-Go Selective Landing Nipples............................................................................................................. 6
Applications: ............................................................................................................................................. 7
General: X&R Landing Nipples ................................................................................................................ 8
X & R Lock Mandrels ............................................................................................................................. 10
XN® Landing Nipple and Lock Mandrel................................................................................................ 14
RN® Landing Nipple and Lock Mandrel ................................................................................................ 15
X & R Running Tools ............................................................................................................................. 16
Operation (Fig. 2) ................................................................................................................................ 16
Attaching the Running Tool to the Lock Mandrel: .............................................................................. 18
Disassembly Instructions X-Line Running Tool: ............................................................................ 19
Assembly Instructions X-Line Running Tool: ........................................................................................ 20
RX or RXN Running Tools ..................................................................................................................... 24
RX Running Tool ................................................................................................................................ 24
RXN Running Tool.............................................................................................................................. 27
X® Check Set Tool ................................................................................................................................. 29
X® & R® Equalizing Subs ..................................................................................................................... 30
Plugs ........................................................................................................................................................ 31
Type XX or XXN Plug Assembly ...................................................................................................... 31
Type RR or RRN Plug Assembly ........................................................................................................ 32
Retrieving/Pulling ................................................................................................................................ 33
Type PXX or PRR Plug Assembly ...................................................................................................... 34
Type XR Plug Assmebly ..................................................................................................................... 35
X® Selective Test Tool ....................................................................................................................... 36
Guide to X® and XN® Landing Nipples ............................................................................................ 37
Guide to X® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Tools ................................................................ 37
Guide to XN® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Tools ............................................................. 38
Guide to X® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Prongs .............................................................. 38
Guide to X® Check Set Tools ............................................................................................................. 38
Guide to R® and RN® Landing Nipples ............................................................................................. 39
Guide to R® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Tools ................................................................ 40
Guide to RN® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Tools.............................................................. 41
Guide to R® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Prongs .............................................................. 42
Guide to R® Check Set Tools ............................................................................................................. 43
1 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
X-Line Project ..................................................................................................................................... 44

Hands-On Projects .............................................................................................................................. 46
2 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Landing Nipples
HYDRAULIC
A landing nipple is a short, thick walled section CONTROL LINE
of pipe which is made up as part of the tubing SURFACE-CONTROLLED
string. The landing nipple is machined TUBING-RETRIEVABLE
SAFETY VALVE
internally to provide a locating, locking, and w
/NIPPLE PROFILE
sealing profile. These profiles make it possible
to install and retrieve various flow control SIDE POCKET
devices using slickline services. MANDREL
The outside diameter of a landing nipple is

normally equal to or slightly smaller than the FLOW COUPLING
diameter of the coupling on the tubing that the LANDING NIPPLE
nipple is used with. The minimum internal FLOW COUPLING
diameter of a landing nipple is normally smaller
than the tubing that the landing nipple is used
SIDE POCKET
with. The lengths of landing nipples may vary MANDREL
from approximately six inches up to two feet or
so, depending upon the size and type of landing LINER
HANGER
nipple.
The landing nipples are generally grouped into SIDE POCKET
three (3) distinct categories. These categories MANDREL
are:
SLIDING SIDE-DOOR®
1. Profile Selective CIRCULATING
DEVICE w/NIPPLE
2. Running Tool Selective PROFILE
3. No-Go Selective RH HYDRAULIC-SET

PACKER
CIRCULATING DEVICE
w
/NIPPLE PROFILE
BLAST JOINT
TWB
PERMA-SERIES®
PACKER
NO-GO NIPPLE
w
/NIPPLE PROFILE
Landing Nipples
Figure 1
4 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Profile Selective Landing

Nipples
In a given tubing size and weight range, each of
the Profile Selective landing nipples (Fig. 2)
which are used in that tubing will have:
1. The same minimum internal diameter (ID).
2. The same Locking Profile.
3. The same Packing Bore, (smallest ID).
A Locating Profile in each landing nipple that
will be different from the locating profile in each
of the other nipples. Before installing a control
device in one of the Profile Selective landing
nipples, the lock mandrel used must be equipped
with a Locator Assembly that matches the
Locating Profile of the landing nipple at the
depth it is to be installed.
Running Tool Selective

Landing Nipples
Running Tool Selective landing nipples
(Fig.3) are selected by the Running Tool
which is used to install the lock mandrel and
attached control device in that nipple. Each
“running tool selective” landing nipple of a
given size and type in the tubing string is
identical. This allows an unlimited number
(within reason) of “Running Tool Selective”
landing nipples to be used in a single string.
A Lock Mandrel used for a given size and type
of running tool selective landing nipple can be
in any one of several nipples that may be in a
single tubing string. A separate or different
locator assembly is not required for the lock
mandrel. The running tool is designed to
select the desired nipple and at the same time
activate the locking mandrel so that the
locking keys on the lock mandrel will serve to
locate and lock the locking mandrel in the
selective nipple.
5 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
No-Go Selective Landing

Nipples
No-Go landing nipples have been designed for
used below selective landing nipples and for use
in tapered tubing strings (Fig. 4).
For each size and type of Otis Selective Landing
Nipple (except FBN), there is a compatible No-
Go nipple which may be used in addition to the
selective nipples. If used, the No-Go nipples
must be placed below the selective nipples in the
tubing string. Only one of these No-Go nipples,
of a given size, can be used in a single tubing
string.
No-Go landing nipples have also been designed

for the installation of Wireline Retrievable
Subsurface Safety Valves (SSSV’s) (Fig. 5).
These are generally Top No-Go type nipples
(Top No-Go means that the no-go shoulder is
above the packing bore both on the lock and in
the landing nipple.)
The no-go shoulder insures positive location of
the lock mandrel and SSSV in the landing
nipple. When installing larger sizes of Wireline
Retrievable Safety Valves (WRSV’s), the no-go
shoulder helps support the weight of the lock
and WRSV during the installation procedure.
In larger tubing sizes and highly deviated wells,

no-go landing nipples offer support for
subsurface flow control devices as well as
insuring proper placement of the lock mandrel.
These top no-go landing nipples (Fig. 6) are
placed in the tubing string starting with the
smallest nipple at the bottom and increasing in
sizes with the largest nipple near the surface of
the wellbore. This type of no-go nipple
completion is know as a tapered nipple
completion.
6 Slickline
and work your way up the tubing until the

leak is located.
Applications:
6. Some sliding side doors (SSD’s) are
designed to enable the operator to convert
Landing Nipples and Lock Mandrels have wide their well to gas lift. The sleeve is opened
range of applications during the life of a well. and a lock mandrel/gas lift valve pack-off
The depth or placement of the landing nipple is assemble is installed.
sometimes the determining factor in using it for
well control device installation. Landing nipple 7. Lock mandrels are also used to install pack-
profiles are sometime machined into Sliding off assemblies across tubing leaks.
Side Doors, Tubing Safety Valves, Tubing 8. Lock mandrels with temperature and
Hangers, and Packer Assemblies to increase pressure gauges are installed in the bottom
their application. nipple in the well to record bottom-hole
Landing Nipples and Lock Mandrels are temperature and pressures.
designed to accommodate the following
applications:
This list name most of the common applications
1. Install or re-establish the subsurface safety of landing nipples and lock mandrels, but
system. A WRSV can be run on a lock service personnel, engineering, and operators are
mandrel and install in a SSSSV landing continuously identifying new applications.
nipple. It may also be used to pack off These applications are generally specific to the
across a Tubing Retrievable Safety Valve individual wells.
when required. The control system for the
TRSV will operate the WRSV
2. Plugging the well when moving a
Completion or Workover Rig over or away
from the well or in an Emergency. A plug
could be set quickly in the top nipple to
provide a safety barrier. This plug would
also make it easy to shut-in the well to work
on surface equipment.
3. During workover operations a plug can be
set below the Circulating Device, so that kill
fluids can be circulated and/or displaced
minimizing the possibility of damaging the
formation.
4. Some wells produce wet gas and fluids that
can cause hydrate formation in and around
the surface choke. For these wells, a bottom-
hole choke or regulator can be installed with
a lock mandrel into a landing nipple to
reduce the well pressure. These control
devices are placed in the well at a depth
where the temperature is warm enough to
prevent hydrate formation.
5. There are plugs that can be set in landing
nipples that are used to test the tubing for
leaks. You can start at the bottom nipple
7 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
General: X&R Landing Nipples

Landing nipples that are selective due to the
running tool offer a very high degree of
downhole selectivity for slickline operations. In
this system, an unlimited number (within reason)
of "Running Tool" Selective landing nipples
may be installed as a part of the tubing string
without regard to any specific sequence of
installation.
All Halliburton landing nipples have a single
external groove machined around the
circumference of the nipple near its upper end.
This groove is intended to identify the top of the
nipple and thereby avoid "upside down"
installation of the nipple in the tubing string.
In a given tubing size and weight range, all of
the running tool selective landing nipples (of a
given type) are identical, regardless of the
number of nipples being used. Therefore the
same lock mandrel, without modification, can be
installed (set) in any of the several selective
nipples (of a given type) that may be in the
tubing string.
The running tool that is used to install the lock
mandrel in the nipple, gives the slickline
operator the capability to select and set the lock
mandrel in any one of the several selective
nipples (of a given size and type) that may be in
the tubing string.
The standard Halliburton "Running Tool
Selective" landing nipples and lock mandrels are
separated into two different types. These are:
1. The Halliburton X® nipples (and XO®
locking mandrels) (Fig. 1). The X®
equipment is designed for use in "Standard
Weight" tubing.
2. The Halliburton R® nipples (and RO®
locking mandrels) (Fig. 2). The R®
equipment is designed for use in the heavier
weight ranges of tubing.
8 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
The X® equipment and the R® equipment (Fig. apparent that the R equipment is capable of
3) are similar in appearance except for the supporting greater pressure differentials than the
locking profile in the nipple and the X, from either direction (above or below).
configuration of the locking keys on the lock
mandrels. Note that the packing (seal) bore of
each nipple is located immediately below the
locking profile in the nipple. The internal
diameter of the packing bore of the nipple is the
smallest internal diameter in these selective
nipples.
The type X® nipple (Fig. 4) provides two (2)
bearing surfaces to support the lock mandrel
when the lock mandrel is subjected to a pressure
differential from below.
When the XO® lock mandrel is subjected to a
pressure differential from above, the X® nipple
provides one (1) bearing surface to support the
lock mandrel. This bearing surface is the 90°
up-facing shoulder in the locking profile of the
nipple along with the corresponding 90°
down-facing shoulder on locking keys of the
XO® lock mandrel.
Refer to the R® landing nipple and RO® lock
mandrel. Note the bearing surfaces in the
locking profile of the nipple and on the keys of
the locking mandrel. The R® nipple (Fig. 4)
provides three (3) bearing surfaces to support the
lock mandrel when the lock mandrel is subjected
to a pressure differential from below.
When the RO® lock mandrel is subjected to a
pressure differential from above, the R® nipple
provides two (2) bearing surfaces to support the
locking mandrel, along with the two
corresponding 90° shoulders on the keys of the
RO locking mandrel.
In summary, the X nipple and the XO lock
mandrel have two (2) bearing surfaces to support
a pressure differential from below and only one
(1) bearing surface to support a pressure
differential from above. By comparison, the R
nipples and the RO lock mandrels have three (3)
bearing surfaces to support a pressure
differential from below and two (2) bearing
surfaces to support a pressure differential from
above. It is apparent that both the X equipment
and the R equipment are capable of withstanding
a greater pressure differential from below than
they are from above. Since the R equipment
(nipple & lock mandrel) has an additional
bearing surface in each direction, it is also
9 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
X & R Lock Mandrels

As previously stated the XO lock mandrel is Figure 1 illustrates exploded views of the
designed for use in the X nipple in standard Halliburton XO and Figure 2 illustrates RO
weight tubing and the RO lock mandrel is locking mandrels. The locking mandrels consist
designed for use in the R nipple in heavier of the following components:
weight tubing. The two types of lock mandrels 1. 1-Fishing neck (internal)
(XO & RO) are very similar in construction and
2. 2-Expander sleeve
are identical in function and operation. The
major physical difference between the XO and 3. 3-Key springs (dual acting)
RO lock mandrels is in their dimensions, 4. 4- Keys
number of locking keys (and key springs) and 5. 5-Key retainer sleeve
the configuration of the locking keys.
6. 6-Packing mandrel
The number of keys vary with the size and type
7. 7-Packing assembly (seals)
of lock mandrel. In general the RO lock mandrel
will have more keys than a XO lock mandrel of
a similar, nominal size.
Since the operation of the XO lock mandrel and
the RO lock mandrel is identical, the following
narration applies to both the XO and RO locking
mandrels.
Figure 2
Figure 1
10 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
The use of an internal fishing neck, rather than When the XO lock mandrel is in the set position,
an external fishing neck, allows the lock the fishing neck/expander sleeve assembly has
assembly to be designed with the largest been moved down as far as it will go in the lock
possible internal diameter and therefore offer mandrel. Note that the lower end of the fishing
less restriction in the wells flow path. neck (item 1) has contacted and stopped on the
The fishing neck (item 1 ) provides an internal key retainer sleeve (item 5). The lower, serrated
flange that allows engagement of a pulling tool end of the expander sleeve (item 2) is positioned
to retrieve the lock mandrel from the well. between the locking keys (item 4) to
mechanically prop the keys out into the locking
The expander sleeve (item 2) serves two basic
recess of the landing nipple.
functions in the lock mandrel. These functions
are:
1. to manipulate the key springs (item 3) to
cause the keys to either:
a) retract fully into the key retainer sleeve
(running position) or
b) cause the keys to be expanded to a fully
spring loaded (locating) position.
2. to mechanically lock the keys into the
locking recess in the landing nipples.
Due to the design of the spring grooves in the
expander sleeve (item 2) and the shape of the
key springs (item 3), the keys on the lock
mandrel are fully retracted into the key retainer
sleeve (item 5) when the expander sleeve/fishing
neck assembly is pulled to its uppermost
position in the lock mandrel.
When the expander sleeve/fishing neck
assembly is pushed down (approximately 5/8
in.), the key springs are activated and cause the
keys to move out to an expanded (locating)
position (Fig. 3). In this position, the keys are
spring biased and will locate and stop in the
locking profile of the landing nipple. In this
position the lower end of the expander sleeve
(item 2) is still above the locking keys (item 4).
Running Locating Set

Position Position Position
Figure 3
11 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
In Figure 4, note the non helical serration on the

enlarged, lower end of the expander sleeve (item
2) and the matching serrations on the inner
surface of the locking keys (item 4). When the
lock mandrel locates and stops in the landing
nipple, the internal diameter of the locking
recess in the nipple is large enough to allow the
keys to move outward so that the enlarged
serrated end of the expander sleeve can be
moved down between the keys with minimal
interference. Once the expander sleeve is moved
down between the keys, a sufficient pressure
differential from below the lock mandrel will
move the entire assembly slightly upward in the
nipple so that the beveled bearing surfaces on
the keys are in contact with the beveled bearing
surfaces in the nipple. Due to the angle of these
bearing surfaces, and as a result of a sufficient
pressure differential below the lock mandrel, the
serrations on the inner face of the keys firmly
grip the matching serrations on the expander
sleeve. The greater the differential, the tighter
the keys grip the expander sleeve to prevent the
expander sleeve from being moved up to the
unlocked position by the well's flow. This
arrangement is the primary "hold down" feature
for the expander sleeve in the XO, XN, RO, and
RN lock mandrels.
In some flowing situations, the pressure drop Figure 4
across the control device that is attached to the
lock mandrel may not be sufficient to activate
the primary hold down in the lock mandrel. For
this reason some of these lock mandrels are
designed with an additional, secondary hold
down feature which does not depend upon the
differential pressure to keep the expander sleeve
in the down and locked position.
12 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Figure 5 illustrates the shear pin type secondary of the expander sleeve is forced to pass over the
hold down. The key retainer sleeve of the lock larger O.D. of the "ridge" on the packing
mandrel is grooved vertically near its upper end. mandrel tube. The tube flexes inwardly to allow
Inside, and near each end of the groove, a hole is the small I.D. of the expander sleeve to move
drilled in the remaining wall of the key retainer down past the "ridge" on the tube. With the
sleeve. The lower hole is threaded. The upper expander sleeve in its fully down position, the
hole in the groove accepts a shear pin which is ridge on the tube is in alignment with the
held in place by a flat spring. The spring is internal groove in the expander sleeve. In this
recessed into the groove in the key retainer position, the tube flexes back to its normal
sleeve and is retained in the groove by a cap diameter and traps the expander sleeve in the
screw in the lower, threaded hole. down and locked position. This provides the
When the lock mandrel is in the unlocked "interference" type secondary hold down feature
position, the spring force tends to push the shear that prevents the expander sleeve from being
pin inwardly against the outside diameter of the moved up to the unlocked position by the wells
expander sleeve. The expander sleeve has a flow. When the lock mandrel is to be retrieved,
matching hole immediately below the lower end upward jarring action is required to force the
of the fishing neck of the lock mandrel. When restriction in the lower end of the expander
the expander sleeve is moved down to the sleeve to move up past the "ridge" on the
locked position, the hole in the expander sleeve packing mandrel tube.
aligns with the shear pin. The spring pushes the
end of the shear pin into the hole in the expander
sleeve. In this position, the shear pin locks the
expander sleeve to the key retainer sleeve and
prevents the expander sleeve from being moved
up to the unlocked position by the wells flow.
When retrieving the lock mandrel from the
nipple, upward jarring action shears the pin and
allows the expander sleeve to move up to the
unlocked position.
Figure 5 also illustrates a XO lock mandrel that
has the interference type secondary hold down
feature. In this lock mandrel the design of the
expander sleeve and the design of the packing
mandrel are slightly different from the
"standard" expander sleeve and packing
mandrel. All other components of the lock
mandrel are the same as in the standard lock
mandrel.
Notice the enlarged area (ridge) on the outside
diameter of the packing mandrel tube near its
lower end. Also notice the internal groove in the
lower end of the expander sleeve. The internal
diameter of the groove in the expander sleeve is
larger than the outside diameter of the "ridge" on
the packing mandrel sleeve. But, the internal
diameter of the expander sleeve at the extreme
lower end (below the groove) is smaller than the Figure 5
O.D. of the ridge on the packing mandrel tube.
When the expander sleeve is driven down to the
locked position the smaller I.D. at the lower end
13 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Once the XN lock mandrel is locked in the XN

nipple, any pressure differential applied above
XN® Landing Nipple and Lock the lock mandrel is supported by the no-go
Mandrel shoulder on the equalizing sub resting on the
no-go restriction at the lower end of the nipple.
Figure 1 illustrates the X nipple, XO lock The XN keys on the lock mandrel do not support
mandrel, the XN nipple and XN lock mandrel. any of the differential load applied above the
In appearance the X and XN equipment is very lock mandrel.
similar. The XN nipple has a locking profile that When subjected to a pressure differential from
is identical to the locking profile in the X nipple below, the XN lock mandrel moves slightly
except that the 90° up-facing shoulder that is upward in the nipple until the two beveled, up-
present in the X nipple is machined to a 45° facing bearing surfaces on the XN keys
angle in the XN nipple. This 45° shoulder in the contact the two beveled bearing surfaces in the
XN nipple does not serve as a bearing surface XN nipple. In this respect, with a differential
for the keys of the XN lock mandrel. from below, the XN lock mandrel locks in the
Note that the packing bore of the X and XN XN nipple in exactly the same manner that the
nipples is located immediately below the locking XO lock mandrel locks in the X nipple.
profile. The internal diameter of the packing
bore of the XN nipple is the same as the packing
bore of the X selective nipples that may be in the
same tubing string.
The no-go restriction near the lower end of the
XN nipple is the smallest internal diameter in
the XN nipple. This no-go "shoulder" in the XN
nipple serves as a base to allow the XN lock
mandrel to locate and stop in the nipple. The
no-go shoulder in the nipple also serves as the
bearing surface to support the lock mandrel in
the nipple when a pressure differential is applied
above the lock mandrel.
The XN "no-go" lock mandrel is identical to the
XO selective lock mandrel except that the
configuration of the locking keys is different.
Note that the XN locking key has a beveled
down-facing shoulder where the X locking key
has the 90° down-facing shoulder.
The standard XO equalizing sub must be
attached to the XN lock mandrel. The equalizing
sub provides the no-go feature of the XN lock
mandrel. When the XN lock mandrel is installed
in the XN nipple the no-go shoulder on the
equalizing sub locates on, and will not pass Figure 1
through the no-go restriction in the XN nipple.
When the equalizing sub is stopped on the no-go
restriction in the nipple, the locking keys on the
XN lock mandrel are properly positioned in
alignment with the locking recess in the XN
landing nipple.
14 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
restriction in the RN nipple, the locking keys on

the RN lock mandrel are properly positioned in
RN® Landing Nipple and Lock alignment with the locking recess in the RN
Mandrel landing nipple. Once the RN lock mandrel is
locked in the nipple, any pressure differential
Figure 1 illustrates the RN nipple, the RN lock applied above the lock mandrel is supported by
mandrel, the R nipple and the RO lock mandrel. the no-go shoulder on the equalizing sub resting
The RN no-go equipment differs from the R on the no-go restriction at the lower end of the
selective equipment in the same manner that the RN nipple. The RN locking keys on the RN lock
previously discussed XN no-go equipment mandrel do not support any of the differential
differs from the X selective equipment. load that is applied above the lock mandrel.
The locking profile in the RN no-go nipple is When subjected to a pressure differential from
identical to the locking profile in the R selective below, the RN lock mandrel moves slightly
nipple except that the two 90° up-facing upward in the nipple until the three beveled up-
shoulders that appear in the R nipple have been facing bearing surfaces on the RN keys
machined to a 45° angle in the RN no-go nipple. contact the three beveled bearing surfaces in the
These two 45° shoulders do not serve as bearing RN nipple. In this respect, with a pressure
surfaces for the locking keys of the RN lock differential from below, the RN lock mandrel
mandrel. Note that the packing bore of both the locks in the RN nipple in exactly the same
R and RN nipple is located immediately below manner that the RO lock mandrel locks in a R
the locking profile of each nipple. The internal nipple.
diameter of the packing bore of the RN no-go
nipple is the same as the packing bore diameter
of the R selective nipples that may be in the
same tubing string.
The no-go restriction near the lower end of the
RN nipple is the smallest internal diameter in the
RN nipple. The no-go shoulder in the RN nipple
serves as a base to allow the RN lock mandrel to
locate and stop in the nipple. The no-go shoulder
in the nipple also serves as the bearing surface to
support the RN lock mandrel in the nipple when
a pressure differential is applied above the lock
mandrel.
The RN no-go lock mandrel is identical to the
RO lock mandrel except that the configuration
of the locking key is different. Note that the RN
locking key has two beveled, down-facing
shoulders where the R locking key has two 90°
down-facing shoulders. Except for the two
tapered down-facing shoulders the RN key is
identical to the R key.
The standard RO equalizing sub must be
attached to the RN lock mandrel. The equalizing
sub provides the no-go feature of the RN lock
mandrel. When the RN lock mandrel is installed Figure 1
in the RN nipple, the no-go shoulder on the
equalizing sub locates and will not pass through
the no-go restriction in the RN nipple. When the
equalizing sub is stopped on the no-go
15 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
X & R Running Tools

Operation (Fig. 2)
The Type X® and R® Running Tools (Fig. 1)
are used to run, locate, and set the Halliburton The type X® or R® running tool with X®,
Types X®, XN®, R® and RN® Lock Mandrels XN®, R®, or RN® lock mandrel and sub-
and sub-surface controls in their respective surface controls are made up on a standard
tubing landing nipples. These running tools may slickline tool string and lowered into the well
also be used to locate existing X® and R® with the running tool in the selective position.
Landing Nipples in the tubing string. As the tool string is lowered into the well, each
X® or R® landing nipple of the same size will
be detected as the packing of the lock mandrel
passes through the packing bore of the nipple.
The running tool will hold the locking keys of
the lock mandrel in a retracted position until a
predetermined landing nipple is located. When
this particular landing nipple has been located,
the lock and running tool must pass through the
nipple. The tool string is then raised
approximately five to six feet back through the
nipple. As the running tool is pulled back
through the nipple, the locating dogs will catch
on the bottom end of the landing nipple. An
approximate strain on the slickline of an
additional 200 pounds may be required to pull
the running tool up through the nipple. This
pulling force is transmitted through the locating
dogs on the running tool, which expands the
keys of the lock mandrel. The lock mandrel and
running tool, now in the control position, are
lowered back into the landing nipple. As the
lock mandrel enters the nipple the 90° bearing
surfaces on the spring loaded locking keys will
engage the 90° surface in the landing nipple
profile locating the lock mandrel in the landing
nipple allowing the lock mandrel to be set. The
lock mandrel is mechanically set with downward
jar action.
The downward jar action shears the top pin in
the running tool and allows the expander sleeve
of the lock mandrel to be driven behind the
locking keys forcing them out into the nipple
recess. When the lock is at least 80% set, the
retainer dogs release the Fish Neck of the lock
mandrel. An upward strain on the slickline
(approx. 200# above tool string weight) will
generally confirm that the lock mandrel is set.
After it has been confirmed that the lock
mandrel and control devices are set in the nipple,
upward jar action will shear the bottom pin,
Figure 1
16 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
which is attaching the lower end of the core of As the lock mandrel reaches the No-Go shoulder
the running tool to the lock mandrel, and allow in the landing nipple the tool string will stop,
the running tool and tool string to return to and the lock mandrel may be set in the same
surface. manner as the Types X® and R®.
Note: The no-go restriction designed into the If the operator is unable to locate in the nipple
Types XN® and RN® Landing Nipples will not with the lock mandrel, after going through the
allow the equalizing valve body attached to the procedure to place the running tool in the control
lock mandrel to pass through the nipple. Prior to position, there are several things that could
setting the Type XN® and RN® Lock Mandrels cause this.
it is necessary that the running tool be placed in 1. There could be weak double acting key
the control position before reaching the landing springs on the lock mandrel.
nipple. This must either be done by hand at the
2. There could be worn shoulders on the
surface, or the running tool may be positioned to
running tool inner mandrel, or the locating
the control position in a Type X® or R®
dogs, or both. If these shoulders at Point "A"
Landing Nipple (or proper I.D. packing nipple)
(Fig. 3) are worn off the tool cannot be kept
located in the tubing above the No-Go Nipple.
in the control position.
3. The bottom pin in the running tool may be
sheared. If there has been any upward jar
action as the tool passes the nipple
restrictions above, the bottom pin in the
running tool may have sheared.
Figure 3
Figure 2
17 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Attaching the Running Tool to the

Lock Mandrel:
Place the running tool in the control position. Running Tool in the Select Position:
This is done by placing the top sub in the vise 1. The running tool should be checked on the
and pulling the Dog Retainer Housing towards surface to insure that it will move from the
the bottom of the running tool. This allows the select position to the control position.
Locating Dogs to drop into the recess in the 2. The locator dogs should be fully expanded.
Main Mandrel. At this same time, the lug O.D. checked for proper size.
segments are aligned with the recess in the dog 3. The lock mandrel keys should be fully
retainer housing which permits the lugs to move retracted.
outwardly, releasing the Core, allowing it to
move up and down. Place the X® or R® Lock 4. The shear pins should be braced and cross
Mandrel in its locked position and slide it over punched to insure that they stay in place
the core of the running tool until it shoulders out during the running operation.
on the retainer dog housing. Align and place Running Tool in the Control Position:
shear pin or punch through the packing mandrel 1. The locator dogs should be fully retracted
and core. Hold the fish of the lock mandrel locking the running tool in the control
against the dog retainer housing, grasp the lower position.
end of the lock mandrel and pull them apart. 2. The keys of the lock mandrel should be
With the lock mandrel pinned temporarily to the spring loaded to the locating position.
core, the core is pulled down, forcing the
3. The shear pins should be braced and cross
Retainer Dogs outward and into the fishing neck
punched to insure that they remain in place
of the lock mandrel.
during the running operation. The mandrel
Note: At this time with the running tool in the assembly is now ready to be run.
Control position the lock mandrel should be in
the locating position, which is indicated by the
key springs moving the keys outward (spring
loading the keys of the lock mandrel).
At this time shear pins may be installed. The
shear pins should be cut slightly shorter than the
O.D. of the running tool and braced in place.
Also it is recommended that a punch be used to
cross punch the pin in the core to hold the pin
centered. It is recommended that a brass shear be
used to pin the top sub of the main mandrel sub
assembly to the core, and a steel shear pin be
used to pin the lock mandrel to the core. Place
the tool in the proper position for the job to be
performed.
To insure proper operation of both the running
tool and the lock mandrel the following should
be checked:
18 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Disassembly Instructions
6. Inspect parts, be sure to check the shoulders
X-Line Running Tool: on dogs (10) and main mandrel at Point “A”
(Fig. 2) to see that they are not rounded.
With the running tool in the control position,
place the top sub (1) in the vice with the running
tool in the vertical position. (The top sub and
inner mandrel make up the main mandrel
subassembly), (Care should be taken to avoid
damage to the fish neck on the top sub.)
1. Using a punch, drive retainer pin (2) out of

core and remove the retainer (3). The core
(7) can now be removed. (The fish neck
retainer dogs (13) are free to drop out.)
2. Place the tool in the locating position, this

will relieve spring tension on the threads of
the spring housing (6) and the dog retainer
(9). Unscrew the dog retainer from the
spring housing.
3. Remove the dog retainer assembly [dog

retainer (9), dogs (10) split ring (11) and
spring (8)] from the inner mandrel. The dog
retainer assembly will come apart and the
dogs and split rings may be removed as the
assembly reaches the end of the mandrel.
The spring may be removed by placing a
piece of flat stock (hackshaw blade) on both
ends of the spring, compressing it, turning it
sideways and removing it through the slot.
4. Remove lug segments (12)
5. If inspection and/or replacement of the 200#

spring (5) if necessary, the inner mandrel
can be removed from the top sub. Caution:
The top sub and the inner mandrel are a
matched set if either piece is damaged, both
must be replaced.
19 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Assembly Instructions X-Line 8. Slide dog retainer (9) housing

threads first down over inner mandrel.
Running Tool: Align windows in the dog retainer (9)
housing with windows in inner
mandrel. Slide dog retainer (9) down
1. Place the top sub in a vice in an upright
till the complete spring (8) passes
position. If the mandrel sub assembly
slightly below top of the two longer
(1) was disassembled to inspect and/or
windows in inner mandrel. Now
replace spring (5), slide the spring (5)
insert a hacksaw blade (or a flat stock)
and spring housing (6) onto the inner
through all the windows above the
mandrel. Screw the inner mandrel into
spring (8).
the top sub to a point where the long
slots in inner mandrel align with the
9. Pull dog retainer (9) housing up as far as
slots in the top sub length and width
it will go compressing spring (8) and
wise.
place the handle end of an adjustable
wrench (or flat 1-1/2” wide piece of
2. Temporarily install the retainer (3) and
stock or a file) to hold dog retainer (9)
check to see that it moves freely up and
housing in fully up position.
down the entire length of the slots.
Remove retainer (3) and lay it aside.
10. Place split rings (11) thru the windows
of dog retainer (9) with “notched” side
3. Remove the mandrel sub assembly (1)
toward the lower end of the running tool
from the vice and lay it aside.
or “notched” side facing up. Split rings
(11) fit in beside the end of inner
4. Vice the dog retainer (9) housing in the
mandrel not protruding into the
vice vertically, being careful to vice on
windows.
the housing not the threads, with the
slots fully exposed.
11. 1st locator dog (10) can enter thru
opposite window, placing the “lugs” on
5. Put spring (8) in the dog retainer (9)
locator dog (10) into the “notches” of
housing by use of two pieces of flat
the split rings (11) on far side and set
stock (hacksaw blades) on both ends of
locator dog (10) vertically in that
spring (8). Compressing the spring (8)
window. 2nd locator dog (10) can be
and turning it sideways to the slot in dog
turned side ways and enter thru other
retainer (9) housing. Put spring (8) thru
open window, setting the lugs of the
slot on dog retainer (9) housing, turning
locator dog (10) in the “notches” of split
1/4 turn the blades and spring (8),
rings (11) and setting locator dog (10)
releasing the compression on the spring
vertically in that window.
(8) and remove saw blades.
6. Check spring (8) to make sure spring (8)

will compress and relax freely in the dog
retainer (9) housing and the free ends of
spring (8) are not over lapping on an
adjacent coil. Take dog retainer (9)
housing out of vice and lay side.
7. Put mandrel sub assembly (1) back in
vice up side down, avoid damage to the
fishing neck and threads.
20 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
12. A short 8” piece of pipe or round bar these threads from engaging and making
stock that has O.D. equal or slightly up. In order to engage the threads,
smaller than the O.D. of the inner simply press inwardly on the extreme
mandrel can be used to make the next lower end of both locator dogs (10)
assembly step much easier. Carefully simultaneously and release the upper
insert the pipe through the open end of ends of the locator dogs (10) from the
the dog retainer (9) to hold locator dogs groove in the inner mandrel. This
(10) and split rings (11) in place and set allows the dog retainer (9) assembly to
on the end of the inner mandrel. move down so that the threads of the
dog retainer (9) can engage the threads
13. Place the small lug segments (12) in the in the spring housing (6). Make up the
small windows in inner mandrel just connection hand tight for time being, as
below the adjustable wrench (or flat it will be tightened in a later step.
piece of stock or file). “CAUTION” Check the locator dogs (10) are working
The beveled side of each lug segment freely and spring pushes locator dogs
(12) must face toward the lower end of (10) back in locating position.
the running tool or the lug segment (12)
must be facing up. The lug segments 19. Place the tool now in a horizontal
(12) should be installed so that they are position in the round jaws of the vice
flushed with O.D. of the inner mandrel. with the windows of the inner mandrel
in a perfect vertical position. Vice the
14. With pipe still in place, gently lift the tool at very lower end of the top sub just
dog retainer (9) housing and remove the above spring housing (6). Grasp the
previously installed adjustable wrench spring housing (6) and pull toward the
or file from window of the inner lower end of the tool changing the tool
mandrel. to control position.
15. Allow the dog retainer (9) to move 20. Take the two retainer dogs (13) and put
down on the inner mandrel until it is “square” end through the end of inner
stopped by the hacksaw blade. mandrel, position the retainer dogs (13)
in the “windows” of the inner mandrel.
16. While holding the dog retainer (9) in The “square” end of the retainer dogs
this position, carefully remove the (13) should engage the groove near the
hacksaw blade. end of the dog retainer (9) and set in the
vertical windows.
17. Hold the assembly pipe in place, allow
the dog retainer (9) assembly to move 21. Insert the core (7) slotted end first into
down as far as it will freely go. As the the inner mandrel. It should move
upper ends of the locator dogs (10) pass freely and completely into the mandrel
the upper end of the inner mandrel, the sub assembly.
assembly pipe should be removed and
laid aside. 22. Align the slot in the core (7) with the
slots in the mandrel sub assembly (1)
18. As the dog retainer (9) assembly moves and insert the retainer (3) through the
down over the inner mandrel, the aligned slots. Move the core in and out
upward facing end of the locator dogs to assure that it moves freely through the
(10) will engage and stop in the groove entire length of the slot in the mandrel
in the inner mandrel. This happens just sub assembly (1).
before the pin thread on the dog retainer
(9) housing reaches the box thread in the 23. With the core (7) all the way in mandrel
spring housing (6) and will prevent sub assembly, insert a mild steel pin (2)
21 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
of proper diameter and length [width of

the flat side of the core (7)] through the
access holes of the top sub and pin the
retainer (3) and core (7) together. Once
the pin (2) is installed, this pin (2) must
be flared on each end to assure that it
stays in place. The pin (2) must be of
proper length so that after flaring, the
pin (2) will be flush with or slightly
recessed into the counter sink hole of the
core (7). The core (7) should be tested
to make sure it moves in and out of the
mandrel sub assembly freely.
24. Loosen the vice and move the tool in

vice to the lower end of dog retainer (9)
housing and vice in the round jaws of
the vice. Place a wrench (preferably a
strap or chain wrench) on the extreme
upper end of the spring housing and
tighten the connection only moderately.
“CAUTION” Be careful to avoid
denting or distorting either the spring
house (6) or dog retainer (9) housing.
The tool should be checked to see that
the tool shifts smoothly from select to
control position and core moves in and
out smoothly in control position.
HINT! The core (7) has to be fully
extended outward for the tool to shift to
select position.
22 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
OTIS® X® Running Tool

Running Tool: 41X05 41X06 41X066
SAP Number: 100009646 13622 101009389
Part Description: 1.875 2.313 2.750
1 Main Mandrel Sub 100008722 100005967 101057674
2 Shear Pin 3116 101077868 101077868 101077910
3 Retainer Pi11 100008726 100005954 101057774
4 Shear Pin 114 101077920 101077929 101077941
5 Spring 200# 100009011 100006181 100009012
6 Spring Housing 101057783 100005957 100008729
7 Core 100008724 101057749 101057772
8 Dog Spring 101078526 100006180 101078541
9 Dog Retainer Housing 101057784 100005959 100008730
10 locating Dogs 100005961 100005963 101057851
11 Split Ring 101012287 100005955 101010043
12 lug Segments 100005953 100005956 100008727
13 Fish Neck Dogs 100008728 100005958 101010051
RunningTool: 41X028100 41X015 41X027

SAP Number: 13623 100009658 101057667
Part Description: 2.813 3.813 4.562
1 Main Mandrel Sub 101057674 101057685 101057679
2 Shear Pin 101077907 101078077 101078015
3 Retainer Pi11 101057774 1010 12296 101057703
4 Shear Pin 101077939 101077949 101077952
5 Spring 200# 100009012 100090911 101015264
6 Spring Housing 100008729 101057918 101057704
7 Core 101078541 101012288 101057750
8 Dog Spring 100008730 101078552 101078052
9 Dog Retainer Housing 101010042 101057922 101057705
10 locating Dogs 100008727 101057822 101057706
11 Split Ring 101010043 101017033 101057708
12 lug Segments 101057772 101017032 101057709
13 Fish Neck Dogs 101010051 101057919 101057710
Fish Neck OD@loc.

Tool OD Core OD
OD Dogs
41X
05
-100009646 1375 1.772 1.943 0.960
41X06
1375 2.209 2.380 1.360
13622
41X066
2313 2.720 2.840 1.734
101009389
41X028100
2313 2.733 2.912 1.734
13623
41X015
2313 3.626 3.916 2.610
100009658
41X027
3.125 4.500 4.668 3.110
101057667
X-Line Equipment
RX or RXN Running Tools
The RX or RXN Running Tools are alternative

running tools fro X-Line Equipment which are
being run with no-go’s equipped on the lock
mandrel or when going to the first nipple in the
well with the type ‘X’ or ‘R’ lock mandrels.
The Halliburton Otis® RX Running Tool is a
non-selective running tool designed to set a lock
mandrel utilizing a no-go device, or run a lock
mandrel into the first selective nipple in the
tubing string.
RX Running Tool
The type RX is the original design. This design

requires that the lock mandrel be 100% set to
release.
The running tool can be run in one of two
modes:
First Mode
When used to run a lock mandrel into the first
selective nipple, the core of the running tool is
placed in the 'control' position by installing shear
pins in the lower set of shear pin holes. In the
control position, the keys of the lock mandrel are
spring biased outward.
The lock mandrel and running tool are run in
until the keys locate the nipple profile.
Downward jar action is used to shear the pins
and drive the fish neck and expander sleeve
down to lock the lock mandrel in the nipple and
release the retainer dogs from the fish neck.
When the no-go restriction in the nipple is
An upward strain on the wireline is applied to reached, the no-go on the lock mandrel contacts
confirm that the lock mandrel is correctly locked the restriction thereby halting further downward
within the landing nipple. Upward jar action is movement. Downward jar action is then applied
then applied to shear the pin holding the lock to shear the shear pins and drive the fish neck
mandrel to the running tool, allowing retrieval of and expander sleeve down, thereby locking the
the running tool. lock mandrel and releasing the retainer dogs
Second Mode from the fish neck.
When used to run a lock mandrel utilizing a 'no- An upward strain on the wireline is applied to
go' device, the core of the running tool is placed confirm that the lock mandrel is correctly locked
in the 'no-go' position by installing shear pins in within the landing nipple. Upward jar action is
the upper set of shear pin holes. This allows the then applied to shear the pin holding the lock
lock mandrel to pass through all nipples until the mandrel to the running tool, allowing retrieval of
no-go restriction in the designated nipple is the running tool.
reached.
24 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Attaching the Lock Mandrel to the 10. Install the shear pins (4) in the desired holes
Running Tool in the 'Control' Mode and replace the set screws (5) which hold
Place the running tool in the 'control' position. them in place.
To do so: 11. Replace the top sub (1) on the running tool,
1. Remove the number of set screws (5) applying sufficient torque for the service it
required to expose the desired number of will see.
shear pin (4) holes in the bottom sub (7). 12. Install a new check set shear pin (10) in the
Note: The number of shear pins (4) used to run top sub (1). Replace the set screw (5).
a lock mandrel can vary dependent upon the
degree of difficulty anticipated in driving the
packing groups into their bores and the lock
mandrel into its profile. Two shear pins require
the same setting force as a standard X running
tool. It is recommended that at least two shear
pins be used for top no-go lock mandrels and at
least four shear pins for bottom no-go lock
mandrels.
2. Place the bottom sub (7) in a vise.
3. Remove the top sub (1) from the bottom sub
(7).
4. Push the core (9) up into the bottom sub (7)
until the lock ring segments (2) are exposed.
Ensure that the lock ring segments are on the
larger diameter of the up end of the core. If
they are in the groove below the shear pin
holes, lift them out and place them above the
shear pin holes.
5. Place the lock mandrel in the 'locked' or
'closed' position by pushing down on the fish
neck until it shoulders against the key
retainer sleeve. In this configuration, the
keys are in the expanded or 'locked' position.
6. Slide the lock mandrel up over the core of
the running tool and install shear pins,
attaching the lock mandrel to the running
tool core (9).
7. Push the lock mandrel with running tool
core (9) up until the fish neck of the lock
mandrel abuts the bottom sub (7) of the
running tool.
8. Hold the lock mandrel fish neck in place
while pulling the rest of the lock mandrel
down into the extended position.
9. Push the lock mandrel and running tool core
(9) toward the running tool's bottom sub
until the lower set of shear pin holes in the
core align with the shear pin holes in the
bottom sub (7) [approx. 7/16 in. (11.2 mm)].
25 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Pre-Installation Checks
 The keys of the lock mandrel should be
spring biased toward the expanded or
control position. They should flex freely
from their expanded to retracted position,
inhibited only by the spring force.
 The lower shear pin should be braded and
cross center punched to ensure that it stays
in place during the running operation.
 Ensure that all of the set screws in the
bottom sub have been replaced.
Note: When an RX running tool is collapsed to
its 'closed' position, the core (9) is locked by the
lock ring segments (2). Steps 2, 3, and 4 above
must be repeated before the core is free to move
again.
Post-Installation Checks
• Check that the lock rings (2) have properly
engaged the undercut on the core (9).
26 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
RXN Running Tool
This Halliburton Otis® RXN Running Tool is a

nonselective running tool that is designed to run
and set Halliburton Lock Mandrels.
The Halliburton Otis® RXN Running Tool is
attached to the lock mandrel with the lock
mandrel in the retracted position. The running
tool is attached to the lock mandrel and shear-
pinned, placing the expander sleeve in the fully
extended position. When the expander sleeve is
fully extended, the key springs bias the keys into
the retracted position. With the keys retracted,
the lock mandrel can be lowered and landed on
the no-go shoulder at the top of the landing-
nipple hone diameter.
When the no-go restriction in the nipple is
reached, the shoulder on the lock mandrel butts
the no-go shoulder at the top of the landing-
nipple hone bore, which stops further downward
movement. Downward jarring is then used to
shear the shear pins. Further downward jarring
drives the fish neck and expander sleeve down
to lock the lock mandrel in the nipple and
release the retainer dogs from the fish neck.
Upward jarring determines whether the lock is
locked and shears the lower shear pin to release
the running tool from the lock mandrel.
The retainer dogs on the running tool will not
release the fish neck of the lock mandrel until
the fish neck and expander sleeve have moved at
least 80% of their travel.
27 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Attaching the RXN Running Tool to the

Lock Mandrel
1. Remove the set screw (9) from the retainer
ring (6).
2. Place the lock mandrel in the locked or
closed position by pushing down on the fish
neck until it shoulders against the key
retainer sleeve. In this position, the keys of
the lock mandrel are in the out, or locked,
position.
3. Slide the lock mandrel over the core (8) of
the running tool until the lower shear-pin
holes line up.
4. Install the shear pin to pin the lock mandrel
to the running-tool core (8).
Note Use a full-length shear pin.
5. Push the lock mandrel, with the pinned
running-tool core (8) toward the running
tool, until the fish neck of the lock mandrel
shoulders up against the main mandrel (1) of
the running tool.
6. While holding the lock-mandrel fish neck up
against the running tool, pull the lower end
of the lock mandrel down to the run-in, or
extended, position.
7. Install the upper shear pins (5) in the upper
set of shear-pin holes of the running tool.
8. Align the holes in the retainer ring (6) and
the main mandrel (1). Install the set screw
(9).
9. The lock mandrel and running tool are now
in the no-go, or run-in, position. Ensure that
the keys of the lock mandrel are in the fully
retracted position.
28 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
X® Check Set Tool

The X® Check Set Tool (Fig. 1) is used to
verify whether or not the X®, XN®, R® and
RN® lock mandrels are in their completely
locked position downhole.
In the pinned position, the check set tool is
lowered into the previously set lock mandrel. If
the lock mandrel is in the fully locked position,
the 90° shoulder near the lower end of the prong
of the check set tool will locate and stop on the
upper end of the packing mandrel. The lower
end of the retainer sub of the check set tool will
be above the top of the fishing neck of the lock
mandrel. Downward jarring action will shear the
pin in the check set tool. The sheared pin
verifies that the lock mandrel is fully locked.
When the pinned check set tool is lowered into a
lock mandrel where the fishing neck/expander
tube of the lock mandrel is not already down to
its fully locked position, the lower end of the
retainer sub on the check set will stop on top of
the fishing neck of the lock mandrel. In this
situation, the 90° shoulder near the lower end of
the prong of the check set tool will not reach the
upper end of the packing mandrel extension in
the lock mandrel. Therefore, downward jar
action cannot shear the pin in the check set tool.
When the check set tool is retrieved to the
surface, and the pin is not sheared, it verifies that
the lock mandrel is not fully locked.
Figure 1
29 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
X® & R® Equalizing Subs

The X and R Equalizing Subs are designed to be
installed between their respective lock mandrels
and the control device being used. If the control
device being used is closed, (such as a plug) the
equalizing sub must be in the open position to
allow fluid by-pass through the assembly when
it passes through or into a landing nipple.
A "running" prong attached to the running tool
holds the valve assembly down so that both seals
on the valve are BELOW the ports in the
housing. This allows fluid by-pass through the
"open" ports in the housing.
Once the lock mandrel/control device assembly
is locked in the landing nipple, upward jarring
action releases the running tool from the lock
mandrel. As the running tool and running prong
are pulled up and out of the assembly, the prong
pulls the valve up to the closed position as
shown in the illustration.
When the lock mandrel/control device assembly
is to be retrieved, a "pulling" prong is attached
to the pulling tool. As the pulling tool is lowered
into the lock mandrel, the attached prong stops
on top of the valve of the equalizing sub. Light
downward jarring action moves the valve
downward so that both seals are below the ports
in the housing.
The dimensions and threads of these equalizing
subs make them compatible with their respective
X, XN, R and RN lock mandrels. The enlarged
upper end, on these equalizing subs, serve as the
"no-go" to locate and stop on the internal no-go
restriction in the XN and RN no-go landing
nipples.
Figure 1
30 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Plugs
Several types of plugs are available for use with
the X, XN, R and RN lock mandrels. These
plugs range in application from minimum debris
tolerance to heavy debris tolerance. These plugs
can be used to test tubing, set packers, or isolate
a production zone. There are pump-through
plugs and pump-open plugs. These plugs may
hold pressure differentials from below, above or
both directions.
Type XX or XXN Plug Assembly
Figure 1 illustrates a Type XX or a Type XXN

plug assembly. The Type XX plug consists of a
standard X lock mandrel, a standard X
equalizing sub, and a valve cap (bull plug). The
Type XX plug may be installed in any X
(selective) landing nipple in the well.
The Type XXN plug consists of a standard XN
(no-go) lock mandrel, a standard X equalizing
sub, and a valve cap. (Same equalizing sub and
valve cap as used on XX plug.) The XXN plug
may be set only in the XN "no-go" landing
nipple.
Figure 1
31 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Type RR or RRN Plug Assembly
Figure 2 illustrates the Type RR or a Type RRN

plug assembly. The Type RR plug consists of a
standard R lock mandrel; a standard R
equalizing sub, and a valve cap. The RR plug
may be installed in any R (selective) landing
nipple in the well.
The Type RRN plug assembly consists of a
standard RN lock mandrel, a standard R
equalizing sub, and a valve cap. (Same
equalizing sub and valve cap as used on the RR
plug.) The RRN plug may be set only in the RN
"no-go" landing nipple.
Figure 2
32 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Retrieving/Pulling
When retrieving these plugs, an equalizing

(pulling) prong (Fig. 3) must be attached to the
GR pulling tool in order to "open" the equalizing
valve. Once the equalizing valve is open, time
must be allowed for complete equalization of
any pressure differential (from above or below)
before attempting to unlock and retrieve the plug
assembly.
Note: A type GS pulling tool may be used to
retrieve the plug assembly, but only after it has
been equalized on a prior trip and without the
equalizing prong.
Caution: The equalizing prong may prevent the
operator having the ability to shear the pin in the
GS, should it become necessary.
Figure 3
33 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
housing are isolated between the upper and

Type PXX or PRR Plug Assembly lower seals on the prong and the tubing is
plugged in both directions.
Figure 4 illustrates a Type PXX or a Type PRR Two slickline trips are required to retrieve this
equalizing assembly. These assemblies are a plug assembly. First, the prong is retrieved. This
more recent and improved design. The allows equalization of any pressure differential
improvements are: across the plug assembly. A second slickline trip
1. The prong housing for PXX and PRR is required to retrieve the lock mandrel/prong
equalizing assemblies is of "one piece" housing assembly.
construction and does not require a valve This type of plugging device is designed for use
cap. in wells where sand or other sediment may settle
2. The prong housing has four equalizing ports into or around the plugging device.
with three of the ports being threaded to
accept plugs. This allows the user to select
the number of ports best suited to the well
conditions that the assembly is to be used in.
The older PX and PR prong housings have
only two unthreaded equalizing ports.
The PXX equalizing assembly is used on the
standard X and XN lock mandrels. The PRR
equalizing assembly is used on the standard R
and RN lock mandrels.
This assembly could represent a PXX, PXN
PRR or PRN plug assembly, dependent upon the
lock mandrel being used. (X, XN, R. or RN).
These plug assemblies are used to plug the
tubing in both directions (from above and
below).
Two slickline trips are required to run the plug
and two trips are required to pull the plug. First
the prong housing and valve cap are made up to
the appropriate lock mandrel.
This assembly (lock mandrel and valve housing)
is run into the well and is installed in the
appropriate landing nipple (X, XN, R or RN). A
running prong is not required because the
equalizing ports in the prong housing are open to
provide fluid by-pass up through the assembly.
A second slickline trip is required to run and
install the prong in the previously installed
assembly. As the lower set of seals on the prong
enter the seal bore in the prong housing, any
fluid in the housing and valve cap is allowed to
displace up through the bore of the prong and
out through the side ports in the prong, above
the seals. Light downward jar action moves the
prong down until a no go shoulder on the prong
stops on an internal shoulder in the prong
housing. At this point the ports in the prong
Figure 4
34 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Type XR Plug Assmebly
Figure 5 illustrates the XR Plug. The XR

Pump-Through Plug is designed to hold a
pressure differential from below only. It can be
pumped through by applying pressure above the
plug to overcome well pressure, allowing kill
fluids to be pumped through the plug to kill the
well. One slickline trip is required to run or pull
the plug.
The XR Pump-Through Plugs, with the
appropriate equalizing sub, are made up on the
Halliburton X, XN, R or RN Lock Mandrels and
are installed in the X, XN, R or RN landing
nipples.
Figure 5
35 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
X® Selective Test Tool
Figure 6 illustrates the X Selective Test Tool.

This tool is essentially a plug that only holds
pressure from above only and can be used to
pressure test tubing, set a hydraulic packer, and
assist in locating tubing leaks.
With the keys retracted, the test tool may be run
down through any number of X Selective
nipples to a point below the desired nipple. As
the test tool is pulled back up through the
desired nipple, the tool is activated so that the
keys are released from their retracted position to
an expanded, spring loaded position. As the test
tool is lowered back into the nipple, the spring
biased keys will locate and stop in the landing
nipple. The keys on the test tool do not lock into
the nipple. They simply locate in the locking
profile of the nipple to allow the test tool to
support a differential pressure from above. Upon
completion of the pressure test, the test tool can
be pulled up through and lowered back into any
or all X selective nipples that may be in the
tubing string above the initial test depth.
With the test tool keys retracted, as in Fig. 8, the
test tool can be lowered down through all of the
X selective nipples until it reaches the XN No-
Go nipple, which is normally located near the
end of the tubing, below the selective nipples.
The no-go shoulder on the test tool will locate
and stop on the no-go restriction in the XN
nipple. In this case, the pressure differential
applied above the test tool will be supported by
the no-go and not by the keys. Upon completion
of this pressure test, and when the test tool is
pulled out of the XN nipple, the retracted keys
on the test tool are activated to their spring
biased, expanded position. The test tool can now
be pulled up through and then lowered back into
each X selective landing nipple for pressure
testing as it is retrieved to the surface.
Figure 6
36 Slickline
Guide to X® and XN® Landing Nipples
Otis® X® and XN® Landing Nipples

11X* 711X* 11XN* 711XN*
For Standard Tubing Weights
Tubing
X® Profile XN® Profile
Size Weight ID Drift Packing Bore Packing Bore No-Go ID
in. mm lb/ft kg/m in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
2.3 3.42
1.66 42.16 1.38 35.05 1.286 32.66 1.25 31.75 1.25 31.75 1.135 28.83
2.4 3.57
2.4 3.57 1.66 42.16
1.9 48.26 2.76 4.11 1.516 38.51 1.5 38.1 1.5 38.1 1.448 36.78
1.6 40.89
2.9 4.32
2.063 52.4 3.25 4.84 1.751 44.48 1.657 42.09 1.625 41.28 1.625 41.28 1.536 39.01
4.6 6.85
2.375 60.33 1.995 50.67 1.901 48.29 1.875 47.63 1.875 47.63 1.791 45.49
4.7 6.99
6.4 9.52
2.875 73.03 2.441 62 2.347 59.61 2.313 58.75 2.313 58.75 2.205 56.01
6.5 9.67
9.3 13.84 2.992 76 2.867 72.82 2.813 71.45 2.813 71.45 2.666 67.72
3.5 88.9
10.2 15.18 2.922 74.22 2.797 71.04 2.75 69.85 2.75 69.85 2.635 66.93
4 101.6 11 16.37 3.476 88.29 3.351 85.1 3.313 84.15 3.313 84.15 3.135 79.63
4.5 114.3 12.75 18.97 3.958 100.53 3.833 97.36 3.813 96.85 3.813 96.85 3.725 94.62
5 127 13 19.35 4.494 114.14 4.369 110.97 4.313 109.55 4.313 109.55 3.987 101.27
5.5 139.7 17 25.3 4.892 124.26 4.767 121.06 4.562 115.87 4.562 115.87 4.455 113.16
Guide to X® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Tools
10XO Locks - Running & Pulling Tools

Lock Lock Fish
Short Desc Running Tool Pulling Tool
Number ID Neck
10XO125** LOCK MDRL,1.250 0.625 100014705 (41XO9) 101056251 (40GR12500) 0.880
10XO150** LOCK MDRL,1.500 0.750 101057665 (41XO13) 101056253 (40GR15000) 1.060
10XO162** LOCK MDRL,1.625 0.750 120057732 (41XO20) 101056253 (40GR15000) 1.060
10XO187** LOCK MDRL,1.875 1.000 100009646 (41XO5) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10XO231** LOCK MDRL,2.313 1.375 13622 (41XO6) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10XO235** LOCK MDRL,2.350 1.375 120057733 (41XO23500) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10XO275** LOCK MDRL,2.750 1.750 101009389 (41XO66) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10XO281** LOCK MDRL,2.813 1.750 13623 (41XO28100) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10XO287** LOCK MDRL,2.875 1.750 101057683 (41XO67) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10XO331** LOCK MDRL,3.313 2.120 101010040 (41XO25) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
10XO368** LOCK MDRL,3.688 2.380 101012266 (41RO36801) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10XO381** LOCK MDRL,3.813 2.620 100009658 (41XO15) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10XO128** LOCK MDRL,4.125 2.750 100005966 (41RO41201) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10XO431** LOCK MDRL,4.313 2.620 101012268 (41RO43103) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10XO456** LOCK MDRL,4.562 3.120 101057667 (41XO27) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
37 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Guide to XN® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Tools
10XN Locks - Running & Pulling Tools

Lock Lock Fish
Number ID Neck
10XN125** LOCK MDRL,1.250 0.625 100014705 (41XO9) 101056251 (40GR12500) 0.880
10XN150** LOCK MDRL,1.500 0.750 101057665 (41XO13) 101056253 (40GR15000) 1.060
10XN162** LOCK MDRL,1.625 0.750 120057732 (41XO20) 101056253 (40GR15000) 1.060
10XN187** LOCK MDRL,1.875 1.000 100009646 (41XO5) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10XN231** LOCK MDRL,2.313 1.375 13622 (41XO6) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10XN238** LOCK MDRL,2.380 1.375 13622 (41XO6) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10XN275** LOCK MDRL,2.750 1.750 101009389 (41XO66) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10XN281** LOCK MDRL,2.813 1.750 13623 (41XO28100) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10XN285** LOCK MDRL,2.850 1.560 101057190 (41RXN27501) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10XN287** LOCK MDRL,2.875 1.750 101057683 (41XO67) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10XN331** LOCK MDRL,3.313 2.120 101010040 (41XO25) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
10XN381** LOCK MDRL,3.813 2.620 100009658 (41XO15) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10XN431** LOCK MDRL,4.313 2.620 101012268 (41RO43103) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10XN456** LOCK MDRL,4.562 3.120 101057667 (41XO27) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
Guide to X® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Prongs
20XO Run/Pull Equalizing Prongs
Size Running Prong Pulling Prong

1.250 101062526 (49Q626) 101062441 (49P627)
1.500 101062479 (49Q1323) 101062477 (49QO37)
1.625 101062480 (49Q1324) 101062477 (49QO37)
1.875 101010091 (49Q496) 100010514 (49QO35)
2.313 101010092 (49Q505) 13624 (49QO44)
2.750 13626 (49Q599) 13628 (49QO43)
2.813 13626 (49Q599) 13628 (49QO43)
2.875 13626 (49Q599) 13628 (49QO43)
3.313 101009434 (49P762) 101009435 (49P763)
3.813 101009433 (49P640) 101012512 (49P641)
4.562 101062447 (49P805) 101062456 (49P944)
Guide to X® Check Set Tools
X-Line Check-Set Tools

Mat/Part Number Tool Number Short Desc
101057657 41XC1 CHK SET TL,2.813 SPEC F/ LOCK MDL 10XN28161
100009701 41XC1870 CHK SET TL,1.88
100009702 41XC2310 CHK SET TL,2.31
100009703 41XC2750 CHK SET TL,2.75
101634064 41XC3130 CHK SET TL,3.313,2.313,FISH NECK
100009704 41XC3810 CHK SET TL,3.81
101057660 41XC4120 CHK SET TL,4.125
101057661 41XC4561 CHK SET TL,4.562
38 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Guide to R® and RN® Landing Nipples
Otis® R® and RN® Landing Nipples

11R* 711R* 11RN* 711RN*
For Heavy Tubing Weights
Tubing
R® Profile RN® Profile
Size Weight ID Drift Packing Bore Packing Bore No-Go ID
in. mm lb/ft kg/m in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
1.900 48.26 3.64 5.42 1.500 38.10 1.406 35.71 1.375 34.93 1.375 34.93 1.250 31.75
5.3 7.89 1.939 49.25 1.845 46.86 1.781 45.24 1.781 45.24 1.640 41.66
5.95 8.85 1.867 47.42 1.773 45.03
2.375 60.33 1.710 43.43 1.710 43.43 1.560 39.62
6.2 9.23 1.853 47.07 1.759 44.68
7.7 11.46 1.703 43.26 1.609 40.87 1.500 38.10 1.500 38.10 1.345 34.16
7.9 11.76 2.323 59.00 2.229 56.62 2.188 55.58 2.188 55.58 2.010 51.05
8.7 12.95 2.259 57.38 2.165 54.99
2.125 53.98 2.125 53.98 1.937 49.20
8.9 13.24 2.243 56.97 2.149 54.58
2.875 73.03 9.5 14.14 2.195 55.75 2.101 53.37
2.000 50.80 2.000 50.80 1.881 47.78
10.4 15.48 2.151 54.64 2.057 52.25
11 16.37 2.065 52.45 1.971 50.06
1.875 47.03 1.875 47.03 1.716 43.59
11.65 17.34 1.995 50.67 1.901 48.29
12.95 19.27 2.750 69.85 2.625 66.68 2.562 65.07 2.562 65.07 2.329 59.16
15.8 23.51 2.548 64.72 2.423 61.54
3.500 88.90 2.313 58.75 2.313 58.75 2.131 54.13
16.7 24.85 2.480 62.99 2.355 59.82
17.05 25.37 2.440 61.98 2.315 58.80 2.188 55.58 2.188 55.58 2.010 51.05
11.6 17.26 3.428 87.08 3.303 83.90 3.250 82.55 3.250 82.55 3.088 78.44
4.000 101.60
13.4 19.94 3.340 84.84 3.215 81.66 3.125 79.38 3.125 79.38 2.907 73.84
12.8 18.97 3.958 100.53 3.833 97.36 3.813 96.85 3.813 96.85 3.725 94.62
13.5 20.09 3.920 99.57 3.795 96.39
3.688 93.68 3.688 93.68 3.456 87.78
4.500 114.30 15.5 23.07 3.826 97.18 3.701 94.01
16.9 25.50 3.754 95.35 3.629 92.18
3.467 87.30 3.467 87.30 3.260 82.80
19.2 28.57 3.640 92.46 3.515 89.28
15 22.32 4.408 111.96 4.283 108.79 4.125 104.78 4.125 104.78 3.912 99.39
5.000 127.00
18 26.79 4.276 108.61 4.151 105.44 4.000 101.60 4.000 101.60 3.748 95.20
17 25.30 4.892 124.26 4.767 121.08
4.562 115.87 4.562 115.87 4.445 113.16
5.500 139.70 20 29.76 4.778 121.36 4.653 118.19
23 34.23 4.670 118.62 4.545 115.44 4.313 109.55 4.313 109.55 3.987 101.27
15 22.32 5.524 140.31 5.399 137.13
6.000 152.40 5.250 133.35 5.250 133.35 5.018 127.51
18 26.79 5.424 137.77 5.299 134.59
24 35.72 5.921 150.39 5.795 147.22
6.625 168.28 5.625 142.88 5.625 142.88 5.500 139.70
28 41.67 5.791 147.09 5.666 143.92
17 25.30 6.538 166.07 6.431 163.35
20 29.76 6.456 163.98 6.331 160.81
23 34.23 6.366 161.70 6.241 158.52
5.963 151.46 5.963 151.46 5.770 146.55
7.000 177.80 26 38.69 6.276 159.41 6.151 156.24
29 43.16 6.184 157.07 6.059 153.90
32 47.62 6.094 154.79 5.969 151.61
35 52.09 6.004 152.50 5.879 149.33 5.875 149.23 5.875 149.23 5.750 146.05
7.050 179.07 7.050 179.07 6.925 175.90
8.625 219.08 36 53.57 7.825 198.76 7.700 195.58 7.250 184.15 7.250 184.15 7.125 180.98
7.450 189.23 7.450 189.23 7.325 186.06
39 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Guide to R® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Tools
RO Locks - Running & Pulling Tools

Lock Lock Fish
Number ID Neck
10RO150** LOCK MDRL,1.500 0.620 101057168 (41RO15001) 101056253 (40GR15000) 1.060
10RO171** LOCK MDRL,1.710 0.750 101057170 (41RO17101) 101056253 (40GR15000) 1.060
10RO178** LOCK MDRL,1.781 0.880 101057171 (41RO17801) 100008669 (40GR17800) 1.380
10RO187** LOCK MDRL,1.875 0.880 101010689 (41RO18701) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10RO194** LOCK MDRL,1.940 0.880 101010689 (41RO18701) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10RO200** LOCK MDRL,2.000 0.880 101057175 (41RO20001) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10RO212** LOCK MDRL,2.125 0.880 100005964 (41RO21201) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10RO218** LOCK MDRL,2.188 1.120 100005965 (41RO21801) 100008670 (40GR21800) 1.812
10RO231** LOCK MDRL,2.313 1.125 13568 (41RO23101) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10RO238** LOCK MDRL,2.380 1.125 13568 (41RO23101) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
710RO250** LOCK MDRL,2.500 1.120 120057702 (41RO25000) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10RO256** LOCK MDRL,2.562 1.380 101015712 (41RO25601) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10RO275** LOCK MDRL,2.750 1.500 25383 (41RO27500) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10RO281** LOCK MDRL,2.813 1.500 101010024 (41RO28100) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10RO287** LOCK MDRL,2.875 1.500 22372 (41RO28701) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10RO312** LOCK MDRL,3.125 1.940 101010025 (41RO31201) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
10RO325** LOCK MDRL,3.250 1.940 101057177 (41RO32500) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
10RO343** LOCK MDRL,3.437 1.940 120098946 (41RO34302) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
710RO363** LOCK MDRL,3.630 3.000 101010027 (41RXN31250) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
10RO368** LOCK MDRL,3.688 2.380 101012266 (41RO36801) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RO375** LOCK MDRL,3.750 2.120 101461313 (41RO37500) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RO381** LOCK MDRL,3.813 2.120 101012267 (41RO38101) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RO383** LOCK MDRL,3.833 2.120 101012267 (41RO38101) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RO400** LOCK MDRL,4.000 2.380 101057179 (41RO40002) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RO412** LOCK MDRL,4.125 2.750 100005966 (41RO41201) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RO431** LOCK MDRL,4.313 2.750 100005966 (41RO41201) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RO443** LOCK MDRL,4.437 2.620 101012268 (41RO43103) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RO452** LOCK MDRL,4.525 2.850 101012270 (41RO45600) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
10RO456** LOCK MDRL,4.562 2.850 101012270 (41RO45600) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
10RO481** LOCK MDRL,4.813 3.120 120057706 (41RO48100) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
10RO600** LOCK MDRL,6.000 3.750 101009387 (41RX59610) 101056272 (40GR59600) 5.380
40 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Guide to RN® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Tools
10RN Locks - Running & Pulling Tools

Lock Lock Fish
Number ID Neck
10RN137** LOCK MDRL,1.375 0.620 101057166 (41RO13700) 101056251 (40GR12500) 0.880
10RN150** LOCK MDRL,1.500 0.620 101057168 (41RO15001) 101056253 (40GR15000) 1.060
10RN171** LOCK MDRL,1.710 0.750 101057170 (41RO17101) 101056253 (40GR15000) 1.060
10RN178** LOCK MDRL,1.781 0.880 101057171 (41RO17801) 100008669 (40GR17800) 1.380
10RN187** LOCK MDRL,1.875 0.880 101010689 (41RO18701) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10RN200** LOCK MDRL,2.000 0.880 101057175 (41RO20001) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10RN212** LOCK MDRL,2.125 0.880 100005964 (41RO21201) 100009894 (40GR18700) 1.380
10RN218** LOCK MDRL,2.188 1.120 100005965 (41RO21801) 100008670 (40GR21800) 1.812
10RN231** LOCK MDRL,2.313 1.125 13568 (41RO23101) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10RN238** LOCK MDRL,2.380 1.125 13568 (41RO23101) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10RN256** LOCK MDRL,2.562 1.380 101015712 (41RO25601) 100009893 (40GR23100) 1.812
10RN275** LOCK MDRL,2.750 1.500 25383 (41RO27500) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10RN300** LOCK MDRL,3.000 1.500 (41RX12) 100008671 (40GR27500) 2.310
10RN312** LOCK MDRL,3.125 1.940 101010025 (41RO31201) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
10RN325** LOCK MDRL,3.250 1.940 101057177 (41RO32500) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
10RN343** LOCK MDRL,3.437 1.940 120098946 (41RO34302) 101056259 (40GR31200) 2.620
10RN368** LOCK MDRL,3.688 2.380 101012266 (41RO36801) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RN381** LOCK MDRL,3.813 2.120 101012267 (41RO38101) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RN400** LOCK MDRL,4.000 2.380 101057179 (41RO40002) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RN412** LOCK MDRL,4.125 2.750 100005966 (41RO41201) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RN431** LOCK MDRL,4.313 2.620 101012268 (41RO43103) 101008834 (40GR36800) 3.120
10RN456** LOCK MDRL,4.562 2.850 101012270 (41RO45600) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
10RN475** LOCK MDRL,4.750 3.120 101057184 (41RO47500) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
10RN481** LOCK MDRL,4.813 3.120 120057706 (41RO48100) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
10RN525** LOCK MDRL,5.250 3.500 101057200 (41RXN52550) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
10RN571** LOCK MDRL,5.710 3.500 (41RX57110) 100008672 (40GR45600) 4.000
10RN625** LOCK MDRL,6.250 3.750 101009387 (41RX59610) 101056272 (40GR59600) 5.380
10RN812** LOCK MDRL,8.125 5.870 (41RX81210) 120057507 (40 GS81200) 7.120
10RN837** LOCK MDRL,8.375 6.120 120098974 (41RX83710) 120057507 (40GS81200) 7.120
41 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Guide to R® Lock Mandrels – Running and Pulling Prongs
20RO Run/Pull Equalizing Prongs
Size Running Prong Pulling Prong

1.375 101062516 (49Q1584) 101062441 (49P627)
1.500 101062478 (49Q1150) 120074252 (49Q1576)
1.710 101062480 (49Q1324) 101062477 (49QO37)
1.781 100008850 (49P793) 100008851 (49QO78)
1.875 100008850 (49P793) 100008851 (49QO78)
2.000 100008850 (49P793) 100008851 (49QO78)
2.125 100008850 (49P793) 100008851 (49QO78)
2.188 101009436 (49Q1325) 100008852 (49QO81)
2.313 101009436 (49Q1325) 100008852 (49QO81)
2.500 101009436 (49Q1325) 100008852 (49QO81)
2.562 13625 (49Q1056) 13624 (49QO44)
2.750 101010093 (49Q813) 101010089 (49QO85)
2.813 101010093 (49Q813) 101010089 (49QO85)
2.875 101010093 (49Q813) 101010089 (49QO85)
3.000 (49Q1477) (49QO178)
3.125 101010088 (49P882) 101010087 (49P881)
3.250 101010088 (49P882) 101010087 (49P881)
3.437 101010088 (49P882) 101010087 (49P881)
3.630 101010088 (49P882) 101010087 (49P881)
3.688 101012514 (49P826) 101012515 (49P827)
3.813 101009434 (49P762) 101062280 (49P1147)
3.875 101062279 (49P1146) 101062280 (49P1147)
4.000 101012514 (49P826) 101012515 (49P827)
4.125 101009426 (49P1012) 101009427 (49P1148)
4.313 101009433 (49P640) 101012512 (49P641)
4.562 101062300 (49P1476) 101062302 (49P1477)
4.750 101062447 (49P805) 101062456 (49P944)
4.813 101062447 (49P805) 101062456 (49P944)
5.625 101012516 (49P970) 101012517 (49P971)
5.710 101012516 (49P970) 101012517 (49P971)
5.813 101309442 (49P2068) 101309443 (49P2069)
5.875 101009430 (49P1918) 101009431 (49P1919)
5.963 (49P1931) (49P1932)
6.250 101009429 (49P1295) 101009428 (49P1156)
6.500 101009429 (49P1295) 101009428 (49P1156)
7.050 (49P1626) (49P1627)
7.250 (49P1626) (49P1627)
7.450 (49P1626) (49P1627)
8.375 (49P1872) (49P1873)
8.500 (49P1872) (49P1873)
42 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Guide to R® Check Set Tools
R-Line Check-Set Tools

Mat/Part Number Old Mat/Ref Number Short Desc
101492486 41RC1870 CHK SET TL,R,1.875,ALY
not available 41RC2120 CHK SET TL,2.125
101405231 41RC2180 CHK SET TL,2.188
101410317 41RC2181 CHK SET TL,2.188
101057164 41RC2750 CHK SET TL,2.750 2.313 FSH NECK
101277927 41RC3680 CHK SET TL,3.688,2.313,FSH NECK
101507443 41RC3810 CHK SET TL,3.813, R
101278937 41RC4310 CHK SET TL,F/ 4.313 R LOCK MDRL
101278594 41RC4560 CHK SET TL,F/ 4.562 R LOCK MDRL
101278885 41RC5870 CHK SET TL,5.875,3.130,FSH NECK
43 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
X-Line Project
1. In a given tubing size and weight range, the locking and the packing
remain the same the Type “X” or “R” Landing Nipples.
2. What equipment item allows the operator to select a particular “X” or “R” nipple for setting a
lock mandrel in?
3. How many “X” landing nipple may be run in a tubing string?
4. What are the three (3) positions of a Type “X” Lock Mandrel, during the running and setting
operation?
a.
b.
c.
5. What are the two (2) positions of the Type “X” Running Tool, during the running and setting
operation?
a.
b.
6. When selectively setting a “X” Lock Mandrel in the third nipple in the well the running tool
must be in the position, when starting into the well.
7. After the landing nipple has been reached the operator passes down through the nipple, then
pull the tools back up above the nipples to change the position of the running tool. This
action shifts the running tool into the position.
8. When pinning the “X” lock mandrel onto the “X” running tool, the top pin passes through the
main mandrel sub-assembly and the core of the running tool. The bottom pin passes through
the packing mandrel of the lock and the core of the running tool.
a. When the running tool is placed in the selective position, is the top pin protected from
shearing?
b. When the running tool is in the controlled (non-selective) position is the top pin protected
from shearing?
c. Will upward jarring cause the bottom pin to shear permanently?
9. The primary purpose of the 200 pound spring in the “X” Running Tool is to hold the tool in
the position.
44 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
10. When running a “XN” lock with a “X” running tool, the running tool must be in the
position when the “XN” Nipple is reached.
11. What running prong is necessary when running a “XX” Plug Assembly?
12. What is the recommended pulling tool used to unlock and retrieve the “XX” plug assembly?
13. Give two reasons why the recommended pulling tool should be used:
a.
b.
14. What pulling prong is necessary to equalize the “XX” plug assembly for pulling?
15. Is it necessary to install a running prong on the “X” running tool when running the lock
mandrel for a “PXN” plug assembly?
16. What is the recommended tool for running and retrieving the equalizing prong for a “PXN”
plug assembly?
17. What is the recommended running tool for running and setting the “X” selective test tool?
45 Slickline
X-Line Equipment
Hands-On Projects
This page is used to check the individuals ability to perform the disassembly, assembly, repining, inspection and

10XO Disassemble/Reassemble Clean and Inspect a
Lock Selective Lock Mandrel
41XO Disassemble/Reassemble Clean and Inspect a `XO`
RunTool Selective Running Tool
10XO Assemble and Pin a 41XO Running Tool onto a
41XO 10XO Lock Mandrel
10RO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a “N” No-Go Lock
10XO Assemble a XX Plug Assembly, Insure the
20XO equalizing valve is in proper working order. Pin to
20R a 41XO Running Tool using the Proper Prong.
10XO Assemble a 24PXX Plug Assembly, Insure that the
24PXX 24PXX prong assembly is properly assembled and
that the packing is in good condition. Make up the
recommended running tool for the lock and prong.
40GR Prepare the pulling tool necessary for the retrieval of
49QO the XX Plug Assembly.
40GR Prepare the pulling tools necessary for the retrieval
40SB of the 24PXX Plug Assembly.
41RX
Disassemble/Reassemble Clean and Inspect a `RX`
Selective Running Tool
41RXN
Disassemble/Reassemble Clean and Inspect a
`RXN` Selective Running Tool
46 Slickline
SECTION 7
RELATED X-LINE EQUIPMENT
RQ & RP LOCK MANDRELS

RPT NIPPLE & LOCK MANDREL
FBN NIPPLE & LOCK MANDREL
SAFETY-SET SYSTEM
SOFT-SET GAUGE HANGER
RQ, RP, RPT, FBN Nipples &
Locks, Safety Set Locks and
Gauge Hangers
Table of Contents
Introduction Landing Nipples and Locks for Larger Tubing Sizes............................................................... 3
Type RQ® Landing Nipple and Lock Mandrel. ........................................................................................ 3
Type RQ® Landing Nipple and Lock Mandrel. ........................................................................................ 4
Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 5
With No-Go Ring in Place ..................................................................................................................... 5
With No-Go Ring Removed .................................................................................................................. 5
Type RP® Landing Nipple and Lock Mandrel ......................................................................................... 6
Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 7
With No-Go Ring in Place (Keys Retracted) ......................................................................................... 7
With No-Go Ring in Place (Keys Expanded) ........................................................................................ 7
RPT™ High Pressure No-Go Lock System .............................................................................................. 8
Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 9
RPT™ Plugs ............................................................................................................................................ 10
Collet Valve Plug................................................................................................................................. 10
Prong Plug ........................................................................................................................................... 11
RPT™ or RPV™ ..................................................................................................................................... 12
Full Bore Nipple (FBN™) Landing Nipple/Lock Mandrel System ........................................................ 13
Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 14
Otis® SAFETYSET® Lock Mandrel System......................................................................................... 16
Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 16
Options................................................................................................................................................. 16
Setting Sequence .................................................................................................................................. 17
UP Running Tool..................................................................................................................................... 18
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 19
Gauge Hangers ........................................................................................................................................ 19
Mechanical Running Tool ....................................................................................................................... 20
Attaching Mechanical Running Tool to the Gauge Hanger .................................................................... 21
Installation Procedure .............................................................................................................................. 22
Emergency Shear Ring ........................................................................................................................ 22
Retrieving Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 23
1 Slickline
RQ, RP, RPT, FBN, SafetySet®, Soft-Set Gauge Hanger
2 Slickline
Introduction Landing
Nipples and Locks for
Larger Tubing Sizes
The Oil and Gas Industry, in its quest to meet
the demands of the consumers have developed
technology and found producing zones that is
requiring larger and yet larger production tubing.
It is to the point now that the casing of yesterday
is the production tubing today. Today wells are
being completed with 4-1/2, 5-1/2, 7 and 9-5/8
inch production tubing.
Developing landing nipples, lock mandrels and
flow control system for these wells has been a
challenge to the companies providing services to
the industry. New completion methods where
the terms deviated wellbore and multi-lateral
completion as well as monobore have become
common place add to the complexity of assuring
proper placement and sealing of subsurface flow
control devices.
Slickline services are having to cope with these
changes. The larger the production tubing and
the bigger the subsurface equipment, the heavier
it becomes. This in turn requires larger toolstring
and wire sizes to insure delivery and placement
of this subsurface equipment.
The landing nipples and lock mandrels in this
section have been developed to meet the needs
of an ever changing Oil and Gas Industry.
3 Slickline
Type RQ® Landing Nipple and

Lock Mandrel
The Halliburton RQ landing nipple profile was
developed primarily for Wireline Retrievable
Safety Valve installation (Fig. 1).
In larger sizes of tubing the selective lock
mandrels were sometime unable to support the
weight of the Safety Valve, Lock and Running
Tool during the setting process. The 90o
shoulder on the lock keys would release from
the 90o shoulder in the landing nipple allowing
the WRSV assembly to fall through the nipple.
The solution to this problem came in the form of
a removable no-go ring placed in a groove on
the key retainer housing of the lock mandrel
immediately above the packing mandrel on the
O.D. of the lock. This no-go ring provides
positive location of the lock mandrel and
supports the weight of the WRSV assembly
during the setting process.
Since Subsurface Safety Valves have the ability
to be pumped through with minimum amount of
differential be applied the removable was
designed only to support the weight of the
WRSV assembly during the setting process.
If it desired to set a plug in the RQ nipple profile
for testing the tubing above the plug, the RQ
Lock Mandrel can be run and set in the RQ
Nipple Profile with the no-go ring removed. In
this application the pressure differential from
above is supported by the 90o should of the keys
and the nipple profile. Figure 1
4 Slickline
Caution: Avoid bumping the jars open when

Operation raising the tool string to jar down. The lower
shear pin could shear before the top shear pin,
there creating an improper set or miss-run.
The RQ lock mandrel is run with a RXN or RX
non-selective running tool. This lock mandrel Note: The lock mandrel has matching non-
can be run in two modes; with no-go ring in helical teeth inside the keys and on the O.D. of
place and with no-go ring removed (Fig. 2). the expander sleeve which serves as the primary
“hold-down” when the lock is subjected to
pressure from below. This primary hold-down
With No-Go Ring in Place inhibits the lock mandrel from being flowed or
pulled from the landing nipple when a pressure
The lock mandrel is attached to the running tool differential exists from below.
in the “select” or fully extended position.
When the RQ lock is used with WRSV’s and
When the lock mandrel is fully extended, the placed in wells with high flow rates, a shear pin
key springs hold the keys in the retracted type secondary hold-down is recommended. If
position. With the key retracted, the lock the rates are extremely high a Safety-Set Lock
mandrel, and any subsurface control device, can would need to be used in place of the RQ Lock.
be lowered and landed on the no-go shoulder at
the top of the landing nipple packing bore.
Once landed, downward jar action shears the top
pin in the running tool, permitting the expander
sleeve to move behind the keys locking them
into the profile of the landing nipple.
When locked in place, an upward bind is used to
determine if the lock is set. Then upward jarring
is applied to shear the bottom pin and remove
With No-Go Ring Removed
In this mode, the lock mandrel is attached to the

running tool with the running tool in the
“control” position.
When the lock mandrel is in the “control”
position, the lower end of the expander mandrel
is under the offset bend in the springs which
hold the key out in the locating position. The
keys are allowed to collapse against the springs
as they encounter restriction the tubing.
The lock mandrel and subsurface device is then
lowered to the landing nipple. The 90o
shoulders on the keys are designed to engage
and “no-go” on the 90o shoulders in the landing
nipple.
Once landed, downward jarring shears the top
pin in the running tool, which permits the
expander sleeve to move down behind the keys Figure 2
locking them out.
5 Slickline
Type RP® Landing Nipple and

Lock Mandrel
The major difference between the RQ and the

RP Land Nipples and Lock Mandrels (Fig. 3) is:
1. The style of keys, and
2. The use of the removable no-go ring.
The Halliburton RP Lock Mandrel is a top No-

Go Landing Nipple/Lock Mandrel System that is
designed to provide for the landing and locking
of Subsurface Flow controls.
The keys on the RP Lock Mandrel are designed
such that they can pass through other landing
nipples that may be installed above the RP
landing nipple, without locating in the profile.
The RP Lock is design to locate and lock only in
the RP nipple profile. The Removable No-Go
Ring must be in place for the RP Lock mandrel
to locate and set in the RP Nipple and no attempt
should be made to run the RP Lock without the
No-Go ring.
Figure 3
6 Slickline

Operation into the profile of the landing nipple.
The RP lock mandrel is run with a RXN or RX determine if the lock is set. Then upward jarring
non-selective running tool. This lock mandrel is applied to shear the bottom pin and remove
can be run in two modes; with the keys fully the running tool from the lock mandrel.
retracted (Selective) or with the keys spring
loaded bias outward (Control) (Fig. 4).
With No-Go Ring in Place (Keys

Retracted)
The lock mandrel is attached to the running tool

in the “select” or fully extended position.
When the lock mandrel is fully extended, the
key springs hold the keys in the retracted
position. With the key retracted, the lock
mandrel, and any subsurface control device, can
With No-Go Ring in Place (Keys

Expanded)
In this mode, the lock mandrel is attached to the

running tool with the running tool in the
“control” position.
When the lock mandrel is in the “control”
position, the lower end of the expander mandrel
is under the offset bend in the springs which
hold the key out in the locating position. The
keys are allowed to collapse against the springs
as they encounter restriction the tubing.
The lock mandrel and subsurface device is then
lowered to the landing nipple. The no-go ring is
designed to locate and “no-go” at the top of the Figure 4
packing bore in the landing nipple.
7 Slickline
positive locator for the lock. Therefore the lock

is selected for the nipple at the surface prior to
RPT™ High Pressure No-Go running into the well.
Lock System Another advantage to the tapered nipple design
is; during the running process the packing is
RPT™ No-Go Landing Nipples and Lock protected by the Key Retainer Housing and only
Mandrels (Fig. 1) are designed for high pressure, makes contact when it is within the desired
high temperature large bore completions. The nipple bore.
RPT™ System was developed for use in the
stringent North Sea environment and has been The System is designed to use one running tool
successfully used in fields around the world and one pulling tool per tubing size.
(Fig. 2).
Figure 1
All RPT™ Lock Mandrels are designed for a

minimum 10,000 psi pressure rating from above
and below for positive plugging in high pressure
well conditions. The RPT™ System is ideal for
tapered no-go nipple completion designs. The
sealbore is optimized to provide maximum I.D.
through the completion string. The no-go
shoulder in the landing nipple provides a
Figure 2
8 Slickline
Halliburton RPT No-Go Landing Nipples mandrel expander sleeve will extend under the
provide a means of running a series of nipples in keys and will not permit the keys to fully retract
a tubing string when a stepdown completion when the running tool is in the locate
with a large through bore is required. The configuration.
landing nipples are designed to accept RPT Lock
Mandrels (Fig. 3).
Since the lock mandrel locates on top of the
polish bore of the landing nipple, there is no
secondary restriction normally associated with
bottom no-go profiles. The RPT no-go provides
positive location of the lock and minimizes the
possibility of misruns. Nipple bores are stepped
down in approximately 1/16-inch increments to
minimize loss of through-bore I.D.
Operation
The RPT lock mandrel is attached to the RXN

running tool in the “select” or fully extended
position.
When the lock mandrel is fully extended, the
key springs hold the keys in the retracted
position. With the key retracted, the lock
mandrel, and any subsurface control device, can
RPT Locks have either a shear pin hold-down or
an interference hold-down feature. The shear pin
hold-down locks the expander sleeve and the
key retainer together when the lock is fully set.
The pins must be sheared to pull the lock. The
interference hold-down lock the expander sleeve
and the packing mandrel together with an
interference fit when the lock is fully set. These
hold-downs inhibit the lock mandrel from being
flowed from the landing nipple.
Figure 3
Caution: Do not attempt to run the lock mandrel
with the running tool in the locate (control)
position (keys biased outward). The lock
9 Slickline
RPT™ Plugs
The RPT lock mandrels may be equipped with
any type of subsurface flow control device. But
it is especially designed for plugging operations.
The two basic types of plugs currently used with
the RPT are the Collet Valve type and the Prong
type.
Collet Valve Plug
The Collet Valve type (Fig. 4) is designed for

single trip plugging operations in wells where
very little sediment is expected. The valve is in
the open position, as the plug assembly is being
run and locked into the landing nipple and is
moved to the closed position when the bottom
pin is sheared and the running tool is removed.
During retrieving operations, the valve is moved
to the open position by an equalizing prong
attached to the Pulling Tool. It may also be
moved to the open position on a separate trip to
insure that the plug is fully equalized before
running the pulling tool.
Figure 4
10 Slickline
Prong Plug
The Prong type is designed for two trip plugging

operations (Fig. 5) and may be used in wells
where sediment or debris may prevent the collet
valve operation. The lock and plug body are set
in the landing nipple on the first trip. The prong
is then run using a SB Pulling Tool and set
inside the plug body by downward jar action
which shears the pin in the SB.
During retrieving operations, the prong is
retrieved using the SB pulling tool to allow the
pressure across the plug to equalize. Then the
lock and plug body are retrieved from the well.
Figure 5
11 Slickline
RPT™ or RPV™
The RPT and RPV Lock Mandrels look identical
from the exterior (Fig. 6). The difference is on
the inside of the locking keys.
The RPT which is used primarily for plugging
operations with deep set application will not
have non-helical serrations on the inside of the
keys.
The RPV on the other hand is used primarily for
SCSSV installation with flow through
capability. This lock is therefore equipped with
non-helical serration which locks the key to the
expander mandrel with differential from below
to act as the primary hold-down. RPV lock
mandrels will generally incorporate one or both
of the secondary hold-downs as an added
insurance to inhibit the lock mandrel from being
flowed from the landing nipple.
Figure 6
12 Slickline
Full Bore Nipple (FBN™)

Landing Nipple/Lock Mandrel
System
The traditional approach to setting plugs and

other devices on slickline has always required
the use of a lock mandrel with interference-fit
packing which, in turn, requires a landing nipple
sealbore of a smaller I.D. than the tubing. Since
this method is obviously not compatible with the
requirements of monobore completions,
Halliburton now designed a unique system.
The Halliburton FBN™ Lock Mandrel and
Landing Nipple System (Fig. 1) are designed to
provide a means by which an infinite number of
identical landing nipples can be installed in a
given tubing string. The FBN lock mandrel can
be selectively set in any one of its associated
landing nipples, and when locked in place will
withstand a high pressure differential from either
direction.
The lock mandrel is designed with an expanding
seal element and the landing nipple has a full-
opening bore, which allows the lock to be run
through any number of profiles before reaching
the intended depth, without the tendency to
“hang up” in the higher profiles. This feature is
particularly significant for large tubing and/or
highly deviated applications where conventional
selective locks will tend to preset in higher
profiles due to interference-fit packing employed
on all previous designs. When the running tool
locates the desired landing nipple, an upward
bind shifts the running tool from the select mode
to the control mode. The lock mandrel keys can
then locate the nipple profile assuring positive
location prior to setting the lock and releasing
the running tool.
Figure 1
13 Slickline
Operation
The FBN lock mandrel is a mechanically-

operated lock that can be selectively located and
set using the FBN running tool. The running
tool, when attached to the lock mandrel and
placed in the “selective” position, holds the keys
and element expander sleeve in the fully
extended position. With the expander sleeve in
the fully extended position the keys are retracted
and the element O.D. is less than the diameter of
the key retainer housing.
With the key retracted, the lock mandrel can be
lowered through a series of identical landing
nipples without locating. However, when the
lock mandrel and running tool is moved up
through any one of the nipples, the locating dogs
on the running tool will locate at the lower end
of the nipple hone bore and further upward
movement through the nipple results in the
running tool shifting to the “control” position.
In the control position, the lower end of the
expander sleeve is positioned under the offset
bend in the key springs, causing the key to
spring outward to their expanded position. At
this stage the expander sleeve has not moved
under the keys, therefore the key can flex inward
when being pulled up through the nipple, or
series of nipples. Likewise, the expander has not
moved under the element, so the diameter of the
element is still unchanged.
The shoulders on the keys and in the landing
nipple are chamfered to prevent the spring
biased keys from “hanging” in the profile when
the lock is being pulled up through the nipple.
Figure 2
However, when the lock mandrel is lowered
back down into the nipple, the 90o shoulders on
the keys engage the 90o shoulders in the landing
nipple, thus landing the lock mandrel within the Once the setting sequence has been completed,
landing nipple. an over pull on the tool string will determine that
the lock mandrel is locked, and then upward
Once the lock mandrel has been landed, jarring will shear the lower running tool shear
downward jarring will shear the top pin in the pin permitting the running tool to be released
running tool which allows the expander sleeve to from the lock mandrel and retrieved to the
move down behind the keys concurrent with surface.
moving behind the element. At this point, the
keys are fully locked into the nipple profile and
the element is full expanded within the nipple
hone bore.
14 Slickline
To ensure proper operation of both the running

tool and lock mandrel, the follow must be
checked:
1. The locator dogs of the running tool should
be fully expanded – “selective” position.
2. The keys of the lock mandrel should be fully
retracted – “selective” position.
3. The shear pins should be centered punched
and cross punched to ensure they stay in
place during the running operation.
4. Shear pins should be below flush of the
outside diameter of the running tool and
lock mandrel.
5. The running tool should operate freely from
the “selective” to the “control” positions.
6. The keys on the lock mandrel should be
spring biased outward in the “control”
position.
7. Return the running tool to the “select”
position for running into well.
15 Slickline
Options
Otis® SAFETYSET® Lock Mandrel  Designs are available for all Otis RQ and
System Otis RPT® landing nipple profiles.
 Models are designed to land and lock in any
Halliburton’s Otis® SAFETYSET® lock safety valve landing nipple if there is a no-
mandrel system is a drive-down, jar up-to-set, go.
no-go-type system designed specifically for  Optional “UP” running tool allows setting
surface-controlled subsurface safety valve staggered seal safety valves.
(SCSSV) applications. This patented system
consists of an Otis SAFETYSET lock mandrel,
running tool, and unlocking tool. The Otis
SAFETYSET lock mandrel system is designed
to help ensure valve-set integrity and hydraulic
control communication to the safety valve.
The design features a locking sleeve that moves

upward in the direction of flow to establish a
locked safety valve. This locking allows
unlimited drive-down action without the
possibility of presetting the lock while it travels
downhole. A no-go shoulder on the lock
mandrel provides positive locating within the
landing nipple. This system is designed to
minimize operator guesswork at the surface by
requiring two independent conditions to exist
before the running tool will release. The SCSSV
must be pressured open for the lock keys to
expand. Only when the locking sleeve is locked
in place will them running tool release. A
running tool retrieved to the surface without the
lock and valve indicates a functional valve
securely locked into the landing nipple.
Operation
The mechanical locking mechanism of the

running tool cannot be activated until hydraulic
control pressure has opened the safety valve.
Opening the safety valve shifts the running tool
into the locking mode. Upward strain on the
slickline toolstring props the keys of the lock
mandrel into position.
Upward jarring completes the locking operation.
The running tool is designed to release
automatically only when the safety valve has
been opened and the lock mandrel is securely
locked in position.
16 Slickline
The Unlocking tool is attached to a GR Pulling

Setting Sequence Tools to unlock and retrieve the Safety Set Lock
Mandrel. The Unlocking Tool has lugs which
engage the top of the Locking Sleeve of the
Run in well with the Safety Set running tool,
Safety Set Lock and downward jarring moves
Safety Set Lock and the Wireline Retrievable
the Locking Sleeve down to unlock the lock.
Safety Valve.
Caution: Do not attempt to pull the Safety Set
Step 1. Jar down until the no-go shoulder is
Lock Mandrel with the Unlocking Tool attached
properly landed.
as the unlocking tool will not allow the skirt of
Step 2. Apply recommended pressure to the the GS to make contact with the fishing neck
control line to move the safety valve to and you not be able to jar down to release the
the open position. GS pulling tools should it become necessary.
Step 3. Jar up to move the locking sleeve behind Only used the GS without the Unlocking Tool.
the key and to release the Safety Set
Remember once the Unlocking Tool has been
running tool from the lock.
run the Safety Set Lock is unlocked.
17 Slickline
UP Running Tool
The Up Running Tool was designed to run the
Safety set lock mandrel when the control line
integrity might be lost or for staggered bore
application.
The Up Running Tool has one shear pin which is
has to be sheared to set the Safety Set Lock.
Operation
The UP Running Tool and the Safety Set Lock
and Safety Valve or Plug is run into the well to
nipple depth. Downward jarring is used to insure
that the Lock is setting on the no-go shoulder
and to shear the pin in the UP Running Tool. An
upward bind and then jarring moves the Locking
Sleeve into position to support the keys in the
nipple profile.
18 Slickline
Introduction
Gauge Hangers are used to install Pressure and
Temperature Gauges in the tubing for prolong
periods of time. They are installed and retrieved
using slickline methods.
Gauge Hangers
The Halliburton RNS or XNX Soft-Set Gauge
Hanger is designed to locate a bottomhole
pressure gauge in a Halliburton Landing Nipple
with the appropriate profile. These Halliburton
Gauge Hangers are designed to locate in Otis®,
X®, R®, XN®, and RN® profiles. The gauge
hanger is installed/retrieved using standard
wireline methods.
During installation, the fish neck is in an
extended position to allow the dogs to retract.
The locking balls are positioned in the fish neck
side holes and ride on the inside surface of the
housing. The latches are designed to locate the
restricted bore of the landing nipple where the
dogs should be tripped. When the hanger is
pulled through the landing nipple, the dogs are
activated. When the hanger is lowered back into
the landing nipple, the gauge hanger is designed
to be stopped by the locating dogs or by the no-
go shoulder of the hanger. The fish neck is then
pushed down against the housing to lock the
gauge hanger in the nipple. The spring-loaded
lock is designed to move the balls out, against
the ball retainers, locking the fish neck to the
housing.
The Halliburton Gauge Hanger:
 does not require jarring to set.
 allows data surveys using conventional
wireline methods.
 allows for accurate charts rather than
recording jarring effects.
 can be set in one of many landing nipples to
run surveys at known locations downhole.
19 Slickline
Mechanical Running Tool

The Halliburton MR Mechanical Running Tool
is used to run the Halliburton XNS or RNS soft-
set gauge hangers. It is designed to carry weight
exceeding the 140 pound weight limit of the
hydraulic running tool, since no preset force
needs to be overcome.
The lugs of the running tool hold the fish neck
of the gauge hanger during the running of the
gauges. The lugs are held in the expanded
position by the core in the fully down position.
When the gauge hanger locks into the nipple
profile; the lock moves upward pushing the core
up by means of the core extension. Once the
core is pushed up, the lock-out lug can then be
pushed into the core recess by the leaf spring,
thus locking the core in the up position. In the up
position, the core no longer holds the lugs out
and the running tool is disengaged from the
hanger. The gauge hanger and pressure gauges
are left suspended in the well.
20 Slickline
Attaching Mechanical Running

Tool to the Gauge Hanger
Note: A core adjustment is needed so that the
running tool will work with any fish neck of that
size. To adjust the core, perform the following
steps.
1. Remove the set screw in the core extension
and screw the core extension in all the way.
2. With the tool locked out (core in up
position) slide the running tool into the fish
neck of the hanger. Holding it there, gently
pull the lock-out lug with pliers or by hand
until the core moves into the down position
by means of the coil spring inside.
3. Attach the running tool to the hanger.
4. With the shear ring against the fish neck,
adjust the core extension by hand until it just
touches the lock of the hanger.
Note: There is a hole in the lug retainer and core
behind the shear ring if needed for a backup. Be
careful not to damage the spring.
5. Replace the set screw in the access hole.
You are now ready to run the hanger and
gauges.
21 Slickline
Installation Procedure
1. Ensure the latches on the hanger are holding
the dogs in.
2. Run the hanger to the nipple desired.
3. Pick up the running tool in order to release
the latches. They will trip on the nipple
profile or hone bore. Set back down in order
to locate and set the hanger.
4. The running tool will release from the
hanger as soon as it is set.
Caution: Do not exceed 400 ft/min. running
speed. Excessive speed through a landing nipple
or into the fluid level may cause the running tool
to release the hanger.
Emergency Shear Ring
The running tool is designed with an emergency

shear ring. If the hanger gets stuck, jarring down
will shear the shear pins and allow the core to be
pushed up and release from the fish neck.
22 Slickline
Retrieving Procedure
The Halliburton GR Pulling Tool is designed to
retrieve the selective gauge hanger. This is a
shear-up-to-release type pulling tool, and it
should be shear pinned with a soft shear pin,
such as brass, aluminum, etc.
1. Attach the proper pulling prong to the GR
pulling tool.
2. Attach the pulling tool and pulling prong to
the toolstring and lower it into the well.
3. Stop the toolstring a few feet above the
gauge hanger.
4. Slowly lower the pulling tool and prong into
the fish neck of the gauge hanger.
5. The pulling prong contacts the gauge hanger
lock and moves it down, releasing the
locking balls.
6. The gauge hanger can now be retrieved.
23 Slickline
SECTION 8
CIRCULATING DEVICES
AND
SERVICE TOOLS
Sliding Side Doors®
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 2
Halliburton’s Sliding Side Doors .............................................................................................................. 3
Type ‘XA’ Sliding Side Door ................................................................................................................ 3
Description............................................................................................................................................. 3
Type ‘XO’ Sliding Side Door ................................................................................................................ 4
Type ‘XD’ Sliding Side Door ................................................................................................................ 4
Type ‘RA’, ‘RO’ & ‘RD’ Sliding Side Doors ....................................................................................... 4
Halliburton DuraSleeve® .......................................................................................................................... 5
XU DuraSleeve® ...................................................................................................................................... 7
XD DuraSleeve® ...................................................................................................................................... 9
42BO Positioning Tool............................................................................................................................ 11
Principles of Operation ........................................................................................................................ 12
142BO Positioning Tool.......................................................................................................................... 13
Principles of Operation ........................................................................................................................ 13
Shift Sliding Side Door ........................................................................................................................... 15
Considerations prior to shifting a SSD ................................................................................................ 15
Determining if a SSD has been shifted ................................................................................................ 15
Selecting a positioning tool.................................................................................................................. 16
Side-Door Chokes ................................................................................................................................... 17
Separation Tool ....................................................................................................................................... 18
Zonemaster™ Reservoir Access Mandrel System .................................................................................. 19
Part Number Information ........................................................................................................................ 21
42BO Positioning Tool for 121X SSD’s ............................................................................................. 22
42BO Positioning Tool for 121R SSD’s. ............................................................................................. 22
42BO Positioning Tool for 621X SSD’s ............................................................................................. 23
42BO Positioning Tool for 621R SSD’s. ............................................................................................. 23
42BO Positioning Tool Part Numbers (Smaller Sizes)........................................................................ 24
42BO Positioning Tool Part Numbers (Larger Sizes).......................................................................... 25
142BO Positioning Tools..................................................................................................................... 26
142BO Positioning Tool Parts ............................................................................................................. 27
Written Project ........................................................................................................................................ 28
1 Slickline
Sliding Side-Doors®
lower packing mandrel. This assembly is

Introduction then placed in an open SSD. Lift gas can
now be injected down the tubing and
The evolution of the sliding sleeve to affect through the gas lift valve. The well is
communication between the tubing and annulus produced through the bore of the valve.
was introduced by Garret Oil Tools about the
turn of the 1950’s. A producer could now
selectively produce a tubing annulus without the
restriction of a lock mandrel in a ported nipple.
The Sliding Side-Door® is designed to isolate
the annulus from the tubing when in the closed
position. Any number of sleeves having the
same ID can be installed in the tubing string.
When it becomes necessary to establish
communication, the inner sleeve is “shifted” to
the open position by a positioning tool attached
to a slickline toolstring. Halliburton’s current
SSDs are designed to be equal to or greater than
the burst, collapse, and tensile strength of the
tubing weight they are designed to be used with.
SSDs can be utilized to perform the following
functions:
1. Circulate and/or Displace completion
fluids and inhibitors. In a single zone
completion, the SSD is usually placed above
the packer. Since it is normally used strictly
as a circulation device it must be high
enough off the top of the packer so that mud
and other solids will not accumulate around
the outside of the ports of the SSD.
2. Selectively produce zones. When SSDs are
placed single string, multiple zone
completion the SSD is placed above the
blast joint and above the perforations to
prevent erosion caused by well effluents
feeding from the perforations when the well
is selectively produced from an upper zone.
To selectively produce an upper zone, a plug
is set in a nipple below the SSD and the
sleeve is shifted to the open position. A
second method is to shift the sleeve open
and set a separation tool in the SSD.
3. Gas Lift. SSDs may be used for center set
gas lift valves. The gas lift valve is
assembled between the lock mandrel and the
2 Slickline
the closed position, sealing off the side ports, the

lower zone can be produced through the
Halliburton’s Sliding Side Doors essentially full-opening tool. To produce the
upper zone and close off the lower zone, the
Halliburton offers the industry a variety of closing sleeve is moved to the open position to
Sliding Side-Doors® (SSD) to address the provide communication between the tubing and
various needs of the operator. annulus, and the Type ‘X’ Separation Tool is set
During the early years, Otis developed the Type across the open ports and bring the upper zone
‘A’ SSD that moved up to open and did not have into the tubing through the mandrel. Should the
a nipple profile. Some of the operators began to Sliding Side Door develop a leak from excessive
experience the opening of the side-door during shifting, the Type ‘X’ Nipple and pack-off area
swabbing operations. This resulted in the side- provide setting and packing facilities for the
door being placed in the tubing upside down to Type ‘X’ Side Door Choke. The Type ‘X’
make opening of the sleeve a downward Nipple in the SSD is also available for other
operation. In this manner, the loaded swab cup flow control devices when the side door ports
kept the side-door in the closed position. are closed and it is being used to flow the lower
Because of this practice, specialists who run zone only.
wireline units will usually ask the operator about
sleeve placement when working on older wells. The Type ‘XA’ SSD is opened by upward
jarring utilizing the standard SSD Positioning
With the introduction of the ‘X’-Line Selective Tool (42BO*). This tool is designed not to lock
landing nipple, Otis offered the operator a new in the Type ‘X’ Nipple Profile. The running-
version of the sliding side-door. An ‘X’ Nipple pulling tools for the Type ‘X’ Lock Mandrel are
profile was incorporated into the Type ‘A’ designed not to affect the sleeve.
Sliding Side-Door. Hence, the terminology
became a Type ‘XA’ Sliding Side-Door having The Type ‘XA’ Sliding Side Door May be
an inner sleeve moving up to open. The Type located any place in the tubing string where it is
‘XO’ (O for Opposite) gave the industry a necessary or may be desirable to provide
sliding sleeve with the ‘X’-Nipple profile having communication between the tubing and annulus.
an inner sleeve that moves down to open. This The SSD is valuable aid in such completion and
gave the producer an extra landing nipple in the production procedures as circulating, washing,
completion while it allows selective zone alternating zone production or any selective or
production without the restricted bore of a lock multiple completion. It may be run into the hole
mandrel. with the sleeve in either the open or closed
position. The sleeve is then closed or opened as
Type ‘XA’ Sliding Side Door necessary using standard wireline methods. For
example, many operators run the sleeve in the
The Type ‘XA’ Sliding Side Door operates the open position during initial completion, land
same as the Type ‘A’ SSD and incorporates the their tubing, install the tree and then circulate
‘X’ Nipple profile into the top sub and a out the weighted drilling mud before closing the
polished sub into the bottom sub. The ‘X’ sleeve and bring in their well. This permits the
Separation Tool or Type ‘X’ Side Door Choke operator greater control over high pressure
may be landed in this sliding Side Door. The completions and eliminates wireline work in
sleeve is shifted upward to open. heavy drilling fluids.
The Type ‘XA’ SSD is rated for temperatures up

Description to 275oF. It utilizes metal back-up rings,
RYTON®V-packing, MOLY-FILLED
The Type ‘XA’ Halliburton-Otis Sliding Side TEFLON®V-packing and Nitrile O-Rings.
Door is designed with a Type ‘X’ Nipple Profile
above and a polished packoff area below the
inner closing sleeve. With the inner sleeve in
3 Slickline
The Type ‘XAH’ is a high temperature SSD and the top sub and a polished pack-off area in the
is rated for temperatures up to 650oF. It bottom sub.
incorporates metal back-up rings, RYTON®V-
packing and VITON® O-Rings. The Type ‘RA’ SSD is opened by upward
jarring.
Type ‘XO’ Sliding Side Door
The Type ‘RO’ and ‘RD’ SSD’s are designed to
The Type ‘XO’ Sliding Side Door has all the be opened by downward jarring.
same features as the type ‘XA’ except, it shifts
down to open. The ‘XO’ SSD incorporates the
Type ‘X’ Nipple in the top sub. The bottom has
the three stage collet profile and a polished Sliding Side Doors
pack-off area below the closing sleeve.
XA
Opens UP
The Type ‘X’ Nipple profile in the top sub and Circulating Sleeve
the polished pack-off area in the bottom sub
provides for the installation of all “X-Line” flow XO
Opens DOWN
controls. Circulating Sleeve
The Type ‘XO’ SSD is opened by downward XD
Opens DOWN
jarring using the standard SSD Positioning Tool Production Sleeve
(42BO*).
RA
Opens UP
The Type ‘XO’ SSD may be utilized in the same Circulating Sleeve
way as the Type ‘XA’ SSD. It is also used in
wells where swabbing operations may cause an RO
Opens DOWN
upward shifting sleeve to open. Circulating Sleeve
The Type ‘XO’ SSD incorporates the standard RD

Opens DOWN
packing rated for temperatures to 275oF. The Production Sleeve
Type ‘XOH’ is equipped with the high
temperature packing for temperatures up to
650oF. These Sliding Side Doors come equipped with
elastomeric packing. This packing can swell, if
Type ‘XD’ Sliding Side Door exposed to certain wellbore environments, and
cause the sleeve to become difficult to shift.
The Type ‘XD’ Sliding Side Door is similar in Halliburton designed a Sliding Side Door which
design to the Type ‘XO’ SSD, but with a larger uses non-elastomeric packing to overcome
flow area through the ports. The flow area hostile wellbore environments called the
through the ports of the Type ‘XD’ SSD is DuraSleeve®.
designed to be equal to or greater than tubing
flow area. The ‘XD’ SSD is opened by
downward jarring.
Type ‘RA’, ‘RO’ & ‘RD’ Sliding Side

Doors
The Type ‘RA’, ‘RO’ & ‘RD’ Sliding Side

Doors are designed for use in heavy wall tubing.
They incorporate the Type ‘R’ Nipple Profile in
4 Slickline
Halliburton DuraSleeve®
The Halliburton takes advantage of the design
history of the Otis Sleeves and combines new
innovations in non-elastomer technology by
developing a new non-elastomer sleeve that
provides easier shifting during well
maintenance, better sealing between the tubing
and casing annulus, and lower total costs for oil
and gas operators.
The Halliburton DuraSleeve® Sliding Side-
Door® circulation and production sleeve is a full
opening device with an inner sleeve that can be
opened or closed using standard slickline
methods. This sleeve enables communication
between the tubing and tubing/casing annulus.
An Otis® X®, R®, RPT™, or FBN® nipple
profile is featured above the inner sliding sleeve
and a polished pack-off area below as integral
parts of the assembly. This design provides for
and additional landing nipple in the tubing string
for a wide variety of Halliburton flow control
equipment and the option to pack off across the
sliding side-door to install other flow controls or
to isolate it.
A three-position collet lock helps to keep the
sleeve in full-open, equalizing, or full-closed
position. Equalizing ports in the inner sleeve are
designed to allow pressure differential between
the tubing and casing annulus to equalize while
shifting into the full-open position. Any number
of circulation/production sleeves can be run in a
single tubing string, and can all be opened or
closed as necessary to meet
workover/production demands.
The DuraSleeve SSD is used for a variety of
installations. It is offered in two shifting
versions:
 Up to Open – Down to Close
 Down to Open – Up to Close
Models are also available for standard and
heavyweight tubing and high temperature
service. All models have a circulation or
production area equivalent to the tubing area.
5 Slickline
Lower shifting forces with DuraSleeve® are

available through a new Engineered Composite
Material (ECM) that is used in the seal. Even
after shifting the DuraSleeve® 100 times,
shifting force with this seal was up to 80% less
than with conventional PEEK seals. Average
shifting force to open or close is less than 500 lb.
Conventional sliding sleeves require more than
1500 lb. to open or close.
The improved system also provides a highly

reliable seal between the tubing and casing
annulus for the life of the well. Operators can
lower total costs using the system due to the
ability to open with high differential pressure,
reduced risks of annular pressure, less deferred
production, fewer workovers and fewer slickline
problems. DuraSleeve™ has been successfully
tested to 5,000 psi external pressure and 325
degrees F with no seal damage.
The DuraSleeve™ is the new standard for

sliding sleeve performance.
Design features offer improved durability and
performance:
 Low shifting forces
 Built in Halliburton Nipple Profile
 DURATEF™ ECM non-elastomer seals
 Improved shifting
 High pressure equalizing ability
6 Slickline
XU DuraSleeve®
The Halliburton XU DURASLEEVE®
circulation and production sleeve is used as an
in-tubing valve, which when open, allows flow
between the well tubing and the annular area. It
is designed with an X® landing nipple profile in
the top sub, packing bores in both the top and
bottom sub, and a non-elastomer seal package.
This DURASLEEVE® circulation/production
sleeve is designed with full-tubing flow through
the nipple and the sleeve.
The landing nipple profile in the top sub and the
packing bores in the top and bottom Sub allow a
lock mandrel carrying a variety of subsurface
flow controls, or a plugging device to be set
across or below the DURASLEEVE®
circulation/production sleeve. This can be done
by standard slickline methods.
This assembly, when open, may be used to
circulate heavy completion fluids out of the
tubing, to acidize formations, to allow pressure
tests to packers and selectively produce well
zones.
Note: The DURASLEEVE™ circulation and/or
production sleeve can only be opened or closed
in one trip.
Caution: The DURASLEEVE™ circulation
and/or production sleeve should never be
installed below a Halliburton position no. 1 ‘S’
landing nipple. The positioning tool passes
through position no. 2 through no. 7 ‘S’ landing
nipples only.
This DURASLEEVE® is installed as an integral
part of the main tubing string. It may be run in
either the open or closed position.
The closing sleeve may be placed in three
positions: closed, equalizing, or open. This
operation is done with a Positioning Tool
attached to a standard slickline tool string.
7 Slickline
The XU sleeve is shifted up to open and down to

close. To open the XU sleeve, the 42BO
positioning tool is attached to a slickline tool
string and lowered through the sleeve. The
positioning tool is then raised back through the
sleeve until the keys of the positioning tool
contact the upper internal shoulder in the closing
sleeve. Upward jarring causes the closing sleeve
to move up until the collet on the upper end of
the closing sleeve engages the middle detente in
the top sub. In this position the equalizing ports
in the closing sleeve are in line with the flow
ports in the nipple. This allows pressure to
equalize between the tubing and the annulus
slowly. When pressure has equalized, continued
jar up action moves the closing sleeve to the
full-up open position. In this position the closing
sleeve collet sets in the top detente groove and
holds the closing sleeve in the open position. As
the closing sleeve approaches the full-up open
position, the releasing profile on the positioning
tool keys come in contact with the releasing
chamfer in the top sub. This cams the keys in
and releases them from the closing sleeve
shoulder to allow the positioning tool to be
raised through the top sub. The positioning tool
may then be retrieved or lowered to the next
sleeve.
To shift the closing sleeve to the closed position,
the positioning tool is attached to the tool string
in the opposite direction (reverse ends).
8 Slickline
XD DuraSleeve®
The Halliburton XD DURASLEEVE®
circulation and production sleeve is used as an
in-tubing valve, which when open, allows flow
between the well tubing and the annular area. It
is designed with an X® landing nipple profile in
the top sub, packing bores in both the top and
bottom sub, and a non-elastomer seal package.
This DURASLEEVE® circulation/production
sleeve is designed with full-tubing flow through
the nipple and the sleeve.
The landing nipple profile in the top sub and the
packing bores in the top and bottom Sub allow a
lock mandrel carrying a variety of subsurface
flow controls, or a plugging device to be set
across or below the DURASLEEVE®
circulation/production sleeve. This can be done
by standard slickline methods.
This assembly, when open, may be used to
circulate heavy completion fluids out of the
tubing, to acidize formations, to allow pressure
tests to packers and selectively produce well
zones.
Note: The DURASLEEVE™ circulation and/or
production sleeve can only be opened or closed
in one trip.
Caution: The DURASLEEVE™ circulation
and/or production sleeve should never be
installed below a Halliburton position no. 1 ‘S’
landing nipple. The positioning tool passes
through position no. 2 through no. 7 ‘S’ landing
nipples only.
This DURASLEEVE® is installed as an integral
part of the main tubing string. It may be run in
either the open or closed position.
The closing sleeve may be placed in three
positions: closed, equalizing, or open. This
operation is done with a Positioning Tool
attached to a standard slickline tool string.
9 Slickline
The XD sleeve is shifted down to open and up to

close. To open the XD sleeve, the 42BO
positioning tool is attached to a slickline tool
string and lowered to the sleeve until the keys of
the positioning tool contact the lower internal
shoulder in the closing sleeve. Downward
jarring causes the closing sleeve to move down
until the collet on the lower end of the closing
sleeve engages the middle detente in the bottom
sub. In this position the equalizing ports in the
closing sleeve are in line with the flow ports in
the nipple. This allows pressure to equalize
between the tubing and the annulus slowly.
When pressure has equalized, continued jar
down action moves the closing sleeve to the full-
up open position. In this position the closing
sleeve collet sets in the bottom detente groove
and holds the closing sleeve in the open position.
As the closing sleeve approaches the full-up
open position, the releasing profile on the
positioning tool keys come in contact with the
releasing chamfer in the bottom sub. This cams
the keys in and releases them from the closing
sleeve shoulder to allow the positioning tool to
drop down through the bottom sub. The
positioning tool may then be retrieved or
lowered to the next sleeve.
To shift the closing sleeve to the closed position,
the positioning tool is attached to the tool string
in the opposite direction (reverse ends).
10 Slickline
42BO Positioning Tool

The 42BO Positioning Tool is composed of the
following basic parts:
1. The Top Sub has standard threads and a fish
neck at its upper end. It is threaded
internally to receive the body, and a set
screw is provided to lock this connection.
2. The Body screws into the top sub. Its lower
end has standard threads and a fishing neck.
The Collet fits over the body and secures the
keys.
3. The Keys fit on each side of the collet and
key retainers. Springs inside the keys push
the keys outward, but the travel of the keys
is limited by the key retainers.
4. The Collet is connected to the body be
means of a Shear pin.
11 Slickline
2. When the pin is not sheared, while using

Principles of Operation self-releasing keys, it is an indication that
the sleeve has been fully shifted.
The 42BO Positioning Tool, run on a standard
slickline tool string, is used to open or close all
of the Halliburton Sliding Side-Doors®. The
keys are shaped so that when traveling in one
direction, their sloped at one end allows them to
pass through the SSD. In the opposite direction,
the 90o shoulder near the center of the key
engages a corresponding shoulder inside the
closing sleeve. Further movement of the
positioning tool (by jar action) moves the
closing sleeve to the equalizing, full-open or
full-closed position, depending on the operation
being performed.
The 42BO has two style of keys:
 Self-Releasing Keys
 Selective keys
The self-releasing keys are placed on the 42BO
when there is only one SSD in the wellbore or if
there is no need to selectively up-shift a SSD.
(“Selectively Shift” means to manipulate one
particular sleeve in the well without disturbing
another above it.) The self-releasing key have a
releasing profile at the one end which retracts
the keys, releasing them from the closing sleeve
as the tool reaches the chamfered shoulder of the
top or bottom sub of the SSD. This indicates that
the sleeve is fully shifted.
The selective keys do not have the self-releasing
profile and are used for up-shifting only. They
are assembled on the 42BO when there is a need
to selectively up-shift a SSD. As the closing
sleeve is moved, the keys will not retract and
release the closing sleeve until the pin through
the collet and body is sheared. Once sheared, the
top sub on the positioning tool moves over the
keys, retracting them and causing the tool to be
released from the closing sleeve. With the shear
pin sheared, any sleeve above will not be
affected because the tool has already been
rendered inactive.
The shear pin, in the 42BO, has two functions:
1. It serves as a safety release device when
shifting up.
12 Slickline
142BO Positioning Tool

The 142BO Positioning Tool is designed for
downward shifting only and only uses self-
releasing keys. The 142BO is made selective by
the design feature of the lower section. (The
lower section of the 142BO resembles the X-
Line® Running Tool.)
Principles of Operation
The 142BO Positioning Tool, generally run with

the keys retracted (referred to as the selective
position), is designed so that the keys remain
retracted until the SSD to be shifted down is
reached. As the 142BO is lowered through the
SSD, the spring-loaded locator dogs contact the
restriction of the packing bore. This restriction
forces the dogs up far enough to retract into an
upper groove on the main mandrel. This reduces
the OD of the tool to allow it to pass through the
bore of the SSD. Once through the SSD, the
compression on the sprig moves the locator dogs
down and out to there original position.
Once the 142BO has passed the SSD to be
opened, the tool is raised back up until the
locator dogs contact the lower packing bore
restriction of the SSD. An upward strain is
required to compress the upper spring, allowing
the main mandrel to be pulled up through the
locator dogs, dog retainer and the spring housing
until the locator dogs engage the lower groove
on the main mandrel. This action allows the
spring housing to release the shifting keys so
they can expand to engage the profile of the
closing sleeve. (The 142BO is now in the control
position.)
At this point the 142BO should be in a position
above the SSD. The tool is then lowered until it
locates the profile in the lower end of the closing
sleeve. Jarring down will move the sleeve
downward. When the closing sleeve reaches it
lowermost position, the self-releasing profile of
the keys contact the chamfered shoulder inside
the bottom sub of the SSD and release the keys
from the closing sleeve. The 142BO passing
through the sleeve should be a positive
13 Slickline
indication that the sleeve is fully shifted. The

142BO can be raised to any SSD above to be
shifted or returned to the surface.
Caution: The 142BO is designed for
downshifting only. Use only self-releasing keys
with the 90o shoulder facing down.
Caution: The 142BO is not designed with a
safety release shear pin. If the keys are installed
with the 90o shoulders facing up and the closing
sleeve cannot be shifted, there is no way to
retrieve your tools.
14 Slickline
Determining if a SSD has been

shifted
Shift Sliding Side Door
There are several indicators used to determine if
a sleeve has been shifted, but there is really only
Considerations prior to shifting a one way to determine if a sleeve has been fully
SSD shifted.
Slickline Supervisor called to shift a SSD needs The only way to determine that a sleeve has
to consider the following items: been fully shifted is by using a positioning tool
with self-releasing keys. When the positioning
1- What is the depth of the SSD and what is the
tool, with self-releasing keys, releases the sleeve
completions elevation? The known depth of the
it is fully shifted (provided the pin in the tool is
sleeve will assure the specialist (with some
not sheared).
reason) that the positioning tool is in the SSD.
A dummy run made at the beginning of the job
Other indicators, that the sleeve has shifted, are:
with an undersized gauge is necessary to check
the tubing for any obstructions down to the
1- A change in the tubing and annulus pressures.
maximum working depth. The undersized gauge
will go through the landing nipples and SSD’s.
2- A change in the fluid level.
Elevation data will allow the specialist to correct
his counter measurements to well record depth
3- The ability to pump through or produce
of the SSD.
through the SSD.
2- What is the position of other SSD’s in the
well (if any)? Other SSD’s in the same well A sheared pin in the 42BO positioning tool with
bore may effect the selection of the positioning selective keys is not a indication that the sleeve
tool that will be used. has shifted.
3- What type and size SSD is to be shifted? Due
to the large variation of SSD’s on the market,
the specialist will need to determine the proper
type and size positioning tool to use.
4- Will there be a pressure differential at the
SSD depth if a sleeve is opened? A specialist
can calculate this differential if he knows the
weight of the fluids in the casing and the gravity
of gas and oil in the tubing string. If a
differential exist at the SSD from the casing
side, the specialist can request that pressure or
fluid be added to the tubing side to equalize this
differential. If neither option is available, then
he can be aware of the differential and be
prepared to cope with the situation by taking
special precautions to help avoid having the tool
string blown up the hole.
15 Slickline
EXAMPLE: Open each sleeve with the

Selecting a positioning tool consideration that all other SSD’s are closed.
The selection of positioning tool is a easy Tool selection: 42BO and 142BO
process when there is only one SSD in the Key size: Standard (STD.) Slim-hole (S-H)
completion. But, when the well is a multiple- Key type: Self-releasing (S/R)
zone completion with several SSD’s that open Selective (SELE)
and close in different directions, the selection
process become more complicated. However, OPEN TOOL KEY KEY OPENS
USED SIZE TYPE DIRECTION
there are some guide-lines that you can follow to
XA 42BO STD. S/R 
help you determine which positioning tool to
XA 42BO STD. SELE 
use.
XD 42BO STD. S/R 
1- When down-shifting always use self releasing RD 142BO S-H S/R 
keys. XN
2- For selective up-shifting, use the 42BO NIPPLE
positioning tool with selective (positive) keys or OPEN EACH SLEEVE
the 42XO selective positioning tool.
3- The 142BO positioning tool is used for down OPEN TOOL KEY KEY OPENS
shifting only. USED SIZE TYPE DIRECTION
XO
4- Besides choosing between self-releasing and XA
selective keys, you need to determine if you XA
need standard keys or slim-hole keys. (Standard XD
keys are used in standard weight tubing, and RN
slim-hole keys are used in heavy-wall tubing.) NIPPLE
Using those guide lines select the positioning
CLOSE EACH SLEEVE
tool for the following:
OPEN TOOL KEY KEY OPENS

USED SIZE TYPE DIRECTION
XO
XA
XA
XD
D
NIPPLE
16 Slickline
Side-Door Chokes
Side-Door Chokes employ two sets of packing
that straddle the SSD with the bottom set of
packing in the polish nipple of the bottom sub
and the upper packing in the nipple profile
located in the top sub. This packs off the ports to
prevent communication to the annulus when a
SSD will not shift close or starts leaking.
The tubing now serves as a conductor for the
lower of single zone only. It is now possible to
produce the well without communications with
the annulus. The side-door choke is equipped
with an equalizing assembly to equalize pressure
differential before the choke is pulled from the
SSD.
17 Slickline
Separation Tool
The Separation Tool is designed to be run and
set in the same SSD as the corresponding type
side-door choke. It is used as a alternate flow
control in a two-zone completion. The
separation tool provides an efficient way for
making the tubing a conductor for the upper
zone while plugging the lower zone. When the
separation tool is placed in a SSD, the packing is
located above and below the ports in the SSD.
18 Slickline
installation is complete and the pin is sheared in

the GS the GS can be retrieved to the surface.
Zonemaster™ Reservoir Access The retrieval of the sleeve is accomplished by
Mandrel System running the GS Pulling Tool to depth and
latching the sleeve installed in the Zonemaster
The Zonemaster™ reservoir access mandrel Mandrel. Upward jarring removes the sleeve
system provides the ability to control inflow or from the mandrel for retrieval to the surface.
injection for any interval in a well. When run
with isolation packers, the Zonemaster mandrels Caution: In this system the isolation sleeve does
provide a positive and reliable method to shut not have an equalizing feature. If a differential is
off well segments. The Zonemaster system suspected from behind the sleeve; the tubing
consists of two separate components. The first is should be full of fluid before attempting to pull
the reservoir access Mandrel. It is generally run the isolation sleeve to avoid loss of tools.
as part of the tubing string or liner and is used as
the inflow point into the production tubing. The
isolation sleeve can be installed or retrieved
depending on whether the adjacent interval
should be producing or shut off.
The Zonemaster system utilizes patented “crimp
seal” technology which allows for a seamless
mandrel while providing maximum ID through
the isolation sleeve.
Operations
The Zonemaster sleeve is generally pre-installed
in the mandrel before running in the well. This
allows for pressure setting of hydraulic-set
packers or for pressure testing the tubing string
during the completion. The isolation sleeves are
then removed and the mandrel is left open or the
blanking sleeves are replaced with flow control
sleeves (chokes). If changes are required during
the producing life of the well, the isolation
sleeves can be pulled and replaced as needed.
Each time the sleeves are pulled, the seals can be
redressed.
The isolation sleeves utilize a no-go positive
positioning system to provide for certainty
during installation. They are generally installed
using Slickline in vertical wells and can be
installed using either coiled tubing or sucker
rods in horizontal wells.
The isolation or production sleeves utilize a GS
tool for installation and retrieval. When running
the sleeve is attached to the GS Pulling Tool and
ran to depth. Downward jarring installs the
sleeve and shears the pin in the GS. Once the
19 Slickline
20 Slickline
Part Number Information
21 Slickline
Slickline Mechanical Capabilities
42BO Positioning Tool for 121X SSD’s
121X Sliding Side Door Positioning Tool Information

Packing OD Keys Fish
Positioning Tool Tool OD Will Pass Standard Key Selective Key Thread Size
Bore Expanded Neck
1.250 120057795 (42BO119) 1.249 1.250 1.488/1.392 120057869 (42B455) NA 1.000 5/8-11 UNC
1.500 101059081 (42BO245) 1.499 1.500 1.629/1.665 101059203 (42B706) 101282505 (42B818) 1.187 15/16-10 UNS
1.625 120057796 (42BO121) 1.624 1.625 1.992/1.897 120057867 (42B444) NA 1.187 15/16-10 UNS
1.875 100008775 (42BO116) 1.843 1.875 2.210/2.108 100005968 (42B31) 101059090 (42B153) 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
2.313 100008776 (42BO118) 2.156 2.188 2.592 101014723 (42B241) 101059109 (42B287) 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
2.750 100009659 (42BO146) 2.718 2.750 3.156/3.015 100008779 (42B345-1) 101059118 (42B349) 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
2.813 100009659 (42BO146) 2.718 2.750 3.156/3.015 100008779 (42B345-1) 101059118 (42B349) 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
3.813 101010057 (42BO238) 3.670 3.688 4.250/4.150 101059194 (42B682) 101059204 (42B707) 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
4.313 120057808 (42BO207) 4.25 4.313 4.918/4.838 120057879 (42B551) NA 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
4.562 101012383 (42BO153) 4.520 4.562 5.068/4.925 101059123 (42B370) NA 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
42BO Positioning Tool for 121R SSD’s
121R Sliding Side Door Positioning Tool Information

Bore Expanded Neck
1.375 101059077 (42BO180) 1.366 1.375 1.718/1.638 101059155 (42B460) NA 1.000 5/8-11 UNC
1.710 101059079 (42BO237) 1.690 1.710 2.156/2.110 101059193 (42B681) NA 1.187 15/16-10 UNS
1.781 101059064 (42BO117) 1.749 1.781 2.177/2.076 101012386 (42B106) NA 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
2.000 101015719 (42BO159) 1.970 2.000 2.494/2.356 101059133 (42B387) NA 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
2.125 101015719 (42BO159) 1.970 2.000 2.494/2.356 101059133 (42B387) NA 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
2.188 100008776 (42BO118) 2.156 2.188 2.592 101014723 (42B241) 101059109 (42B287) 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
2.313 100008776 (42BO118) 2.156 2.188 2.592 101014723 (42B241) 101059109 (42B287) 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
2.562 101017053 (42BO178) 2.530 2.562 3.123/2.966 101012387 (42B453) 32294 (42B642) 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
3.125 120057807 (42BO204) 3.060 3.125 3.604/3.486 120057877 (42B542) NA 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
3.250 101059078 (42BO208) 3.200 3.250 3.746/3.610 101059172 (42B557) 120057912 (42B742) 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
3.437 101009406 (42BO242) 3.410 3.437 4.08/4.14 101059186 (42B639) NA 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
3.688 101010057 (42BO238) 3.670 3.688 4.250/4.150 101059194 (42B682) 101059204 (42B707) 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
4.125 101059073 (42BO171) 3.850 4.125 4.504/4.360 101059147 (42B442) NA 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
4.313 120057808 (42BO207) 4.250 4.313 4.918/4.838 120057879 (42B551) NA 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
4.562 101012383 (42BO153) 4.520 4.562 5.068/4.925 101059123 (42B370) NA 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
5.250 120057812 (42BO236) 5.230 5.250 5.76/5.70 120057902 (42B673) NA 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
5.625 101059082 (42BO249) 5.600 5.625 6.14/6.06 101059212 (42B723) NA 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
22 Slickline
42BO Positioning Tool for 621X SSD’s

621X Sliding Side Door Positioning Tool Information
Bore Expanded Neck
1.875 100008775 (42BO116) 1.843 1.875 2.210/2.108 100005968 (42B31) 101059090 (42B153) 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
2.313 100008776 (42BO118) 2.156 2.188 2.592 101014723 (42B241) 101059109 (42B287) 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
2.750 100009659 (42BO146) 2.718 2.750 3.156/3.015 100008779 (42B345-1) 101059118 (42B349) 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
2.813 100009659 (42BO146) 2.718 2.750 3.156/3.015 100008779 (42B345-1) 101059118 (42B349) 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
3.313 101010055 (42BO154) 3.250 3.313 3.734/3.616 101059131 (42B380) NA 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
3.813 101010057 (42BO238) 3.670 3.688 4.250/4.150 101059194 (42B682) 101059204 (42B707) 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
4.313 101012385 (42BO247) 4.250 4.313 4.918/4.838 101059207 (42B713) 101399113 (42B744) 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
4.562 101012383 (42BO153) 4.520 4.562 5.068/4.925 101059123 (42B370) NA 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
42BO Positioning Tool for 621R SSD’s

621R Sliding Side Door Positioning Tool Information
Bore Expanded Neck
1.710 101059079 (42BO237) 1.690 1.710 2.156/2.110 101059193 (42B681) NA 1.187 15/16-10 UNS
2.125 101015719 (42BO159) 1.970 2.000 2.494/2.356 101059133 (42B387) NA 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
2.188 100008776 (42BO118) 2.156 2.188 2.592 101014723 (42B241) 101059109 (42B287) 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
2.313 100008776 (42BO118) 2.156 2.188 2.592 101014723 (42B241) 101059109 (42B287) 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
2.562 101017053 (42BO178) 2.530 2.562 3.123/2.966 101012387 (42B453) 32294 (42B642) 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
2.750 100009659 (42BO146) 2.718 2.750 3.156/3.015 100008779 (42B345-1) 101059118 (42B349) 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
3.437 101009406 (42BO242) 3.410 3.437 4.08/4.14 101059186 (42B639) NA 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
3.688 101010057 (42BO238) 3.670 3.688 4.250/4.150 101059194 (42B682) 101059204 (42B707) 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
3.750 101010057 (42BO238) 3.670 3.688 4.250/4.150 101059194 (42B682) 101059204 (42B707) 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
4.000 101059073 (42BO171) 3.850 4.125 4.504/4.360 101059147 (42B442) NA 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
5.625 101059082 (42BO249) 5.600 5.625 6.14/6.06 101059212 (42B723) NA 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
5.875 101015091 (42BO262) 5.850 5.875 6.31 101059265 (42B792) NA 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
23 Slickline
42BO Positioning Tool Part Numbers (Smaller Sizes)

Socket Top Selective Lower
Positioning OD Keys Retainer
Size Screw Top Sub Shear Pin Retainer Collet Key Spring Standard Key Body
Tool Expanded 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 Key 7 7a 8
120057795 100008768 120057840 101077868 120057841 101059100 101016351 120057869 101059101 120057859
1.250 1.488/1.392 NA
(42BO119) (412SS406) (42B242) (9P30875) (42B243) (42B244) (90T194) (42B455) (42B245) (42B333)
101059077 100008768 101059154 101077868 101059153 101059100 101016351 101059155 101059101 101059152
1.375 1.718/1.638 NA
(42BO180) (412SS406) (42B459) (9P30875) (42B458) (42B244) (90T194) (42B460) (42B245) (42B457)
101059081 100008768 101059200 101077903 101059102 101059202 101016351 101059203 101282505 101059201 101059112
1.500 1.629/1.665
(42BO245) (412SS406) (42B703) (9P41062) (42B247) (42B705) (90T194) (42B706) (42B818) (42B704) (42B335)
120057796 100007338 120057842 101077903 120057843 101059103 101016351 120057867 101059104 120057860
1.625 1.992/1.897 NA
(42BO121) (412SS411) (42B250) (9P41062) (42B251) (42B248) (90T194) (42B444) (42B249) (42B337)
101059079 100007338 101059144 101077903 101059192 101059103 100009027 101059193 101059104 101059191
1.710 2.156/2.110 NA
(42BO237) (412SS411) (42B439) (9P41062) (42B680) (42B248) (90TN68) (42B681) (42B249) (42B679)
101059064 101012357 101059097 101077909 101059096 100008777 101010207 101012386 101059098 100008778
1.781 2.177/2.076 NA
(42BO117) (412SS404) (42B234) (9P41312) (42B233) (42B235) (90T465) (42B106) (42B236) (42B339)
100008775 101012357 101059097 101077909 100008781 100008777 101010207 100005968 101059090 101059098 100008781
1.875 2.210/2.108
(42BO116) (412SS404) (42B234) (9P41312) (42B762) (42B235) (90T465) (42B31) (42B153) (42B236) (42B762)
2.000 101015719 101012357 101059136 101077911 101059135 100008777 101010207 101059133 101059098 101059134
2.494/2.356 NA
2.125 (42BO159) (412SS404) (42B391) (9P41500) (42B390) (42B235) (90T465) (42B387) (42B236) (42B389)
2.188 100008776 101012357 101017054 101077912 101059241 101015721 101010207 101014723 101059109 101015720 101059241
2.592
2.313 (42BO118) (412SS404) (42B240) (9P41562) (42B763) (42B238) (90T465) (42B241) (42B287) (42B237) (42B763)
101017053 101012357 101059151 101077912 101059099 101015721 101010207 101012387 32294 101015720 101017055
2.562 3.123/2.966
(42BO178) (412SS404) (42B454) (9P41562) (42B239) (42B238) (90T465) (42B453) (42B642) (42B237) (42B338)
100009659 100007337 101059105 101077975 101059242 101059115 101010207 100008779 101059118 101059108 101059242
2.750 3.156/3.015
(42BO146) (412SS409) (42B252) (9P52188) (42B764) (42B346) (90T465) (42B345-1) (42B349) (42B255) (42B764)
120057807 100007337 101059163 101078010 101059161 101059162 101010207 120057877 101059164 101059165
3.125 3.604/3.486 NA
(42BO204) (412SS409) (42B540) (9P62750) (42B538) (42B539) (90T465) (42B542) (42B541) (42B543)
101059078 100007337 101059169 101078013 101059170 101059171 101078900 101059172 120057912 101059130 101059126
3.250 3.746/3.610
(42BO208) (412SS409) (42B554) (9P62937) (42B555) (42B556) (90TN454) (42B557) (42B742) (42B379) (42B375)
101010055 100007337 101059129 101078013 101059127 101059128 101010207 101059131 101059130 101059126
3.313 3.734/3.616 NA
(42BO154) (412SS409) (42B378) (9P62937) (42B376) (42B377) (90T465) (42B380) (42B379) (42B375)
4.000 101059073 100007336 101059143 101078018 101059145 101059141 101079002 101059147 101059142 101059146
4.504/4.360 NA
4.125 (42BO171) (412SS403) (42B435) (9P63500) (42B440) (42B432) (90T358) (42B442) (42B433) (42B441)
120057808 100007336 101059168 120060028 101059167 120057878 101078897 120057879 120057880 101059166
4.313 4.918/4.838 NA
(42BO207) (412SS403) (42B550) (9P61000) (42B548) (42B549) (90TN443) (42B551) (42B552) (42B547)
101012383 100007336 101059124 101078021 101059119 101059121 101078897 101059123 101059125 101059120
4.562 5.068/4.925 NA
(42BO153) (412SS403) (42B371) (9P64109) (42B367) (42B369) (90TN443) (42B370) (42B372) (42B368)
24 Slickline
42BO Positioning Tool Part Numbers (Larger Sizes)
Positioning OD Keys
Size Socket Top Key Standard Selective Lower Key Socket Socket
Tool Expanded
Top Sub Screw Cylinder Shear Pin Retainer Key Spring Key Key Retainer Body Screw Retainer Screw
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7a 8 9 10 11 12
3.437 101009406 101059173 100007335 101059198 101078014 101059185 101318574 101059186 101059187 101059188 101058938 101059199 101058878
4.08/4.14 NA
3.562 (42BO242) (42B576) (412SS401) (42B698) (9P63000) (42B638) (90CN3635) (42B639) (42B640) (42B641) (412SS800) (42B699) (412SS410)
3.688
101010057 101059178 101058867 101059175 101326477 101059243 101078049 101059194 101059204 101059243 101059177 101058942 101059197 100008769
3.750 4.250/4.150
(42BO238) (42B583) (412SS105) (42B580) (9P61188) (42B765) (90CN1370) (42B682) (42B707) (42B765) (42B582) (412SS807) (42B685) (412SS437)
3.813
101012385 101059168 100007336 101059205 101078020 101059167 101078049 101059207 101399113 101059166 101059206 101058938 101059208 100008769
4.313 4.918/4.838
(42BO247) (42B550) (412SS403) (42B711) (9P63920) (42B548) (90CN1370) (42B713) (42B744) (42B547) (42B712) (412SS800) (42B714) (412SS437)
4.437 101243498 101059168 100007336 101059205 101078020 101059167 101078049 101243500 101059166 101059206 101058938 101059208 100008769
5.054 NA
4.500 (42BO267) (42B550) (412SS403) (42B711) (9P63920) (42B548) (90CN1370) (42B803) (42B547) (42B712) (412SS800) (42B714) (412SS437)
101270847 101270855 100007336 101270853 101077997 101270851 101078049 101270856 101270852 101270854 101058938 101270857 101058898
5.125 5.53 NA
(42BO269) (42B811) (412SS403) (42B812) (9P54750) (42B813) (90CN1370) (42B814) (42B815) (42B816) (412SS800) (42B817) (412SS488)
120057812 120057901 100007336 120057899 101077997 120057897 101078049 120057902 120057898 120057900 101058938 120057903 101058898
5.250 5.76/5.70 NA
101247083 101247088 100007336 101247148 101077998 101247090 101078049 101247093 101247097 101247098 101058938 101247154 101058898
5.500 6.02/5.94 NA
101059082 101059209 100007336 101059210 101077998 101059211 101078049 101059212 101059213 101059214 101058938 101059215 101058898
5.625 6.14/6.06 NA
101015091 101059262 100007336 101059263 101077999 101059264 101078049 101059265 101059266 101059267 101058938 101059268 101058898
5.875 6.31 NA
25 Slickline
142BO Positioning Tools
142BO Shifting Tools

SAP Old Key Locating
Fish
Material Material Will Pass Tool OD Expanded Key Part Numbers Dog Top Thread
Neck
Number Number OD OD
101038100 142BO6 1.500 1.410 1.694 101059148 (42B443) 1.568/1.546 1.187 15/16-10 UNS
100008500 142BO4 1.875 1.843 2.161 100005968 (42B31) 1.943/1.925 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
NA 142BO13 2.125 2.060 2.478/2.35 101059133 (42B387) 2.193/2.169 1.375 15/16-10 UNS
101323317 142BO15 2.188 2.170 2.592 101014723 (42B241) 2.318/2.300 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
100008499 142BO3 2.313 2.280 2.592 101014723 (42B241) 2.382/2.364 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
101038097 142BO14 2.562 2.500 2.966 101012387 (42B453) 2.692 1.750 15/16-10 UNS
100008498 142BO1 2.750 2.720 3.076 100008779 (42B345-1) 2.846/2.822 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
101038098 142BO16 2.813 2.780 3.015 100008779 (42B345-1) 2.912/2.884 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
NA 142BO7 3.125 3.100 3.604/3.486 120057877 (42B542) 3.222/3.203 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
101038095 142BO11 3.313 3.250 3.616 101059131 (42B380) 3.416/3.399 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
101038096 142BO12 3.437 3.410 4.080 101059186 (42B639) 3.530/3.513 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
101038094 142BO10 3.688 3.620 4.080 101059176 (42B581) 3.769/3.751 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
101038099 142BO2 3.813 3.750 4.158 101038111 (42B12) 3.915/3.897 2.313 1 1/16-10 UNS
101038101 142BO9 4.562 4.500 4.928 101059123 (42B370) 4.668/4.644 3.125 1 1/16-10 UNS
26 Slickline
142BO Positioning Tool Parts
Size Positioning OD Keys Upper Key Standard Lower Key Socket Spring Dog Locator Main
Tool Expanded Fish Neck Retainer Key Key Spring Retainer Screw 200# Spring Housing Retainer Dog Spring Split Ring Dog Mandrel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
101038100 101038123 101059102 101059148 101016351 101038153 101058879 101078550 101038154 101038124 100009023 101057744 101057916 101038125
1.500 1.694
(142BO6) (142B23) (42B247) (42B443) (90T194) (142B58) (412SS414) (90CN896) (142B59) (142B24) (90C691) (41X22) (41X73) (142B26)
100008500 101038122 101059096 100005968 101010207 100008778 101012321 100009011 101038119 101015050 101078526 101012287 100005961 101038121
1.875 2.161
(142BO4) (142B21) (42B233) (42B31) (90T465) (42B339) (410SS118) (90CN808) (142B19) (142B22) (90CN559) (41X2) (41X539) (142B20)
101038122 101059135 101059133 101010207 101059134 101012321 100009011 101078526 101012287 100005960 101038121
2.125 (142BO13) 2.478/2.35 (142B53) (142B54)
(142B21) (42B390) (42B387) (90T465) (42B389) (410SS118) (90CN808) (90CN559) (41X2) (41X176) (142B20)
101323317 101038118 101059099 101014723 101010207 101017055 100007337 100006181 101323321 101323322 100006180 100005955 100005962 101038117
2.188 2.592
100008499 101038118 101059099 101014723 101010207 101017055 100007337 100006181 101038116 100008501 100006180 100005955 100005963 101038117
2.313 2.592
Nut
101038097 101038150 101059099 101012387 101010207 101017055 101078123 101038151 101037709 101078124 101057277 101057281 101037713
2.562 2.966 101038152
(142BO14) (142B55) (42B239) (42B453) (90T465) (42B338) (90CN2223) (142B56) (14R88) (90CN2224) (41R92) (41R96) (14R92)
(142B57)
100008498 101038135 101059106 100008779 101010207 101059111 100007337 100009012 101038120 101038126 101078541 101010043 101057851 101038102
2.750 3.076
(142BO1) (142B4) (42B253) (42B345-1) (90T465) (42B334) (412SS409) (90CN895) (142B2) (142B3) (90CN742) (41X31) (41X542) (142B1)
101038098 101038135 101059106 100008779 101010207 101059111 100007337 100009012 101038120 101038126 101078541 101010043 101010042 101038102
2.813 3.015
(142BO16) (142B4) (42B253) (42B345-1) (90T465) (42B334) (412SS409) (90CN895) (142B2) (142B3) (90CN742) (41X31) (41X277) (142B1)
101059161 120057877 101078900 101059165 100007337 101078110 101491010 101078036 101012285 101012295 101038127
3.125 (142BO7) 3.604/3.486 (142B27) (142B28)
(42B538) (42B542) (90TN454) (42B543) (412SS409) (90CN2095) (142B29) (90CN1193) (41X128) (41X543) (142B30)
101038095 101038142 101038140 101059131 101078900 101038139 100007337 101078110 101038141 101038143 101078571 101012285 101057698 101038127
3.313 3.616
(142BO11) (142B46) (142B44) (42B380) (90TN454) (142B43) (412SS409) (90CN2095) (142B45) (142B47) (90C1193) (41X128) (41X133) (142B30)
101038096 101038148 101059185 101059186 101078049 101038144 100007337 101078110 101038145 101038147 101078036 101012285 101057741 101038149
3.437 4.080
(142BO12) (142B51) (42B638) (42B639) (90CN1370) (142B48) (412SS409) (90CN2095) (142B49) (142B50) (90CN1193) (41X128) (41X215) (142B52)
101038094 101038137 101059174 101059176 101078049 101038134 100007337 101015276 101038136 101038138 101015275 101017033 101017031 101038160
3.688 4.080
(142BO10) (142B41) (42B579) (42B581) (90CN1370) (142B39) (412SS409) (90C929) (142B40) (142B42) (90C928) (41X80) (41X493) (142B7)
101038099 101038166 101038146 101038111 101013700 101038155 100007337 101015276 101038103 101038167 101015275 101017033 101057822 101038160
3.813 4.158
(142BO2) (142B8) (142B5) (42B12) (90T5) (142B6) (412SS409) (90C929) (142B10) (142B9) (90C928) (41X80) (41X492) (142B7)
101038101 101038128 101038129 101059123 101078897 101038130 100007337 101015264 101038131 101038132 101015268 101057708 101057706 101038133
4.562 4.928
(142BO9) (142B33) (142B34) (42B370) (90TN443) (142B35) (412SS409) (90CN1207) (142B36) (142B37) (90C1391) (41X149) (41X146) (142B38)
27 Slickline
Slickline Mechanical Capabilities
Written Project
1. Two type of circulating devices are ported nipples (Zone Master) and sliding side doors (SSD), what
the primary purpose (reason) for installing these devices?
2. What advantages does the sliding side door have over the ported nipples?
3. List three applications for a SSD:
a.
b.
c.
4. How many “621XU” or “621XD” SSD’s can be run in a tubing string?
5. List a couple of reasons that a “XD” SSD might be chosen over the “XU” SSD:
6. The “121XD” was designed the same as the “121XO” except the “121XD” has larger
for use in production operations.
7. What direction do you shift the sleeve in a 121XA SSD to open it?
8. What direction do you shift the sleeve in a 121XD SSD to open it?
9. What direction do you shift the sleeve in a 121XO SSD to open it?
10. What positioning tool is primarily used to shift SSD’s to the open or closed position?
11. What positioning tool is most commonly used in upward shifting?
12. What positioning tool is most commonly used for selective down shifting?
13. What purpose does the shear pin have in the “42BO” Positioning Tool?
14. Why is the “42BO” shifting tool equipped with two threaded pin ends?
15. When shifting the top sleeve in the wellbore, which in this case happens to be a 121XA SSD, to the
closed position the 90o Shoulder on the keys have to face (direction).
16. When shifting the sleeve in the wellbore, which happens to be a 121XD, to the open position; you
should use the selective positioning tool.
17. Does the 142BO positioning tool have a shear pin?
28 Slickline
Hands-On Projects

42BO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a “42BO”
Tool Positioning Tool – Reassemble
142BO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a “142BO”
Tool Positioning Tool – Reassemble
42BO Assemble and Pin a 42BO Positioning Tool
preparing it to run into the well to shift a SSD up
that has more than 1 up shift to open SSD`s.
29 Slickline
SECTION 9
GAS LIFT EQUIPMENT

Gas Lift Equipment
Gas Lift Equipment
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 2
Gas Lift Installations ................................................................................................................................. 2
Open Installation (Fig. 1) ....................................................................................................................... 2
Semi-Closed Installations (Fig. 2) ......................................................................................................... 3
Closed Installations (Fig. 3) ................................................................................................................... 3
Gas Lift Mandrels (GLM's) ....................................................................................................................... 5
Latches....................................................................................................................................................... 6
Schlumberger ......................................................................................................................................... 6
Weatherford ........................................................................................................................................... 8
Kickover Tools .......................................................................................................................................... 8
Kickover Tools .......................................................................................................................................... 9
Running procedure ................................................................................................................................. 9
Pulling procedure ................................................................................................................................. 10
Pulling procedure ................................................................................................................................. 11
Orienting Kickover Tools ........................................................................................................................ 14
ADDITIONAL GAS LIFT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 15
1. Tubing Flow Installations ...................................................................................................... 15
2. Casing Flow Installations ....................................................................................................... 15
3. Install Slickline Surface Service Equipment .......................................................................... 15
4. Slickline Procedure to Retrieve and Install Gas Lift Valves. ................................................ 15
5. General Information. .............................................................................................................. 16
Written Project......................................................................................................................................... 17
Gas Lift: ............................................................................................................................................... 17
Hands-On Projects ................................................................................................................................... 18
1 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
of this type for intermittent flow, it should only be

Introduction done where a packer cannot be run for some reason.
At any rate an open installation should not be run
In a flowing well there is sufficient energy stored where there is any possibility that the gas will be
in the reservoir to flow the well to the surface. blown around the bottom of the tubing. Another
Reservoir pressure and formation gas furnish this
lifting energy. When this energy is too low for the
well to flow, or when the volume rate of production
desired is greater than the reservoir energy can
deliver, it becomes necessary to install artificial lift.
Gas lift is a process of lifting fluids from a well by
the continuous injection of relatively high-pressure
gas to supplement the reservoir energy (continuous
flow), or by the injection of gas underneath an
accumulated liquid slug in a relatively short period
of time to move the slug to the surface (intermittent
lift). The injected gas lifts the oil to the surface by
one or a combination of the following processes:
reduction of fluid gradients, expansion of injected
gas, and displacement of fluid by compressed gas.
Wells with high fluid levels, but not enough gas
pressure and/or volume to flow naturally, lend
themselves readily to continuous flow gas lift.
Wells with low bottom-hole pressures are more
suitable to intermittent gas lift. Gas lift is suitable
for almost every type of well to be placed on
artificial lift. The installation may be made either
during completion or in later workover operations.
Gas Lift Installations

There are numerous types of installations that can problem with open installations is that a variable
be run in gas lift operations. These depend to a surface line pressure will cause the fluid level to
great extent as to whether or not the well is to go on rise and fall in the casing annulus thereby exposing
intermittent or continuous flow lift. The installation all the gas lift valves beneath the point of gas
type also depends upon the type of completion such injection to severe fluid erosion. Another
as open hole, etc. In addition well producing disadvantage to this type of installation is that the
conditions such as possible sand production, water well must be unloaded and re-stabilized every time
and or gas coning have a bearing on the type of it is shut down for some reason. Since no packer is
installation. in the well, the fluid will rise during shutdown time
and this fluid must again be produced out of the
Open Installation (Fig. 1) annulus. Also a portion of this fluid will be U-
tubed through the valves subjecting the valves to
In this installation a string of tubing is hung in the additional fluid erosion.
well with no packer. This leaves communication From the various disadvantages cited it is quite
between the casing and tubing, thereby restricting evident that an open installation is not normally
this type of installation to good wells that will recommended.
exhibit a fluid seal. Normally this will mean wells
that are suitable for continuous flow only.
Although it would be possible to run an installation
2 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
Semi-Closed Installations (Fig. 2) may be intermitting from the very bottom of the
tubing and the top of the packer, the packer still
This installation is identical with the open prevents casing gas pressure from acting on the
installation except that a packer is added to pack off formation. However, this type of installation does
between the tubing and casing. This type of not make provisions to keep gas pressure from
installation is suitable for both continuous and acting on the formation through the tubing string.
intermittent flow. It offers several advantages over
an open installation. Once the well has been Closed Installations (Fig. 3)
unloaded there is no way for the fluid to come back
into the casing/tubing annulus. Since all the gas lift This type of installation is similar to semi-closed
valves are run with reverse checks, no fluid can installation except that a standing valve is placed in
leave the tubing and go into the casing space. In the tubing string. Normally the standing valve is
turn the packer prevents any fluid from coming placed at the bottom of the well, but may be placed
around the bottom of the tubing and into the casing. directly below the bottom gas lift valve. The
This type of installation is also used in many purpose of this standing valve is to prevent the gas
instances for intermittent gas lift. The installation pressure (when injected into the tubing string) from
3 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
acting on the formation. For example, let us assume

that we have a 700 psi gas lift valve on the very
bottom that is to lift by intermittent slugs a 400 psi
total tubing load. This means that the well must
build up to a 400 psi bottomhole pressure to support
this tubing load. As the 700 psi gas lift valve opens
it places 700 psi gas pressure underneath the liquid
slug. This 700 psi is also free to act in reverse on
the formation if no standing valve is installed. Since
the formation has only 400 psi pressure, it is quite
likely that some of the fluids will be pushed back
into the formation. Assuming that no fluids are
pushed back into the formation, the 700 psi is still
placed against the sand face preventing fluid entry
for a period of several minutes until the slug is
removed at the surface. During this period of time
the sand face has a higher pressure than it would
have if a standing valve is installed.
In lieu of these various arguments it is
recommended that a standing valve be run on many
intermittent gas lift installations. At least some
provision should be made to place a standing valve
in the well at a later date if necessary. It is quite
likely that a standing valve will increase the daily
production from a well of the intermittent type. This
type of closed installation is recommended for low
bottomhole pressure high Productivity Index (P.I.)
wells and low bottomhole pressure low P.I. wells.
4 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
The following information is to serve as a guide for

the proper latches (which are illustrated in the latch
Gas Lift Mandrels (GLM's) section) used in the 1½” Type 'A' and 'G' profiles.
The 1½" 'A' profile accepts:
When addressing the subject of Gas Lift Mandrels
(GLM's) it would be logical to break them into 1. Schlumberger’s RA and RM latches.
categories based on their evolution into the oil 2. Weatherford’s RA and MT-2 latch.
industry. The three categories or generations they The 1½" 'G' profile accepts:
would come under are: 1. Schlumberger's RK and RKP latch.
1. Side pocket mandrels with 1½" pockets. 2. Weatherford’s RK and RKP latch.
2. Side pocket mandrels with 1" pockets.
3. Side pocket mandrels with 1½" or 1" pockets
that incorporate the use of an orienting sleeve
and deflectors.
The first generation gas lift mandrels which

incorporate the use of 1½" valves and latches came
into existence in the early 1950's. During this time
and on up into the early 1970's the 1½" GLM's were
generally chosen over the 1" GLM’s which also
evolved in the early 1950's because of two reasons:
1. The bellows used in the 1½” valves was more
reliable until the design of newer version of
bellows in the early 1970's.
2. Because of the larger port area which was used
for water flooding purposes.
The gas lift mandrels originally had a concentric
latch profile similar to what is found in a landing
nipple for a lock mandrel. This type of latch profile
is referred to as the type 'A' profile. Another type of
latch profile available for both the 1" and 1½"
pockets is the type 'G' profile. The type 'G' profile
has a latch ring at the entry mouth of the pocket
which is "C" shaped and does not circumvent the
pocket as does the type 'A' profile. Given a choice
of the two profiles ('A' or 'G') most customers
choose the type 'A' because of the profile design
being concentric in the pocket. This design gives a
more reliable locating action and helps to eliminate
the bending of the latch during the running The second generation GLM's gained popularity in
sequence of the valves as sometimes occurs with the early 1970's with the design of a better bellows
the type 'G' profile. for the 1" valves. The use of the 1" GLM’s allowed
Fig. 6 shows the difference between the profiles for a reduction in the outside diameter of the SPM.
available in GLM's. Also illustrated is the This reduction in OD allowed the use of smaller
difference between a tubing flow SPM (Type 'A') casing and the use of larger tubing during the
and a casing flow (Type 'G'). Both profiles are completion in order to reduce the overall cost of
available in the two types of GLM's. completing a well for gas lift operations. The
second generations GLM utilize 1" pockets and are
available with only the type 'G' profile.
5 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
The 1" 'G' profile accepts: Latches

1. Schlumberger's BK-2, BEK-3 and M latches.
2. Weatherford’s BK-2 and BEK2 latches. Schlumberger
GLM’s with 1" pockets also have the capability of
accepting an integral bottom collet latch. These Camco valve top latches lock retrievable gas lift
latches are normally used in conjunction with a valves and side pocket accessories without integral
dummy valve: but, can also be used with gas lift latches in the appropriate Camco side pocket
valves such as the Camco BKT-1 gas lift valve and mandrels. This line includes the BK-2, BK-4, BK-5,
Daniel's RP-1-C gas lift valve. BEK-2, BEK-3, RA, RK, RK-1, and RKP latches.
The BK-2, BK-4, BK-5, BEK-2, and BEK-3 spring-
loaded, ring-style latches lock 1-in. [25.4-mm] OD
In deviated wells, the non-orienting GLM’s valves and accessories in the appropriate Camco
frequently present problems when installing or KBM, KBMM, KBMG, and KBTG series
retrieving gas lift accessories from the GLM. If the mandrels. BK-4 latches feature a tangential locking
pocket is on the high side of the tubing (belly up), pin in the latch stop similar to the RK series latches.
the centering device of a non-orienting type The BK-5 latch features a tangential locking pin
kickover tool may not have sufficient strength to lift like the BK-4. In addition, the no-go angle on the
the weight of the valve to align it with the pocket. BK-5 latch stop is a 15° bevel instead of a 30°
In this circumstance, the valve could not locate the bevel. BEK-2 and BEK-3 latches allow flow
pocket and therefore could not be installed. The through the latch center and have a 0.375-in. [9.5-
same situation could occur when attempting to mm] bore. BEK-3 latches feature a specially treated
retrieve the valve, due to the weight of the pulling erosion-resistant ID and are ideal for use with
tool and spacer(s) that may be required. circulating or flow devices.
RA latches are attached to 1 1/2-in. [38.1-mm] OD
When the pocket is on the low side of the tubing valves and accessories. RA latches are used in the
(belly down), there should be no problem in appropriate Camco MMA and MTA TRU-GUIDE*
installing and/or retrieving the valve. However, in a series mandrels. RK, RK-1, and RKP spring-loaded,
"belly down” situation it is very difficult to lower ring-style latches are also attached to 1 1/2-in.
other slickline tools and control devices through the [38.1-mm] OD valves and accessories and are used
GLM. The tools tend to drop into the low side of in MMM, MMG, and MTG TRU-GUIDE series
the mandrel and stop on top of the pocket, if empty, mandrels.
or on top of the gas lift accessory that may be in the
RK latches have two O-rings on the latch stop to
pocket.
provide a debris barrier in the top of the mandrel
Due to these problems and in order to provide a pocket and are used in the appropriate Camco
more reliable means of installing and retrieving gas MMM, MMG, or MTG TRU-GUIDE series
lift accessories in deviated wells, the third mandrels. RK-1 latches have longitudinal grooves
generation GLM was introduced in the early 1960's. that serve as flow conduits between the latch and
These GLM’s have a built-in orienting sleeve that is the mandrel pocket and are used in appropriate
used to activate a kickover tool that is more reliable Camco MMG and MTG TRU-GUIDE series
(in deviated wells) than the non-orienting kickover mandrels. RKP latches allow flow through the latch
tool. (The Kickover Tools are discussed later in center, have a 0.453-in. [11.5-mm] bore, and are
this section.) These types of GLM’s are also used in the appropriate Camco MMG or MTG
available with a tool discriminator (deflector) which TRU-GUIDE series mandrels.
is designed to prevent tools larger than the proper
running and pulling tools from locating and
stopping in the SPM when performing slickline
work below the mandrel.
6 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
Gas Lift Mandrel Top View
RA Latch in a A Profile RK Latch in a G Profile
7 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
Latches for a 180° latch pocket profile have a

Weatherford spring-loaded, ring-style locking mechanism.
Latches for a 360° latch pocket profile have either a
Weatherford offers a wide range of McMurry- collet-type locking mechanism or a spring-loaded
Macco™ Latches for installing slickline-retrievable rotating cam lock with debris barrier.
gas lift and chemical injection equipment in side A ported ID is included in some designs for
pocket mandrels. These latches are specifically applications requiring a communication path
designed to lock in either a 180° or a 360° latch- between the latch and attached valve.
pocket profile. To retrieve a latch and attached
valve; upward jarring of the tool string shears the
release shear pin, permitting the locking mechanism
to disengage from the latch pocket profile.
8 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
Kickover Tools Running procedure
There are basically two classes of kickover tools In the running procedure, the valve, latch, and
used to position accessories into side pocket kickover/selector tool are made up onto the
mandrels (GLM’s). These classes are: slickline tool string and lowered through the tubing
1. Non-orienting type, which relied on a centering until the tool is below the selected mandrel (Fig. A).
device, mounted on its body, to manipulate the The kickover/selector tool is slowly raised through
accessories into the side pocket. the tubing until the finger on the tool contacts the
2. Orienting type, which positively positions the orienting sleeve slot and stops. Tension is placed on
accessories over the side pocket after the
kickover tool, has been pulled up into the
orienting sleeve of the SPM.
The orienting type kickover tool can only be used
with GLM's having an orienting sleeve. The non-
orienting kickover tool is required in GLM's that
don't incorporate the orienting sleeve.
The orienting type kickover tool is the tool
normally used in the GLM's with an orienting
sleeve; but, most of the non-orienting kickover tools
can also be used in these GLM’s if the well is fairly
vertical.
Two examples where the use of a non-orienting
type kickover tool may be advisable are as follows:
1. The GLM is installed at an extreme depth in the
well where the weight load on the slickline plus
the additional strain required to activate the
orienting type kickover tool may approach the
load limit of the slickline. In general, the
weight, length and diameter of the orienting type
kickover tools are greater than that of the non-
orienting type kickover tools. This coupled with
crooked tubing and/or heavy fluids would add to
the problem, especially, at extreme depths.
2. A damaged or severely worn orienting sleeve in
the GLM could prohibit the use of the orienting
type kickover tool.
The Camco kickover tools (OK Series and OM
Series) and Merla selector tools (TMP and TP) are
run into the well using standard slickline methods. the slickline tool string by pulling until the tool
When the locating finger of the tool contacts the releases and kicks over (Fig. B). The tools are then
stop in the orienting guide sleeve in the mandrel, lowered until a loss of weight indicates that the tool
the kick spring pivots the lower section of the tool, has located the side pocket of the mandrel.
the running tool, and valve into the kicked-over
position. The orienting guide sleeve in the mandrel Downward jarring drives the valve and
assures correct installation. Once the slickline latch into the side pocket mandrel (Fig. C).
device is installed, a shear pin in the finger Upward jarring shears a pin in the latch and releases
housing and the release plunger assembly is the running tool from the valve and latch (Fig. D).
sheared, permitting the tool to be returned to the The tool string can then be retrieved from the well.
surface.
9 Slickline
Gas Uft Eqliprrmt
® 2009, HJNibutt.m
Gas Lift Equipment
Pulling procedure
In the pulling procedure, the kickover/selector tool

and pulling tool are made up onto the slickline tool
string and lowered through the tubing until the tool
is below the selected mandrel (Fig. A).
The kickover/selector tool is slowly raised through
the tubing until the finger on the tool contacts the
orienting sleeve slot and stops. Tension is placed on
the slickline tool string by pulling until the tool
releases and kicks over (Fig. B). The tools are then
lowered until a loss of weight indicates that the tool
has located the side pocket of the mandrel.
Downward jarring securely connects the pulling
tool to the latch (Fig. C). Upward jarring shears a
pin in the latch and releases the valve from the
mandrel (Fig. D). The tool string and valve can then
be retrieved from the well.
11 Slickline
Gas lift Equipment
HALLIBURTON 12 Sliddine
0 2000, HiiiUJtlf
Gas Lift Equipment
Weatherford McMurry-Macco™ Kickover Tools

are slickline devices used to selectively install and
retrieve control equipment from side pocket
mandrels with an orienting sleeve. The sleeve
guides the kickover tool into perfect alignment
above the pocket of the mandrel.
The McMurry-Macco KOT™ Tool features “no
pinning” between runs. The arm assembly is pushed
back into position when leaving the side pocket
mandrel on its trip out of the well. This greatly
reduces slickline time by eliminating the need to
remove the tool from the tool string while
disassembling the tool for re-pinning. It also allows
the operator several attempts to either set or retrieve
a control device without coming out of the well.
Many customers and slickline operators specify the
McMurry-Macco KOT Tool because of this cost
savings feature.
Another feature is the multiple tubing sizes each
tool is capable of operating within. By simply
adding the appropriate centralizing pad, the tool can
be used in larger tubing thus saving the additional
expense of another tool and repair parts.
Key Features
 Requires no pinning
 Most tools are easily converted to run in
two different tubing sizes.
13 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
Orienting Kickover Tools

Pocket
Schlumberger Weatherford
Size
1.00” OK Series Merla TMP KOT-1
1.50” OM Series Merla TP KOT-2
14 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
the current operating valve; casing

fluid and the hydrostatic pressure that
ADDITIONAL GAS LIFT may exist below the current operating
INFORMATION valve, etc.)
OPERATING PROCEDURE TO PULL GAS 2.5 Close swab valve on the tree and bleed off
LIFT VALVES AND RESET GAS LIFT any trapped pressure above the swab valve
VALVES to allow slickline equipment to be installed.
1. Tubing Flow Installations

3. Install Slickline Surface Service
1.1 Shut off injection gas to casing. Equipment
1.2 Shut-in wing valve on the tree. 3.1 Assure that the slickline surface service
1.3 Relieve any casing to tubing differential that equipment meets the pressure and service
may exist at the lowermost valve that is to (STD. or H2S) requirements of the job at
be retrieved. This may require: hand.
a. bleeding the trapped injection gas from 3.2 Use lubricator of sufficient length to contain
the casing or, the entire slickline tool string, kickover tool
b. applying pressure to the tubing or, and accessory that is to be installed or
c. combination of the above, depending retrieved.
upon the well conditions and the status 3.3 After installation on the well, the slickline
of the lifting operation. (i.e. depth of the surface service equipment should be
current operating valve; casing fluid and pressure tested to the maximum anticipated
the hydrostatic pressure that may exist shut-in tubing pressure.
below the current operating valve, etc.) 3.4 The slickline valve should be tested in the
1.4 Close swab valve on the tree and bleed off closed position.
any trapped pressure above the swab valve 3.5 Any leaks should be corrected and the
to allow the slickline equipment to be pressure test repeated until it is successfully
installed. tested.
2. Casing Flow Installations

4. Slickline Procedure to Retrieve
2.1 Shut off injection gas to tubing.
and Install Gas Lift Valves.
2.2 Allow casing to bleed down to system
pressure. 4.1 Run a tubing gauge to check for
obstructions in the tubing. The gauge
2.3 Close valve on casing flow wing. should be run to a point below the
2.4 Relieve any casing to tubing pressure lowermost gas lift valve to be retrieved or
differential that may exist at the depth of the installed.
lowermost valve that is to be retrieved. This 4.2 If tubing stop, collar stop or standing valve
may require: is not already in place, a suitable stop
should be installed at a point below the
a. Bleeding the casing surface pressure to
lowermost valve to be retrieved or installed.
zero, or
(The stop would retain a dropped valve in
b. applying pressure to the tubing, or the tubing.)
c. combination of the above, depending 4.3 Make up the slickline tool string using 30#
upon the well conditions and the status of weight bar, jars and knuckle joint.
of the lifting operation. (i.e. depth of Attach the proper kickover tool, spacer
bar(s) (if applicable) and pulling tool. (More
15 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
weight bar may be used if needed to uppermost GLM would be assigned number
overcome stuffing box friction or due to one (1) etc... A written record of this
well conditions.) information should be retained.
4.4 When retrieving two or more gas lift valves 4.10 Once the valves are installed, follow the
from a well, the valves should be retrieved, Company Representative's instructions to
in sequence, starting with the lowermost put the system back in service and/or to
valve. Beware that a casing to tubing other wise test the valves. Upon completion
pressure differential may exist at the first of a successful test, and if applicable,
valve to be retrieved. retrieve the previously installed tubing stop.
4.5 As each valve is retrieved, it should be
positively identified, (by its pressure setting, CAUTION: Shut off injection gas and
serial number, etc.) and a written record be close the flow line valve prior to re-
made as to the depth of the GLM that it was entering the well with slickline tools.
retrieved from.
4.6 If some or all of the retrieved valves are to
be re-installed, they should be visually
inspected, redressed and tested before re-
5. General Information.
installation.
5.1 When retrieving gas lift valves, dummy
4.7 If the latches are to be reused they should be valves, circulating valves, injection valves,
carefully inspected for damage and if etc. from the side pocket mandrels, a shear
acceptable, the latches must be redressed down to release pulling tool should be
(pinned). used.
4.8 When installing two or more gas lift valves 5.2 Consideration should be given to the
is a well, the valves should be installed in weight of the tool string used in installing
sequence, starting with the uppermost valve and retrieving accessories in side pocket
to be installed. mandrels. Excessive tool string weight,
4.9 Before installing the valves, each valve along with heavy jarring action can cause
should be positively identified (by its severe damage; especially when installing
pressure setting, serial number, etc.) and one (1) inch OD equipment.
should be numbered in the order of the
sequence in which they are to be installed.
Example: The valve to be installed in the
16 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
Written Project
Gas Lift:
1. The two most accepted methods of gas lift are:
2. When pulling a string of gas lift valves or dummy valves, from the tubing, you being pulling
the valves from the:
3. The recommended stem weight for pulling and setting gas lift valves in Side Pocket Mandrels
is:
4. The one inch “BK” latch is designed to be installed into a Side Pocket Mandrel having a
profile type:
5. What is the running tool used to set the 1” latches?
6. What is the pulling tool used to pull the 1” latches?
7. What pulling tool is used to pull the 1.500” RK latch?
8. What pulling tool is used to pull the 1.500” RA latch?
9. The Merla Kickover Tool used to run and set the 1.500” valves in Side Pocket Mandrels is
the:
17 Slickline
Gas Lift Equipment
Hands-On Projects
inspection and maintenance of tools and/or equipment of this Section. (Dependant on what is used at the
Individuals Location)

TP Disassemble/Reassemble Clean and Inspect a “TP”
Kickover Tool and function test
TMP Disassemble/Reassemble Clean and Inspect a
“TMP” Kickover Tool and function test
OK Disassemble/Reassemble Clean and Inspect a “OK”
OM Disassemble/Reassemble Clean and Inspect a “OM”
Prepare Equipment to Run and Pull 1 & 1½” GLV`s
18 Slickline
SECTION 10
SLICKLINE FISHING
Wireline Fishing
Wireline Fishing
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 3
Wireline Fishing Tools .............................................................................................................................. 4
Cutter Bar ............................................................................................................................................... 4
Go-Devil................................................................................................................................................. 6
Kinley Snepper....................................................................................................................................... 8
Upside Down Kinley Snepper .............................................................................................................. 10
Flopetrol – Rotary Wireline Cutter ...................................................................................................... 11
Sidewall Cutter ..................................................................................................................................... 12
Wire Finder .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Wire Finder .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Calculating to Find the Top of the Wire .................................................................................................. 16
Wireline Grab ....................................................................................................................................... 17
Toolstring Stuck Wire Still Intact ............................................................................................................ 18
Stuck in the Well Wire Broke .................................................................................................................. 19
Lost Tools and Wire! ............................................................................................................................... 20
Toolstring Blown Uphole! Wire Attached............................................................................................... 21
Toolstring Blown Uphole! Wire Broke ................................................................................................... 22
Written Project ......................................................................................................................................... 23
Wireline Fishing ................................................................................................................................... 23
Hands-On Projects ................................................................................................................................... 24
1 Slickline I
Wireline Fishing
2 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
2. Inform your customer and supervisor of

Introduction the situation; discuss retrieval operations
with your supervisor to gain a many ideas
Wireline Fishing becomes necessary due to a as possible and to instill a clear
number of reasons, ranging from - operator understanding of the job and safety
error, often due to lack of information, bad concerns.
practices, inexperience, etc; to – genuine 3. Discuss the job procedures and safety
problems experienced in today’s deep wells, concerns with your crew, so that they will
such as asphaltines, scale, and a large range of know what to do and how to react if any
chemical compositions and high temperatures emergencies should occur.
that attack wirelines, equipment and seals 4. Insure sufficient lubricator length to cover
which serve to compound the problem. work tool string and the length of tools to
be recovered.
Over the past fifteen years, there have been
5. Pressure test the wireline valve and ensure
vast improvements in downhole technology,
that it is operating properly. Use the
such as completion designs, plugging systems,
wireline valve to contain well pressure,
subsurface safety valves etc. As regards to the
instead of the tree’s gate valves, when wire
surface equipment, we have also seen a great
is suspected.
improvement in wire quality and strength from
6. Prior to running a fishing tool, ensure that
most manufactures, which have been
is operating properly and carefully
complimented by more powerful wireline
consider the options and the possible
units. However, the area that has seen little
undesirable consequences of running that
change is the Slicklining technique, and some
particular tool.
of the surface equipment still used which can
7. Think of and prepare other tools that could
largely contribute to the creation of the
be run if the first tool is not successful.
“fishing job”.
8. Carefully consider what actions can be
When discussing fishing jobs the list can go on taken if a run does not result in the
forever as to the different types of fishing jobs anticipated or desired outcome.
that can occur when dealing with slickline. So, 9. Attempt to remove the wire first – then the
in order to be effective in discussion let’s tools.
narrow the field a little. Slickline fishing jobs 10. A length of stem installed below the jars
will generally be caused by one of the (when fishing wire) will help prevent the
following methods: jars from becoming fouled. Also consider
1. Toolstring Stuck wire still intact. the use of substantial tubular jars, rather
2. Toolstring Stuck wire broke. than link jars.
3. Wire broke Toolstring not stuck. 11. Keep accurate records of the lengths and
4. Tools blown up-hole wire still intact. diameters on each component of the tool
5. Tools blown up-hole wire broke.. string and tools run into the well.
12. Measure and retain all wire fished from the
As mentioned earlier there can be others, but well until the job is completed. This
in day-to-day slickline operations these would allows you to be aware of the amount of
be the most likely encountered. wire remaining after each step of the
The question then becomes “What do I do first fishing operation.
in order to retrieve the wire and tools?” 13. Use an impression block when necessary
to check the downhole situation.
GENERAL FISHING GUIDELINES
1. Secure the well – if the wire is still
attached to the tools, shut in the wireline
valve; if the wire has parted, pull out of
hole and shut-in the swab and master
valves of the tree.
3 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Wireline Fishing Tools For considering the largest blind box to run
there must be consideration given to the
possibility of the presence of a landing nipple
and four strands of wire in that landing nipple.
Cutter Bar (Fig. 2)
The cutter bar consists of one or more lengths Again using the example, the standard nipple
of wireline stem which has a blind box size for that tubing is 2.313” ID.
attached to it’s lower end and a wireline socket Use this formula:
made up on the upper end. Nipple ID – (Wire OD x 4) = Max. Blind Box
The purpose of the cutter bar, when dropped, is
2.313 – (.108 x 4) =
to cut the wire at the top of a wireline socket of
2.313 – .4320 = 1.8810” Blind Box
a tool string which cannot be retrieved.
The blind box has to be of a size that will hit Conclusion:
the wire at the rope socket, bending it sharp Blind box size range is from 1.8075” to
enough to cause the wire to break. Also, 1.8810”.
having a blind box that is to large can be a
problem. How to determine the right size
blind box is a matter of simple calculations.
Example (Minimum Blind Box Size) (Fig. 1):
Tubing size is 2 7/8” having an ID of 2.441”,
the tool string has an OD of 1.5” (which has a
fishing neck OD of 1.375”), and the wire OD
is .108.
Formula for finding Minimum blind box size
is:
Tbg. ID – (Rope socket ÷ 2) + (Wire ÷ 2) =
Blind Box Size
or using the example:

2.441 – (1.375 ÷ 2) + (.108 ÷ 2) =
2.441 – .6875 + .054 = 1.8075” Blind Box
4 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
The cutter bar can be dropped from the surface down pass the wire to the rope socket to cut
or run part-way in the well and dropped at the wire.
some point above the stuck tool string (Using a Note: Using this procedure requires careful
RB pulling tool minus the core spring, a SSM running of the tool string, traveling in and out
without a shear pin, a UO pulling tool adjusted of the well at a slow rate of speed so as to keep
as and SB minus the shear pin, or using a the wire from balling around the tool string.
gauge ring and string. When the desired depth
is reached simply “bounce” the tool string to Also, using the knot type rope socket with only
release the cutter bar.). one and one half wraps for the knot should be
Determining the method using is a matter of considered.
considering the following factors:
1. Is there fluid in the well? At what depth?

2. How heavy is the well fluids?
3. Is the well straight or deviated?
4. What are the depths of the landing nipples?
5. Are there side pocket mandrels in the well?
These factors are considered in the following

manner:
1. How fast will the cutter bar be traveling

when it hits the fluid? Is there any possible
damage that can occur when the cutter bar is
traveling at that high rate of speed?
2. How much weight bar is needed for the
bar to travel down hole in that heavy fluid?
(Note: It will be much less than tool string
weight because you don’t have to overcome
wire drag in the stuffing box.)
3. Will extra weight bar be necessary in the
deviated portion of the well?
4. Is there a possibility of damaging the landing
nipple or cutting the wire at the landing
nipple due to the speed in which the cutter
bar is traveling?
5. Is there a possibility of damaging the side
pocket mandrel or cutting the wire at the
SPM due to well deviation and speed of the
cutter bar?
Due to all things considered some customers

do not allow the use of cutter bars.
But, the need to free the wire from a stuck tool
string still needs to be accomplished and can
be done using the blind box.
The blind box can be attached to the wireline
tool string, with a 3 to 5 foot piece of weight
bar between the jars and blind box, and run
5 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
4. Insert the filler plate and pin it in place.

Go-Devil (Note: When installing the pins it is a good
idea to cover or fill the BOP’s with a rag
to prevent a dropped pin from falling in on
top of the rams.)
The purpose of the go-devil is to provide a 5. Allow the go-devil to rest on top of the
wireline socket (base) on which a cutter may wireline valve rams.
be dropped to sever the line at the socket. 6. Set the lubricator back into position.
The go-devil is similar in appearance to stem 7. Remove slack from the wireline, but do
with a wireline socket attached. It has a slot not stretch. (Note: Pulling the wire
milled along its length and a filler plate which through the rams may cause the wireline to
is held in position with roll pins, leaving a hole break.)
in the center to run smoothly down the 8. Equalize pressure across wireline valve.
wireline. It is available in lengths from 18” to 9. Open the wireline rams enough to pull up
60” and has an OD of 1 1/2” or 1 7/8”. on the wireline and pull a bind equal to the
last known hanging weight of the tool
When wireline tools become fouled in the
string plus 100 pounds. (Example: the
tubing due to sand, scale, wire, loss of jar
hanging weight of the tools before getting
action, etc., it becomes desirable to cut the
stuck was 150 pounds; pull a 250 pound
wireline as near the wireline socket as
bind on the wire.) (This is to prevent drag
possible. This is usually done by dropping a
friction from building up a ball of wire
cutter of some type (cutter bar or Kinley
under the go-devil.)
Snepper) on top of the wireline socket. The
cutter, striking the top of the wireline socket,
with either sever or bend and crimp the
wireline to the extent that, by pulling on the
line it will part.
If the wireline tools are fouled in such a
manner that the sand, scale, wire, etc., is above
the wireline socket, the cutter to be dropped
will not be effective since it cannot hit the
wireline socket. In this case, a go-devil may
be installed on the wireline at the surface and
allowed to fall down the line until it is stopped
by the obstruction (sand, scale, wire, etc.).
Thus, the go-devil provides a wireline socket
above the obstructing material so that the
cutter to be dropped will have a base on which
it can cut the wireline.
The go-devil is installed on the wireline in the
following manner:
1. Remove the pins and filler plate from the
go-devil.
2. Close the wireline BOP, and bleed
pressure from the lubricator, slack off on
the wireline, disconnect and hoist the
lubricator.
3. Install go-devil about the wireline so that
the fishing neck is at the upper end and
so that the wireline is in the slot of the
go- devil.
6 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
10. Fully open the wireline rams and permit 5. NOT RECOMMENDED – In the past,
the go-devil to fall into the tubing. Allow some operators have cut a bevel or taper
time for the go-devil to reach its on the bottom end of the go-devil and used
destination. it for a cutter. The idea is for the bevel
bottom of the go-devil to strike the bevel
Some additional uses of the go-devil may be: top of the wireline socket and move to the
side, severing the wireline. Again this is
1. Jars stuck open due to a small piece of not a recommended practice, but if used,
junk, rubber, etc. – Drop a go-devil to certain precautions must be taken before
knock the jars closed and possibly regain using the beveled-bottom go-devil or any
jar action. go-devil:
2. Wireline socket hung up on end of tubing
while trying to come back from the casing a. Also, the operator must be aware of the
into the tubing – Slack of six to eight wireline socket diameter, the diameter of
inches and drop a go-devil. (It guides the the go-devil and the internal diameter of
wireline tool string back into the tubing.) the tubing. This is to avoid wedging the
3. Hung up in the hole and need more stem go-devil beside the wireline tool string and
weight to facilitate downward jarring – creating a difficult fishing job.
Strap a go-devil to the line and drop it to b. There must be fluid in the tubing to slow
the tool string for additional weight. the fall of the go-devil. If not, when it hits
4. To trip a Flopetrol Cutter or Kinley the wireline socket, there is a good
Snepper – Attach a small go-devil to the probability for damage to occur, and in the
line, after allowing time for the cutter or case of the beveled-bottom go-devil, it
snepper to reach the wireline socket, to may “kick-off” the tapered head of the
operate the cutter or snepper. wireline socket and damage if not
penetrate, the tubing wall.
7 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Kinley Snepper
What size measuring line will it cut?
The Kinley Snepper is designed to cut and crimp Any size up to and including .092” wire.
the wireline above the rope socket upon impact. It can be special ordered for heavier wire sizes.
Cutting the wireline severs it from a stuck tool
string. The crimping is used to bring the How small a hole will it cut in?
Snepper back out of the well on the wireline. 1 1/4” minimum ID or larger. The Kinley
Snepper is 2 1/2 feet in length. Check with
Kinley for special sizing when ordering.
How near the rope socket will it cut?

Only 2 1/2” above the rope socket. This is
important when fishing for the rope socket,
because there is little wire left in the hole to foul
the fishing tool.
Do you have to fish for the Snepper?

No. As the Snepper cuts, it also crimps the line
and clamps onto it. This action makes it
possible to pull the snepper back up with the cut
line. Note: The weight of the Snepper is
generally much less than the weight of the tool
string that is stuck in the well. Therefore
precautions should be taken when nearing the
surface to stop the wire from blowing out the
stuffing box as the high speeds can knock the
Snepper off the wire.
Is the Snepper dependable?

Yes. The Snepper is designed to be dropped
into the hole. It operates by the impact of its
own weight when it hits bottom. Tests show
that it will do the job with a free fall of only two
feet. It has already cut .082” wireline at 11,000
feet and .108 at 7,000 feet.
Is the tool easy to use?

Yes. There are only six pieces. They will not fit
together wrong.
A small three-piece cutting and crimping

assembly is put together on the wireline. Each
piece has a slot for the wireline and each slot
extends away from the wire in a different
direction. The slipper will slide along the knife
to cut the wireline at the same time it slides
along the crimper to crimp the wireline just
above the cut. The three pieces are fastened
together with a longitudinal brass shear pin (not
shown). The assembly is then slipped into the
8 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
body, where it is secured by a horizontal shear side just enough so that it can be bent down
pin through the knife. The bottom cap is then into the recess for it.
screwed onto the body. The upper retaining pin 5. Screw the set screw into the tapped hole at
and the lower retaining screw are then fastened the top of the crimper until it is tight.
into place. The Snepper is ready to drop into the 6. Put the knife on the measuring line in the
well on the wireline. same way, below the slipper. Being the
pieces together, pushing the 1/16” brass
Will Side Pocket Mandrels and Deep Fluid shear pin down into the knife. Crimp the
Levels cause Premature Cuts? end of the shear pin slightly. Screw the set
Yes, they might! If such exist in your well, the screw at the lower end of knife in all the
Snepper should be mortified to run ‘upside way. This completes the sub assembly.
down.’ A new top cap with fishing neck 7. Put the body on the measuring line and push
replaces the bottom cap and the top cap plunger the subassembly into it.
is placed above the knife. With these new parts 8. Line-up the 1/16” shear pin hole which goes
added, the Snepper will only cut when hit on its across the knife with the corresponding
top by the go-devil. About 22 inches of wire is 1/16” shear pin hole which is found to be in
left above the rope socket after an ‘upside down’ the last three or four threads at the bottom of
cut. the body. Push another 1/16” shear pin
through and cut it off so that it will not
When Can We Deliver? interfere with the threads. Tighten the set
Immediately. Complete tools and parts are screw at the top end of the body.
stocked in Houston and can be delivered on 9. Put the bottom cap on the measuring line,
receipt of your order. below the body and subassembly and screw
it tightly onto the body.
Instructions for Use 10. The Snepper is now ready to drop into the
well. If the well is not full of fluid, run in a
The Kinley Snepper is simple to assemble and few barrels ahead of the Snepper to break its
use. It won’t go together in any way but the fall and to be sure it doesn’t cut the
right one. The knife, slipper and crimper make line when it hits fluid. Remove hole
up a subassembly which is pushed into the body cover. Gently set the Snepper down on the
and held there by the bottom cap. The wireline valve, install and equalize
procedure for assembling the Snepper is as lubricator, and open the rams and drop the
follows: Kinley Snepper.
1. After the lubricator has been bled off and The Kinley Snepper will cut the measuring line
hoisted, the first step is to cover the BOP when it hits the rope socket. It will also crimp
hole so that none of the small parts can drop the end of the line and clamp onto it at the same
into it while the cutter is being assembled on time. When the line is brought out of the hole,
the measuring line. the cutter will be on the end of it.
2. Cut 1/16” brass welding rod to 4’ long and
push it through the two lengthwise holes in NOTE: The Kinley Snepper will generally
the slipper. The upper end of the slipper weigh much less than the tool string that was
may be identified by the rounded (crimper) needed to make the wire fall into the well.
edge where the slot comes down to the Therefore, care should be taken to minimize the
diagonal end. effect of well pressure trying to blow the wire
3. Put the slipper on the measuring line so that out of the stuffing box. If the snepper is run into
the line lies in the back of the slot. the bottom of the stuffing box it will fall off the
4. Put the crimper on the measuring line in the line and back down into the well bore.
same way, above the slipper. Bring the two
pieces together, pushing the 1/16” brass Whenever any soft material such as rope, sand,
shear pin up into the crimper and out the far rubber, etc., may be above the rope socket, it
will be advisable to provide something solid for
9 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
the Snepper to hit when it gets to the bottom. A

drop weight, furnished as part of each complete
cutter, may be dropped in first for this purpose.
If ever the Snepper doesn’t cut the line, the drop

weight may be dropped in on top of the cutter to
give a still harder blow.
Upside Down Kinley Snepper
1. Assemble the Snepper as in previous steps 1

through 8, except assemble it ‘upside down’
with the knife on top, pointing upward,
followed by the slipper and then the crimper.
2. Put the top cap plunger on the line with its

enlarged bottom against the top of the knife.
3. Put the top cap on the measuring line above

the body and subassembly. Slide it
down over the top cap plunger and knife and
screw it tightly onto the body.
4. The cutter is ready to drop into the well

upside down. A drop weight must be
dropped on top of it to make it cut the line.
The upside down parts will only fit the 1 1/2-

O.D. regular Snepper. The dimensions of the
top fishing neck are the same as the bottom one.
10 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Flopetrol – Rotary Wireline Cutter
The rotary wireline cutter rides the wire down to

the rope socket under its own weight and rests
there until the Go-Devil is dropped.
When the go-Devil strikes the top of the cutter,
the shock provided causes a shear pin to shear
and the knife then rotates cutting the wire. The
rotation of the knife also pushes up a tapered
key, wedging the wire into the cutter body. This
allows the Cutter and Go-Devil to be retrieved
with the wire.
The wire is cut short near to the rope socket – 1
inch for the slickline model.
11 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
to fall to the top of the fish. Then a weight bar

Sidewall Cutter must be dropped on top of the side wall cutter to
shear the pin and cause the side wall cutter to cut
The purpose of the side wall cutter is to cut a the line. This method is not recommended.
wireline at any desired point in the tubing string.
The side wall cutter is run on a special Type C

running tool and a standard wireline tool string.
It is carefully lowered into the tubing alongside
the wire which is to be cut. When the desired
depth is reached, the cutter is set by dropping the
tool string rapidly. This causes the mandrel (1)
to wedge the over-lapping cutters (2 and 3)
against the tubing wall, trapping the wire
between the cutter blades and the tubing wall.
Downward jarring cuts the line and shears the
pin to release the running tool from the cutter.
In this jarring operation, extreme care must be

taken to avoid bumping the jars up and releasing
or un-setting the side wall cutter. If used
carelessly in this respect, the result could and
usually will be that several cuts will be made in
the same area, leaving short pieces of free wire
in the hole.
The Type C running tool, which is used to run

the side wall cutter is a comparatively long tool.
Its length is for the purpose of preventing the cut
end of the wire from fouling the jars used above
the running tool.
The side wall cutter can be used, as was

mentioned, to cut the wireline anywhere in the
tubing or it can be run in the same manner all the
way to the rope socket of the tool string which is
in the hole.
The Type B side wall cutter is designed so that it

may be shear pinned (6) in a retracted position
that will prevent the tool from presetting until it
stops on top of the rope socket or some other
obstruction in the tubing. When running the side
wall cutter all the way to the tool string, it is
advisable to have this shear pin installed to
prevent the cutter from presetting while running
in the hole.
The side wall cutter may be pinned as just

described and dropped into the hole and allowed
12 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Some precautions to be observed when using the

side wall cutter are:
1. Never run the side wall cutter on a pulling

tool or any tool with the intention
of bringing the side wall cutter back out of
the hole on the same trip. The cut wire
should be retrieved before the cutter is
retrieved.
2. Make sure that the running neck of the side

wall cutter and the pinning area of the
running tool are in good condition to insure
a clean shear of the pin. If the shearing
surfaces of the side wall cutter and its
running tool do not fit snugly, the sheared
pin can wedge or take a friction bite and
retrieve the side wall cutter.
The danger in both instances above is in

hanging the side wall cutter in the cut wire
while retrieving.
3. Even if the side wall cutter is left in place as

intended, there is some danger involved
when retrieving the running tool and tool
string. These tools should be retrieved very
slowly and carefully so as to avoid
entangling them in the wire that is in the
hole.
4. In view of the above (paragraph 3), when

running the side wall cutter or any other tool
that is being run past wire in the tubing, it
may be advisable to take only one and one-
half wraps on the wireline knot of the
wireline work string. Then, in the event that
the tools become fouled in the wire while
going in or coming out of the hole, the
operator would be able to pull out of
the rope socket and leave only another
tool string in the hole and not another
wireline. Wireline fishing becomes rather
tedious when there is more than one
wireline in the hole.
13 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Wire Finder
The purpose of the wire finder is to locate and

ball the upper end of wireline that is in the well
bore so that it can be engaged by and retrieved
with a wire grab.
The most commonly used wire finder is a thin-
walled, soft metal, cylindrical shaped tool which
can be flared on its lower end to conform to the
tubing I.D. (See illustration). It is lowered into
the well bore with a light tool string until it
locates the upper end of the wireline. Once the
wire finder has set down over the end of the
wire, downward jarring will cause the wire to be
balled or bent over into the tubing bore so that it
may be engaged and retrieved with a wire grab.
Certain precautions must be taken when using
the wire finder. The wireline specialist must be
aware that it is always possible for the wire
finder to bypass the upper end of the wire.
When this happens, and as the wire finder is
being retrieved, the wire which has been
bypassed tends to stack above the finder and will
make it extremely difficult to retrieve.
The following example illustrates how it is
possible for this type wire finder to bypass wire
in the tubing bore: The 2 3/8-inch O.D. 4.6 –
4.7-pound per foot tubing has a bore I.D. of
1.995 inches, but the drift I.D. is only 1.901
inches. Therefore, the wire finder that can be
run into this tubing must be of a diameter that
will pass through the drift diameter of 1.901
inches. Taking the difference in the drift
diameter and the bore diameter of the tubing, we
find that the clearance between the O.D. of the
wire finder (1.901) and the I.D. of the tubing
(1.995) would be .094 inches. Since the largest contribute to how far the top of the wire will fall
wire normally used has a diameter of .092 down the hole once it breaks. Some of these
inches, it is readily apparent that the wire finder factors are:
could bypass the wire. 1. Condition of the wireline (old, new, size,
Being aware that the wire finder can miss the top etc.)
of the wire and being aware of the consequences 2. Tubing size
of bypassing several feet of wire with this tool, 3. Tubing content (heavy fluid, gas, etc.)
the specialist must make every effort to calculate 4. Strain on line (bind) when it breaks
or estimate the approximate depth of the top of 5. Where the line broke (stuffing box, hay
the wire in the tubing bore before running the pulley, counterhead or elsewhere)
wire finder. There is no accurate means of 6. Whether or not the tool string attached to the
determining this since many factors may line can move back down the hole
14 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
A general practice is to assume that in 2 3/8 and

2 7/8-inch O.D. tubing, the top of the wireline
will coil down the tubing ten feet for each 1,000
feet of wireline that is in the hole. Example:
The tools are hung at 10,000 feet and the
wireline breaks at “zero” point at the surface.
We would assume the top of the wireline to be
no deeper than 100 feet down the hole. If the
wire broke at some point other than zero, (the
hey pulley, for instance) the distance from zero
back to the hay pulley would be subtracted from
the estimated depth (100 feet) and it would be
expected that the wire would be higher in the
tubing.
The point is, that every effort should be made to
estimate where the top of the wire is located
before running the wire finder and to diligently
search for the wire down to that depth before
venturing deeper into the well with the wire
finder.
We refer to the wire finder (see illustration) as
an Otis wire finder, but, in reality, it is not
manufactured by Otis. This tool is usually made
to individual specifications by a local machine
shop in the various areas where it is used.
Notice the arrangement of the fluid bypass ports
of the wire finder. This port arrangement is very
important in that, if the fluid bypass ports were
drilled vertically from the bore of the wire
finder, the wire being located could and would
thread through the port and allow the wire finder
to continue moving downhole, bypassing the
wire.
15 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Calculating to Find the Top of Now, having an understanding of wire fall-back,

the Wire let’s find out what to do with the wire that
remained from your “zero” back to the counter
The first step, in calculating to find the top of the head.
wire, is to determine the amount the wire will
“fall-back”, because of it’s own weight, into the The first thing we have to do is calculate how
well. much wire there is from zero to the counter
“Rule of Thumb” head. We do that by adding together the
for following; the tree, wireline BOP, length of
2 3/8” and 2 7/8” Tubing lubricator (to the top of the stuffing box), the
length from the top of the stuffing box to the hay
The wire will fall-back 10 feet per 1,000 feet of pulley, and the length from the hay pulley to the
wire in the well. counter head.
Example: You are 10,000 feet in the well After we have added all those lengths together,
jarring on a plug and your wire parts at the we add this number to the top of the wire after
counter wheel. the fall-back has been determined.
10 ft x 10 (thousand) = 100 feet of fall back Example: The well we are working on has a
tree that measures 8 feet from zero to the
How accurate is this “Rule of Thumb”? wireline BOP. The wireline BOP measures 2
By cutting measured lengths of wire on feet. The lubricator is 24 feet long plus an
numerous fishing exercises in a 3,000’ training additional 2 feet to the top of the stuffing box.
well, the following table has been compiled. The distance from the top of the stuffing box to
The table shows the distance that the wire will the hay pulley is 30 feet. And the distance from
fall back down the hole per 1,000’ of length. the hay pulley to the counter head is 50feet.
Although not totally accurate under all
conditions, field experience has proven the table 8 + 2 + 24 + 2 + 30 + 50 = 116 feet
to be a reasonable guide in determining the
depth of the top of the wire. Using the example from the previous page,
where the wire fell back 100 feet down the well,
Wireline Fall-back per 1,000 we add the accumulated wire above zero to the
Feet top and find:
Tubing Wireline Fall-
Size OD back/1,000’ 100 feet down the well + 116 feet above = 16
2 3/8” .082 8 feet above zero
2 3/8” .092 10
2 7/8” .082 10 The wire is still in the lubricator.
2 7/8” .092 12
3 1/2” 0.92 16 Conclusion:
3 1/2” .108 15 Close the wireline BOP’s and make preparations
3 1/2” 3/16 20 for retrieving the rest of the wire.
4 1/2” .108 27
4 1/2” 3/16 35 Note: The amount of tension you have on the
5 1/2” .108 40 wireline when it parts plays a small part
on where the top of the wire might be
5 1/2” 3/16 50
located, but is not considered for the
7” .108 90
purpose of these calculations.
7” 3/16 100
16 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Wireline Grab
The wireline grab is used to retrieve a broken

wireline from the wellbore.
When a wireline breaks a considerable length of
it is left in the wellbore, the upper section of the
line tends to coil and conform to the I.D. of the
wellbore, creating friction or resistance which
prevents the entire length of the line from
coiling.
WHEN ATTEMPTING TO RETRIEVE THE
WIRELINE, IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT THE TOP
OF THE WIRE FIRST BE LOCATED AND
BALLED WITH A WIRE FINDER BEFORE
RUNNING THE WIRELINE GRAB.
If this is not done the wire grab may miss the top
of the wireline and bypass several feet of wire
before engaging it. Once this happens, the
wireline that is above the grab will tend to
“stack” around the grab as it is being retrieved
and, if more than a few feet of line has been
bypassed, will foul the grab to the extent that it
cannot be retrieved short of further fishing
operations.
When the grab located the balled wire the
Slickline Supervisor should only sit down then
pick up a sufficient length above the point of
contact to take all of the slack out of the slack
out of wire.
On the previous page we saw that the wire will
fall down in coils several feet in the tubing
depending on size and length of the wire.
Therefore it will take several feet of pick up
before the supervisor will see any wire weight
on the indicator.
17 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Toolstring Stuck Wire Still

Intact
Conditions
• Unable to jar free
• Wire still attached to Slickline unit.
• Wire might break if jarring is
continued.
Recommendations
• Close Wireline Valve
• Bleed Pressure off Lubricator.
• Attach Cutter to wire.
• Re-Install Lubricator
• Pull 100lbs above wire weight
• Open Wireline Valve and allow cutter
to fall to Rope Socket
• Cut wire at Rope Socket
• Retrieve wire
• Prepare program to retrieve
toolstring.
18 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Stuck in the Well Wire Broke
Conditions
• Toolstring is stuck
• Wire broke while jarring to free and
fell downhole
Recommendations
• Close Swab Valve
• Tie new Rope Socket attach
Toolstring using tubular jars
• Attach Blind Box to Toolstring (3’ to
5’ Stem may be used)
• Slowly run Blind Box into well until
reaching stuck tools
• Jar down cutting wire at Rope Socket
• Pull slowly out of well
• Run Wirefinder to top of wire and
locate.
• Run Wire Grab and retrieve wire
• Prepare program to retrieve
toolstring.
19 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Lost Tools and Wire!
Conditions
• Toolstring is not stuck
• Wire broke while running into well.
Recommendations
• Close Swab Valve
• Tie new Rope Socket attach
Toolstring using tubular jars
• Attach Wire Finder to Toolstring
locate.
• Run Wire Grab and retrieve wire and
toolstring.
• Close Wireline Valve on Wire install
bar clamp.
• Prepare program to retrieve wire and
toolstring.
20 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Toolstring Blown Uphole! Wire

Attached
Conditions
• Wire is still attached to the unit at the
surface.
Recommendations
• Close WL Valve, Bleed Pressure off
Lubricator.
• Attach Flat Bottom Go-Devil to Wire,
Replace Lubricator, Pull 100# over
wire weight, Open WL Valve and
allow Go-Devil to Drop.
• Close WL Valve, Bleed Pressure off
Lubricator.
• Attach Cutter to Wire, Replace
Lubricator, Pull 100# over wire
weight, Open WL Valve and allow
Cutter to Drop.
• Pull wire Out of well
• Prepare program to retrieve Go-Devil
and Toolstring.
21 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Toolstring Blown Uphole! Wire

Broke
Conditions
• Wire is not attached to the unit at the
surface.
Recommendations
• Close Swab Valve, Bleed Pressure off
Lubricator.
• Prepare program to retrieve wire and
tools.
locate.
• Run Wire Grab, break and retrieve
wire.
22 Slickline
Wireline Fishing
Written Project
Wireline Fishing
1. What is the rule of thumb formula for determining how far the wire will fall after breaking in 2 3/8”
and 2 7/8” tubing?
2. What is the formula used to calculate the minimum OD of a blind box used on a cutter bar?
3. What is a cutter bar?
4. What is the minimum OD of the blind box that can be used to cut .092 wire on a 1 1/2” rope socket in:
a. 2 3/8” 4.6-4.7 ft/lb tubing?
b. 2 7/8” 6.4-6.5 ft/lb tubing?
5. What tools are available designed to find the top of the wire?
6. Can these tools by-pass the top of the wire?
7. What are some uses for the flat bottom go-devil?
8. How does the Kinley Snepper work?
23 Slickline I
Wireline Fishing
Hands-On Projects

Select a wire finder for 5½” 17# tubing
Select a wire Grab for 5½” 17# tubing
Make up Slickline Scratcher to suit 4½” 12.75#
Tubing
Make up Braided line Scratcher to suit 4½” 12.75#
Tubing
Assemble a Flat Bottom Go-Devil to wire size at
Location
Assemble a Kinley Snepper to wire size at Location
and Function Test
Assemble a Flopetrol Cutter to wire size at
Location and Function test
24 Slickline
SECTION 11
SLICKLINE CALCULATIONS
Slickline Calculations
Table of Contents
FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUIDS AND PRESSURE ................................................................................... 4
REVIEW PROJECT #1 ........................................................................................................................... 10
REVIEW PROJECT # 2 .......................................................................................................................... 13
REVIEW PROJECT # 3 .......................................................................................................................... 16
REVIEW PROJECT #4 ........................................................................................................................... 19
Final Project............................................................................................................................................. 30
1 Slickline
Use for Section notes…
2 Slickline
CALCULATIONS
AND
FORMULAS
TUBING CORRECTION FACTOR
CIRCUMFERENCE DIAMETER
RADIUS CASING RULE OF THUMB
AREA
PRESSURE FORCE
VOLUME DENSITY GRADIENT
SPECIFIC GRAVITY API GRAVITY
ANNULUS
PSI HYDROSTATIC FLUID
GAS DEPTH
3 Slickline
FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUIDS AND PRESSURE
Various downhole service operations in oil and gas wells will require "on the job" mathematical
calculations to determine volumes, pressures, areas, differential pressure, force, etc.. It is also
important that we understand the fundamentals related to fluids and gases when performing downhole
work.
Several tables are included in this section and should be used to help reduce the number of
mathematical calculations, (and probability of error) that may be required at the job site. Reference
will be made to these tables as this exercise progress.
Almost every item that is used downhole to complete and/or service an oil or gas well is cylindrical
(circular/round) in shape. (i.e. tubing, casing, landing nipples, lock mandrels, wireline, etc.)
Therefore, the ability to calculate the area of a circle is very important when working with subsurface
equipment. We depend a great deal upon different cross sectional areas for the operation of many
tools. For example, the small area of an equalizing port allows us to equalize pressures with a
minimum of force by using a small prong. The area that is packed off around the wireline will
determine the amount of weight needed to go into the well bore under pressure.
Quite often we are required to calculate the volume of fluid required to fill or displace the tubing or
casing. Many times, we need to know the procedure to calculate the capacity of tanks of various
sizes and shapes. Most often, it is necessary that we calculate pressures, differentials and force in
the course of our work. In this lesson, we will learn these procedures.
The following is a list of terms, definitions, symbols and formulas which are necessary in completing
these calculations.
CIRCUMFERENCE (C) - The length of the external boundary of a circle.

(Pi x Diameter) (x D)
DIAMETER (D) - The length of a straight line through the center of a circle.
(Circumference Pi) (C )
RADIUS (R) - The length of a straight line from the center of a circle to the circumference.
(Diameter 2) (D 2)
Pi () = 3.14159265 (normally rounded to 3.1416). This symbol denotes the ratio of the
circumference of a circle to its diameter.
AREA (A) - The number of unit squares (inches, feet, etc.) equal in measure to the surface.
(Area of a Circle = Radius x Radius x Pi) (Area = R²) or
(Area of a Circle = Diameter x Diameter x .785398) (Area = D² x .7854)
(Area of a Rectangle = Length x Width) (L x W)
VOLUME OF A CYLINDER = (Area x Height) (A x H)
VOLUME OF A RECTANGLE = (Length x Width x Height) (L x W x H)
4 Slickline
VOLUME OF A SPHERE = (Diameter x Diameter x Diameter x .5236) (D³ x .5236)
CUBIC INCHES PER GALLON = 231 in.
CUBIC INCHES PER CUBIC FOOT = 1,728 in.
GALLONS PER CUBIC FOOT = 7.481 gal.
GALLONS PER OIL FIELD BARREL = 42 gal.
GALLONS PER SALES BARREL (DRUM) = 55 gal.
Rule of Thumb for determining Gradient - (Weight per Gallon x .052) (LBS/Gal. x .052)
Rule of Thumb for determining Hydrostatic Pressure - (.052 x Weight per Gallon x Depth)
(.052 x LBS/Gal. x Depth)
Rule of Thumb for determining Fill-up Volume of Tubing - (ID² = Barrels/1,000 ft.)
(Internal Diameter x Internal Diameter = The Number of Barrels per 1,000 feet of Tubing)
PRESSURE - Force per unit area. The force acting on the area upon which the force is distributed.
Pressure is, in most cases, expressed in pounds per square inch (PSI).
GRADIENT - The rate of increase or decrease.

(For the purpose of this manual, assume the term GRADIENT to mean the weight or pressure exerted
by a vertical column of fluid that measures 1" x 1" x 12".)
DENSITY - The weight of a substance per unit volume.

(Pounds per gallon, pounds per cubic foot, etc.)
SPECIFIC GRAVITY - The ratio of the density (weight) of a substance compared to the density
(weight) of an equal volume of another substance which is used as the standard.
WATER - Water is considered a UNIVERSAL FLUID because of its abundance and the fact pure
water anywhere in the world weighs the same per unit volume (density). For this reason, water is
used as the standard for the comparison of the density of other fluids. Water has been assigned the
SPECIFIC GRAVITY of 1.000. Fluids heavier (more dense) than water will have a specific gravity
greater than 1.0, while fluids lighter (less dense) than water will have a specific gravity less than 1.0.
The following facts about pure water should be committed to memory:
1. Pure water has a density of 62.4 pounds per cubic foot.
2. Pure water weighs 8.33 pounds per gallon.
3. Pure water has a gradient of .433 pounds per square inch per foot of height.
4. Pure water has a specific gravity of 1.000.
5. Pure water has an API gravity of 10.000.
5 Slickline
To learn how the gradient of fresh water is derived, assume a square container (Fig. 1) that measures
12" x 12" x 12" (inside dimensions) and imagine it filled with pure water. This water will weigh 62.4
pounds. The base of the container is 12" x 12" and has a surface area of 144 square inches.
12 inches x 12 inches = 144 square inches
The container is also 12" high, so within this container there are 144 columns of water measuring
1" x 1" x 12". Divide the total weight of the water by the total number of square inches upon which this
weight is being exerted.
62.4
= .433 gradient
144
This is the weight or pressure exerted at the bottom of water that measures 1" x 1" x 12" high. If we
want to know the pressure exerted by a 10,000 foot column of water, we would multiply the gradient
(.433) by the number of feet (10,000').
.433 gradient x 10,000 feet = 4,330 pounds per square inch.
1"
1"
12"
12"
12"
Fig.1
We have found how gradient of pure water is determined, that water is the standard by which other
fluids are compared and that it has been assigned the specific gravity of 1.000.
6 Slickline
The gradient of any fluid can be derived in the same manner if the density of that fluid per cubic foot is
known (weight per cubic foot). If you know that 9.6 pound per gallon salt water has a density of 71.8
pounds per cubic foot, the gradient can be found by dividing 71.8 by 144.
71.8
= .498 gradient
144
In most of our field work, we will be given only the weight per gallon of fluid. For this reason, let's go a
step farther and learn how to the specific gravity of a fluid is determined and how we can use it to
convert weight per gallon to gradient.
We learned earlier that specific gravity is a ratio or percentage of the weight of an equal volume of
pure water. To find the specific gravity of any fluid, divide the weight of a given volume of that fluid by
the weight of an equal volume of pure water.
Using the 9.6 pound per gallon salt water which weighs 71.8 pounds per cubic foot, we could find its
specific gravity in two different ways. First, by knowing it weighs 71.8 pounds per cubic foot and
knowing that pure water weighs 62.4 pounds per cubic foot, we could divide the weight per cubic foot
of the salt water by the weight per cubic foot of pure water to get a ratio of specific gravity of the salt
water.
71.8
= 1.15 specific gravity
62.4
This specific gravity of 1.15 simply means that the 9.6 pound per gallon salt water weighs 1.15 times
or 115 percent as much as 8.33 pound per gallon pure water. Since we know that pure water has a
gradient of .433 and that the 9.6 pound per gallon salt water is 115 percent as heavy as pure water,
we simply multiply the gradient of pure water (.433) by the specific gravity of the 9.6 pound per gallon
salt water (1.15) to find the gradient of the salt water.
.433 x 1.15 = .498 gradient of 9.6 lbs/gal. salt water
Since specific gravity is simply the ratio of the weight of the fluid in question to the weight of pure
water, we can also find the specific gravity of the 9.6 pound per gallon salt water by dividing it by the
weight of an equal volume of pure water.
9.6lbs / gal.
= 1.15 specific gravity
8.33lbs / gal.
To find the hydrostatic pressure exerted by a 9,000 foot column of 9.6 pound per gallon salt, multiply
the height of the column by the gradient, which we found to be .498.
9,000 ft. x .498 gradient = 4,482 psi
Having completed these examples, it should now be apparent why we should commit the facts
concerning pure water to memory. With this information and understanding these exercises, you can
determine the specific gravity and gradient of any fluid when the weight per gallon is known.
Refer to Table "A" for weight per gallon - fluid gradient reference. In order to use this table, the weight
per gallon of the well fluid must be known. Locate the fluid weight on the table. Immediately below
the weight per gallon is the gradient of that fluid. Using 12 pound per gallon mud as an example, we
find the gradient to be .6234. By multiplying .6234 by 10,000 feet, we find the hydrostatic pressure to
be 6,234 psi.
7 Slickline
WEIGHT PER GALLON - GRADIENT TABLE

wt./gal. 8 lbs 8.1 lbs 8.2 lbs 8.3 lbs 8.4 lbs 8.5 lbs 8.6 lbs 8.7 lbs 8.8 lbs 8.9 lbs
gradient .4156 .4208 .4259 .4311 .4363 .4415 .4467 .4519 .4571 .4623
gradient .4675 .4727 .4779 .4831 .4883 .4935 .4987 .5039 .5091 .5143
gradient .5195 .5247 .5298 .5351 .5402 .5454 .5506 .5558 .5610 .5662
gradient .5714 .5766 .5818 .5870 .5922 .5974 .6025 .6078 .6130 .6181
gradient .6234 .6286 .6337 .6389 .6441 .6493 .6545 .6597 .6649 .6701
gradient .6753 .6805 .6857 .6909 .6961 .7013 .7065 .7116 .7169 .7221
gradient .7273 .7325 .7377 .7428 .7480 .7532 .7584 .7636 .7688 .7740
gradient .7792 .7844 .7896 .7948 .7999 .80519 .81036 .8156 .8208 .8259
gradient .8311 .8363 .8415 .8467 .8519 .8571 .8623 .8675 .8727 .8779
gradient .8831 .8883 .8935 .8987 .9039 .9089 .9143 .9195 .9246 .9298
gradient .9351 .9402 .9454 .9506 .9558 .9610 .9662 .9714 .9766 .9818
gradient .9870 .9922 .9974 1.0025 1.0077 1.0129 1.0182 1.0233 .1.0285 1.0337
wt./gal. 20 lbs. 20.1 lbs. 20.2 lbs 20.3 lbs 20.4 lbs 20.5 lbs 20.6 lbs 20.7 lbs 20.8 lbs 20.9 lbs
gradient 1.0389 1.044 1.0493 1.054 1.0597 1.0649 1.0701 1.0753 1.0805 1.0851
TABLE "A"
Using the formula: lbs/gal of a given fluid = specific gravity x .433 = gradient of given fluid
8.33
Find the specific gravity and gradient of the following fluids: (Check your answers with the table
above)
1. 8.6 lbs/gal. salt water has a specific gravity of and a gradient of .
2. 10.3 lbs/gal. brine has a specific gravity of and a gradient of .
3. 16.5 lbs/gal. mud has a specific gravity of and a gradient of .
Using the formula: gradient x depth = hydrostatic pressure

What is the hydrostatic pressure of the following fluids at 5,000 feet?
4. 9.8 lbs/gal. salt water psi
5. 18.4 lbs/gal. mud psi
If you know the weight per gallon of a fluid, there is a reasonably accurate "RULE OF THUMB"
formula that can be used to determine the gradient of the fluid. The "RULE OF THUMB" formula is:
0.052 x weight per gallon = gradient
8 Slickline
Example: .052 x 12 (weight/gallon) = .624 (gradient)
Taking this "RULE OF THUMB" formula one step further, the hydrostatic pressure exerted by a
column of fluid can be determined if you know the weight per gallon of the fluid. The formula is:
0.052 x weight per gallon x depth (in feet) = Hydrostatic Pressure
Example: .052 x 12 (=.624 gradient) x 10,000 feet = 6240 psi
This is the pressure (per square inch) that is exerted at the bottom of a 10,000 foot column of mud
that weighs 12 pounds per gallon.
What is the number .052? Where does it come from?
In the calculation we use .052 x weight per gallon to find the gradient of that fluid.
So, .052 is a constant for finding the gradient of a fluid density given in weight per gallon.
Gradient is expressed as 1" x 1" x 12" or 1/144 of a cubic foot. There are 7.481 gallons per cubic foot.
To get a constant .052 we divide 7.481 by 144.
7.481 144 = .05195 or .052
Using the 0.052 "Rule of Thumb" formula find the gradient and hydrostatic pressure for the following:
1. 10.2 lbs/gal mud to 8,000 ft; what is the gradient?

what is the hydrostatic pressure?
2. 8.6 lbs/gal salt water to 4,000 ft; what is the gradient?

3. 9.8 lbs/gal brine to 12,000 ft; what is the gradient?

9 Slickline
REVIEW PROJECT #1
After verifying that you have correctly completed statements one through five (below) you should
commit them to memory.
1. Fresh water has a specific gravity of .
2. Fresh water weighs pounds per cubic foot.
3. Fresh water weighs pounds per gallon.
4. Fresh water has a gradient of psi per foot.
5. There are gallons per cubic foot.
6. There are gallons in an "oil field" barrel.
7. What is the gradient of a fluid the weighs 11.5 pounds per gallon? .
8. How much hydrostatic pressure will there be at the bottom of an 8,700 foot column of mud that
weighs 11.5 pounds per gallon? psi.
9. How much hydrostatic pressure will there be at the bottom of an 8,700 foot column of fresh water?
psi.
10. Write the "Rule of Thumb" formula for finding the hydrostatic pressure exerted by a column of
fluid.
x x =
11. Use the rule of thumb formula to determine the hydrostatic pressure exerted by a 10,000 foot
column of 10.0 pound per gallon brine. psi.
12. When you multiply .052 times the weight per gallon of a fluid, the result gives you the approximate
of that fluid.
13. Do not use "rule of thumb" or tables. In this problem, the tubing is standing full of fresh water with
zero surface pressure. The tubing/casing annulus is full of 12.5 pound per gallon mud with zero
surface pressure.
a. What is the gradient of the 12.5 pound per gallon mud? psi.
b. What is the pressure in the tubing/casing annulus at 9000 feet? psi.
c. What is the pressure in the tubing at 9000 feet? psi.
d. What is the differential pressure at 9000 feet? psi.
e. What is the specific gravity of hte 12.5 pound per gallon mud? S.G.
f. What is the specific gravity of the fresh water? S.G.
10 Slickline
You often hear the term "API Gravity" of fluids in the petroleum industry. The American Petroleum
Institute, (in an effort to standardize all materials used in the oil industry), has a standard for fluids.
This is expressed as API gravity. Oil of various weights, at a base temperature of 60° F, is given API
ratings. Fresh water has arbitrarily assigned the API gravity of 10.0 The formula used to convert the
API gravity to specific gravity is 141.5 ÷ (131.5 + API gravity). In this formula, 141.5 is the reading of
water on the modulus of a hydrometer scale and 131.5 is a constant.
Substituting in the formula, you can find the specific gravity of any known API gravity fluid. For
example, lets find the specific gravity of 30° API oil.
141.5 141.5 = .876 specific gravity

131.5 30 161.5
By converting the API gravity to specific gravity, you can then multiply this specific gravity by the
gradient of water (.433) to obtain the gradient of the fluid in question. For example:
What is the hydrostatic pressure exerted by 30° API oil at 5,000 feet?
Step 1 - Convert the API gravity to specific gravity .
141.5
= .876 specific gravity
131.5 30
Step 2 - Multiply the specific gravity by the gradient of fresh water (.433).
.876 specific gravity x .433 gradient = .379 gradient of the 30° PI gravity oil
Step 3 - Multiply the gradient (.379) by the depth (5,000 feet).
.379 gradient x 5,000 feet = 1,895 psi hydrostatic pressure.
Using the above formula, find the gradient and hydrostatic pressure of the following:
1. 32° API oil; what is the gradient? ;

what is the hydrostatic pressure at 3,500 ft?



11 Slickline
Table "B" can be used to find the gradient of various API gravity oils. Using this table, we locate the
30° API oil by reading down the left side column. Next, move across the table to the next last column
which is headed "gradient". Here, we find that the gradient of the 30° API oil is .380. now simply
multiply the gradient (.380) times the depth (5,000 ft) to get the pressure per square inch exerted by
this fluid at 5,000 feet.
.380 gradient x 5,000 feet = 1,900 psi
FLUID WEIGHT CONVERSION TABLE

Degrees Specific Weight per Weight per Gradient
API Gravity Gallon Cubic Foot
60 .739 6.16 46.1 .320
59 .743 6.20 46.4 .322
58 .747 6.23 46.6 .324
57 .751 6.26 46.8 .325
56 .755 6.30 47.1 .327
55 .759 6.33 47.4 .329
54 .763 6.36 47.6 .330
53 .767 6.40 47.9 .332
52 .771 6.43 48.1 .334
51 .775 6.46 48.3 .336
50 .780 6.51 48.7 .338
49 .784 6.54 48.9 .340
48 .788 6.57 49.2 .341
47 .793 6.61 49.5 .343
46 .797 6.65 49.8 .345
45 .802 6.69 50.0 .348
44 .806 6.72 50.3 .349
43 .811 6.76 50.6 .351
42 .816 6.81 50.9 .354
41 .820 6.84 51.2 .355
40 .825 6.88 51.5 .357
39 .830 6.92 51.8 .359
38 .835 6.96 52.1 .362
37 .840 7.01 52.4 .364
36 .845 7.05 52.7 .366
35 .850 7.09 53.0 .368
34 .855 7.13 53.3 .370
33 .860 7.17 53.6 .372
32 .865 7.21 53.9 .375
31 .871 7.26 54.3 .377
30 .876 7.31 54.7 .380
29 .882 7.36 55.1 .382
28 .887 7.40 55.4 .384
27 .893 7.45 55.7 .387
26 .898 7.49 56.0 .389
25 .904 7.54 56.4 .392
24 .910 7.59 56.8 .394
23 .916 7.64 57.2 .397
22 .922 7.69 57.5 .399
21 .928 7.74 57.9 .402
20 .934 7.79 58.3 .405
19 .940 7.84 58.7 .407
18 .946 7.89 59.0 .410
17 .953 7.95 59.5 .413
16 .959 8.00 59.8 .416
15 .966 8.06 60.3 .419
14 .973 8.11 60.7 .421
13 .979 8.16 61.0 .424
12 .986 8.22 61.5 .427
11 .993 8.28 61.9 .430
10 1.00 8.34 62.4 .433
TABLE "B"
12 Slickline
REVIEW PROJECT # 2
1. Write the formula for converting the API gravity to specific gravity.
2. What is the specific gravity of an oil that has an API gravity of 36° ? S.G.
Show your calculations in the space provided.
3. If you know the specific gravity of a fluid, you can calculate its gradient by multiplying it's specific
gravity times the of .
4. If you know the specific gravity of a fluid, you can calculate its weight per gallon by multiplying its
specific gravity times the per of .
5. What is the gradient of the 36° API oil in question No. 2 above? Show your calculations.
Gradient psi.
6. What is the weight per gallon of the 36° API oil in question No. 2 above? Show your calculations.
Weight per gallon lbs.
7. If you know the weight per gallon of a given fluid, you can find its specific gravity by dividing its
weight per gallon by the per of .
8. If you know the gradient of a given fluid you can find its specific gravity by dividing its gradient by
the of .
9. What is the gradient and weight per gallon of 42° API oil? Show your calculations.
Gradient
Wt./Gal.
10. Now. go back to Table B on page 10 and find the answer to the following:
34° API Fluid 10° API Fluid

Specific Gravity Specific Gravity
Weight Per Gallon Weight
Gradient Per Gallon
Gradient
13 Slickline
Gases in wells also exert pressure due to their weight. All gases are assigned a specific gravity
according to their relationship to a cubic foot of air at 60° F and 14.7 psi. Air is used as the standard
and is assigned a specific gravity of 1.00. Any gas lighter than air will have a specific gravity of less
than 1.00, while any gas weighing more than air will have a specific gravity of more than 1.00.
Sometimes, a well will have a column of gas above the fluid, and it will be necessary to calculate the
pressure exerted by gas. Table "C" will help you to calculate the pressure exerted by gases at
various depths.
To use this table, the specific gravity of the gas must be known. You will obtain the specific gravity of
the gas from the customer. For example:
What pressure is exerted at 5,000 feet in a well having gas with a specific gravity of 0.7 and a surface
shut in tubing pressure of 3,500 psi?
In the column marked "Well Depth", in Table "C", find the depth at which you are determine the
pressure (5,000 feet). Under the heading marked, "Correction Factors", find the column showing the
specific gravity of the gas in question (0.7). Read down this column until in intersects the well depth.
The figure (1.1292) found at this point is the correction factor for 0.7 gravity gas at 5,000 feet. Multiply
the surface pressure (3,500 psi) by this correction factor to obtain the pressure at 5,000 feet.
3,500 psi surface pressure x 1.1292 correction factor = 3,952.2 psi at 5,000 feet.
or
3,952.2 BHP @ 5,000 ft.
Using Table "C", Answer the following:
1. Surface pressure is 1,200 psi, 0.85 gravity gas to 8,000 feet; what is the correction factor?
; what is the BHP at 8,000 ft.? .
4. Surface pressure is 800 psi, 0.75 gravity gas to 14,500 feet; what is the correction factor?
14 Slickline
GAS CORRECTION FACTOR TABLE

To find the downhole pressure, multiply the surface pressure by the factor corresponding to the depth and gas gravity.
GAS GRADIENT CORRECTION FACTORS
WELL 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90
DEPTH GRAVITY GRAVITY GRAVITY GRAVITY GRAVITY GRAVITY GRAVITY
1000 1.0210 1.0228 1.0246 1.0264 1.0282 1.0299 1.0317

1500 1.0317 1.0344 1.0371 1.0398 1.0425 1.0453 1.0480
2000 1.0425 1.0462 1.0498 1.0535 1.0571 1.0608 1.0645
2500 1.0535 1.0580 1.0626 1.0673 1.0719 1.0766 1.0812
3000 1.0645 1.0700 1.0756 1.0812 1.0869 1.0926 1.0986
3500 1.0756 1.0822 1.0888 1.0954 1.1021 1.1088 1.1156

4000 1.0869 1.0945 1.1021 1.1098 1.1175 1.1253 1.1331
4500 1.0983 1.1069 1.1156 1.1243 1.1331 1.1420 1.1510
5000 1.1098 1.1194 1.1292 1.1390 1.1490 1.1590 1.1691
5500 1.1214 1.1321 1.1430 1.1540 1.1650 1.1762 1.1875
6000 1.1331 1.1450 1.1570 1.1691 1.1813 1.1937 1.2062

6500 1.1450 1.1580 1.1711 1.1844 1.1979 1.2114 1.2252
7000 1.1570 1.1711 1.1854 1.1999 1.2146 1.2295 1.2445
7500 1.1691 1.1844 1.1999 1.2157 1.2316 1.2477 1.2641
8000 1.1813 1.1979 1.2146 1.2316 1.2488 1.2663 1.2840
8500 1.1937 1.2114 1.2295 1.2477 1.2663 1.2851 1.3042

9000 1.2062 1.2252 1.2445 1.2641 1.2840 1.3042 1.3247
9500 1.2188 1.2391 1.2597 1.2806 1.3019 1.3236 1.3456
10000 1.2316 1.2532 1.2751 1.2974 1.3201 1.3433 1.3668
10500 1.2445 1.2674 1.2907 1.3144 1.3386 1.3632 1.3883
11000 1.2545 1.2818 1.3065 1.3317 1.3573 1.3835 1.4102

11500 1.2707 1.2963 1.3224 1.3491 1.3763 1.4041 1.4324
12000 1.2840 1.3110 1.3386 1.3668 1.3956 1.4249 1.4549
12500 1.2974 1.3259 1.3550 1.3847 1.4151 1.4461 1.4778
13000 1.3110 1.3409 1.3715 1.4028 1.4349 1.4676 1.5011
13500 1.3247 1.3561 1.3883 1.4212 1.4549 1.4894 1.5247

14000 1.3386 1.3715 1.4053 1.4398 1.4753 1.5116 1.5487
14500 1.3526 1.3871 1.4225 1.4587 1.4959 1.5340 1.5731
15000 1.3668 1.4028 1.4398 1.4778 1.5168 1.5568 1.5979
15500 1.3811 1.4188 1.4575 1.4972 1.5380 1.5800 1.6231
16000 1.3956 1.4349 1.4753 1.5168 1.5595 1.6035 1.6486

16500 1.4102 1.4511 1.4933 1.5367 1.5813 1.6273 1.6746
17000 1.4249 1.4676 1.5116 1.5568 1.6035 1.6515 1.7009
17500 1.4398 1.4843 1.5300 1.5772 1.6259 1.6760 1.7277
18000 1.4549 1.5011 1.5487 1.5979 1.6486 1.7009 1.7549
18500 1.4702 1.5181 1.5677 1.6188 1.6717 1.7262 1.7826

19000 1.4855 1.5354 1.5868 1.6401 1.6950 1.7519 1.8106
19500 1.5011 1.5528 1.6062 1.6615 1.7188 1.7779 1.8391
20000 1.5168 1.5704 1.6259 1.6833 1.7428 1.8044 1.8681
20500 1.5327 1.5882 1.6458 1.7054 1.7672 1.8312 1.8975
21000 1.5487 1.6062 1.6659 1.7277 1.7919 1.8584 1.9274

21500 1.5650 1.6245 1.6862 1.7504 1.8169 1.8860 1.9577
22000 1.5813 1.6429 1.7069 1.7733 1.8423 1.9141 1.9886
22500 1.5979 1.6615 1.7277 1.7965 1.8681 1.9425 2.0199
23000 1.6146 1.6804 1.7488 1.8201 1.8942 1.9714 2.0517
23500 1.6315 1.6995 1.7702 1.8439 1.9207 2.0007 2.0840

24000 1.6486 1.7188 1.7919 1.8681 1.9476 2.0304 2.1168
24500 1.6659 1.7383 1.8138 1.8926 1.9748 2.0606 2.1501
25000 1.6833 1.7580 1.8360 1.9174 2.0024 2.0912 2.1840
TABLE "C"
15 Slickline
REVIEW PROJECT # 3
Use the following information pertaining to a well to answer the questions below.
Show your calculations.
a. Tubing
1. 4600 psi Shut in Tubing Pressure
2. .70 gravity gas from surface to 4000 feet.
3. 37° API oil from 4000 feet to 9000 feet.
4. 9.3 pound/gallon salt water from 9000 feet to 11000 feet.
b. Casing
1. Completely filled with 10.5 pound/ gallon fluid to 11000 feet.
2. Zero surface pressure on casing.
Note: It may be helpful to draw and lable a schematic of the well prior to answering the questions.
1. Using Table C, the corrections factor for the gas is .
2. What is the pressure in the tubing at 4000 feet? psi.
3. What is the gradient of 37° API oil? Gradient.
4. How much hydraulic pressure is exerted by the column of 37° API oil? psi.
5. What is the gradient of hte 9.3 pound/gallon fluid in the tubing? Gradient.
6. How much hydrostatic pressure is exerted by the column of 9.3 pound/gallon fluid?
psi.
7. What is the pressure in the tubing at 11000 feet? psi.
8. What is the pressure in the casing at 11000 feet? psi.
9. How much pressure differential is there between the tubing and casing at 11000 feet?
psi.
TBG or TBG CSG ?

From which direction CSG
10. How much differential pressure is there between the tubing and casing at 8000 feet in the well?
psi.
TBG or TBG CSG ?

From which direction CSG
16 Slickline
Use the following information and well schematic, to answer the following questions:
4,000 psi Shut in Tubing Pressure
TUBING
.7 gravity gas in tubing 1. Pressure at 5,000 ft. psi
Casing filled with 11.6 pound/gallon 2. Pressure at 8,000 ft. psi

mud. No surface pressure on casing
3. Pressure at 12,000 ft. psi
Fluid level at 5,000 feet is
36 o API oil
CASING
1. Gradient of mud in casing
2. Pressure at 12,000 ft. psi
Differential pressure between tubing and casing

at:
9.6 pound/gallon saltwater
starts at 8,000 feet 1. 5,000 ft psi
2. 8,000 ft psi
3. 10,000 ft psi
4. 12,000 ft psi
Packer set at 12,000 feet
17 Slickline
Prior to or during downhole operations it sometimes becomes necessary to calculate the area of
a circle (tubing ID or OD, nipple ID, wireline OD, etc.). Either of the two following formulas may
be used to calculate the area of a circle.
1. R² = Area (x R x R)

2. D² x 0.7854 = Area (D x D x 0.7854)
Example: The packing bore in a "nominal" 2 inch 'X' landing nipple has an internal diameter
(ID) of 1.875 inches.
Problem #1 - Use formula No.1 above (R²) to calculate the cross sectional area of the 1.875
(Diameter) packing bore of the landing nipple. (Radius is one half of the diameter)
1.875
Step 1 - 
D R 
 0.9375 inches (radius)
 2  2
Step 2 - R² (R x R) 0.9375 x 0.9375 = 0.8789
Step 3 - (x R²) 3.1416 x 0.8789 = 2.761 square inches (area)
Problem #2 - Use formula No.2 above (D² x 0.7854) to calculate the cross sectional area of the
1.875 (Diameter) packing bore of the landing nipple.
Step 1 - D² (D x D) 1.875 x 1.875 = 3.5156 (D²)
Step 2 - (D² x 0.7854) 3.5156 x 0.7854 = 2.761 square inches (area)
In Problems 1 and 2 (above), we have determined that the packing bore ID of a nominal 2 inch
Type 'X' landing nipple has a cross sectional area of 2.761 inches.
Now, let's install a 1.875 inch (nominal 2") Type 'XX' Plug in the 'X' nipple that is 5,000 ft. deep
in a dry gas well (no fluid). The well pressure at 5,000 ft. is 3,500 psi. Once the plug is set, we
bleed the pressure above the plug to zero psi (0 psi). Now we have a 3,500 psi pressure
differential across the plug from below.
Question: How much force is being exerted across the plug?
The formula for calculating force is Area x Pressure = Force (A x P = F)
We have previously calculated the area of the 'X' nipple packing bore to be 2.761 square
inches.
We have also determined that we have a well pressure of 3,500 pounds per square inch against
the bottom of the plug. Use the formula (A x P = F) to find the force being exerted across the
plug.
2.761 (square inches) x 3,500 psi = 9,663.5 pounds (Force)

or
2.761 x 3,500 = 9,663.5 pounds of Force
18 Slickline
REVIEW PROJECT #4
1. Write two formulas for finding the area of a circle:
a.
b.
2. Calculate the areas of the circles having the following diameters:
Diameter Area
1.901 inches sq. in.
3. Area x Pressure = ?
4. Force = x ?
5. Calculate the force applied in the following:
a. 2" DW plug (1.995" Diameter) with a differential of 800 psi. lbs-force
b. 2.313 PXX plug with a 3400 psi. differential. lbs-force
c. 1.781 RR plug having a pressure differential of 8750 psi. lbs-force
d. 3.500" Blanking Cap with 2700 psi Shut-in Tubing Pressure (SITP). lbs-
force
19 Slickline
Table "D" lists the packing bore ID's and cross sectional areas of most common landing nipple
sizes from 1.25" ID up through 7.45" ID. To use Table "D", Locate the desired ID under the
column headed Landing Nipple Packing Bore ID (inches) and its corresponding area in the
adjacent column headed AREA (square inches).
Where applicable, Table "D" can be used in lieu of the mathematical formulas to determine the
area of a circle.
Example: The packing bore ID in a "nominal" 4 ½" Type 'X' landing nipple is 3.813 inches.
Problem No.1 - Use Table "D" to find the cross sectional area of a packing bore diameter of
3.813".
Step 1 - In column headed Landing Nipple Packing Bore ID (inches) find 3.813.
Step 2 - Move straight across to the next column headed AREA (square inches) and
find 11.4189 square inches, which is the cross sectional area of the 3.813"
landing nipple.
Problem No.2 - A plug is installed in the "nominal" 4 ½" Type 'X' landing nipple and is subject
to a pressure differential of 3,500 psi from below the plug.
Question: How much force is being exerted against the plug?
Area x Pressure = Force (A x P = F)
From Table "D" we found the area of the 3.813" packing bore ID to be 11.4189 square inches.
Step 1 - 11.4189 (square Inches) x 3,500 psi = 39,966.15 pounds force
Using the formulas for finding areas and force; find the cross sectional area and the force
applied in the following situations: (Check your answers for area with Tables "D" & "E")
1. A Type 'PS' plug (2.313" Diameter) set in 2 7/8" tubing with 3,700 psi differential under the
plug;
What is the cross sectional area of the plug? ;
How much force is applied?
2. A Type 'DD' bridge plug (1.995" Diameter) set in 2 3/8" tubing with 2,800 psi differential under
the plug;
3. A Type 'XX' plug in 4 1/2" tubing (3.813" Diameter) with 4,300 psi differential under the plug;
20 Slickline
LANDING NIPPLES
Landing Nipple AREA AREA
Packing Bore ID (Inches) (Square Inches) Landing Nipple (Square Inches)
Packing Bore ID (Inches)
1.250 1.2272 3.125 7.6699
1.375 1.4849 3.250 8.2958
1.500 1.7671 3.313 8.6235
1.625 2.0739 3.347 8.7983
1.710 2.2966 3.688 10.6825
1.781 2.4913 3.813 11.4189
1.813 2.5816 4.000 12.5664
1.875 2.7612 4.125 13.3640
1.905 2.8502 4.313 14.6099
2.000 3.1416 4.562 16.3456
2.188 3.7600 5.250 21.6475
2.250 3.9761 5.625 24.8505
2.313 4.2019 5.874 27.1085
2.380 4.4488 5.963 27.9267
2.562 5.1552 7.050 39.0362
2.750 5.9396 7.250 41.2825
2.813 6.2148 7.450 43.5916
2.875 6.4918
Table "D"
Table "E" contains information pertaining to most of the various sizes and weight ranges of
tubing and casing that we may encounter in the course of our work. This Tubing/Casing Table
contains ID and OD cross sectional areas for the tubing and/or casing sizes and weight ranges
that listed in the table.
Example: Using Table "E", we find that 2 3/8" (2.375) OD tubing that weighs 4.6/4.7 pounds per
foot has:
1. An ID of 1.995 inches
2. Drift Diameter of 1.901 inches
3. OD Cross Sectional Area of 4.4301 in²
4. ID Cross Sectional Area of 3.1259 in²
5. Wall Thickness of 0.190 inches
Example: We set a plug in the 1.995" ID of this tubing and applied a 1,500 psi pressure
differential underneath the plug.
Question: How much force is being exerted against the plug? A x P = Force
Area (from Table "E") = 3.1259 in²
3.1259 in² x 1,500 psi = 4,688.85 pounds Force
21 Slickline
TUBING/CASING
ID² x .7854 = ID Area
OD² x .7854 = OD Area
SIZE OD WEIGHT SIZE ID DRIFT AREA PIPE AREA PIPE WALL THICKNESS
(INCHES) LBS/FT (INCHES) (INCHES) OD (IN²) ID (IN²) (INCHES)
1.050 1.2 0.824 0.730 0.8659 0.5333 0.113
1.315 1.8 1.049 0.995 1.3581 0.8643 0.133
1.660 2.3/2.4 1.380 1.286 2.1642 1.4957 0.140
3.02 1.278 1.184 1.2828 0.191
1.900 2.40 1.650 1.516 2.1382 0.125
2.76/2.90 1.610 1.516 2.8353 2.0358 0.145
3.64 1.500 1.406 1.7671 0.200
2.063 3.25 1.751 1.657 3.3426 2.4080 0.156
4.6/4.7 1.995 1.901 3.1259 0.190
5.3 1.939 1.845 2.9529 0.218
2.375 5.95 1.867 1.773 4.4301 2.7377 0.254
(2 3/8) 6.20 1.853 1.759 2.6967 0.261
7.70 1.703 1.609 2.2778 0.336
6.4/6.5 2.441 2.347 4.6798 0.217
7.9 2.323 2.229 4.2383 0.276
8.7 2.259 2.165 4.0079 0.308
2.875 8.9 2.243 2.149 6.4918 3.9514 0.316
(2 7/8) 9.5 2.195 2.101 3.7841 0.340
10.40 2.151 2.057 3.6339 0.362
11.00 2.065 1.971 3.3491 0.405
11.65 1.995 1.901 3.1259 0.440
9.2/9.3 2.992 2.867 7.0310 0.254
10.2/10.3 2.922 2.797 6.7058 0.289
3.500 12.70/12.95 2.750 2.625 9.6211 5.9396 0.375
(3 1/2) 15.80 2.548 2.423 5.0990 0.476
16.70 2.480 2.355 4.8305 0.510
17.05 2.440 2.315 4.6759 0.530
11.00 3.476 3.351 9.4896 0.262
4.000 11.60 3.428 3.303 12.5664 9.2294 0.286
13.40 3.340 3.215 8.7616 0.330
12.75 3.958 3.833 12.3039 0.271
13.50 3.920 3.795 12.0687 0.290
4.500 15.50 3.826 3.701 15.9043 11.4969 0.337
(4 1/2) 16.90 3.754 3.629 11.0682 0.373
19.20 3.640 3.515 10.4062 0.430
13.00 4.494 4.369 15.8619 0.253
5.000 15.00 4.408 4.283 19.6350 15.2606 0.296
18.00 4.276 4.151 14.3604 0.362
17.00 4.892 4.767 18.7959 0.304
5.500 20.00 4.778 4.653 23.7583 17.9301 0.361
(5 1/2) 23.00 4.670 4.545 17.1287 0.415
6.000 15.00 5.524 5.399 28.2743 23.9661 0.238
18.00 5.424 5.299 23.1062 0.288
6.625 24.00 5.921 5.796 34.4716 27.5347 0.352
(6 5/8) 28.00 5.791 5.666 26.3389 0.417
17.00 6.538 6.413 33.5722 0.231
20.00 6.456 6.331 32.7353 0.272
23.00 6.366 6.241 31.8290 0.317
7.000 26.00 6.276 6.151 38.4845 30.9354 0.362
29.00 6.184 6.059 30.0351 0.408
32.00 6.094 5.969 29.1672 0.453
35.00 6.004 5.879 28.3120 0.498
8.628 36.00 7.825 7.700 58.4262 48.0904 0.400
(8 5/8)
Table "E"
22 Slickline
The amount of weight bar (stem) required to pull various sizes of wireline (slickline) into the well
is another against various well pressures can also be calculated, eliminating the guessing
game.
Chart "A" is a guide that may be used to assist in determining the amount of tool string weight
that is needed. This chart is reasonably accurate in determining the amount of stem that is
require to equal (balance the force of the well's pressure that is trying to push the wire up and
out of the stuffing box packing. The chart does not take into consideration the additional weight
that may be required to overcome the friction of the stuffing box packing. The degree of friction
between the wireline and stuffing box packing can vary greatly due to:
1. The type of packing material being used in the stuffing box.

2. The amount of compressing applied to the packing. (packing nut)
3. The size (diameter) of the wire.
4. The condition of the wireline. A clean, straight, smooth surfaced, lubricated wireline
will pass through the packing with much less friction than will a dirty, rough surfaced,
dry (non-lubricated) wireline.
Chart "A" is laid out with the vertical lines representing well pressure (in 100 psi increments)
from 0 psi to 20,000 psi. The horizontal lines represent weight (in 2 lbs increments) from 0 lbs
to 250 lbs. The seven (7) diagonal lines that originate at zero in the lower left corner of the chart
represent the various wireline diameters from .066" to .125". To use the chart:
1. Find the shut-in well pressure at the bottom of the chart.

2. Follow the vertical "pressure" line up until in intersects the diagonal line that is labeled
with the wireline size that is being used.
3. At this intersection, follow the nearest horizontal "weight" line to the right (or left) and
read the number of pounds, that is the weight require to equal the force.
Remember, the weight derived from this chart is only the weight that is required to prevent the
well pressure from pushing the wireline up and out through the stuffing box disregarding the
friction of the stuffing box packing. Normally, in wireline operations we consider only the weight
of the wireline stem when determining the weight that is required to balance the wireline against
the force of the well pressure. The additional weight of the jars, knuckle joint, pulling tool, etc. is
not normally considered in this weight requirement. In some operations (especially at lower well
pressures and when using the smaller diameter wirelines) the additional weight of the jars,
knuckle joint, pulling tool, etc. is sufficient to overcome the friction of the stuffing box packing
and pull the wireline into the well. In other operations where higher well pressures are
encountered and/or where larger wireline sizes are used, stem weight may have to be added in
addition to the accessories.
CAUTION: When determining the wireline tool string weight that is required to pull the wireline into the
well when running a subsurface device, consideration must be given to the design of the device being
run. In the large ID of the wireline lubricator and the tree, the weight of the device may be beneficial in
pulling the wireline into the well. However, if the device has centralizers or spring loaded components
that contact the tubing wall, a portion (if not all) the weight of the device, and possibly some of the tool
string weight, may be supported by the centralizers or spring loaded components when they enter the
smaller ID of the tubing. Therefore, it is a general practice to disregard the weight of this type of device
when calculating the weight required to pull the wireline into the well. In fact, additional weight may be
required to overcome the "drag" effect of the centralizers or spring loaded components that may be in
contact with the tubing wall.
23 Slickline
CHART "B" CHART "C"
Cross Sectional Areas of Wireline Approximate Weights of Wireline

Diameter (in) Area (in²) Diameter (in) Pounds/Foot Pounds/1,000 ft.
.066 .0034 .066 .01162 11.62

.072 .0040 .072 .01382 13.82
.082 .0052 .082 .01793 17.93
.092 .0066 .092 .02257 22.57
.105 .0087 .105 .02940 29.40
.108 .0092 .108 .03110 31.11
.125 .0123 .125 .04167 41.67
Chart "B" shows the cross sectional area of wire sizes from .066" OD up through .125" OD. The
cross sectional area of these wirelines was obtained using the formula:
D² x .7854 = Area
Chart "A" is based on multiplying the area of the wireline by the surface shut-in well pressure.
Area x Pressure = Force (A x P = F)
In this case, force is expressed in actual pounds of weight. Therefore, by simple calculation,
you may multiply the area of the wireline (taken from Chart "B") by the shut-in surface pressure
of the well to determine the stem weight requires to balance the wireline against the shut-in well
pressure.
Example: The area of .092 wireline is .0066 in² (taken from Chart "B"). Well pressure is 9,000
psi.
Area x Pressure = Force

.0066 x 9,000 psi = 59.4 lbs. (weight required)
Use Chart "A" to find the stem weight required to balance .092 wireline against 9,000 psi. The
weight that you determine from Chart "A" should be very close to the weight (59.4) found in the
example above.
24 Slickline
We have found that we need 59.4 lbs. of stem weight to balance the .092" OD wireline against
9,000 psi of well pressure. Next we need to determine how many feet of stem we need to
provide the 59.4 pounds of weight.
In this example we will use 1½" OD stem. A formula that is reasonably accurate for determining
the weight per foot of round, cold rolled steel bar stock is:
D 2 8
= weight per foot
3
Diameter x Diameter x 8 = lbs/ft

3
Example
: 1.5 x 1.5 = 2.25
2.25 x 8 = 18
18
6 lbs/foot
3
Another method used to calculate weight per foot of stem is: D² x 2.667 = Lbs/Ft
Example
: 1.5 x 1.5 x 2.667 = 6.00075 or 6 Lbs/Ft
In the example above we found that a round steel bar having a diameter of 1.5 inches weighs 6
pounds per foot. If we have a 5 foot length of this 1.5 " stem, it will weigh (5 ft x 6 lbs/ft = 30)
30 lbs. Considering the loss of steel that occurred due to machining the box and pin
connections and fishing neck on that piece of stem it will weigh slightly less than 30 pounds.
We have determined that 1.5" OD stem weighs approximately 6 lbs/ft and that we need 59.4 lbs
of stem weight to balance the .092 wireline against 9,000 psi shut-in well pressure. Now we can
determine the number of feet of 1.5" OD stem that we need simply by dividing the required stem
weight (59.4 lbs) by the weight per foot (6 lbs) of 1.5" OD stem.
59.4lbs
9.9 ft or 10 ft of stem needed
6lbs / ft
Use the preceding information, charts and examples to answer the following questions.
1. How much force would be exerted on the following wireline sizes, and how many feet of 1.25"
OD stem would be required to balance each wireline size against a shut-in surface well
pressure of 14,300 psi?
.072 pounds force; ft. of 1.25" OD stem required

25 Slickline
Using the preceding formulas for finding force and the weight per foot of round stock, we can
also determine at what point the tubing pressure will overcome the weight of the wireline and
blowing it out of the stuffing box, after pulling out of the rope socket or dropping a cutter bar.
This is accomplished by calculating the pounds of force and dividing it by the weight per foot of
the wireline. (As previously mention, this calculation does not account for friction of the wireline
in the stuffing box packing.)
D² x .7854 x psi (Force) ÷ (Lbs/Ft) (D² x 8) ÷ 3 = Depth in feet
or
D 2 .7854 psi
D 2 8  = Depth in Feet
 
 3 
Example: Using .092 wire on a well with 5,000 psi shut-in well pressure.
.092 .092 .7854 5,000 psi 33.238

.092 .092 8 
= 1472.6236 ft .
.0225706
 
 3 
The depth which the wire will start blowing out of the stuffing box is 1472.62 ft.
Let's take this formula one step further. If we look at these examples we can see that we are
using the diameter of the wireline on both sides of the formula. D² divided by D² equals one (1)
and one multiplied or divided into any number has no effect on that number. So, let's take
another look at the formula leaving out the wireline diameter.
.7854 .7854
8   2.667 .2945

3 
What about the pressure? Pressure was left out of the equation because, pressure is a variable.
Pressure changes from one well to the next. The other numbers remain constant (unchanging).
The number .2945 is also a constant, which we can use to determine a point the tuning
pressure will over come the weight of the wireline. By multiplying .2945 by the tubing pressure
we can determined the number of feet in depth, where the weight of the wireline equal the force
of the tubing pressure.
.2945 x surface pressure = depth of wireline
Example: Shut-in well pressure is 5,000 psi
.2945 x 5,000 psi = 1472.93 ft
With 5,000 psi shut-in well pressure, any size of solid wireline will start blowing out of the
stuffing box at 1472 feet.
26 Slickline
There are times when talking to a customer about different wirelines that they will ask about
breaking strength of the wireline. In Section III of your Wireline Specialist I manual there are
charts for the different sizes and materials of wirelines. But what if you don't have your manual
with you? What can you tell your customer? Most areas still use standard plow steel wireline.
Standard plow steel wireline has a maximum tensile breaking strength of approximately 280,000
psi (Found in Section III, page 14). The minimum tensile breaking strength is approximately
85% of the maximum tensile breaking strength. Tensile strength is given in pounds per square
inch (psi). So, one square inch of standard plow steel will have an approximate maximum
breaking strength of 280,000 pounds. To find the maximum breaking strength of a wireline, we
calculate the area of that line to square inches and multiply by 280,000, then to get the minimum
breaking strength we take that number times 85%.
Area of wire x 280,000 x 85% (.85) = Approx. minimum breaking strength
Example: Using .092" OD, Standard Plow Steel Wireline
.092 x .092 x .7845 = .0066 (area of wireline in²)
.0066 x 280,000 = 1848 ( approx. maximum breaking strength)
1848 x .85 = 1570.8 (approx. minimum breaking strength)
or
.0066 x 280,000 x .85 = 1571 approx.
The calculated minimum breaking strengths are an approximate figure and gives you something
to tell your customer when they ask about different wireline sizes and breaking strengths. If you
compare the calculated figures to those in Section III page 14, you will find in the example
above that you are only 24 pounds off the actual number. Considering that most of our wireline
work is accomplished using only 50% of this figure, the calculated figure is a safe number.
27 Slickline
Customers will need to know when pressure testing tubing after setting a plug, how many
barrels of fluid are needed to fill the tubing. Other times we may be ask how much fluid needs
to swabbed out of the tubing to get a well artificially pressure balance. When swabbing into a
tank on location, will the volume of the tank hold what they want to swab out of the tubing.
Using the "Rule of Thumb" for determining fill-up volume of tubing we can calculate an
approximate answer to these questions. The "Rule of Thumb" formula for determining fill-up
volume of tubing is:
ID² = barrels/1,000 feet

or
internal diameter x internal diameter = the number of barrels per 1,000 feet of tubing.
Using the "Rule of Thumb" for 2 3/8" 4.6-4.7 lbs/ft tubing, we find the number of barrels per
1,000 feet for 1.995 ID tubing is: 1.995 x 1.995 = 3.98 barrels/1,000 feet.
Finding the volume of 2 7/8" 6.4-6.5 lbs/ft tubing, we would use the same "Rule of Thumb"
formula, ID for this tubing is 2.441: 2.441 x 2.441 = 5.96 barrels/1,000 feet.
Using the "Rule of Thumb" find the volume to fill up 7,000 ft. of 2 3/8" 4.6-4.7 lbs/ft tubing?
Barrels/1,000' would be 3.980 x 7 = 27.86 barrels to fill that amount of tubing.
Find the number of barrels it would take to fill up the tubing in the following examples.
1. 9,000 feet of 2 3/8" 4.6-4.7 lbs/ft tubing?
2. 6,000 feet of 2 7/8" 6.4-6.5 lbs/ft tubing?
3. 8,000 feet of 2 7/8" 8.9 lbs/ft tubing?
VOLUME OF RECTANGLE TANK = (Length x Width x Height)

Find the volume of a tank that is 20' 7" long by 8' wide and 8' 9" high.
The first thing you do is converting the different units to the same unit. Convert the units to
either feet or inches. Example 20' 7", converting the 7" to decimal foot is done by dividing 7" by
12" = 20.583 feet in length. If you wanted to convert 20' 7" to inches you would multiply 20' by
12" = 240" + 7" = 247 inches in length.
Convert the example to units in feet.

Cubic feet - (20.583' x 8' x 8.750' = 1440.81 cubic feet)
Gallons - (1440.81 cu.ft. x 7.481 gal. in cu.ft. = 10778.699 gallons)
Barrels - (10778.699 gal. divided by 42 gal. in a barrel = 256.636 barrels)
Convert the example to units in inches.

Cubic inches - (247" x 96" x 105" = 2489760 cubic inches)
Cubic feet - (2489760 cu.in. divided by 1728 cu.in. in 1 cu.ft. = 1440.833 cu.ft.)
Gallons - (1440.833 cu.ft. x 7.481 gal in cu.ft. = 10778.873 gallons)
Barrels - (10778.873 gal. divided 42 gal. in a barrel = 256.640 barrels)
28 Slickline
VOLUME OF CYLINDRICAL TANK =(Area x Height)

Calculate the volume of a tank with a diameter of 7 feet and a height of 8 feet.
Find the area of round tank ID² x .7854 = area of base x height = volume.
(7' x 7' x .7854 = 38.4846 sq.ft. area x 8' high = 307.8768 cu.ft.
Using the formulas for volume of tanks calculate the following tank volumes:
1. 6 feet 10 inches by 4 feet by 3 feet 5 inches
a. Cubic feet
b. Gallons
c. Barrels
2. 6' 8" diameter and height 7' 3"

a. Cubic feet
b. Gallons
c. Barrels
3. 8' diameter and 5' height

a. Cubic feet
b. Gallons
c. Barrels
Customer will ask to swab out a certain number of barrels of fluid out of a particular size of
tubing. We need to know how to calculate the number of feet of fluid that needs to be swabbed
out of the tubing. They may ask how big a tank will be needed to hold that amount of fluid. The
formula for finding out the number of feet of fluid needed to be swabbed out.
Barrels of fluid to be swabbed divide by barrels per 1,000 feet x 1,000 = number of feet of fluid
that needs to be swabbed.
Example problem swab 23 barrels of fluid out of 2 3/8" 4.6-4.7 lbs/ft tubing.
23 barrels divided by 3.980 bbls/1000' = 5.779 x 1,000 = 5779 feet of fluid needs swabbed.
Tank 6' 6" long by 5' wide by 4' high, would it hold the fluid that you swabbed out of the tubing?
How many barrels will the tank hold? .
Swab 35 barrels of fluid out of 2 7/8" standard weight tubing, how many feet of fluid would need
to be swabbed?
The company person wants to swab 7000' of fluid out of 2 7/8" 6.4 - 6.5 lb/ft. tubing. How many
barrels will be swabbed? The formula is ID² = bbls/1000' x depth divide by 1000= barrels of
fluid.
ID² is 2.441 x 2.441 = 5.958 x 7000' divide by 1000 = 41.709 barrels
Swab 5000' of fluid out of 2 7/8" 7.9 lb/ft. tubing. How many barrels will be swabbed?
Tank on location is 6' long by 5' wide by 5' high, would the tank hold the fluid swabbed out of the
tubing from question right above? How many barrels does tank hold?
29 Slickline
Final Project
1. Fill in the following pertaining to fresh water:
a. Has a specific gravity of

b. Has a gradient of
c. Weight per gallon is
d. Weight per cubic foot is
e. Has an API gravity of
2. How many gallons are in an oil field barrel?

How many cubic inches per gallon?
How many gallons per cubic foot?
How many cubic inches per cubic foot?
3. The fluid weighs 9.8 pounds per gallon:
a. What is the specific gravity?
b. What is the gradient?
c. What is the hydrostatic pressure exerted by this fluid at 10,000’?
4. The fluid weights 124 pounds per cubic foot:
a. What is the specific gravity?
b. What is the gradient?
c. What is the weight per gallon?
d. What is the hydrostatic pressure exerted by this fluid at 7,000’?
5. What is the “rule of thumb” formula for finding a gradient?
6. What is the “rule of thumb” formula for finding hydrostatic pressure?
USE THE “RULE OF THUMB” FORMULA TO FIND THE FOLLOWING:

7. The tubing is filled with 8.7 lb/gal. salt water.
The casing is filled with 12.6 lb/gal. mud.
a. What is the gradient of the fluid in the tubing?

b. What is the tubing pressure at 10,000’?
c. What is the gradient of the fluid in the casing?
d. What is the casing pressure at 10,000’?
e. What is the differential pressure at 10,000’?
f. From which direction is the differential?
30 Slickline
8. The tubing is filled with 6.8 lb/gal. fluid and has 850 psi surface pressure.
The casing is filled with 9.3 lb/gal. fluid.
a. What is the gradient of the fluid in the tubing?

b. What is the hydrostatic pressure in the tubing at 17,000’?
c. What is the tubing pressure at 17,000’?
d. What is the gradient of the fluid in the casing?
e. What is the casing pressure at 17,000’?
f. What is the differential pressure at 17,000’?
g. From which direction is the differential?
9. What is the formula for converting API gravity to specific gravity?
10. The fluid is 36o API gravity oil:
a. What is the specific gravity of the oil?

b. What is the gradient of the oil?
c. What is the hydrostatic pressure of the oil at 4,500’?
11. The tubing has 42o API gravity oil from surface to 3,600’ and 8.7 lb/gal. salt water from 3,600’ to
8,500’. Surface pressure on the tubing is 1,500 psi. The casing is full of 11.6 lb/gal. mud and
has 0 psi surface pressure.
a. What is the specific gravity of the oil?

b. What is the gradient of the oil?
c. What is the hydrostatic pressure of the oil at 3,600’?
d. What is the tubing pressure at 3,600’?
e. What is the gradient of the salt water?
f. What is the hydrostatic pressure at 8,500’?
g. What is the tubing pressure at 8,500’?
h. What is the gradient of the casing fluid?
i. What is the casing pressure at 8,500’?
j. What is the differential at 8,500’?
k. From which direction is the differential?
12. What is the formula for finding the BHP at the bottom of a column of gas?
13. What is the formula for finding the area of a circle?
14. What is the formula for finding force?
15. The tubing has .8 gravity gas to 7,500’ and 2,500 psi surface pressure:
a. What is the correction factor of the gas?

b. What is the BHP at 7,000’?
31 Slickline
16. Fluid level in the tubing is 4,200’. Gas is .6 gravity. Tubing surface pressure is 4,200 psi. There
is 39o API gravity oil in the tubing from 4,200’ to 8,400’ and 9.2 lb/gal. salt water from 8,400’ to
12,000’. The casing is full of 12.8 lb/gal. mud with 750 psi surface pressure:
a. Gas correction factor is

b. BHP at 4,200’ is
c. Specific gravity of the 39o API oil is
d. Gradient of the oil is
e. Hydrostatic pressure exerted by the oil is
f. Gradient of the 9.2 lb/gal salt water is
g. Hydrostatic pressure exerted by the salt water is
h. Tubing pressure at 12,000’ is
i. Casing pressure at 12,000’ is
j. Differential at 12,000’ is
k. Direction of the differential is
17. A ‘DW’ plug is set in 2 7/8” 6.4-6.5 lb/ft tubing:
a. What is the area of the plug?

b. What is the force exerted across the
plug with a 1,500 psi differential?
18. A ‘PN’ plug choke is set in a nipple in 2 3/8” tubing:
a. What is the area of the plug?

b. What is the force exerted across the
plug with a 5,000 psi differential?
19. A Type ‘W’ circulating plug is run in a well having a fluid level of 5,000’. The test tool is set
below fluid level and the tubing above the test tool is then filled with fresh water. The seat which
the drop dart seal against has an ID of 3/8”. How much force is holding the drop dart on seat?
20. What is the cross sectional area of the following wires?
a. .072 b. .105 c. .125
21. What is the formula for finding the weight per foot of bar stock?
22. Using the above formula give the weight per foot for the following:
a. 1 1/2” stem b. 1 1/4” stem c. 1 7/8” stem
What is the weight of 3’-1 1/4” stem?

32 Slickline
23. You rig up on a well using .105 wire. Surface pressure is 3,300 psi:
What is the force exerted against the cross sectional area of the wire?
How many feet of 1 1/2” stem will it take to overcome that force?
24. You rig upon a well using .082 wire and 1 1/4” stem. Surface pressure is 4,200 psi. Neglecting
stuffing box friction, how many feet of stem is needed to overcome the force against the
wireline?
25. What is the “rule of thumb” formula for finding the fill-up volume of 2 3/8” & 2 7/8” tubing?
26. Using the “rule of thumb” formula for finding the fill-up volume of tubing, how many barrels of
fluid would it take to fill up 6,000’ of 2 3/8” 4.7 lb/ft tubing? How many barrels
of fluid would it take to fill up 5,000’ of 2 7/8” 6.4 lb/ft tubing?
27. You have pulled out of the rope socket while trying to pull a lock mandrel at 10,000’. There is
3,500 psi surface pressure on the well. Neglecting stuffing box friction, at what point is the
tubing pressure going to overcome the weight of the wireline and start blowing the wire out of
the hole?
(Hint: Use the formula for finding weight per foot of bar stock to calculate the weight per foot of
the wireline.)
28. Calculate the capacity of the following tanks:
a. 5 feet 7 inches by 8 feet 2 inches by 4 feet

Cubic feet Gallons
Barrels
b. 64 inches by 89 inches by 60 inches

Cubic inches
Cubic feet
Gallons
Barrels
c. A cylindrical tank with a diameter of 15 feet and a height of 12 feet

Cubic feet
Gallons
Barrels
33 Slickline
34 Slickline
OPTIONAL
PROFILE SELECTIVE EQUIPMENT

Slickline Profile Selective
Table of Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 3
Landing Nipples (General) ........................................................................................................................ 3
Profile Selective Nipples ........................................................................................................................... 4
Running Tool Selective ............................................................................................................................. 5
No-Go Landing Nipples ............................................................................................................................ 6
Type ‘S’ Profile Selective Equipment........................................................................................................... 7
Type ‘S’ Landing Nipple........................................................................................................................... 7
Type ‘S’ Lock Mandrel ........................................................................................................................... 11
Type ‘V’ Landing Nipple ........................................................................................................................ 15
Type ‘V’ Lock Mandrel .......................................................................................................................... 16
Type ‘N’ No-Go Landing Nipple ............................................................................................................ 17
Type ‘N' Lock Mandrel ........................................................................................................................... 18
Profile Selective Equipment for Heavy Wall Tubing ................................................................................. 20
Type ‘T' Profile Selective Landing Nipples ............................................................................................ 21
Type ‘T' Lock Mandrel............................................................................................................................ 23
Type ‘Q' No-Go Landing Nipple............................................................................................................. 27
Type ‘Q' Lock Mandrel ........................................................................................................................... 28
Recommended Running and Pulling Procedures for Type ‘S’, ‘V’, ‘T’, ‘N’, and ‘Q’ Lock Mandrels. ..... 30
Pinning Procedures .................................................................................................................................. 30
Running Procedures ................................................................................................................................ 35
Pulling Procedures................................................................................................................................... 39
Sliding Key Locator ................................................................................................................................ 44
CAUTION NOTE: 1 ............................................................................................................................... 46
CAUTION NOTE: 2 ............................................................................................................................... 47
Equalizing Valves and Plugs ................................................................................................................... 48
Test Tools.................................................................................................................................................... 53
Profile Selective Equipment Project........................................................................................................ 58
Hands-On Projects ............................................................................................................................... 60
1 Slickline
2 Slickline
Introduction
Landing Nipples (General)
A landing nipple is a short, thick walled section

of pipe which is made up as a part of the tubing
string. The landing nipple is machined internally
to provide a locating, locking and sealing profile
which will accept various control devices that
can be installed in and retrieved from the
landing nipple by use of slickline.
The outside diameter of a landing nipple is
normally equal to or slightly smaller than the
diameter of the coupling on the tubing that the
landing nipple is used with. The minimum
internal diameter of a landing nipple is normally
smaller than the drift diameter of the tubing that
the landing nipple is used with. The length of
landing nipples may vary from approximately
six inches up to two feet or so, depending upon
the size and type of landing nipple.
Landing nipples are grouped into two (2)
separate and distinct categories (Figure 1). These
categories are:
1. Selective Landing Nipples
2. No-Go Landing Nipples
SELECTIVE LANDING NIPPLES
Several Selective landing nipples may be
installed as a part of the tubing at predetermined
depths in the well. In a given tubing size and
weight range, each of these several nipples will
have the same internal diameter. These nipples
are called Selective nipples due to the fact that Fig. 1
by the use of slickline, from the surface, we can
Select any one of these nipples and install a
control device in it.
Selective landing nipples are divided into two
(2) separate categories. The categories are:
1. "Profile" Selective Landing Nipples
2. "Running Tool" Selective Landing Nipples.
3 Slickline
Profile Selective Nipples

In a given tubing size and weight range, each of
the Profile Selective nipples (of the same type)
which are used in that tubing will have:
1. The same minimum internal diameter (ID)
2. The same Locking Profile
3. The same Sealing Profile (packing bore)
(smallest diameter in nipple)
4. The locating profile in each nipple will be
different from the locating profile in each of
the other nipples. Before installing a control
device in one of the Profile Selective LOCKING
Nipples, the lock mandrel used with the PROFILE
control device must be equipped with a
Locator assembly which MATCHES the
Locating profile of the nipple it is to be
installed in. (See Fig. 2) SEALING
(PACKING)
Halliburton "Profile Selective" landing nipples PROFILE
are separated into three (3) types. These are:
1. 'Type S' Landing Nipples
2. 'Type V' Landing Nipples (Optional)
3. 'Type T' Landing Nipples LOCATING
PROFILE
Each of these three (3) types of Profile Selective
Landing Nipples will be discussed individually
in the following pages of this manual.
S, V, or T
S, V, or T Lock Mandrel
Nipple
Figure 2
4 Slickline
Running Tool Selective

Running Tool Selective Landing Nipples are
selected by the Running Tool which is used to
install the lock mandrel and control device in
that nipple. Each "running tool selective"
landing nipple of a given size and type in the
tubing string is identical. This allows an
unlimited number (within reason) of "Running
Tool Selective" landing nipples to be used in a
single tubing string.
LOCKING AND
A locking mandrel used in a given size and type LOCATING
of "Running Tool Selective" landing nipples will PROFILE
"Set" in any one of several nipples which may SEALING
be in a single tubing string. A separate or (PACKING)
different locator assembly is not required for the PROFILE
locking mandrel. The running tool is designed to
select the desired nipple AND at the same time Type ‘X’
activate the locking mandrel so that Locking Lock
Keys on the lock mandrel will serve to locate Type ‘X’
Mandrel
and lock the locking mandrel in the selective Nipple Figure 3
nipple.
Halliburton "Running Tool Selective" Landing
Nipples are separated into two (2) types. These
are:
1. 'Type X' Landing Nipples (For Standard
Weight Tubing).
2. 'Type R' Landing Nipples (For Heavy
Walled Tubing).
LOCKING AND
LOCATING
PROFILE
SEALING
(PACKING)
PROFILE
Type ‘R’
Lock
Type ‘R’ Mandrel
Nipple Figure 4
5 Slickline
No-Go Landing Nipples

For each size and type of Halliburton Selective
Landing Nipple, there is a compatible No-Go
nipple which may be used in addition to the
selective nipples. If used, the No-Go nipples
must be placed below the selective nipples in
the tubing. Only one No-Go nipple of a given
size can be used in a single tubing string.
A Halliburton No-Go nipple will have a
restricted internal diameter (No-Go "Shoulder")
near its lower end. (See Fig. 5 and Fig. 6). The
locking mandrel or control device to be installed NO-GO
in a No-Go nipple will have an outside SHOULDER
dimension which is larger than the internal
Figure 5
diameter of the No-Go "Shoulder" in the nipple.
Therefore the lock mandrel or control device
being used will locate on, and be stopped by, the
No-Go shoulder in the nipple. The No-Go lock
mandrel cannot pass through the No-Go nipple.
The lock mandrel and control device to be used
in the No-Go nipple will pass through all of the
compatible selective nipples that may be in the
tubing but will positively locate and stop in the
No-Go nipple.
Figure 5 represents a No-Go nipple and a No-Go
lock mandrel which may be used in conjunction
with the 'type S' "PROFILE SELECTIVE"
equipment.
NO-GO
Figure 6 represents a No-Go nipple and a No-Go SHOULDER
lock mandrel which may be used in conjunction
with the 'Type X' "RUNNING TOOL
SELECTIVE" equipment. Figure 6
6 Slickline
Type ‘S’ Profile Selective

Equipment
Since the Halliburton 'Type S' equipment
(profile selective) was the first selective type
slickline equipment to be introduced for use in
the petroleum industry, we will begin with it in
our discussion and instruction on Profile
Selective slickline equipment.
Type ‘S’ Landing Nipple

LOCKING
A maximum of seven (7) 'Type S' landing DOGS
nipples of a given nominal size may be installed
in a single tubing string. Each of these seven
nipples will have a locking profile, a sealing V-TYPE
profile and a locating profile. The Locking and PACKING
the Sealing profile of each of the seven nipples
will be dimensionally identical. But each nipple
will have a different locating profile.
To identify the locating profile in each of the
LOCATOR
seven nipples, each nipple is assigned a KEYS
"position" number. Figure 9 illustrates the
position one (1) through position five (5) 'Type
SPRING
S' landing nipples. The Locking and Sealing
section of each nipple is identical to the others.
The difference is in the locating section. Notice
in Figure 9 the location of the 90° shoulder in
the locating section of the position No. 1 nipple
and then compare it to the location of the 90°
shoulder in each of the other four nipples. It is
obvious that as the position number increases,
the 90° shoulder in the locating section is
positioned farther from the lower end of the
nipple. The location of the 90° shoulder is the Type ‘S’ Type ‘S’
only difference between the position one, two, Nipple Lock Mandrel
three, four and five 'Type S' nipples. No other
dimensions are changed. Figure 8
7 Slickline
LOCKING
PROFILE
PACKING
(SEAL)
BORE
SMALLEST
ID IN
NIPPLE
LOCATING
PROFILE
Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position 5
Figure 9
8 Slickline
Figure 10 illustrates the position six (6) and

position seven (7) 'Type S' nipple profiles. The
Locking profile and the Sealing profile of the
position six and position seven nipples are
identical to the positions one through five 'Type
S' nipples. The locating section of the positions
six and position seven nipples retain the 90°
shoulder as was shown in the positions one
through five nipples. Notice in Figure 10 that the
locating section of the position six and position
seven nipples have an additional groove below
the 90° shoulder which the first five positions do
not have.
Since the locking and sealing sections of the
seven different "positions" of the 'Type S'
landing nipples are identical, the locating section
(profile) of the nipple provides the selectivity
feature. Therefore the locking mandrel to be
used in these nipples must be equipped with a
locator assembly which matches the particular
nipple that it is to be installed in.
When the 'Type S' nipples are installed in a well
as part of the tubing string, they must be placed
in numerical sequence with the lowest position
number being the lowermost nipple in the well.
For example, if the positions one (1), two (2),
and three (3) nipples are being installed, the Position 6 Position 7
position one (1) nipple must go into the well Figure 10
first (deepest), the position number two nipple
next highest up the hole and the position number
three nipple next highest in the well. (See Figure
11).
9 Slickline
Any combination of position numbers could be Note: It is difficult, if not impossible to

used if they are installed in numerical sequence, determine the position number of a nipple simply
by looking into the nipple. At the manufacturing
starting with the lowest position number being
plant, identification grooves are machined
placed the deepest in the well. onto the outside diameter of the nipple near its
upper end. One groove identifies the nipple as a
position one; two grooves as a position two,
three grooves as a position three etc. (Fig.12)
In Halliburton' part numbering system the

position number of a Profile Selective landing
nipple is identified by a dash number which
follows the part number of that nipple: Example
1. 11S900-1 (Position one)
2. 11 S900-2 (Position two)
Figure 11 3. 11S900-3 (Position three) etc.
10 Slickline
RUNNING
Type ‘S’ Lock Mandrel NECK
1
A 'Type S' Locking Mandrel (complete) consists FISHING
NECK
of two basic subassemblies. These are the
LOCK assembly and the LOCATOR assembly.
2
(See Fig. 13).
The Lock Assembly consists of the locking dogs LOCK
(Item 3) which are mounted around the tapered ASSEMBLY
3
locking mandrel (Item 4). The Locking dogs are
suspended from the dog carrier (Item 2). The 4
dogs and the dog carrier are retained on the
mandrel (Item 4) by the carrier mandrel (Item 1). 5
The lower end of the mandrel (Item 4) has an 6

internal thread that is used to attach the Locator
7
Assembly to the Lock Assembly. The lower
portion of the mandrel (Item 4) also provides a
place for the Packing Assembly (Items 5-7) to
be installed onto the Lock Assembly. 8
Note that the upper end of the dog carrier (Item 9

2) provides a fishing neck (pulling flange) to
allow engagement of a pulling tool to retrieve
the assembly from the well. The upper end of LOCATOR 10
ASSEMBLY
the carrier mandrel (Item 1 ) is normally referred
to as the "Running Neck" since it provides the 11
means of attaching the running tool to the lock
mandrel assembly. (See instructions for pinning 12
the lock mandrel to the 'Type T' and Type SP' 13
Running Tools).
The LOCATOR assembly consists of two Figure 13
locator keys (Item 9), mounted around a locator
mandrel (Item 11). Each key is spring loaded
outwardly from the mandrel (Item 11 ) by an
individual spring (Item 10) mounted between the
key and mandrel. The upper key retainer (Item
8) and the lower key retainer (Item 12) keeps the
two keys "linked" together as a unit on the
mandrel (Item 11). The ring (Item 13) is simply
a thin, threaded nut which is screwed onto the
lower end of the mandrel (Item 11 ) to keep the
keys, the springs and lower retainer on the
mandrel.
11 Slickline
Figure 14 illustrates a position number one bore of the nipple. The locking dogs on the lock
Locator Assembly threaded into a lock assembly mandrel are also properly positioned adjacent to
to make a COMPLETE position number one the locking groove in the upper section of the
'Type S' Locking Mandrel Assembly. Note that nipple.
the external profile of the position number one
keys on the locator assembly MATCH the
internal locator profile of the position one nipple
inFigure14.
LOCKING
PROFILE
SEALING (PACKING)
PROFILE
LOCATING
PROFILE
Type ‘S’ Type ‘S’

Nipple Figure 14 Lock
Mandrel
As the position number one lock mandrel

assembly is lowered into the tubing, the position
number one keys on the locator assembly will
pass through all of the 'Type S' nipples
(Positions seven through position two) that may
be in the tubing above the position number one
nipple.
When the position number one mandrel
assembly reaches the position number one
nipple, the 90° down-facing shoulders on the
keys will locate and stop on the 90° up-facing
shoulder in the locating section of the nipple.
(See Fig. 15). Note that the packing on the lock
mandrel assembly is positioned in the packing
12 Slickline
Since the LOCKING and SEALING profile is Since there is not enough area in the positions
EXACTLY the same in each of the seven (7) 4-547 keys to machine the "spring" recess, space
nipple positions of a given size, the SAME for the spring is provided by machining a recess
LOCK ASSEMBLY can be used in all seven (reduced OD) on the inner mandrel. Figure 18
positions. (See Fig. 16). shows a position number five locator assembly.
The recessed (reduced OD) section of the
As previously stated, the LOCATING profile in
"inner" mandrel provides the space required for
each of the seven nipple positions is different.
the springs for the positions 4-5-6-7 locator
Therefore the locator assembly used with the
keys. The SAME inner mandrel accepts the
locking mandrel must be modified to match the
springs for each key position (4-5-6-7). The
locating profile of each nipple position.
recessed inner mandrel MUST be used with
To modify a position number one (1) locator Position 4-547 keys. To convert a position
mandrel assembly to a position number two (2) number one locator assembly (Figure 17) to a
OR to a position number three (3) (or vice- position number two or a position number three
versa), simply remove the position number one locator assembly, simply remove the position
(1) keys and replace them with position number number one keys and replace them with the
two (2) or position number (3) keys. position number two OR position number three
To modify a position number one (1), two (2), or keys. (or vice versa) NO OTHER parts need to
position three (3) locator assembly to a position changed. BUT if a position number one, position
number four (4), five (5), six (6) or seven (7), number two or position number three locator
the "INNER MANDREL" and the keys must assembly is to be converted to a position number
be changed. four-five-six or seven locator assembly, the keys
AND the inner mandrel must be changed. (or
Notice in Figure 17 that the "inner" mandrel of vice versa) (See Fig. 18). No other parts need to
the position number one locator assembly has be changed.
the same diameter (OD) from one end to the
other (except for the threaded ends). Also note Although the 'Type S' nipples and 'Type S'
that the position number one, number two and locator assemblies have been designed and
number three KEYS have an internal recess to manufactured in positions one through position
provide space for the spring to fit between the seven, very few position six and position seven
key and the inner mandrel. Notice also that as nipples have ever been installed in wells. Only a
the position number of the locator key limited number of wells are completed in such a
Increases, the 90° locating shoulder on the key way that they would require more than five
is closer to the top of the key. As this 90° selective landing nipples plus a No-Go nipple.
locating shoulder is moved closer to the top of The Position Number of each locator key and
the key, the spring recess in the key must also be each locator assembly is identified by a "Dash"
moved up. Note that the recess in the position number which follows the part number of the
number three key stops VERY near the top of key or locator assembly.
the key. There is no area left for the spring
EXAMPLE:
groove to be machined into the positions four,
five, six and seven keys. These keys (4-5-6-7) 10S260-2 - Position #2 Locator Key 10S055-
DO NOT have the internal recess for the spring.
3 - Position #3 Locator Assembly
(See Fig. 18).
13 Slickline
Lock Assembly
Figure 16
INNER MANDREL FOR

INNER MANDREL FOR POSTION 4,5,6 AND 7
POSTION 1,2 AND 3
RECESSED TO
SPRING RECESS IN KEYS ACCEPT
KEY SPRINGS
POS. POS. POS. POS. POS

2 3 4 6 .7
POS. POS.
1 5
Position 1 Position 5
Locator Assembly
Locator Assembly
Figure 17 Figure 18
14 Slickline
four, five, six or seven so that the position one,

two, and three locator assembly can pass down
Type ‘V’ Landing Nipple through it when necessary.
The position number of the 'Type V' nipple is
The 'Type V' Landing Nipple is an OPTIONAL identified by IDENTIFICATION grooves
nipple that may be used IN CONJUNCTION machined onto the outside diameter of the nipple
with the 'type S' Profile Selective Landing near its upper end. One groove identifies the
Nipple. It is IDENTICAL to the 'Type S' nipple as a position one, two grooves as a
Landing Nipple EXCEPT that it has a larger position two, etc.
packing bore diameter than the 'Type S' nipple.
In Halliburton' part numbering system the
You will recall that 2 3/8 inch OD tubing which position number of a 'Type V' nipple is
weights 4.6 pounds per foot will have an internal identified by a DASH number which follows the
diameter of 1.995 inches and a "drift" diameter part number of the nipple.
of 1.901 inches. The internal diameter (packing
bore ID) of the 'Type S' nipples used in this Example:
tubing is 1.875 inches. 11V2-1(position1)
A 'Type V' nipple used in the same tubing will 11 V2-2 (position 2)
have a minimum ID (packing bore) of 1.905
inches. IF a 'type S' nipple is installed in the 11 V2-3 (position 3) etc.
upper region of the tubing, its 1.875 inch ID
could cause problems in paraffin cutting and/or
swabbing operations. Since the minimum
internal diameter (packing bore) of the 'Type V'
nipple is slightly larger than the drift diameter of LOCKING
PROFILE
the tubing it could be used at a shallow depth IS THE SAME IN
without severely restricting paraffin cutting and BOTH NIPPLES
swabbing operations. PACKING
BORE
Essentially, the 'Type V' nipple is nothing more 1.905 IN. ID
than a 'Type S' nipple whose packing bore 1.875 IN. ID
LOCATING
diameter has been enlarged. No other PROFILE IS
dimensions are different from the 'Type S' nipple THE SAME
of the same nominal size. (See Fig. 1) IN BOTH
NIPPLES
When used in a well, the 'Type V' nipple is
always installed near the surface, usually no
deeper than 1500 to 2000 feet. If it were
installed at extreme depths, the "oversized"
packing on the lock mandrel would likely be Nominal 2 inch Nominal 2 inch
Type ‘V’ Type ‘S’
worn or damaged before it reached the nipple.
Figure 1
Normally, only one (1) 'Type V' nipple is used in
a well and, if used, it will always be above the
'Type S' selective nipples. When the 'Type V'
nipple is used in conjunction with 'Type S'
nipples; the 'Type V' nipple must be in
numerical sequence just as if it were a 'Type S'
nipple. For example, if the tubing contains (from
the bottom up) a position one, position two, and
a position three 'Type S' nipple, the 'Type V'
nipple used above them must be either a position
15 Slickline
Type ‘V’ Lock Mandrel

Since the 'Type V' nipple is identical to the
'Type S' nipple, except for the packing bore
diameter, then the 'Type V' locking mandrel is
identical to a 'type S' locking mandrel except for
the size of the packing assembly.
A 'Type V' mandrel is nothing more than a 'Type
S' mandrel equipped with "oversize" packing
AND packing adapters. The locator assembly on
the 'Type V' mandrel must match the locating
section of the nipple.
To convert a 'Type S' lock mandrel to a 'Type V
lock mandrel, simply replace the packing AND
the packing adapters (back up rings) of the 'Type
S' mandrel with packing AND packing adapters
of the proper size to fit the 'Type V' nipple. (See
Fig. 2)
The running tool(s), the pulling tool(s), the
assembly-disassembly procedure, and the
running and pulling procedure for the 'Type V'
lock mandrel is Exactly the same as for the
'Type S' lock mandrel.
Engineering data for the 'Type V' equipment is
found in the Engineering Data Section of this
manual.
16 Slickline
Type ‘N’ No-Go Landing Nipple

As previously mentioned, for each type of
SELECTIVE Landing Nipple there is a
compatible No-Go Landing Nipple that can be
used in the tubing Below the selective landing
nipples. Only ONE No-Go Landing Nipple of a
given nominal size may be used. In general, a
no-go landing nipple is used below the selective
nipples OR may be used as the only nipple in
the well, if only one nipple is installed.
The 'Type N' No-Go Landing Nipple is the
compatible no-go nipple to be used with the
'Type S' (and 'Type V') selective landing nipples.
Figure 1 illustrates a 'type S' selective nipple and
a 'Type N' no-go nipple. The locking and sealing
(packing bore) section of the 'Type N' nipple is
IDENTICAL to the locking and sealing section
of the 'Type S' nipple. The difference between
the 'Type N' nipple and 'Type S' nipple is in the
"Locating" section of the nipples. Notice in
Figure 1 that the 'Type N' nipple has a reduced
internal diameter (no-go shoulder) near its lower
end. (Below the packing bore). This no-go
shoulder serves to Locate And Stop the 'Type
N' lock mandrel in the 'Type N' nipple. The
'Type N' lock mandrel CANNOT pass through
the 'Type N' nipple due to the "no-go" restriction
in the 'Type N' nipple.
The 'Type S' selective landing nipples which are
normally used in 2 3/8 OD, 4.64.7 pound per
foot tubing will have minimum internal diameter
of 1.875 inches. This minimum ID is in the
packing bore of the 'Type S' nipples. The 'Type
N' nipple which is normally used in this tubing
will also have a packing bore diameter of 1.875
inches. (same as the 'Type S' nipples). BUT the
ID through the NO-GO restriction in this 'Type
N' nipple is 1.791 inches.
17 Slickline
Type ‘N' Lock Mandrel

Since the locking and sealing (packing bore)
sections of the 'Type N' no-go nipple are
identical to the locking and sealing sections of
the 'Type S' nipple we simply convert a 'Type S'
lock mandrel to a 'Type N' lock mandrel. This is
done by REMOVING the locator assembly from
the 'Type S' mandrel and replacing it with a
'Type N' no-go sub. (See Fig. 2). This assembly
now becomes a 'Type N' lock mandrel. (See Fig.
3).
18 Slickline
As previously stated, the minimum ID in the

'Type S' nipple which is used in 2 3/8 OD, 4.6 or
4.7 pound per foot tubing is 1.875 inches.
The ID of the packing bore of the 'Type N'
nipple (for the same tubing) is also 1.875 inches.
The maximum OD of the No-Go sub on the
'Type N' Lock Mandrel is 1.870 inches.
Therefore, the 'Type N' lock mandrel will pass
through the 'Type S' and 'Type V' nipples but
will be stopped in the 'Type N' nipple when the
1.870 inch OD No-Go sub on the 'Type N' lock
mandrel reaches the 1.791 inch ID No-Go
restriction in the lower end of the 'Type N'
nipple. (See Fig. 4).
The running tools, the pulling tools, the running
procedure and the pulling procedure for the
'Type N' lock mandrel are EXACTLY the same
as for the 'Types S. V, T and Q' lock mandrel.
The disassembly and assembly of the 'Type N'
lock mandrel is limited to the removal of the
No-Go sub, packing and packing adapters and/or
the installation of those items.
19 Slickline
diameter of the thicker walled tubing will be

Profile Selective smaller than the internal diameter and the drift
Equipment for Heavy diameter of the "standard" (lighter) weight
tubing. (See Fig. 1).
Wall Tubing The "DRIFT" diameter of tubing DOES NOT
mean that the tubing has a restriction of that
Generally, landing nipples are designed so that diameter. The drift diameters listed in Table 1
the packing bore diameter of the nipple is refer to the outside diameter (OD) of a 42 inch
slightly SMALLER than the DRIFT diameter of long, round bar (Drift) which has been freely
the tubing that the nipple is to be used with. This passed through the length of tubing at the time
provides adequate clearance for the lock of manufacture.
mandrel and control device to pass through the
tubing WITHOUT damage or excessive wear to
the packing on the lock mandrel and/or control
device. (The 'Type V' nipple and certain
wellhead plugging nipples are exceptions.)
The 'Type S' profile selective landing nipples
and the 'type N' No-Go landing nipples were
designed to be dimensionally compatible with
the "Standard" (lighter) weight ranges of tubing
in tubing sizes of 1.050 OD (3/4 inch nominal)
up through the 41/2 inch OD tubing size (4 inch
nominal).
The 'Type V' profile selective landing nipples
have been designed for only the 2 1/16 inch OD,
2 3/8 inch OD and 2 7/8 inch OD, Standard
weight tubing sizes.
As oilfield technology advanced, wells were
drilled to greater depths AND into formations
which contained greater pressures than had
previously been encountered. In some cases the
"standard weight" tubing did not have the tensile
strength required for the extreme depths NOR
the burst or collapse resistance required for the
higher pressures which were encountered.
Under these circumstances, tubing having a
greater wall thickness than the standard weight
tubing is sometimes used to provide a greater
tensile strength for the tubing used in the deeper
wells AND a greater burst and collapse
resistance for the tubing used in the higher
pressure wells.
The outside diameter (OD) of the "heavy wall"
tubing remains the same as the OD of the
"standard weight" tubing. (2 3/8 OD-2 7/8 OD
etc.) Therefore, if the OD of the tubing remains
the same, and its wall thickness is increased,
then the internal diameter (ID) and the drift
20 Slickline
Type ‘T' Profile Selective THE 'TYPE T' landing nipples are PROFILE
Landing Nipples SELECTIVE nipples and in appearance they are
IDENTICAL to the 'Type S' nipples.
THE 'TYPE T' profile selective landing nipples The differences between the 'Type T' nipples
are designed to be dimensionally compatible and the 'Type S' nipples are in the INTERNAL
with only a few of the weight ranges of the DIAMETERS of the nipples. In a given nominal
"heavy wall" tubing in MOST of the tubing sizes tubing size, the internal diameters of the 'Type T'
up through the 4 1/2 inch OD tubing size. Notice nipple is slightly SMALLER than the internal
in Table 1, that 2 3/8 inch OD tubing which diameters of the 'Type S' nipples. This includes
weighs 4.6 or 4.7 pounds per foot has an ID of the internal diameters in the locking section, the
1.995 inches and a "drift" diameter of 1.901 packing section, and locating section of the
inches. The packing bore diameter of the 'Type nipple. The internal Linear dimensions of the
S' nipples which are used with this "Standard" 'Type T' and 'Type S' nipples are essentially the
weight tubing is 1.875 inches. The packing bore same. Basically, the 'Type T' nipples are nothing
diameter of this 'Type S' nipple is smaller than more than a "scaled down" version of the 'Type
the 1.901 inch DRIFT diameter of the 4.6 or 4.7 S' nipples.
pound per foot tubing.
The 'Type T' nipples have been designed in
Notice also in Table 1 that 2 3/8 inch OD tubing positions one (1) through five (5). They have not
which weighs 5.3 pounds per foot has an ID of been made with the position six (6) or position
1.939 inches and a drift diameter of 1.845 seven (7) locator profiles.
inches. It is obvious that a 'type S' nipple, having The locking and sealing (packing bore) profiles
a packing bore diameter of 1.875 inches
in each of the five positions of the 'Type T'
SHOULD NOT be used with the 5.3 pound per nipple are dimensionally identical, but each of
foot tubing. The smaller drift diameter (1.845 the five locator profiles are different.
inches) would probably not allow passage of the
'Type S' lock mandrel which has 1.875 inch OD Although the five (5) different locating profiles
packing. in the 'Type T' nipples are different from each
other, the Linear dimensions and the
OD WT/FT ID Drift ID Wall
Thickness configuration of each "Position" number is
(in.) (lbs.) (in.) (in.) (in.) identical to the corresponding position numbers
in the 'Type S' locating profile, EXCEPT for the
4.7 1.995 1.901 0.190
3
internal DIAMETERS. (See Fig. 2)
2- /8 5.3 1.939 1.845 0.218
5.95 1.867 1.773 0.254
6.2 1.853 1.759 0.261
The 'Type T' nipple which is used in the 2 3/8

OD -5.3 pound per foot tubing has a packing
bore diameter of 1.781 inches. This is the
smallest internal diameter in the nipple and is
compatible with the 1.845 inch DRIFT diameter
of the 2 3/8 inch OD - 5.3 pound per foot tubing.
21 Slickline
As with the 'Type S' nipples, identification number of the nipple. (Example: 11T82-1
grooves are machined into the outside diameter 11T82-2; etc.)
of the 'Type T' nipple to identify its POSITION When the 'Type T' nipples are installed with the
number. (one groove = Position 1; two grooves tubing, they MUST be installed in numerical
= Position 2; etc.) sequence starting with the lowest POSITION
In the Halliburton Part Numbering System the number being the deepest in the well. (Same as
position number of a 'Type T' nipple is identified the 'Type S' nipples.)
by a DASH number which follows the part
LOCKING
PROFILE
PACKING
(SEAL)
BORE
SMALLEST
ID IN
NIPPLE
LOCATING
PROFILE
Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position 5

Figure 2
22 Slickline
individual spring (Item 10) mounted between

the key and the mandrel. The upper key retainer
Type ‘T' Lock Mandrel (Item 8) and the lower key retainer (Item 12)
keeps the two keys "linked" together as a unit on
The 'Type T' lock mandrel assembly is used to the mandrel (Item 11). The ring (Item 13) is
install control devices in the 'Type T' nipples. simply a thin, threaded nut which is screwed
The 'Type T' lock mandrel assembly is onto the lower end of the mandrel (Item 11) to
IDENTICAL to the 'Type S' lock mandrel keep the keys, the springs and the lower retainer
assembly EXCEPT that the outside diameters of on the mandrel.
the 'Type T' lock mandrels are smaller than the
'Type S' mandrels. The linear dimensions of the
'Type T' lock mandrels are essentially the same
as the linear dimensions of the 'Type S' lock
mandrel.
Since the 'Type T' nipple is designed in only five
positions, the 'Type T' locator assembly is
available only in positions one (1) through (5).
A 'Type T' Locking Mandrel (complete) consists
of two basic subassemblies. These are the
LOCK assembly and the LOCATOR assembly.
(See Fig. 3).
The Lock Assembly consists of the locking dogs
(Item 3) which are mounted around the tapered
locking mandrel (Item 4). The locking dogs are
suspended from the dog carrier (Item 2). The
dogs and dog carrier are retained on the mandrel
(Item 4) by the carrier mandrel (Item 1).
The lower end of the mandrel (Item 4) has an
internal thread which is used to attach the
Locator Assembly to the Lock Assembly. The
lower portion of the mandrel (Item 4) also
provides a place for the Packing Assembly
(Items 5-7) to be installed onto the Lock
Assembly.
Note that the upper end of the dog carrier (Item
2) provides a fishing neck (pulling flange) to
allow engagement of a pulling tool to retrieve
the assembly from the well. The upper end of
the carrier mandrel (Item 1) is normally referred
to as the "Running Neck" since it provides the
means of attaching the running tool to the lock
mandrel assembly. (See instructions for pinning
the lock mandrel to the 'Type T' and 'Type SP'
Running Tools).
The LOCATOR assembly consists of two
locator keys (Item 9), mounted around a locator
mandrel (Item 11). Each key is spring loaded
outwardly from the mandrel (Item 11) by an
23 Slickline
Figure 4 illustrates a position number one When the position number one mandrel
Locator Assembly threaded into a lock assembly assembly reaches the position number one
to make a COMPLETE position number one nipple, the 90° down-facing shoulders on the
'Type T' Locking Mandrel Assembly. Note that keys will locate and stop on the 90° up-facing
the external profile of the position number one shoulder in the locating section of the nipple.
keys on the locator assembly MATCH the (See Fig. 5). Note that the packing on the lock
internal locator profile of the position one nipple mandrel assembly is positioned in the packing
in Figure 4. bore of the nipple. The locking dogs on the lock
mandrel are also properly positioned adjacent to
the locking groove in the upper section of the
nipple.
As the position number one lock mandrel

assembly is lowered into the tubing, the position
number one keys on the locator assembly will
pass through all of the 'Type T' nipples
(Positions five through position two) that may
be in the tubing above the position number one
nipple.
24 Slickline
Since the LOCKING and SEALING profile is the springs for the positions 4 and 5 locator
EXACTLY the same in each of the five (5) keys. The SAME inner mandrel accepts the
nipple positions of a given size, the SAME springs for each key position (4 and 5). The
LOCK ASSEMBLY can be used in all five recessed inner mandrel MUST be used with
positions. Figure 6 Position 4 and 5 keys.
As previously stated, the LOCATING profile in To convert a position number one locator
each of the five nipple positions is different. assembly (Figure 7) to a position number two, or
Therefore the locator assembly used with the a position number three locator assembly,
locking mandrel must be modified to match the simply remove the position number one keys
locating profile of each nipple position. and replace them with the position number two
OR position number three keys (or vice versa).
To modify a position number one (1) locator NO OTHER parts need to be changed. BUT if a
mandrel assembly to a position number two (2) position number one, position number two or
OR to a position number three (3) (or vice- position number three locator assembly is to be
versa), simply remove the position number one converted to a position number four or position
(1) keys and replace them with position number number five locator assembly, the keys AND the
two (2) or position number (3) keys. inner mandrel must be changed (or vice versa).
To modify a position number one (1), two (2), or (See Fig. 8). No other parts need to be
position number (3) locator assembly to a changed.The Position Number of each locator
position number four (4), or position number key and each locator assembly is identified by a
five (5), the "INNER MANDREL" and the "Dash" number which follows the part number
keys must be changed. of the key or locator assembly.
Notice in Figure 7 that the "inner" mandrel of EXAMPLE:
the position number one locator assembly has 10T89-2- Position two Locator Key
the same diameter (OD) from one end to the
other (except for the threaded ends). Also note 10T046-3- Position three Locator Assembly
that the position number one, number two and The Disassembly-Assembly Procedure, the
number three KEYS have an internal recess to running and pulling tools and the running and
provide space for the spring to fit between the pulling procedures for the 'Type T' lock mandrel
key and the inner mandrel. Notice also that as is EXACTLY the same as for the 'Type S' and
the position number of the locator key 'Type V' lock mandrels.
Increases, the 90° locating shoulder on the key
is closer to the top of the key. As this 90° Engineering data for the 'Type T' lock mandrel
locating shoulder is moved closer to the top of assemblies is found in the Engineering Data
the key, the spring recess in the key must also be Section of this manual.
moved up. Note that the recess in the position
number three key stops VERY near the top of
the key. There is no area left for the spring
groove to be machined into the position four or
the position five keys.
These keys (4 and 5) DO NOT have the internal
recess for the spring. (See Fig. 8).
Since there is not enough area in the positions 4
and 5 keys to machine the "spring" recess, space
for the spring is provided by machining a recess
(reduced OD) on the inner mandrel. Figure 8
shows a position number five locator assembly.
The recessed (reduced OD) section of the
"inner" mandrel provides the space required for
25 Slickline
26 Slickline
(same as the 'Type T' nipples). BUT the ID

through the No-Go restriction in this'Type Q'
Type ‘Q' No-Go Landing Nipple nipple is 1.718 inches.
As previously mentioned, for each type of

SELECTIVE Landing Nipple there is a
compatible No-Go Landing Nipple that can be
used in the tubing Below the selective landing
nipples. Only ONE No-Go Landing Nipple of a
given nominal size may be used. In general, a
no-go landing nipple is used below the selective
nipples OR may be used as the only nipple in the
well, if only one nipple is installed.
The 'Type Q' No-Go Landing Nipple is the
compatible no-go nipple to be used with the
'Type T' profile selective landing nipples. Figure
1 illustrates a 'Type T' selective nipple and a
'type Q' no-go nipple.
Internally the 'Type Q' No-Go nipple looks
exactly like a 'Type N' No-Go nipple. The
differences between the 'Type Q' and 'Type N'
nipples are in the internal diameters. For a given
nominal size, the 'Type Q' nipple will have
SMALLER internal diameters than are found in
the 'Type N' nipple. Essentially, the 'Type Q'
nipple is simply a "Scaled down" version of the
'Type N' nipple just as the 'Type T' nipple is a
"Scaled down" version of the 'Type S' nipple.
The locking and sealing (packing bore) section
of the 'Type Q' nipple is IDENTICAL to the
locking and sealing section of the 'Type T'
nipple. The difference between the 'Type Q'
nipple and the 'Type T' nipple is in the
"Locating" section of the nipples. Notice in
Figure 1 that the 'Type Q' nipple has a reduced
internal diameter (no-go shoulder) near its lower
end (below the packing bore). This no-go
shoulder serves to Locate And Stop the 'Type
Q' lock mandrel in the 'Type Q' nipple. The
'Type Q' lock mandrel CANNOT pass through
the 'Type Q' nipple due to the "no-go" restriction
in the 'Type Q' nipple.
The 'Type T' selective landing nipples which are
normally used in 2 3/8 OD, 5.3 pound per foot
tubing will have a minimum internal diameter of
1.781 inches. This minimum ID is in the packing
bore of the 'Type T' nipples. The 'Type Q' nipple
which is normally used in this tubing will also
have a packing bore diameter of 1.781 inches.
27 Slickline
Type ‘Q' Lock Mandrel

Since the locking and sealing (packing
bore) sections of the 'Type Q' no-go nipple
is identical to the locking and sealing
sections of the 'Type T' nipple, we simply
convert a 'Type T' lock mandrel to a 'Type
Q' lock mandrel. This is done by
REMOVING the locator assembly from the
'Type T' mandrel and replacing it with a
'type Q' no-go sub. (See Fig. 2). This
assembly now become a 'Type Q' lock
mandrel. (See Fig. 3)
28 Slickline
As previously stated, the minimum ID of the

'Type T' nipple used in 2 3/8 OD, 5.3 pound per
foot tubing is 1.781 inches. The ID of the
packing bore of the 'Type Q' nipple (for the
same tubing) is also 1.781 inches.
The maximum OD of the no-go sub on the 'Type
Q' lock mandrel is 1.776 inches. Therefore, the
'Type Q' lock mandrel will pass through the
'Type T' nipples but will be stopped in the 'type
Q' nipple when the 1.776 inch OD no-go sub on
the 'Type Q' lock mandrel reaches the 1.718 inch
ID no-go restriction in the lower end of the
'Type Q' nipple. (See Fig. 4).
The disassembly and assembly of the Type 'Q'
lock mandrel is limited to the removal of the
no-go sub, packing and packing adapters and/or
the installation of those items.
The running tools (T and SP), the pulling tool
(RS and UO), the "running" procedure and the
"pulling" procedure for the 'Type Q' lock
mandrel are Exactly the same as for the 'Types
S-V-N and T' lock mandrels.
29 Slickline
Recommended Running Pinning Procedures

and Pulling Procedures ATTACHING THE TYPE T' OR THE 'TYPE
for Type ‘S’, ‘V’, ‘T’, ‘N’, SP' RUNNING TOOL TO THE 'TYPES S. V,
T. N AND Q' LOCK MANDREL.
and ‘Q’ Lock Mandrels 1) Pull the dog carrier (fishing neck) of the
lock mandrel to its uppermost position and
(1) 'Type T' Running Tool (2) 'Type SP' grasp the lock mandrel horizontally in the
Running Tool (is required when a 'Type P' plug vise immediately above the packing. Take
assembly is attached to the lock mandrel ) (See care to AVOID grasping the packing, the
Fig. 5) packing backup rings OR the locking dogs
in the vise.
2) Position the lock mandrel in the vise so that

The 'Type J' running tool IS NOT recommended one end of BOTH of the slots in the carrier
and SHOULD NOT be used to run any of the mandrel (running neck) are facing up
Profile Selective Lock Mandrels NOR the
compatible NO-GO lock mandrels. (See Fig. 6).
'Type J'
Halliburton
Running Tool
Figure 6
30 Slickline
3) Using a properly assembled running tool, 5) Cut two shear pins of the proper size and
with ALL shear pins removed, slide the length and flatten approximately one quarter
running tool onto the lock mandrel until the (1/4) inch of one end of each shear pin.
core of the running tool stops on the running CAUTION: the shear pins must be short
neck of the lock mandrel. enough to allow the cylinder of running tool
to rotate around the core of the running tool
AFTER the pins are installed.
6) Install one shear pin in the shear pin hole

4) Rotate the running tool to align the lower which is not occupied by the punch installed
shear pin holes in the core of the running in Step 4 above. The shear pin should be
tool with the slots in the running neck of the installed so that the flat side of the pin is
lock mandrel. Temporarily insert a punch of parallel to the core of the running tool.
the proper size through one of the two CAUTION: Be careful to avoid striking the
pinning holes. This will hold the running cylinder of the running tool with the
tool in place on the lock mandrel. hammer while installing the shear pin. Once
the pin is started, use a punch and hammer
to drive it past the running tool cylinder.
31 Slickline
7) Remove the punch and install the second 9) With the cylinder in the "down" position,
shear pin in the same manner and with the slide the fishing neck of the lock mandrel
same precautions used in Step 6. fully up into the cylinder of the running tool.
8) Next, grasp the cylinder of the running tool

and move it down to its lowermost position 10) While holding the fishing neck of the lock
toward the lock mandrel. This allows the mandrel in its uppermost position, pull the
collets in the running tool to move out into a cylinder of the running tool back up to its
larger internal diameter in the cylinder of the uppermost position. A reduced internal
running tool. diameter at the lower end of the cylinder
pushes the collets inwardly and causes them
to engage the fishing neck of the lock
mandrel to hold the dog carrier and dogs in
their uppermost and unlocked position.
32 Slickline
11) Rotate the retainer band on the cylinder to NOTE: In some sizes, the 'Type T' and 'Type SP'
align the pin holes in the retainer band with running tools have two upper pinning holes of
the pin hole in the core of the running tool. different sizes in the core and also in the
cylinder. These holes are in the same plane but
(See Note in right hand column before
are 90° apart. For example, the nominal two inch
proceeding.)
'Type T' and 'Type SP' running tools are drilled
to accept a 3/16 inch shear pin OR a 1/4 inch
shear pin. When pinning one of these tools
which offer a choice of pin size, you must make
sure that the pinning hole in the cylinder is
aligned with the SAME SIZE hole in the core
before installing the shear pin.
12) Rotate the cylinder to align the pinning hole

in the cylinder with the upper pinning hole
in the core of the running tool. Install shear
pin and rotate the shear pin retainer band to
cover the ends of the shear pins.
33 Slickline
As previously mentioned, the Profile Selective

Landing Nipples (S-T-V) must be installed in
numerical sequence, starting with the lowest
position number being the lowermost (deepest)
nipple in the well.
Refer back to Figure 9 on page 7 and notice that
the single difference between the locator
sections of the nipples is the distance between
the 90° Locating Shoulder (B) in the nipple and
the Groove (C) below the 90° Locating
Shoulder. The Groove (C) is the same distance
from the packing bore (A) in each of the nipples,
BUT the 90° Locating Shoulder (B) in the nipple
is moved up and away from the Groove (C) as
the position number of the nipple Increases. This
allows the locator keys on the Lock Mandrel to
pass through all nipples that have a HIGHER
position number than the Locator Keys being
used. For example, Position One Keys will pass
through the Position 7-6-5-4-3 and 2 nipples and
will locate and stop ONLY in the Position
Number One nipple.
Figure 7 illustrates how a position number one
Locator Assembly can pass through a position
number two nipple. This example could depict
any of the Locator Key Assemblies passing
through Higher numbered landing nipples.
When the 90° shoulders on the position number
ONE Locator keys reach the 90° Locating
Shoulder (B) in the position number TWO
nipple notice that the upper ends of the position
number one locator keys are still in the packing
bore (smallest ID) of the nipple. Also notice that
the lower ends of the keys are in a reduced ID
below the 90° locating shoulder (B) in the
nipple. This keeps the locator keys compressed
against the key springs so that the 90° shoulder
on the keys cannot engage the 90° shoulder in
the nipple.
As the Locator Assembly continues to move
down, the key springs will attempt to push the
lower end of the keys out into the Groove (C) in
the nipple. BUT, when this happens, the
shoulders on the keys have already passed the
90° shoulder in the nipple. Therefore the
position number one keys cannot locate and stop
on the 90° shoulder in the position number two
nipple.
34 Slickline
Running Procedures
NOTE: Before installing a lock mandrel and
control device in a landing nipple, a GAUGE
run should be made to determine that neither the
tubing or the landing nipple is obstructed
RUNNING PROCEDURE for the 'Type S',
'Type V' and 'Type T' lock mandrels using a
'Type T' or a 'Type SP' running tool.
NOTE: If the device being "run" requires a
"running" prong to provide for fluid bypass, then
the 'Type T' running tool must be used. The
'Type SP' running tool does not have a threaded
receptacle for a running prong.
1) Attach the 'Type T' or 'Type SP' running tool
to the lock mandrel (See Fig. 1).
2) Close the wing valve on the tree to stop the
well's flow.
35 Slickline
3) Lower the running tool-lock mandrel 4) Jar down to shear the top pin in the running
assembly into the selected nipple. The tool. After the top pin in the running tool is
locator keys on the lock mandrel will locate sheared, the sleeve on the running tool
and stop the assembly in the nipple (Figure moves down and allows the collet to open
2). and release from the fishing neck on the lock
mandrel. The dog carrier and dogs on the
Note that the Dog Carrier and Locking Dogs are lock mandrel drop down to a position
still retained in the "Up" and UNLOCKED adjacent to the locking groove in the nipple.
position by the collet of the running tool. (See Fig. 3). The lower pins in the running
tool are still intact.
36 Slickline
5) Pull a 200 to 250 pound bind (above

hanging tool weight) on the slickline. A
greater pull may be necessary for the larger
sizes. Hold the bind for at least 30 seconds.
(See Fig. 4).
Explanation:
If the lock mandrel assembly pulls up and out of
the nipple the top pin in the running tool is not
sheared. Repeat Step 3 and 4 above. If the lock
mandrel assembly stays in place, this indicates
that the top pin in the running tool has sheared
and that the running tool has released the dog
carrier and dogs on the lock mandrel assembly.
Once the top pin in the running tool has been
sheared, the locking dogs on the lock mandrel
are free of the running tool and are positioned
adjacent to the locking groove in the nipple. (See
Fig. 3). When the 200-250 pound pull is applied
to the lock mandrel assembly, the entire
assembly will move up a short distance in the
nipple. As the assembly moves up, the tapered
portion of the lock mandrel will push the locking
dogs out into the locking groove in the nipple to
lock the assembly in place. (See Fig. 4) Notice
that the locator keys on the lock mandrel are no
longer resting on the 90° shoulder in the locating
section of the landing nipple when the mandrel
is in its LOCKED position.
37 Slickline
6) Jar up to shear the lower pins in the running

tool to release it from the "running neck" of
the lock mandrel (See Fig. 5). To avoid
damage to the running tool, DO NOT jar
down after the running tool has released.
Retrieve the tool string and running tool.
38 Slickline
Pulling Procedures
General:
Before attempting to retrieve a control device
that has been in the well for a considerable
period of time, a gauge run should be made to
determine that the tubing above the control
device is not obstructed or restricted by paraffin,
scale, sand, etc.
Before unlocking and retrieving a lock mandrel,
and existing pressure differential across the lock
must be relieved (equalized).
Once the lock mandrel is “set” (locked) in the
nipple as in Figure 6, any pressure differential
from below the assembly tends to keep it in the
up and locked position. All of the Profile
Selective Lock Mandrels (S-T-V) as well as
their compatible no-go lock mandrels (N-Q), it
would be extremely difficult to unlock and latch
onto the lock mandrel by using conventional
Slickline procedures. The cross-sectional area
of the lock mandrel and a significant pressure
below the lock would create a greater upward
force (AxP=F) to hold the lock mandrel in the
up and locked position than could be overcome
by normal downward jar action. This provides a
“safety” feature to the Profile Selective
equipment which is not present in most other
types and “Brands” of “nipple-set” lock
mandrels.
39 Slickline
RECOMMENDED PULLINGS TOOLS for the

'Type S. V, T. N and Q' Lock Mandrels
1) 'Type RS' pulling tool
2) 'Type UO' pulling tool (S core length
ONLY; SHEAR UP mode only).
1. Close the wing valve on the tree to stop the
well's flow.
2. Lower a properly pinned, recommended
pulling tool to the lock mandrel assembly. If
required, an equalizing prong should be
attached to the pulling tool.
3. After equalization (if necessary) jar down
lightly, (two or three times) to unlock and
latch onto the lock mandrel.
Explanation:
When the lock mandrel is in the "Up" and
locked position in the nipple, the Recommended
pulling tool Cannot engage (latch onto) the
fishing neck of the lock mandrel. (See Fig. 7).
Note that the core of the pulling tool is stopped
by the "running neck" of the lock mandrel
BEFORE the pulling tool dogs reach the
"fishing neck" (pulling flange) of the lock
mandrel. In order for the pulling tool to engage
the fishing neck of the lock mandrel, downward
jar action (through the core of the pulling tool
and onto the "running" neck of the lock
mandrel) is required to move the lock mandrel
down to its lowermost (unlocked) position in the
nipple.
40 Slickline
As the lock mandrel assembly moves down, the

dog carrier (fishing neck) stops when the lower
ends of the locking dogs reach the bottom of the
locking groove in the nipple. All other parts of
the lock mandrel assembly, (including the
running neck) continue to move down until the
locator keys on the mandrel stop on the 90°
shoulder in the locating section of the nipple
(See Fig. 8).
This shortens the distance between the top of the
"running neck" and the pulling flange on the dog
carrier. Since the "running neck" of the lock is
closer to the pulling flange, the dogs of the 'Type
RS' pulling tool can now Reach and latch onto
the pulling flange of the lock mandrel.
41 Slickline
Jar up with light to moderate impacts to move

the lock mandrel up and out of the landing
nipple.
Explanation: Figure 9
When the pulling tool is pulled upward, after
engaging the fishing neck of the lock mandrel,
the dog carrier and the dogs move up until the
top of the fishing neck stops against the enlarged
end of the carrier mandrel (running neck). At
this point, the locking dogs are above the
locking groove in the landing nipple and are also
well above the tapered portion of the lock
mandrel and prevents the locking dogs from
"re-locking" themselves in the nipple.
Furthermore, when the lock mandrel is engaged
by one of the Recommended pulling tools (S
core length) the core length of the pulling tool
Will Not allow the body of the lock mandrel to
move up far enough for the tapered mandrel to
expand the locking dogs into a locked position.
Essentially then, the upward jarring that is
required to move the lock mandrel out of the
nipple is due only to the friction and/or
"friction" of the lock mandrel's packing in the
packing bore of the nipple.
Retrieve the assembly at a slow to moderate rate
of speed.
Caution: When pulling a lock mandrel out of the
well, all landing nipples or other tubing
restrictions must be approached slowly and
cautiously. The packing on the lock mandrel
being pulled is very likely to hang and stop in
the landing nipples.
42 Slickline
As discussed above, the Profile Selective Lock

Mandrels (S-T-V) will support a pressure
differential from below the lock mandrel. They
will also support a lesser pressure differential
from above the lock mandrel.
When a Profile Selective Lock Mandrel is in its
"Up" and Locked position in the nipple, and if a
pressure differential is applied from ABOVE the
lock mandrel, it will move down in the nipple
until the 90° shoulder on the locator keys stop
on the 90° shoulder in the locator section of the
landing nipple. (See Fig. 10). In effect, only the
locating keys on the lock mandrel are used to
support a pressure differential from above the
lock mandrel.
Notice in Figure 10 that in this situation, the
locking section of the lock mandrel is in a totally
UNLOCKED position. But, when the direction
of the differential is reversed (applied from the
bottom) the entire lock mandrel assembly will
move up in the nipple and will Automatically
re-lock itself in the nipple. (See Fig. 11)
When the lock mandrel is supporting a pressure
differential from the top, the locking section of
the lock mandrel is totally Unlocked. (See Fig.
10) In this situation the 'Type RS' pulling tool
WILL immediately engage the fishing neck of
the lock mandrel, because the lock mandrel is
ALREADY in its down and UNLOCKED
position due to the pressure differential above it.
43 Slickline
In Figure 11 it is obvious that ONLY the Sliding Key Locator

LOCKING DOGS on the lock mandrel are used
to hold the lock mandrel in the nipple when In operations where it is likely that a profile
there is a PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL from selective lock mandrel (S-V-T) will be subjected
BELOW the assembly. to RAPID changes in the direction of the
In Figure 10 it is obvious that ONLY the pressure differential, the STANDARD Locator
LOCATOR KEYS on the lock mandrel are used Assembly on the lock mandrel should be
to hold the lock mandrel in the nipple and REPLACED with a SLIDING KEY locator
support the PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL when assembly (Figure 1).
the differential is from ABOVE the lock
mandrel.
Under certain operational conditions, a
PROFILE SELECTIVE lock mandrel (S-V-T)
may sometimes be subjected to a very RAPID
change in the DIRECTION of the pressure
differential that it is required to hold.
For example, the lock mandrel shown in Figure
11 is in the UP and locked position as it would
normally be with a pressure differential from
BELOW.
The locking dogs on the lock mandrel are held in
the locking groove in the nipple by the tapered
portion of the lock mandrel. The assembly is
firmly locked in the nipple by the pressure
differential from BELOW.
BUT, notice in Figure 11 that the LOCATOR
KEYS on the lock mandrel ARE NOT seated on
the 90° shoulders in the locating section of the
landing nipple. The upper ends of the
LOCATOR KEYS are in the lower end of the
packing bore of the nipple. Since the packing
bore of the nipple has a smaller internal diameter
than the LOCATING SECTION of the nipple,
the LOCATING KEYS on the lock mandrel are
compressed to a smaller diameter against the key
SPRINGS.
Now, IF a high DIFFERENTIAL pressure is
RAPIDLY applied ABOVE the lock mandrel, IT
IS ENTIRELY POSSIBLE that the lock mandrel
assembly will move down FASTER than the
KEY SPRINGS can move the locator keys
OUTWARDLY to engage the 90° locating
shoulder in the landing nipple. IF this occurs, the
lock mandrel will pass down through the landing
nipple and into the tubing below the nipple.
44 Slickline
Figure 2 illustrates a Profile Selective lock

mandrel equipped with a sliding key locator
assembly. Notice that the key assembly is
shorter than the "Inner" mandrel that it is
mounted on. The key assembly is free to slide up
or down on the mandrel as illustrated in Figure
2.
When the lock mandrel moves UP to the locked

position (Figure 4) the "inner" mandrel of the
locator assembly simply "slides" UP in the key
assembly to allow the lock mandrel to be locked
The purpose of the Sliding Key Locator in the nipple WITHOUT lifting the locator keys
Assembly is to allow the 90° shoulders on the off the 90° shoulders in the nipple.
locator keys to remain seated on the 90°
shoulders in the locating section of the nipple at If the lock mandrel (Figure 4) is subjected to a
all times, even when the lock mandrel is in its up very rapid pressure differential from above, the
and locked position. This will prevent the lock mandrel will move down to the unlocked
mandrel assembly from being "Popped" through position exactly the same as a "Standard" lock
the nipple by a sudden differential from the top. mandrel assembly would. But, since the sliding
locator keys are ALREADY down and seated on
Figure 3 schematically illustrates a Profile the 90° shoulders in the landing nipple, the
Selective lock mandrel (with sliding key locator) possibility of "popping" the assembly through
located in a landing nipple. The sliding key the nipple is eliminated or at least greatly
assembly is located and seated on the 90° reduced.
shoulder in the locating section of the nipple.
The locking section of the mandrel is in the
"down" and unlocked position. Note that the
"inner" mandrel of the Locator Assembly is
extended Below the key assembly.
45 Slickline
2. Carefully slack off on the slickline to only

PARTIALLY close the jars. The weight of
CAUTION NOTE: 1 the slickline tool string may "unlock" the
locking mandrel and allow it to move back
When running the profile selective lock downhole if the jars are allowed to
mandrels (S-V-T) or the 'Type N' or 'Type Q' completely close.
No-Go lock mandrel, it is not unusual to have to 3. Jar up to shear the lower pins in the running
lightly jar the lock mandrel down through tool to release the running tool from the lock
landing nipples which are in the well above the mandrel. DO NOT allow the running tool
nipple that the lock mandrel is to be installed in. and tool string to fall back and strike the
This is caused by the close tolerance between lock mandrel. This would unlock the
the outside diameter of the packing on the lock mandrel and allow it to fall downhole.
mandrel and the internal diameter of the packing
bore of the landing nipples. 4. Retrieve the tool string and running tool.
Occasionally, this downward jarring action will 5. Lower a properly pinned, recommended
shear the upper shear pin in the 'Type T' or'Type pulling tool to the lock mandrel. Jar down to
SP' running tool BEFORE the desired landing "unlock" and latch onto the lock mandrel.
nipple is reached. After the upper pin is sheared When the mandrel unlocks it will normally
the collet of the running tool releases the dog move downhole. When this occurs it is advisable
carrier of the lock mandrel and allows the to slack off rapidly on the slickline to assure that
locking dogs to drop down on the tapered the pulling tool engages the fishing neck of the
portion of the lock mandrel. The lower pins in lock mandrel.
the running tool are not sheared by downward
jarring action and will retain the lock mandrel Retrieve the assembly from the well.
assembly on the running tool.
Even though the upper pin in the running tool
may be prematurely sheared BEFORE the
assembly reaches the desired landing nipple, it
has absolutely NO EFFECT on the continued
DOWNWARD travel and proper setting of the
lock mandrel in the desired landing nipple. BUT
if an attempt is made to pull the assembly back
UP through the tubing AFTER the upper pin in
the running tool is sheared, the locking dogs will
ride down on the tapered portion of the mandrel
and will wedge into the tubing wall to prevent
UPWARD movement of the assembly.
If it should become necessary to pull one of
these lock mandrels (S-V-T-N-Q) out of the well
AFTER the upper pin in the running tool is
sheared and BEFORE the lock mandrel reaches
the desired landing nipple, the following steps
are necessary.
1. Pull a 200-250 pound bind on the Slickline.
This should wedge the locking dogs into the
ID of the tubing sufficiently to support the
weight of the lock mandrel and any control
device which is attached to the lock
mandrel.
46 Slickline
CAUTION NOTE: 2
Occasionally one of the Profile Selective Lock
Mandrels (S-T-V) or one of the compatible
No-Go Lock Mandrels (N or Q) may be
inadvertently left in the tubing on top of a collar
stop or some other device that may be in the
tubing. In some instances one of these lock
mandrels may even be "set" in the tubing
immediately above a landing nipple that is
ALREADY occupied by another lock mandrel.
(This should emphasize the importance of
making a gauge run prior to running a lock
mandrel into the well.) (See Fig. 12).
In the event that one of these lock mandrels IS
sitting on another object in the TUBING when it
is to be retrieved, the recommended pulling tool
(with the S core length) normally CANNOT be
used to retrieve, the lock mandrel. Since the ID
of the tubing is larger than the ID of a landing
nipple, the dog carrier and locking dogs are able
to move farther down on the tapered body of the
lock mandrel than they could if the mandrel was
in a landing nipple. Therefore, the distance
between the top of the carrier mandrel (running
neck) and the top of the fishing neck is greater
than it would be if the lock mandrel was in a
landing nipple. Because the lock mandrel (or its
attached control device) is sitting on an object
(collar stop, etc.), the body of the lock mandrel
CANNOT be moved down to shorten the
distance between the top of the running neck and
the fishing neck. When the lock mandrel is in
this condition, the core (S length) of the pulling
tool will stop on the running neck of the lock
mandrel BEFORE the pulling tool dogs can
reach the fishing neck of the lock mandrel.
Therefore a pulling tool with a shorter core and
longer reach, such as the 'Type RJ' pulling tool,
will normally be required to retrieve a profile
selective lock mandrel (S-V-T) or the
compatible No-Go Lock Mandrels (N or Q)
when they are sitting on an object in the tubing.
47 Slickline
EXCEEDS the maximum differential pressure

that it will be subjected to.
Equalizing Valves and Plugs
In addition to the Type C and Type D plug bean
assemblies, there are two other "plugs" that may
In a given nominal size, all of the Profile be used with the types S-T-V-N and Q lock
Selective Lock Mandrels (S-T and V) and their mandrels. These are the Type P and Type S
compatible No-Go Lock Mandrels (N and Q) equalizing assemblies. When attached to any of
will normally have the same type and same size the profile selective lock mandrels (S-T-V) or
EXTERNAL thread connection that is found on the no-go lock mandrels (N-Q), these assemblies
a comparable size SLIP TYPE Lock Mandrel (B become two-way (positive) plugs, in that they
or W). This allows us to use most of the same will hold a pressure differential from ABOVE
control devices and accessories on the Profile and from BELOW.
Selective mandrels and their related no-go lock
mandrels that are used with the slip type lock Figure 1 illustrates two versions of the Type S
mandrels. equalizing assembly. The right hand view
illustrates a Type S equalizing assembly that has
These control devices and accessories include an added extension. The extension is added so
the Type B. F. H and D equalizing subs, the that when the assembly is attached to a lock
Type C and Type D plug assemblies, the Type E mandrel, the top of the equalizing assembly will
pressure regulator and several different types of be closer to the top of the lock mandrel. The use
safety valves. (The safety valves are discussed in of the longer equalizing assembly is beneficial in
a separate section of this manual.) preventing sand or other solids from settling into
The Profile Selective Lock Mandrels (S. T and the bore of the lock mandrel to the extent of
V) and their compatible No-Go Lock Mandrels preventing the pulling prong from reaching the
(N and Q) DO NOT have an INTERNAL thread top of the equalizing assembly when the plug is
at their lower end. Therefore the Type B and to be retrieved.
Type BO Bottom Hole Choke Beans (screw in
type) cannot be attached directly to these lock
mandrels. The Type A Bottom hole choke bean
is normally used with the Profile Selective and
No-Go Lock Mandrels.
In general, the rated working pressure of MOST
of the control devices and accessories mentioned
above is limited to the rated working pressure of
the lock mandrel to which they are attached. For
example, if the control devices and accessories
are used with a Slip Type lock mandrel, the
working pressure of the assembly is limited to
the working pressure of the slip type lock
mandrel (1500 psi). But, if the same control
devices and accessories are attached to the
higher rated Profile Selective Lock Mandrels or
No-Go Lock Mandrels, most of the control
devices and accessories are designed to assume
the rated working pressures of those lock
mandrels.
Caution: Before installing ANY slickline related
control device in a well, it must be determined
that Each Component of that control device has
a rated working pressure which is EQUAL to or
48 Slickline
49 Slickline
A Type RS pulling tool (Fig. 3) or equivalent is in the valve housing. This allows pressure
required to retrieve ALL of the profile selective equalization and/or fluid bypass from either
lock mandrels (S-T-V) and the nogo lock direction (above or below).
mandrels (N-Q).
When the Type S equalizing assembly is
attached to any of the above lock mandrels (S-
T-V-N-Q). a Type R equalizing prong (Fig.
3) must be screwed into the pulling tool in order
to open (equalize) the Type S equalizing
assembly. As the pulling tool is lowered onto the
lock mandrel, the pulling prong enters the bore
of the lock mandrel and stops on top of the S
equalizing assembly. Downward jar action
shears the pin in the equalizing assembly and
pushes the inner valve assembly down so that
both o-rings on the valve are BELOW the ports
50 Slickline
Figure 4 illustrates the Type P equalizing

assembly that may be used with any of the
profile selective lock mandrels (S-T-V) and the
no-go lock mandrels (N & Q). When the Type P
equalizing assembly is attached to any of the
above lock mandrels (S-T-V-N or Q), the
complete assembly becomes a twoway (positive)
plug in that it will hold a pressure differential
from either direction (above or below).
51 Slickline
Two slickline trips are required to pull these This releases the prong from the plug assembly
plug assemblies. Normally, an Halliburton and allows rapid equalization of the pressure
52GO fishing socket (non-releasing) (Fig. 6) is differential from either direction. A second
used to retrieve the prong part of the Type P slickline trip with a Type RS pulling tool (Fig.
equalizing assembly. Once the fishing socket 6) is required to unlock and retrieve the lock
engages the fishing neck of the prong, upward mandrel and valve housing.
jarring action shears the pin that is holding the
valve and prong of the P equalizing assembly
together.
52 Slickline
Test Tools
Halliburton TEST TOOLS are plugs that locate
and set in a landing nipple and hold a pressure
differential from the TOP ONLY.
Figure 1 represents a Type N or Type Q test
tool. The Type N test tool sets in the Type N
no-go landing nipple. The Type Q test tool sets
in the Type Q no-go landing nipple. Although
the Type N and Type Q test tools are identical in
appearance, the dimensions of the two tools are
slightly different so that each tool will no-go and
seal in its respective landing nipple (N or Q).
Figure 2 represents the Type S. Type T and
Type V test tools. The Type S test tool locates
and sets in a Type S nipple. The Type T test tool
locates and sets in a Type T nipple. The Type V
test tool locates and sets in a Type V nipple
In a given tubing size, the Type N nipple has the
same packing bore ID as the Type S nipple.
Therefore, a Type N test tool is converted to a
Type S test tool by screwing the desired Type S
locator assembly into the bottom of the Type N
test tool (look at Figures 1 & 2).
In a given tubing size, the only difference
between a Type S nipple and a Type V nipple is
that the V nipple has a slightly larger packing
bore ID. Therefore, a Type S test tool is
converted to a Type V test tool simply by
replacing the "S" dimension packing and backup
rings with "V" dimension packing and backup
rings.
In a given tubing size and weight range, the
Type Q nipple has the same packing bore ID as
the Type T nipple. Therefore, a Type Q test tool
is converted to a Type T test tool by screwing
the desired Type T locator mandrel into the Q
test tool.
When any of the above mentioned test tools (S-
T-V-N and Q) are set in their respective
landing nipples, the test tools ARE NOT locked
in the nipple. These tools are used as plugs that
hold a pressure differential from the TOP ONLY
and will not hold a pressure differential from
BELOW. In fact, these tools may move up the
hole if the well is allowed to flow.
53 Slickline
a.) If the test tool is to be run and retrieved with

a single slickline trip, a SHEAR UP pulling tool
with a SHORT CORE and long reach should be
used. For this operation the recommended
Halliburton "running" tools are:
1.) Halliburton RJ pulling tool
2.) Halliburton UO pulling tool (shear up
mode - J reach)
b.) If the test tool is to be left in the nipple and
then be retrieved later with a second slickline
trip, a SHEAR DOWN "running" tool that has a
short core and long reach should be used to
RUN the test tool. The "running" tool must be a
type that can be sheared when the CYLINDER
(skirt) of the toot is resting on the test tool. The
recommended Halliburton "running" tools for
this operation are:
1.) Halliburton SSJ running/pulling tool
2.) Halliburton UO pulling tool (shear down
mode - J reach )
3.) Halliburton Type H running tool
When jarring a test tool down through (or into) a
landing nipple, the cylinder of the
RECOMMENDED running tool(s) will rest on
the cage (Item 4 of Fig. 1) of the test tool and
will prevent the core of the running tool from
contacting the fishing neck of the test tool. This
feature of the RECOMMENDED running tool(s)
allows the valve (drop dart) of the test tool to
float up, and allow fluid bypass through the test
tool when it is being jarred down through (or
into) a landing nipple. Since the core of the
RECOMMENDED running tool(s) CANNOT
contact the fishing neck of the test tool,
downward jarring action CANNOT damage the
valve (drop dart) and/or the seat of the test tool.
If a "short reach" running tool (such as an
Halliburton RB or SB) is used, any downward
jarring action can cause sever damage to the
valve and/or seat of the test tool.
To help avoid operational problems and Since no downward jarring is required to
unnecessary damage to the test tools when they retrieve the test tool, the Halliburton Type RB or
are being run into the well on slickline, one of SB pulling tools may be used to RETRIEVE the
the following RECOMMENDED "running test tool. If neither of these tools are readily
tools" should be used. available, the same tools that were used to run
the test tool CAN be used to retrieve the test
tool.
54 Slickline
Column 2 shows the seal bore ID of landing

nipples commonly used in that size tubing.
The following table is to illustrate and
emphasize the necessity of completely Column 3 shows the sq. inch area of a
equalizing any differential across a plug or other subsurface control which would be landed in
closed device before unlocking that device by that nipple.
slickline methods.
Column 4 shows the force in pounds per 100 psi
Column 1 shows tubing sizes which are all of differential existing across the closed control
"standard weight". device.
As you can see, if the control device is unlocked

prior to equalization the device will move
rapidly up the hole, pushing the slickline tool
string up thru the slickline, usually creating a
very difficult and sometimes impossible fishing
job. If a plug or other closed device cannot be
fully equalized by slickline methods, then the
tubing above the control device should be
pressured up by pump, another well, etc. to
equalize the differential before attempting to
retrieve the control device. If no pressure source
is available, an alternative is to completely fill
the tubing, including the tree, slickline valve and
lubricator, with fluid (no gas or air pockets)
before unlocking the control device. This "solid
fluid" cushion substantially reduces the
probability of the tools being "blown up the
hole", to the extent of creating a severe fishing
job.
55 Slickline
56 Slickline
57 Slickline
Profile Selective Equipment Project

1. What two things do all Type “S” Landing Nipples, of a given tubing size and weight range
have in common?
a.
b.
2. How many “S” Nipples can be installed in a tubing string?
3. What makes the Type “S” Nipple a selective nipple?
4. What two assemblies make up a profile selective lock mandrel?
5. What type of landing nipple is generally installed below the Type “S” Landing Nipple (as the
No-Go nipple in the tubing string)?
6. How do you convert a “S” Lock Mandrel into a Type “N” Lock Mandrel?
7. Is the Type “S” Profile Selective Equipment designed for standard or heavy wall tubing?
8. Is the Type “T” Profile Selective Equipment designed for standard or heavy wall tubing?
9. What No-Go nipple is designed to be run below a Type “T” Landing Nipple?
10. What is the recommended running tool for profile selective lock mandrels?
11. What is the recommended pulling tool for profile selective lock mandrels?
12. Can the same equalizing valves and plug bean assemblies that are used with slip lock
mandrels be used with profile selective lock mandrels?
13. The 24SO Plug Assembly was designed for use with the profile selective lock mandrels:
a. Can this plug hold pressure from both directions?
b. What is the recommended running tool and prong for this plug when made up to a profile
selective lock mandrel?
c. What is the recommended pulling tool and prong for this plug when made up to a profile
selective lock mandrel?
58 Slickline
14. The 24P Plug Assembly was designed for use with the profile selective lock mandrels;
a. Can this plug hold pressure from both directions?
b. What is the recommended running tool for this plug when made up to a profile selective
lock mandrel?
c. What is the recommended pulling tool for the prong to equalize the pressure across the
plug?
15. List two applications for the Type “N” Test Tool:
a.
b.
16. What is the recommended running tool for the “N” Test Tool?
59 Slickline
Hands-On Projects
inspection and maintenance of tools and/or equipment of this Section.

10SO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a “S” Profile
Lock Selective Lock Mandrel – Reassemble
41TO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a TO Running Tool
Run Tool – Reassemble
10SO Assemble and Pin a 41TO Running Tool onto a
41TO 10SO Lock Mandrel
10NO Disassemble, Clean and Inspect a “N” No-Go Lock
10SO Assemble a 21DS Plug Assembly, Insure the
20DO equalizing valve is in proper working order and the
21DO plug bean assembly has a good element.
10SO Assemble a 24SS Plug Assembly, Insure that the
24SO plug assembly is properly assembled and
24SO
pinned. Make up the recommended running tool
and prong for running the assembly into the well.
10SO
Assemble a 24SS Plug Assembly, Insure that the
24P
24P plug assembly is properly assembled and
pinned. Make up the recommended running tool for
running the assembly into the well.
40RS Prepare the pulling tool necessary for the retrieval of
49T the 24SS Plug Assembly.
40RS Prepare the pulling tools necessary for the retrieval
52GO1 of the 24PS Plug Assembly.
60 Slickline

SL Prerequisite Man

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SL Prerequisite Man

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SL Prerequisite Man

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Slickline Training

Section I Slickline Services Introduction

Section II Toolstring Components

Section III Auxiliary Service Tools

Section IV Pulling Tools

Section V Tubing Set Flow Controls

Section VI X-Line Equipment

Section VII Related X-Line Equipment

Section VIII Circulating Devices & Service Tools

Section IX Gas Lift Equipment & Service Tools

Section X Slickline Fishing

Optional Profile Selective Equipment

Use for Section notes…

Our Vision and Core Beliefs

Halliburton’s vision is:

 Maintains long-term sustainable customer relationships that meet the individual

 Is a credible, reliable service provider that matches actions to words

 Is an effective innovator, applying technology that delivers results

 Epitomizes excellence in digital connectivity, using technology to link its global

Halliburton’s mission is:

 Maximizing production and recovery

 Realizing reserves from difficult environments

 Improving operational efficiency.

Our motto is:

Unleash the Energy!

"one is too many"

one unbuckled seat belt is too many

and on and on and on and on………….

It starts with a strong, bold, memorable rallying cry.

How it all began

Success brought rapid growth

Innovation is the Key

Mr. Otis alone accumulated over 50 patents and was co-

Halliburton Wireline and Perforating Services

Slickline success: The art of being the best

HalWorld Today August 13, 2008 (David Larimore)

POST-COMPLETION, MISCELLANEOUS MERCHANDISE

SLICKLINE SURFACE EQUIPMENT

Wire Mechanical Capabilities .................................................................................................................... 19

used to install or retrieve the control devices

A discussion of the surface equipment must, of

Arctic Slickline Trailer Unit

Truck Mounted Slickline Unit

Offshore Slickline Skid Unit

Slickline Lift Barge

position (handle pulled all the way back) and the

Some slickline units also have hydraulic

Stuffing Box and Slickline

pass through it.

Lubricator Sections changed out on location when job conditions

Design Verification Certification

The chart shown below shows the standards

Halliburton uses both “name brand” wireline

Wireline – Breaking Strengths (lbs)

Carbon Steel – API 9A

Material 0.072 0.082 0.092 0.105 0.108 0.125

Austenitic Stainless Steel

316 Stainless Steel 1083 1363 1732 1786 2270